Coverage For Qualifying Exam For PJLC

PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE HANDBOOK PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
REVISED PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES
December 2013
3
PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE HANDBOOK PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
December 2013
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
COPYRIGHT PAGE
PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE HANDBOOK (PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13)
Copyright 2010
Revised 2013
Printed by:
The Directorate for Operations
All rights reserved. This publication may not be reproduced, in whole or in part, in any form or by means
electronic or mechanical or by any information storage and retrieval system now known or hereafter
invented, without prior written permission of the Director, PNP Directorate for Operations with postal
address at 3rd Floor, NHQ Building, Camp Crame, Quezon City and telephone numbers (632) 725-3178
or 723-0401 local 3103.
ii COPYRIGHT PAGE
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES
DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT
DILG-NAPOLCOM CENTER, EDSA cor. Quezon Avenue Quezon City, Philippines 1100
MESSAGE
I commend the PNP Directorate for Operations, the Technical Working Group and the editorial board
and staff that worked together in coming up with the Revised PNP Police Operational Procedures (POP)
Manual.
The need to continuously revise and update this document is occasioned by constantly shifting
challenges in law enforcement and criminal justice. It is imperative that the police organization is
constantly informed, prepared and enabled to meet new and emerging threats to law and order - -as
well as rising demands for greater
discipline and lawful conduct in its actions, operations and investigations.
Some of the important features of this new PNP POP Manual revisit the rules on the investigation of
violence against women and children cases, cybercrime incidents and terrorism, among others. There is
also one whole chapter dedicated to proper investigation procedures, focusing on the importance of
properly booking arrested suspects and the conduct of meticulous crime scene investigations.
Hopefully, too, there would be lees work – related harassment suits against our policemen in the field as
this manual prescribes in detail the special procedures on the conduct of pre-demolition conferences, on
the implementation of the Comprehensive Agrarian Reform Program and on carrying out court orders
and decisions that are immediately executory.
I urge each member of the police organization to imbibe and be guided by this Manual as we all strive to
achieve a law abiding society driven by the tenets of Tuwid na Daan, with the people at the apex of
service.
Again, my congratulations to all those who contributed in one way or another to this worthy project.
Carry on and Godspeed!
MESSAGE iii
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Republic of the Philippines NATIONAL POLICE COMMISSION
NATIONAL HEADQUARTERS PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE OFFICE OF THE CHIEF, PNP

Camp Crame, Quezon City
FOREWORD
“The police must obey the law while enforcing the law.”
Earl Warren
This is a great challenge that our police force has to face – to abide by the law that they enforce. Simple
as it may seem, the challenge is more often easier said than done. With the growing security demands of
a rapidly changing society, the task of the Philippine National Police (PNP) becomes even more difficult.
And admittedly, in the performance of these tasks, our police personnel are sometimes placed in bad
light because of some operational lapses.
To address this, the PNP leadership deemed it urgent to review and revise the existing PNP Police
Operational Procedures to ensure that each provision is clear to all police personnel as well as followed
to the letter. Also, the PNP Thrust CODE-P was conceptualized, which seeks to enhance the Competence
of every policeman, redefine and reform the Organization, instill Discipline, realize Excellence and
institute Professionalism at all levels of the organizations.
I therefore commend the Directorate for Operations and the members of the Technical Working Group
who painstakingly reviewed the Manual and infused the necessary changes to improve police service as
embodied in the PNP thrust CODE-P.
With the revised PNP POP Manual, I am confident that the policemen in the field will be able to perform
their tasks more efficiently and effectively.
ALAN LA MADRID PURISIMA
Police Director General Chief, PNP
iv FOREWORD
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Republic of the Philippines
NATIONAL POLICE COMMISSION
NATIONAL HEADQUARTERS, PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE DIRECTORATE FOR OPERATIONS
PREFACE
As the basic foundation of police operations, the PNP Police Operational Procedures (POP) Manual has
to be constantly reviewed and revised, evaluated and assessed to keep it relevant to the present time.
This is to make certain that the procedures are still as effective as when they were conceptualized.
While the Manual was revisited only on March 2010, new laws, issuances and incidents have occurred,
which prompted the immediate update and revision of the Manual. Another reason for its revision
is the alignment of the rules and procedures with the CODE-P program of the C, PNP, which seeks to
enhance the Competence of every policeman, redefine and reform the Organization, instill Discipline,
realize Excellence and institute Professionalism at all levels of the organizations.
Among the notable new provisions are: Critical Incident Management Operational Procedures; Crisis
Escalation Protocol; Crime Incident Reporting System; and Unit Crime Periodic Report. The revisions in
the PNP POP will definitely increase the confidence of police personnel in the field because they will not
be caught in legal entanglements while in the performance of their duties.
As such, I want to extend my congratulations to the members of the Technical Working Group and to all
the people who made the revision of the PNP POP Manual a reality.
PREFACE v
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
COMMISSION ON HUMAN RIGHTS
MESSAGE
I extend my warmest congratulations to the men and women of the Philippine National Police for the
timely and relevant publication of the PNP Manual on Police Operational Procedures, 2013 Edition. This
manual serves as a “bible” on proper, legal and effective police operations as well as a testament to the
PNP’s commitment to pursue positive change and to perform its role in implementing security sector
reforms.
By coming up with an updated version of its operational manual, the PNP demonstrates its sincerity in
progressively applying human rights principles and rights-based approaches in law enforcement and
public safety. This manual takes into account recent developments in political, economic, and socio-
cultural rights -- all of which are interdependent and inseparable. More than just a step-by-step
narration of how a police function must be carried out based on law, it highlights the continuing growth
of a police agency that recognizes its duty to enforce the law without fear or favor, while fulfilling its
obligation to remain accountable to the people that it has sworn to serve and protect.
The Commission on Human Rights shall continue performing its mandate to monitor the human rights
compliance of the PNP, while seeking more opportunities to further deepen human rights consciousness
among police personnel. Through this manual, we can build the capacity of law enforcers to implement
rights-based policing concepts and, in the process, empower them to become human rights protectors.
Chairperson
vi MESSAGE
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The revision of the PNP Police Operational Procedures Manual was made imperative by the passing of
new laws and new PNP protocols and issuances brought about by incidents implicating police
operational flaws.
I want to acknowledge the concerted efforts of the PCOs, PNCOs, NUP and other members of the
Technical Working Group who made the Revised PNP Operational Procedures (POP) Manual updated. In
particular PCSUPT (ATTY) ASHER A DOLINA, Executive Officer; PSSUPT DANILO S PELISCO, Chief, Law
Enforcement Division (LED); PSSUPT (ATTY) WILBEN M MAYOR, Spokesperson to the C, PNP; PSUPT
ARVIN Q ALCANTARA, Assistant Chief, LED; PCINSP
(ATTY) ROCHEL S RUMA, Servicing Legal Officer; PCINSP MA ANA FE B LAZA and Ms Zheena Luz R Martin
who ensured the conduct of regular TWG meetings and the consolidation and incorporation of the TWG
inputs into the Manual.
Also, the Command Group and Division Chiefs of the Directorate for Operations and the Chiefs of the
different Regional Operations and Plans Division and Operations and Management Division who gave
their professional insights, making the Revised POP more simple and easy to understand.
It is hoped that the use of this Revised POP Manual be maximized by all the members of the PNP
organization and that each provision be implemented at heart.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT vii
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
POWERS AND FUNCTIONS OF THE PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE
REPUBLIC ACT 6975 “Department of the Interior and Local Government Act of 1990”
SEC. 24. POWERS AND FUNCTIONS. – THE PNP SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING POWERS AND FUNCTIONS:
(a) Enforce all laws and ordinances relative to the protection of lives and properties;
(b) Maintain peace and order and take all necessary steps to ensure public safety;
(c) Investigate and prevent crimes, effect the arrest of criminal offenders, bring offenders to justice
and assist in their prosecution;
(d) Exercise the general powers to make arrest, search and seizure in accordance with the
Constitution and pertinent laws;
(e) Detain an arrested person for a period not beyond what is prescribed by law, informing the
person so detained of all his rights under the Constitution;
(f) Issue licenses for the possession of firearms and explosives in accordance with law;
(g) Supervise and control the training and operations of security agencies and issue licenses to
operate security agencies, and to security guards and private detectives, for the practice of their
professions; and
(h) Perform such other duties and exercise all other functions as may be provided by law.
viii POWERS AND FUNCTIONS OF THE PNP
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL PRINCIPLES 1
RULE 1. FUNCTIONS OF A POLICE OFFICER 1
1.1 To Serve and Protect 1
1.2 To Observe Human Rights and
Dignity of Person 1
RULE 2. POLICE UNIFORM, ATTIRE AND
ACCESSORIES 1
2.1 Agency Prescribed Uniform 1
2.2 Appearing Before the Public 1

2.3 Carrying of Police Notebook,
Pen and Miranda Warning Card 1
2.4 Carrying of Non-Lethal Weapon
in the Police Rig. 2
RULE 3. CATEGORIES OF POLICE OPERATIONS 2
3.1 Public Safety Operation 2
3.2 Law Enforcement Operation 2
3.3 Internal Security Operation 2
3.4 Special Police Operation 2
3.5 Intelligence Operation. 2
3.6 Investigation Operation. 2
3.7 Scene of the Crime Operation (SOCO) 3
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES 4
RULE 4. PRE-OPERATIONAL CLEARANCE 4
RULE 5. INTER-UNIT COORDINATION 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS ix
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
5.1 Personal Coordination or by
Official Representative 4
5.2 Coordination by Filing Coordination Form 4
5.3 Coordination by Practical/Available
Means of Communication 4
RULE 6. REQUIREMENTS OF POLICE OPERATIONS 5
6.1 Basic Requirements 5
6.2 Use of Megaphones and Similar Instruments 5
6.3 Warning Shots Prohibited 5
RULE 7. USE OF FORCE DURING POLICE
OPERATIONS 5
7.1 Use of Excessive Force Prohibited. 5

7.2 Issuance of Verbal Warning 5
7.3 Non-Issuance of Verbal Warning
When Excusable. 5
7.4 Use of Non-Lethal Weapon 6
7.5 Application of Necessary and
Reasonable Force 6
7.6 Factors to Consider in the
Reasonableness of the Force Employed. 6
7.7 Responsibility of the Police Officer
in Charge of the Operations 6
RULE 8. USE OF FIREARM DURING POLICE OPERATIONS 6
8.1 Use of Firearm When Justified 6
8.2 Firing at Moving Vehicles Prohibited
But with Exceptions 7
x TABLE OF CONTENTS
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
8.3 Parameters to be Considered
in Firing at Moving Vehicles 7
8.4 Filing of an Incident Report
After the Use of Firearm 7
8.5 Procedures After an Armed Confrontation 7
RULE 9. PATROL PROCEDURES 8
9.1 Patrol Guidelines 8
9.2 Duties of Patrol Supervisors 9
9.3 Duties of Patrol Officer 10
9.4. Guidelines and Procedures when Responding to Calls for Police
Assistance 11
RULE 10. SPOT CHECKS/ACCOSTING
AND PAT-DOWN SEARCHES 12

10.1 Grounds for Spot Check/Search. 12
10.2 Procedures and Guidelines 13
10.3 Reporting after the Spot Check/
Accosting or Pat-Down Search. 15
RULE 11. CHECKPOINTS 15
11.1 Authority to Establish Checkpoints 15
11.2 Composition 15
11.3 Guidelines. 16
11.4 Procedure in the Conduct
of Regular Police Checkpoint 19
11.5 Procedure in the Conduct
of On-the-Spot (Hasty) Checkpoints. 20
11.6 General Procedure to be Followed When Checkpoints are Ignored 21
TABLE OF CONTENTS xi
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
11.7 Procedure in Flagging Down or Accosting Vehicles While in Mobile Car 22
11.8 Dealing with Hostile Situation 23
11.9 High Risk Stop and High Risk Arrest 25
11.10 Police Defensive Roadblock 26
RULE 12. INTERNAL SECURITY OPERATIONS 31
12.1 General Mandate 31
12.2 The PNP in an Active Support Role 31
12.3 Defensive Position 31
RULE 13. ARREST 32
13.1 General Guidelines 32
13.2 Warrant of Arrest 33
13.3 Arrests Without a Warrant 33
13.4 Authority of the Arresting Officer
when Making an Arrest 34

13.5 Procedures 34
13.6 Duties of the Arresting Officer. 36
13.7 Physical Examination of Arrested Person/Suspect 37
RULE 14. SEARCH AND SEIZURE 37
14.1 Requisites for the Issuance
of Search Warrant 37
14.2 Validity of Search Warrant 38
14.3 Time of Search 38
14.4 Applications for Search Warrant 38
14.5 Authority of Police Officers
when Conducting Search 39
xii TABLE OF CONTENTS
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
14.6 Prohibited Acts in the Conduct of Search
by Virtue of a Search Warrant 39
14.7 Inventory and Delivery of Property Seized 39
14.8 Valid Search and Seizures Without
Search Warrant 40
CHAPTER 3 INVESTIGATION PROCEDURES 42
RULE 15. INVESTIGATION BY THE TERRITORIAL POLICE UNIT AFTER AN ARMED CONFRONTATION 42
15.1 Responsibility of the Territorial
Police Unit 42
15.2 Scene of the Crime Operation (SOCO)
Team to Process the Crime Scene 42
15.3 Mandatory Examination of Firearm Seized/Confiscated during Police Operation 42
15.4 Inquest Proceeding Necessary
When the Suspect Dies 43
RULE 16. JUDICIAL AFFIDAVIT RULE 43
16.1 Application of Rule to Criminal Actions 43

16.2 Contents of Judicial Affidavit. 43
16.3 Sworn Attestation of the Lawyer 44
RULE 17. MAINTENANCE OF POLICE BLOTTER 44
17.1 Police Blotter 44
17.2 Police Blotter for Cases involving
Women and Children 44
17.3 Crime Incident Reporting System (CIRS) 45
17.4 Blotter Procedure. 45
RULE 18. UNIT CRIME PERIODIC REPORT (UCPER) 45
18.1 Purpose 45
TABLE OF CONTENTS xiii
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
18.2 Execution and Procedures 45
18.3 Recording 46
RULE 19. BOOKING OF ARRESTED SUSPECTS 46
19.1 Policies and Guidelines 46
RULE 20. CUSTODIAL INVESTIGATION 51
20.1 Duties of the Police During
Custodial Investigation 51
20.2 Detention 53
20.3 Transporting Detention Prisoner 56
RULE 21. INQUEST PROCEDURES 57
21.1 Commencement of Inquest 57
21.2 Documents to Be Submitted 57
21.3 Waiver of Rights 59
21.4 Monitoring of Cases by the Investigators 59
RULE 22. CONDUCT OF CRIME SCENE
INVESTIGATION 60
22.1 Specific Functions, Responsibilities and Procedures of the First Responder,

Investigation-On-Case (IOC) and SOCO 60
22.2 Release of the Crime Scene. 63
22.3 Crime Scene Investigation. 63
22.4 Special SOCO Procedures 64
22.5 Duties of the Territorial Police Unit 64
22.6 Policy Guidelines on Processing
of Persons Present at the Crime Scene 65
xiv TABLE OF CONTENTS
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
RULE 23. PROCEDURES IN THE INVESTIGATION OF HEINOUS AND SENSATIONAL CRIMES 66
23.1 Policies 66
23.2 Organizational Procedures 67
23.3 Operational Procedures. 69
CHAPTER 4 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 74
RULE 24. RULES ON LABOR DISPUTES 74
24.1 General Policy and Guidelines 74
24.2 Applicable Legal Parameters. 75
24.3 Service of Lawful Orders or Writ 75
24.4 Prohibited Labor Activities 76
RULE 25. RALLIES AND DEMONSTRATIONS 76

25.1 Policies 76
25.2 Limitations on the Role of the PNP 77
25.3 Guidelines for Civil Disturbance Management (CDM) Contingent During
Rallies/Demonstrations.77
25.4 Dispersal of Public Assembly
with Permit 77
25.5 Dispersal of Public Assembly
Without Permit 78
25.6 Prohibited Acts.78
25.7 Police Responses During
Public Assembly79
25.8 Guidelines in the Use of Non-Lethal
Weapons 81
25.9 Guidelines in dealing with Assemblies, Rallies, Demonstrations and Marches 82
TABLE OF CONTENTS xv
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
RULE 26. CIVIL DISTURBANCE MANAGEMENT OPERATIONS 83
26.1 General Guidelines 83
26.2 Specific Guidelines 84
26.3 CDM Operational Tasks 84
26.4 CDM Operational Approaches 84
RULE 27. DEMOLITION AND EJECTMENT ORDERS 85
27.1 Role of the PNP in the Enforcement
of a Demolition and/or Ejectment Order 85
27.2 Procedures in the Enforcement
of a Demolition and/or Ejectment Order 86

RULE 28. POLICE ASSISTANCE IN THE IMPLEMENTATION OF FINAL DECISIONS OR ORDERS OF THE
COURTS IN CIVIL CASES, OF QUASI-JUDICIAL BODIES AND OF ADMINISTRATIVE BODIES ON
CONTROVERSIES WITHIN THEIR
JURISDICTION 87
28.1 Police Assistance in the Implementation
of Final Decisions or Orders or Resolutions of the Courts in Civil Cases, of Quasi- Judicial Bodies and of
Administrative Bodies, (Except Cases with Issued Temporary Restraining Order or
Injunction) 87
28.2 Requirements for Police Assistance 87
28.3 Period to Render Police Assistance 88
28.4 Office or Unit That May Be Tasked
to Render Police Assistance 88
28.5 Extent of Police Assistance 88
28.6. Role of PNP Personnel Rendering
Police Assistance. 89
xvi TABLE OF CONTENTS
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
RULE 29. POLICE ASSISTANCE IN THE IMPLEMENTATION OF FINAL DECISIONS OR ORDERS OR

RESOLUTIONS OF THE COMELEC OR DILG OR LOCAL GOVERNMENT UNIT EXERCISING DISCIPLINARY
POWERS IN ADMINISTRATIVE CASES OF ELECTED OFFICIALS 89
29.1 Requirements for the Request
for Police Assistance 89
29.2 Period To Render Police Assistance 89
29.4 Role of PNP Personnel Rendering
RULE 30. POLICE ASSISTANCE IN THE IMPLEMENTATION OF COMPREHENSIVE
AGRARIAN REFORM PROGRAM (CARP) 91
30.1 Coverage 91
30.2 Requirements in the Granting
of Police Assistance. 91
30.3 When to Render Police Assistance 92
30.5 Role of PNP Personnel Rendering
30.6 When Entry to the Property
is Refused by the Landowner 92
RULE 31. POLICE ASSISTANCE IN THE IMPLEMENTATION OF DECISIONS/ORDERS OF THE COURT,
QUASI-JUDICIAL OR ADMINISTRATIVE BODIES THAT ARE IMMEDIATELY EXECUTORY 93
31.1 Where to File 93
31.2. Role of PNP Personnel Rendering
TABLE OF CONTENTS xvii
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
RULE 32. HOSTAGE SITUATION/BARRICADED
SITUATION 94
32.1 Procedure to be followed
in a Hostage Situation 94
32.2 Ground Commander/On-Scene Commander 95
32.3 Negotiators/Negotiation Team 95
32.4 Assault Team 95
32.5 Support Personnel 95
32.6 Plans 95
32.7 Coordination 96
32.8 Safety of Hostage(s) 96
32.9 Guidelines during Negotiations. 96
32.10 Negotiation through Mediator 97

RULE 33. INVESTIGATION OF VIOLENCE AGAINST WOMEN AND THEIR CHILDREN (VAWC)
AND OTHER CASES OF CHILD ABUSE 97
33.1 Investigation of Complaints and Reports ........
Involving All Forms of Violence
against Women and Their Children 97
33.2 Investigation of Complaints and Reports Involving Other Forms of Child Abuse 100
33.3 Right to Privacy of the Child and Confidentiality of Records. 101
33.4 Procedure in the Rescue of Minors 101
33.5 Procedure to be Observed in the Handling of Children in Conflict
with the Law (CICL) 102
33.6 Guidelines. 104
xviii TABLE OF CONTENTS
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
RULE 34. BOMB, BOMB THREAT AND BOMB INCIDENT EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES 105
34.1 Bomb 105
34.2 Bomb Threat 105
34.3 First Responder’s Procedure
on Bomb Threat 105
34.4 First Responder’s Procedure
in Case of Actual Bomb Explosion. 108
RULE 35. PROCEDURES IN DETERMINING AND REPORTING OF TERRORISM
INCIDENTS/CASES 109
35.1 Procedures 109
RULE 36. CYBERCRIME INCIDENT RESPONSE PROCEDURE 109
36.1 Cybercrime Response 109
36.2 Guidelines for Cybercrime Incident
First Responder 110
36.3 Search and Seizure of Computer110

36.4 Guidelines in the Treatment of Other Electronic Data Storage Devices 112
36.5 Search and Seizure of Wireless
Telephones 112
36.6 Search and Seizure of Electronic
Paging Devices. 113
36.7 Search and Seizure of Facsimile
or Fax Machines 113
36.8 Search and Seizure of
Caller ID Devices 113
RULE 37. RULES ON ANTI-ILLEGAL DRUGS
OPERATIONS 113
37.1 General Policy and Guidelines 113
TABLE OF CONTENTS xix
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
37.2 Coordination Requirements 114
37.3 Handling, Custody and Disposition
of Evidence 115
RULE 38. RULES ON ANTI-KIDNAPPING
OPERATIONS 117
38.1 Types of Kidnapping 117
38.2 Concept of Operation 117
38.3 Anti-Kidnapping Operation Flowchart 117
RULE 39. PNP CRITICAL INCIDENT MANAGEMENT OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES 118
39.1 Types of Incidents. 118
39.2 5 P’s of Crisis Management 119
39.3 Incident Command System (ICS) 121
39.4 Alert Levels During Human-Indused
(Man-Made Critical Incident) 122

39.5 Stages in Disaster Management 122
39.6 Organization and Structure of CIMC/CIMTG/DIMTG 124
RULE 40. CRISIS ESCALATION PROTOCOL130
RULE 41. GENERAL RULES ON MEDIA RELATIONS DURING CRISIS 131
SUMMARY OF CHANGES 133
ABBREVIATIONS 134
GLOSSARY 137
xx TABLE OF CONTENTS
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
LIST OF ANNEXES
“A” - Coordination Form 145
“B” - Return of Warrant 146
“C” - Application for Search Warrant 147
“C-1 - Joint Affidavit by the Arresting Officers 148
“C-2” - Deposition of Witnesses 149
“D” - Receipt for Property Seized 150
“D-1” - Certification of Orderly Search 151
“E” - Compliance/Return of Search Warrant 152
“E-1” - Verification 153

“F” - Incident Record Form 154
“G” - Incident Recording System (Blotter Procedure
Flowchart) 156
“H” - PNP BOOKING FORM 1 - “Medical Examination
of Arrested Suspects, Request Form” 157
“I” - PNP BOOKING FORM 2 - “Arrest and Booking Form” 158
“J” - PNP Booking Form 2A - ”Medical Examination
Result Sheet” 160
“K” - PNP Booking Form 2B -“Booking Mug Shots” 161
“L” - PNP Booking Form 3 - “Turn-over of Arrested
Suspect/s Form 163
“L-1” - Jailer’s Receipt of Suspects Form 164
“M” - PNP Booking Form 4 - “Suspects Property Receipt” 165
“N” - PNP Booking Form 2C - “Tenprint Card” 166
“O” - Booking of Arrested Suspects Flowchart 167
“P” - Sworn Statement 168
“Q” - Request for Preliminary Investigation
and Waiver of Article 125, Revised Penal Code 170
“R” - Dying Declaration. 171
“S” - CSI Form 1: First Responder’s Form 172
TABLE OF CONTENTS xxi
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
“T” - CSI Form 4: SOCO Report Form “1”- Person Present
at the Crime Scene 173
CSI Form 4: SOCO Report Form “2”- Evidence Log 174
CSI Form 4: SOCO Report Form “3”- Scene of Crime Examination Worksheet Sketch Details
and Measurement 175
CSI Form 4: SOCO Report Form “4”- Inventory

of Evidence Collected 176
“U” - CSI Form 2: Request for the Conduct of SOCO 177
“V” - CSI Form 6: IOC/Investigator’s CSI Form 178
“W” - CSI Form 5 - Release of Crime Scene Form 181
“X” - Crime Scene Investigation Flowchart 182
“Y” - Case Investigation Plan (CIPLAN) 183
“Z” - Eleven General Orders of a Duty Guard184
“AA” - PNP Incident Command System (ICS)
Organizational Structure 185
“BB” - PNP Crisis Management Committee (PNP CMC) Organizational Structure 186
“CC” - PNP NHQ Critical Incident Management Committee
(PNP NHQ CIMC) Organizational Structure 187
“DD” - PNP Critical Incident Management Task Group (PNP CIMTG) Organizational Structure at
PRO/PPO/CPO/CPS/MPS 188
“EE” - PNP NHQ Disaster Incident Management Task Group
(PNP NHQ DIMTG) Organizational Structure 189
“FF” - PNP Disaster Incident Management Task Group (PNP DIMTG) Organizational Structure at
PRO/PPO/CPO/CPS/MPS 190
“GG” - Chain of Custody Form 191
“HH” - Anti-Kidnapping Operations Flowchart 192
BIBLIOGRAPHY 193
xxii TABLE OF CONTENTS

PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL PRINCIPLES
Regardless of the type of function to be performed and/or police operations to be conducted, all PNP
personnel must know by heart and shall comply with and apply the following principles and procedures:
RULE 1. FUNCTIONS OF A POLICE OFFICER
1.1 To Serve and Protect
The responsibility of every police officer is to serve the public and protect life and property. No police
operation shall be conducted in order to serve or protect the illegal activity of a particular person, group
or criminal syndicate.
1.2 To Observe Human Rights and Dignity of Person
All PNP personnel shall respect the human rights and dignity of the suspect/s during police operations.
RULE 2. POLICE UNIFORM, ATTIRE AND ACCESSORIES
2.1 Agency Prescribed Uniform
A police officer shall always wear the agency prescribed uniform which is appropriate for the kind of
police operation to be undertaken.
2.2 Appearing Before the Public
When wearing the police uniform, a police officer shall, at all times, appear presentable, smart and well-
groomed. While on actual patrol duties, he shall refrain from eating along the sidewalks, smoking and
reading newspapers.
2.3 Carrying of Police Notebook, Pen and Miranda Warning Card
Every police officer on patrol, whether on board a vehicle or on foot patrol, must always carry with him
a police notebook, a pen and the Miranda Warning Card. The notebook, which is approximately pocket-
sized, will be used to inscribe important events that transpire during his tour of duty.
Chapter 1 GENERAL PRINCIPLES 1

PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
2.4 Carrying of Non-Lethal Weapon in the Police Rig
Every police officer shall carry in his prescribed rig a non-lethal weapon (pepper spray, baton or stun
gun), which shall be primarily used in a non-armed confrontation with an uncooperative and unruly
offender during the arrest.
RULE 3. CATEGORIES OF POLICE OPERATIONS
Police operations are categorized as follows:
3.1 Public Safety Operation – includes Search, Rescue and Retrieval Operations, Fire Drills,
Earthquake Drills and similar operations that promote public safety.
3.2 Law Enforcement Operation – includes Service of Warrant of Arrest, Implementation of Search
Warrant, Enforcement of Visitorial Powers of the Chief, Philippine National Police and Unit
Commanders, Anti-Illegal Drugs Operation, Anti- Illegal Gambling Operations, Anti-Illegal Logging
Operations, Anti-Illegal Fishing Operations, Anti-Carnapping Operations, Anti-Kidnapping Operations,
Anti-Cyber Crime Operations and similar operations that are conducted to enforce laws, statutes,
executive orders and ordinances.
3.3 Internal Security Operation – includes Counter-Insurgency Operations, Counter Terrorist

Operations and similar operations that are conducted to ensure internal security.
3.4 Special Police Operation – includes Checkpoint Operation, Roadblock Operation, Civil
Disturbance Management Operation, Police Assistance in the Enforcement of Demolition Eviction
Injunction and Similar Orders, Police Assistance in the Implementation of Final Court Order and Order
from Quasi-Judicial Bodies, Hostage Situation, Visit Board Search and Seizure Onboard Marine Vessels
and similar police operations that are conducted by police units with specialized training on the
peculiarity of the mission or purpose.
3.5 Intelligence Operation – includes Surveillance Operation, Counter Intelligence, Intelligence

Research, Intelligence Assessment and similar police intelligence operation conducted to gather
information related to security, public safety and order.
3.6 Investigation Operation – includes Investigation of Crime or Incident, Administrative

Investigation and similar investigative work necessary to determine facts and circumstances for filing
cases criminally or administratively.
2 GENERAL PRINCIPLES Chapter 1

PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
3.7 Scene of the Crime Operation (SOCO) – includes the processing of crime scene, technical and
forensic examination of evidences and similar scientific investigative assistance.
Chapter 1 GENERAL PRINCIPLES 3
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES
RULE 4. PRE-OPERATIONAL CLEARANCE
No police operation shall be conducted without the approval of the Chief/Commander/Head of the
concerned Police Unit/Office. A pre-operational clearance shall be filed by the Team Leader of the
operating team/s prior to the conduct of the operation and shall be approved by the concerned Police
Unit Commander. This clearance shall be submitted to the operations section/division of the concerned
police unit for record purposes.
RULE 5. INTER-UNIT COORDINATION
5.1 Personal Coordination or by Official Representative

Team Leader/s (TL) of local police units operating outside their territorial jurisdiction and National
Support Units (NSUs) shall coordinate, personally or through an official representative, with the Police
Regional, Provincial or City Police Office within whose jurisdiction the operation is to be conducted.
5.2 Coordination by Filing Coordination Form
Prior to the launching of the operation, except in cases where the formal (in writing) inter-unit
coordination cannot be made due to the nature and/or urgency of the situation such as, but not limited
to, cross-jurisdictional pursuit operations, coordination should be made formally using the prescribed
Coordination Form, which shall be filed with the concerned operation center of the Police Regional,
Provincial or City Office (Annex “A” – Coordination Form).
5.3 Coordination by Practical/Available Means of Communication
In cases where formal inter-unit coordination is not feasible, the Police Unit concerned shall endeavor to
notify the territorial police office through any practical/available means of communication at anytime
during the operation and, if not possible, shall accomplish and furnish the territorial Police Office a
written incident report immediately after the termination of the operation.
4 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES Chapter 2
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
RULE 6. REQUIREMENTS OF POLICE OPERATIONS
6.1 Basic Requirements
Police operations like arrest, search and seizure, checkpoint, roadblocks, demolition and civil
disturbance management shall be conducted as follows:
a. With a marked police vehicle;
b. Led by a Police Commissioned Officer (PCO); and
c. With personnel in prescribed police uniform or attire.
6.2 Use of Megaphones and Similar Instruments
During actual police intervention operations, the Team Leader shall use peaceful means including the
use of megaphones or any other similar instruments to warn or influence the offender/s or suspect/s to
stop and/or peacefully give up.
6.3 Warning Shots Prohibited
The police shall not use warning shots during police intervention operations.
RULE 7. USE OF FORCE DURING POLICE OPERATIONS
7.1 Use of Excessive Force Prohibited
The excessive use of force during police operation is prohibited. However, in the lawful performance of
duty, a police officer may use necessary force to accomplish his mandated tasks of enforcing the law and
maintaining peace and order.
7.2 Issuance of Verbal Warning
The police officer must first issue a verbal warning before he could use force against an offender. As far
as practicable, the verbal warning shall be in the dialect that is known to the offender or in the national
language. Basically the verbal warning shall consist of the following: the police officer identifying
himself; his intention; and what he wants the offender to do. If the offender is a foreigner, the verbal
warning shall be done in the English language followed by a demonstrative act of the police officer’s
intent. The verbal warning shall be done in a loud and clear manner.
7.3 Non-Issuance of Verbal Warning When Excusable
The failure to issue a verbal warning is excusable in cases where threat to life or property is already
imminent,
Chapter 2 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES 5
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
and there is no other option but to use force to subdue the offender.
7.4 Use of Non-Lethal Weapon
When suspect is violent or threatening, and that less physical measures have been tried and deemed
inappropriate, a more extreme, but non-deadly measure can be used such as baton/truncheon, pepper
spray, stun gun and other non- lethal weapon to bring the suspect under control, or effect an arrest.
7.5 Application of Necessary and Reasonable Force
During confrontation with an armed offender, only such necessary and reasonable force should be
applied as would be sufficient to overcome the resistance put up by the offender; subdue the clear and
imminent danger posed by him; or to justify the force/act under the principles of self- defense, defense
of relative, or defense of stranger.
7.6 Factors to Consider in the Reasonableness of the Force Employed
A police officer, however, is not required to afford offender/s attacking him the opportunity for a fair or
equal struggle. The reasonableness of the force employed will depend upon the number of aggressors,
nature and characteristic of the weapon used, physical condition, size and other circumstances to
include the place and occasion of the assault. The police officer is given the sound discretion to consider
these factors in employing reasonable force.
7.7 Responsibility of the Police Officer in Charge of the Operation
The police officer who is in charge of the operation shall, at all times, exercise control over all police
personnel in the area of operation, and shall exhaust all possible means to apply the necessary and
reasonable force to protect lives and properties during armed confrontation.
RULE 8. USE OF FIREARM DURING POLICE OPERATIONS
8.1 Use of Firearm When Justified
The use of firearm is justified if the offender poses imminent danger of causing death or injury to the
police officer or other persons. The use of firearm is also justified under the doctrines of self-defense,
defense of a relative, and defense
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
of a stranger. However, one who resorts to self-defense must face a real threat on his life, and the peril
sought to be avoided must be actual, imminent and real. Unlawful aggression should be present for self-
defense to be considered as a justifying circumstance.
8.2 Firing at Moving Vehicles Prohibited But with Exceptions
A moving vehicle shall not be fired upon except when its occupants pose imminent danger of causing
death or injury to the police officer or any other person, and that the use of firearm does not create a
danger to the public and outweighs the likely benefits of its non-use.
8.3 Parameters to be Considered in Firing at Moving Vehicles
In firing at a moving vehicle, the following parameters should be considered:
a. The intent of the suspect/s to harm the police officer or other persons;
b. The capability of the suspect/s to harm with certainty the police officer or other persons; and
c. Accessibility or the proximity of the suspect/s from the police officer and other persons.
8.4 Filing of an Incident Report After the Use of Firearm
A police officer who fires his service firearm or weapon during a confrontation with an offender or
offenders must submit an incident report outlining the circumstances necessitating the use of his
firearm.
8.5 Procedures After an Armed Confrontation
Immediately after an armed confrontation, the officer who is in charge of the operation shall:
a. Secure the site of confrontation;
b. Take photographs;
c. Check whether the situation still poses imminent danger;
d. Evacuate the wounded to the nearest hospital;
e. Ensure that all persons who died on the spot are not moved from their original position;
f. Arrested suspects should be kept in isolation;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
g. Conduct debriefing on all involved PNP operatives;
h. Submit After-Operations Report; and
i. Ensure psychological stress counseling for all involved PNP operatives.
RULE 9. PATROL PROCEDURES
9.1 Patrol Guidelines
a. Observe precautionary measures and personal safety while on patrol;

b. Observe defensive driving and follow traffic rules and regulations;
c. Select routes which provide best visibility;
d. Patrol members must be always on the look-out for indications of vices and other illegal
activities on their beat;
e. Patrol members must be knowledgeable of all conditions, events and details of places on their
beat;
f. Be observant of people, places, situations or conditions and develop a suspicious attitude

especially if the subject appears to be slightly out of the ordinary;
g. Keep under close observation actions of juveniles, trouble makers/agitators and the mentally
ill/retarded persons;
h. Be familiar, as much as possible, with known criminals/ ex-convicts residing in or frequenting the
patrol beat;
i. Be familiar with stay-in employees of business establishments on your beat;
j. Be on the alert for loiterers;
k. Keep watch on uninhabited homes;
l. Observe the practice of “shaking doors” of unguarded business establishments during night
patrol. Check for signs of intrusion;
m. Establish good rapport with the people on your beat;
n. Develop contacts by getting to know as many people as possible who can give factual
information about crime conditions on the patrol beat;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
o. Use tact and persuasiveness when conducting spot inquiry or questioning individuals for
information;
p. When requiring identification from a suspicious person or any individual, avoid taking the wallet
or bag in which the cards/documents are placed. Let the individual remove and hand them to you;
q. When checking suspicious persons, places, buildings/ establishments and vehicles especially
during nighttime, be prepared to use your service firearm. Flashlight should be held tightly away from
the body to avoid making you a possible target; and
r. Patrol members should avoid loitering in theaters, restaurants and other recreational places.
9.2 Duties of Patrol Supervisors
a. In any operation, careful planning is a must in order to avoid waste of time, effort and resources.
Make a patrol plan with the following details:
(1) Area Coverage: safe haven, ambush areas and crime-prone areas;
(2) Organizational Detail of Personnel;
(3) Duration;
(4) Stand-by points; and
(5) Route plan.
b. Designate and select the members of the patrol team/s;
c. Inspect the members of the patrol for completeness of uniforms, operational readiness and all
government- issued equipment (firearms, mobile car, radio, etc.) to ensure that these are well-
maintained and properly used by the Patrol Officer;
d. Conduct briefing prior to dispatch by disseminating any orders, directives or instructions from
the Chief of Police or higher authorities and new policy or guidelines being implemented by the PNP
Organization;
e. Remind the patrol team about the strict observance of the PNP Operational Procedures;
f. Strictly observe “Buddy System” during the patrol operations;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
g. Render hourly report of location and situation through radio/telephone/cellphone to Police

Community Precinct (PCP)/Station Headquarters Tactical Operation Center (TOC);
h. Render after-patrol report duly signed by detailed personnel. PCP Commanders shall collate and
submit significant details to the Station Patrol Supervisor, who in turn, will submit the same to the
Provincial/District Patrol Supervisor; and
i. Conduct debriefing after the patrol to assess its conduct and make necessary corrective
measures on defects noted.
9.3 Duties of Patrol Officer
a. Attend the Roll Call Formation before his Tour of Duty for briefing and likewise attend the after
Tour of Duty formation for debriefing;
b. Patrol the assigned beats, observe and check suspicious people, structures/buildings,
compounds and vehicles;
c. Observe and monitor public gatherings, prevent disorders and disperse unlawful assemblies;
d. Inspect and/or conduct surveillance in various business establishments and other installations
and remove hazards to public safety;
e. Check suspicious vehicles (private, public, or commercial/delivery vehicles) along the main
roads/ highways in the course of their patrol;
f. Report occurrences and conditions which relate to crime, public peace, order and safety;
g. Prevent crimes and arrest sighted law violators, assuring the public that peace is preserved;
h. Conduct regular visitations, dialogues/consultations with the residents and other stakeholders;
i. Assist personnel of responsible agencies/unit in facilitating the flow of traffic at busy

intersections/roads within his Area of Responsibility (AOR), assist and provide pedestrian information
such as directions and street locations;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
j. Enforce city/municipal ordinances on liquor establishments and night clubs, cabarets and all
houses of ill-repute;
k. Respond to calls, entertain complaints, initiate the investigation and protection of the scene and
minimize the after-effects of accidents, fires and other catastrophes;
l. Patrol Officers shall wear the prescribed patrol uniform; and
m. Patrol Officers must have the equipment necessary in the performance of their duty.
9.4 Guidelines and Procedures when Responding to Calls for Police Assistance
a. Gather and note down in the patrol officer’s logbook all available data as to the nature of the
calls, date, time and name of the caller. It may be regular, urgent or emergency in nature.
b. The manner of approach will be dependent on the nature of the call, either with haste/secrecy
or with/ without flashing lights and sirens.
c. Consider the pertinent factors like the time, traffic conditions, the possibility of greater damage
and the neighborhood characteristics.
d. Stop the patrol car some distance from the scene.
e. Approach the scene on foot, in complete silence and exercising extreme caution.
f. Immediately attend to the injured, unless the other members of the patrol are in immediate
danger.
g. Focus all efforts to arrest criminals; however, priority shall be given to aiding the injured.
h. Determine the crime committed, identify and question briefly the victim/complainant and
possible witnesses at the scene.
i. If the suspects or criminals have fled the scene before the arrival of the patrol team,
immediately relay the composition, armament, appearance, and mode and direction of escape of the
suspects to the Operations Center for the conduct of dragnet operations.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
j. When responding to street fights/brawls, the patrol member should call for back-up before
intervening. If there are no injuries and insufficient corroborative statements obtained to identify who
started the fight, disperse the crowd and make complete notes.
k. Never treat calls or complaints of loud noises caused by barking dogs, drunks, appliances and
parties as negligible or a nuisance. They only need courteous and tactful intervention and not
enforcement actions.
l. When responding to calls for police assistance due to planted or found explosives, never
attempt to handle, move or lift the object. Instead contact Operations Center and request for Explosive
Ordnance Disposal Team (EODT). On-lookers must be promptly led to a safe distance away from the
scene. (Refer to Rule 34).
m. When responding to calls from owners of beerhouses, bars or inns or any other similar
establishments during night time, request the owner to put the lights on first before entering the
establishments.
n. Do not attempt to arbitrate and resolve conflicts/ differences between neighbors,

landlords/tenants, husband and wife.
RULE 10. SPOT CHECKS/ACCOSTING AND PAT-DOWN SEARCHES
10.1 Grounds for Spot Check/Search
a. Spot Check/Accosting. The police officer may stop an individual for the purpose of conducting a
spot check/ accosting only when reasonable suspicion exists. Reasonable suspicion must be more than
just a hunch or feeling. In justifying the stop, the police officer must be able to point to specific facts
that, when taken together with rational inferences, reasonably warrant the stop. Such facts include, but
are not limited to, the following:
(1) The appearance or demeanor of the individual suggests that he is part of a criminal enterprise or
is engaged in a criminal act;
(2) The actions of the individual suggest that he is engaged in a criminal activity;
(3) Questionable presence of the individual in the area;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(4) The subject is carrying a suspicious object;
(5) The suspect’s clothing bulges in a manner that suggests he is carrying a weapon;
(6) The suspect has been found in the time and place proximate to an alleged crime;
(7) The police officer has knowledge of the suspect’s prior criminal record or involvement in
criminal activity; and
(8) The individual flees at the sight of a police officer.
b. Body Frisk/Pat-Down Search. A police officer has the right to perform a pat-down search if the
individual has been legitimately stopped with reasonable suspicion and when the police officer has
reason to believe that the individual possesses weapon/s on his person and poses a threat to the police
officer’s or another person’s safety. Circumstances which may justify pat-down search:
(1) The type of crime believed to be committed by the subject, particularly crimes of violence where
the threat of use or use of deadly weapon is involved;
(2) Where the police officer handles several suspects;
(3) The time of the day and the location where the pat- down search took place;
(4) Prior knowledge by the police officer of the suspect’s use of force and/or propensity to carry
deadly weapons;
(5) The appearance and demeanor of the suspect;
(6) Visual indications suggesting that the suspect is carrying a firearm or other deadly weapon; and
(7) Whenever possible, pat-down searches should be performed by police officers of the same
gender.
10.2 Procedures and Guidelines
a. Spot Check/Accosting
(1) When approaching the individual, the police officer shall clearly identify himself as a police
officer. If not in uniform, the police officer must identify himself by announcing his identity and
displaying official identification card and/or badge.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(2) Police officers shall be courteous at all times but maintain caution and remain vigilant for
suspicious movements like attempting to retrieve weapon, conceal or discard contraband, or other
similar actions.
(3) Before approaching more than one individual, police officers should determine whether the
circumstances warrant a request for back-up and whether the spot check/accosting can and should be
delayed until such back-up arrives.
(4) Police officers shall confine their questions as to the person’s identity, place of residence, and
other inquiries necessary to resolve the police officer’s suspicion. However, in no instance shall a police
officer hold a person longer than the period reasonably necessary to be able to make these limited
inquiries and to resolve suspicions.
(5) Police officers are not required to inform the person of his rights under the law (i.e. Miranda
Warning, Anti-torture law, etc.) unless the person is placed under arrest.
b. Body Frisk/Pat-Down Search
When reasonable suspicion justifies a pat-down search, the search should be performed with due
caution, restraint, and sensitivity. Pat-down searches should be conducted in the following manner:
(1) Whenever possible, pat-down searches should be conducted by at least two (2) police officers,
one to perform the search while the other provides protective cover.
(2) Because pat-down searches are cursory in nature, they should be performed with the suspect in
a standing position, or with hands placed against a stationary object, and feet spread apart. However,
should an officer visually observe a weapon, a more secure search position may be used like the prone
(lying face down) position.
(3) In a pat-down search, officers are permitted only to feel the outer clothing of the suspect. Police
officers may not place their hands inside the pockets of the subject’s clothing unless they feel an object
that
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
could probably be a weapon, such as a gun, knife, club, or the like.
(4) If the suspect is carrying an object such as a handbag, suitcase, briefcase, sack, or other similar
items that may conceal a weapon, the police officer should not open the item but instead put it in a
place out of the suspect’s reach.
(5) If the external patting of the suspect’s clothing fails to disclose evidence of a weapon, no further
search may be made. If a weapon is found and the possession of which amounts to a violation of the
law, the police officer shall arrest the suspect and conduct a complete search of his person.
10.3 Reporting after the Spot Check/Accosting or Pat-Down Search
If after conducting a spot check/accosting or pat-down search, the police officer has no basis for making
an arrest, he should record the facts of such spot check/accosting or pat-down search and forward a
report to the appropriate authority. If the spot check/accosting or pat-down search gives a justification
for a valid warrantless arrest, then an arrest shall be made.
RULE 11. CHECKPOINTS
11.1 Authority to Establish Checkpoints
Checkpoint is a place where the police check vehicular/ pedestrian traffic in order to enforce circulation
control measure and other laws, orders, and regulations. The establishment of checkpoints must always
be authorized by the Head of Office of the territorial PNP Unit and manned by uniformed PNP
personnel. Other units directly involved in an operation may establish mobile checkpoints in
coordination with the Unit Commander in the area.
11.2 Composition
In the conduct of checkpoint, the checkpoint team shall be composed of, but not limited to, the
following:
a. Team Leader (TL) - shall lead and take responsibility in the conduct of checkpoint preferably an
officer with the rank of at least Police Inspector;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
b. Spotter - PNP personnel who will point/profile suspected vehicle subject for checkpoint;
c. Spokesperson - TL or member who is in charge of communicating with the motorists subject for
checkpoint;
d. Investigation Sub-team - in charge of investigation and documentation of possible incidents in

the checkpoint to include issuance of Traffic Citation Ticket (TCT) or Traffic Violation Report (TVR);
e. Search/Arresting Sub-Team - designated to conduct search, seizure and arrest, if necessary;
f. Security Sub-Team - tasked to provide security in the checkpoint area; and

g. Blocking/Pursuing Sub-Team - team tasked to block/ pursue fleeing suspects/vehicle.
11.3 Guidelines
a. Mobile checkpoints are authorized only when established in conjunction with ongoing police
operations. Only officially marked vehicles with blinkers turned on, if available, shall be used in
establishing mobile checkpoints.
b. Checkpoints are established to enforce circulation control measure, laws, orders and
regulations, and when there is a need to arrest a criminal or fugitive from justice.
c. The composition of the personnel manning the checkpoint shall be left to the sound discretion
of the Team Leader (TL), with the consideration of female PNP officer in the team especially when there
is an anticipated female suspect.
d. The minimum Police Checkpoint team should at least be composed of an 8-man complement,
with three verifiers, one spotter, one TL, one profiler, one rear security and one advance security.
e. The Team manning checkpoints must have immediate contact with the LGUs, Public Attorney’s
Office (PAO) or any member of the Philippine bar, and/or the media (for drug cases).
f. The Team should encourage the participation of, but not limited to, the Local Government Units
(LGUs),
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Civil Society Groups, Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs), business organizations, other civic
groups, media and other stakeholders during the conduct of Police Checkpoint operations.
g. The participation of the civilians and the presence of the media in the conduct of checkpoint
must be confined only as observers to give police additional eyes and promote transparency of activities
in the area.
h. All civic groups or organizations to include the media, who are inclined to participate in police
checkpoints, must be duly registered and accredited by the PNP for such purpose. The accreditation of
the civilian groups to join in the conduct of checkpoint shall be administered by the Police Regional and
Provincial Offices.
i. PNP personnel manning the checkpoint must have a presentable appearance, wearing the
prescribed PNP uniform. Likewise, the civilian members must also be in their organization’s uniform with
their names conspicuously displayed for identification. In no case shall the civilian components be
allowed to bear firearms during the checkpoint.
j. In Metro Manila and other major cities, police officers manning the checkpoints should not wear
Field Service Uniforms (FSU) or black fatigues in lieu of the PNP General Office Attire unless the conduct
of checkpoint is a result of a Hot Pursuit Operation or a High Risk Checkpoint. The use of mixed uniforms
(GOA, FSU, black fatigue) in the conduct of checkpoint is strictly prohibited.
k. As much as possible, the area where the checkpoints shall be established must be properly
lighted, with a noticeable signage bearing the name of the PNP unit and the participating organization/s
visibly displayed in the checkpoint site, to prevent any apprehension from the public of the existence of
the same.
l. Due courtesy must be accorded to the motorists, traders and the commuters during the conduct
of checkpoint.
m. The spokesperson must greet the people subject for inspection, extend apology for the
inconvenience, appeal for understanding and state the reasons of the operation. Upon completion,
thank the person/s searched.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
n. Except in the actual commission of crime during checkpoints or in a hot pursuit operation, the
conduct of inspection of vehicle during a routine checkpoint is limited to a visual search and therefore
must be done with due respect to innocent passers-by, commuters, or bystanders and be conducted in a
manner that is of least inconvenience to the public. Searches, seizures, and arrests made during
checkpoints shall be within the ambit of the law.
o. Violations/Infractions of the law discovered during the checkpoint operation shall be

expeditiously disposed of following legal procedures. Arrested persons must be apprised of their rights
with respect to the Miranda Doctrine.
p. The security of the PNP personnel, and most especially that of the civilians participating in the
checkpoint operation, must be given due consideration in the planning of the operation.
q. Only the security sub-team and blocking/pursuing sub- team members are allowed to display
high-powered firearms should be positioned where they can best provide security to the Checkpoint
team, including themselves.
r. Checkpoint personnel must not limit their task to law enforcement and crime deterrence. They
should also be ready to provide police assistance in the vicinity e.g., giving directions to inquiring
motorists or passers-by.
s. The PNP operating units must provide their own logistical and financial requirements to avoid
soliciting support from the civilians for their personal or operational needs.
t. Police personnel assigned in the checkpoint shall not mulct, extort, or harass drivers,
passengers, and traders. Designated TL assigned at the checkpoint shall be responsible for the
actuations and behavior of his personnel and shall be accountable under the doctrine of Command
Responsibility.
u. Voluntary offers of cash or in kind from the traders/ motorists passing the checkpoint should be
absolutely refused because the offer might be misconstrued as a bribe.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
v. The police and the civilian component must separately submit their After Checkpoint Operation
Report to their respective units or organization for proper evaluation of the efficacy of the operation.
11.4 Procedure in the Conduct of Regular Police Checkpoint
a. Unit Commanders should inform Higher Headquarters (HHQs) Tactical Operations Center (TOC)
and coordinate with adjacent units, such as MPS, CPS, NSUs, Public Safety Company Forces and other
friendly forces, personally or through an official representative, before commencing with the checkpoint
to avoid misencounter and any untoward incident;
b. The TL shall brief the PNP personnel, as well as the civilian components present, including the
media regarding the proper conduct of the checkpoint and their assigned tasks prior to their
deployment;
c. The TL shall initially account for the PNP personnel and check if they are in the prescribed
uniform. PNP personnel conducting the checkpoint shall display their nameplates at all times. If wearing
a jacket, the flap of the jacket bearing their names should also be displayed. Likewise, the equipment
will include, but not limited to, the following:
(1) Marked Patrol vehicles;

(2) Firearms with basic load of ammunition;
(3) Handheld and vehicle base radios;
(4) Flashlights;
(5) Megaphone;
(6) Video camera; and
(7) Signage:
(a) Warning signs: (e.g., Slowdown Checkpoint Ahead, Checkpoint 20 Meters Ahead, etc); and
(b) Information signs: Name of the Unit and TL.
d. The Spotter of the team will be pre-positioned in a place where he can best point/profile
suspected vehicles prior to their approach to the checkpoint;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
e. Search/Arresting Sub-Team shall flag down suspected vehicles and conduct search, seizure and
arrest, if necessary;
f. In the event of seized drugs, the team having initial custody and control of the drugs shall
immediately conduct physical inventory and photograph the same in the presence of the accused or the
person/s from whom such items were confiscated and/or seized, or his/her representative or counsel, a
representative from the media and DOJ, any elected public official who shall be required to sign the
copy of the inventory and be given a copy thereof;
g. Arrested persons and seized items shall be turned over to the investigation sub-team for
documentation and proper disposition;
h. In the event that the checkpoint is ignored, and the occupants of the vehicle open fire on the
personnel manning the checkpoint, reasonable force to overcome the suspects’ aggression may be
employed;
i. Inform Higher Headquarters before terminating the conduct of Checkpoint;
j. The TL shall conduct debriefing of personnel after termination of the Checkpoint; and
k. Unit Commander shall submit After-Activity Report to Higher Headquarters.
11.5 Procedure in the Conduct of On-the Spot (Hasty)
Checkpoints
a. PNP personnel conducting mobile patrols on board patrol vehicles will initially man the
checkpoint, to be complemented by additional personnel upon arrival of reinforcement. A collapsible
signage with markings: “Stop, Police Checkpoint” if available, indicating also the name of the concerned
police office/unit conducting the operations, will be used for the purpose;
b. In the case of PNP personnel conducting Internal Security Operation (ISO) or foot patrol, where
a vehicle and collapsible signage is not readily available, the checkpoint shall be manned initially by said
personnel;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
c. The team shall immediately inform Higher Headquarters of the exact location of the hasty
Checkpoint to include personnel involved and available equipment;
d. In a hasty checkpoint, where there is a possibility of high- risk stop and high-risk arrest, and
there is an urgency for troop deployment and that public safety might be at risk, the participation of the
civilian component and the presence of the media in the checkpoint operation shall not be allowed;
e. The Unit Commander of the personnel manning the hasty checkpoint shall immediately send
additional personnel, equipment and signage to the area in order to convert the Hasty Checkpoint into a
Regular Checkpoint; and
f. As soon as the Hasty Checkpoint is converted into a Regular Checkpoint, TL shall follow the
procedures under 11.4c of this Rule.
11.6 General Procedure to be Followed When Checkpoints are Ignored
When checkpoints are ignored, the following shall be observed:
a. In the event that checkpoints/roadblocks are ignored and the motorists/suspects bump the
roadblock in an attempt to elude arrest or avoid inspection, the TL shall immediately contact adjacent
units to inform them of the situation so that these units can conduct dragnet operation or police
defensive roadblock, while the members of the blocking/pursuing team shall block or pursue the errant
fleeing motorist;
b. Warning shots shall not be allowed due to the confusion it may create for the driver and
passengers of the vehicle. Megaphones or police sirens shall be used instead during the pursuit. The
plate number of the vehicle shall be noted and given to other units in adjacent areas to prevent the
possibility that the vehicle may elude the pursuit operation; and
c. In the event that the occupants of the vehicle open fire on the personnel manning the
checkpoint, reasonable force to overcome the suspects’ aggression may be employed.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
11.7 Procedure in Flagging Down or Accosting Vehicles While in Mobile Car
This rule is a general concept and will not apply in hot pursuit operations. The mobile car crew shall
undertake the following, when applicable:
a. Call Headquarters to provide information on the make or type and plate number of the motor
vehicle to be accosted and, if possible, identity of occupants;
b. State the reason(s) for the planned intervention of the suspected motor vehicle;
c. Give the mobile car’s location and its direction before making actual intervention;
d. Try to get alongside the suspects’ vehicle and check the occupants without alarming them of
your purpose. You can even overtake the vehicle and wait for it at an advantageous location before
stopping the suspects’ vehicle;
e. Determine whether the suspects are hostile or not;
f. Make known to the suspect that you are after them through the use of a siren or megaphone;
g. Instruct the driver to pull over or stop on the side of the road;
h. Park behind the suspect’s vehicle at an appropriate distance and cautiously approach the vehicle
on the driver’s side;
i. If the vehicle’s windows are heavily tinted and the occupants cannot be seen, instruct the driver
to open all windows to have a clear view of the interior of the vehicle;
j. Instruct the driver to turn off the ignition, if this was not done when the vehicle stopped; in case
of motorcycle instruct the driver to remove the key and disembark;
k. The other members of the team must be on guard for any eventuality while the vehicle is being
approached;
l. Talk to the driver in a most courteous manner and inform him of the nature of his violation.
Demand to see the driver’s license, photocopies of the certificate of registration and the official receipt.
Examine these
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
documents and counter-check the driver on the information reflected therein;
m. If it concerns traffic violations, immediately issue a Traffic Citation Ticket (TCT) or Traffic
Violation Report (TVR). Never indulge in prolonged, unnecessary conversation or argument with the
driver or any of the vehicle’s occupants;
n. In case of other violations that require the impounding of the vehicle, inform the driver
regarding this situation and instruct him to follow you, after issuing the TCT/ TVR; and
o. Before moving out, inform Headquarters regarding the situation/status and disposition of the
person and motor vehicle accosted.
11.8 Dealing with Hostile Situation
The following are the procedures to be followed in dealing with hostile drivers:
a. Stopping Vehicles
(1) Follow the procedure stated in paragraphs a to c of Rule 11.7;
(2) Immediately request for back-up;
(3) Follow the suspect and always keep him within visual range;
(4) Expect that the suspect will notice your action at any time. Be prepared for hot pursuit or actual
hostile confrontation;
(5) If the back-up is already in the vicinity, inform Headquarters that you are proceeding to accost
the suspect;
(6) Inform the suspects that you are after them through the use of siren or megaphone and instruct
the driver to pull over or stop on the side of the street;
(7) Park at an appropriate distance behind the suspect’s vehicle;
(8) While the vehicle is being approached, the other members of the crew and back-up must be on
guard for any eventuality. Overreactions or aggression on the part of the police should be avoided;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(9) If the vehicle’s windows are heavily tinted and the occupants cannot be seen, instruct the driver
to open all windows for a clear view of the vehicle’s interior;
(10) Direct the driver and other occupants of the vehicle not to make unnecessary movements and
to show their hands outside the car;
(11) Instruct the driver to turn off the ignition and toss the key to the ground. Demand to see the
Driver’s License and photocopies of the vehicle’s certificate of registration and the official receipt.
Examine the documents and counter-check the driver on the information reflected therein; and
(12) If there are other suspects aside from the driver, separate them from one another.
b. Fleeing Vehicles
(1) In the event that the motor vehicle did not stop despite the warning given, inform Headquarters
or adjacent units so that dragnet operations or police defensive roadblocks can be set-up;
(2) Inform Headquarters of the make or type, plate number and color of the motor vehicle to be
accosted including the number of occupants and, if possible, their identity;
(3) State the reason(s) for flagging down the suspected motor vehicle;
(4) Give mobile car’s location and its direction before making actual intervention;
(5) When the vehicle of the suspect is cornered or stopped, instruct the driver and other occupants
in a clear and commanding voice to follow specifically what you will require of them. Failure on their
part to follow will be construed as a hostile act on their part. Execute instructions on the use of
reasonable force;
(6) Instruct the driver to turn off the ignition and toss the key to the ground, open the door and
step out of the vehicle, then instruct him to place his hands on top of the vehicle, or to move towards
you with his hands up;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(7) Instruct other occupants of the vehicle, if any, to come out one by one, and follow what the
driver has been instructed to do earlier;
(8) Arrest, handcuff and search the suspects and bring them to Headquarters for proper disposition;
and
(9) Before moving out, inform Headquarters about the situation, status and disposition of the
suspects and motor vehicle accosted.
11.9 High-Risk Stop and High-Risk Arrest
a. Initial Stage
Upon receipt of information involving movement of armed person or persons, either singly or in group,
including unauthorized movement of government troops, or in immediate response to a reported
commission of crime perpetrated by armed persons, the PNP shall immediately:
(1) Organize appropriate tactical security forces utilizing maximum firepower and armor assets;
(2) Deploy the security forces to stopping zones in defensive position; and
(3) Seal off the area and establish strong roadblocks/ barricades.
b. Effecting a High Risk Stop
When effecting high-risk stop, the police officer shall:
(1) Exert utmost effort to persuade the suspects to halt or stop their movement.
(2) Start with the procedural conduct of regular warrantless arrest where arrest is inevitable.
(3) Ensure proper documentation of the process.
(4) Respect the rights of all the persons involved.
c. During Violent Stage

The PNP shall strictly adhere to the PNP Operational Procedures (POP), particularly on the use of force
(Rule 7).
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
11.10 Police Defensive Roadblock
Police Defensive Roadblock is a temporary installation or hastily built barricade set for halting traffic to
facilitate the apprehension/neutralization of an armed person/suspect onboard a motor vehicle. (PNP
Command Memorandum Circular No. 25-13 “Establishment of Police Defensive Roadblocks”)
a. Pre-Conditions in Establishing Police Defensive Roadblocks:
A police defensive roadblock may be established in any of the following conditions/situations:
(1) The object vehicle/s must be the subject of a recent flash alarm;
(2) The driver/occupants of the vehicle are presumed hostile and will not stop at the checkpoint;
(3) The vehicle disregarded a police-established checkpoint when flagged down;
(4) The identified vehicle and occupants must be the subject of a police case/combat operational
plan;
(5) There is unauthorized troop movement; or
(6) There must be validated information on any of the following:
(a) On-going hot pursuit/police chase;
(b) Movement of suspected armed persons onboard a motor vehicle;
(c) Report of suspected armed men who have just committed a crime;
(d) Vehicle carrying escaped prisoner; or
(e) Armed motorcycle riding criminals.
b. Procedures in Establishing Roadblock:
(1) Before the Roadblock:

(a) Organize appropriate/sufficient police tactical security forces, utilizing maximum firepower and
armor assets (if any), with the following team composition:
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
i. Team Leader (TL) - shall lead and take responsibility in the conduct of roadblock preferably an
officer with the rank of at least Police Inspector;
ii. Forward observer/spotter - PNP personnel who will point/profile suspected vehicle subject for
roadblock;
iii. Spokesperson - TL or member who is solely in charge of communicating with the armed suspects
onboard a motor vehicle subject for roadblock;
iv. Sniper - to render the vehicle un-operational to avoid escape and provide firepower support to
neutralize armed and hostile suspects during firefight;
v. Investigation Sub-team - in charge of investigation and documentation of the roadblock;
vi. Search/Arresting Sub-Team - designated to conduct search, seizure and arrest;
vii. Security Sub-Team - tasked to provide security in the roadblock area and ensure exclusion of
other vehicles and civilians not subject of roadblock;
viii. Blocking/Pursuing Sub-Team - tasked to block/pursue fleeing suspects/vehicle;
ix. Medical Sub-Team – tasked to provide immediate medical assistance if necessary;
x. Additional tactical personnel/team may be employed depending on the size of the hostiles; and
xi. Videographer – tasked to take videos of the entire roadblock operation.
(b) The Team Leader (TL) shall brief the elements/ members of the Police Roadblock and perform
the following:
i. Inform the next higher Headquarters of the make or type and plate number of the motor vehicle
to be accosted, including
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
the number and, if possible, identity of the occupants;
ii. State the reason(s) for the planned intervention of the suspected motor vehicle;
iii. Give the exact location of the roadblock to include personnel involved, available equipment and
marked vehicles;
iv. Coordinate with the Chief of Police and friendly forces who has territorial jurisdiction over the
area; and
v. Immediately contact adjacent units to inform them of the situation so that these units can
conduct dragnet operation, while the members of the blocking/pursuing team shall block or pursue the
fleeing suspects/ vehicle.
(c) Participating personnel in the roadblock must be in their prescribed uniform; and
(d) In a roadblock, since troop deployment is urgent and public safety is at risk, the participation of
civilian component and the presence of media in the roadblock shall not be allowed.
(2) During the Roadblock:
(a) Establish forward observers/spotters and rear checkpoint;
(b) Deploy security forces in a strategic and defensive position;
(c) Establish a strong roadblock on selected strategic areas;
(d) Deploy road spikes or tire deflation system if available;
(e) Ensure that the whole intervention procedure is documented by the videographer;
(f) As much as possible, the area where the roadblock shall be established must be properly lighted
with noticeable signage bearing the name of the PNP Unit visibly displayed and in a
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
safe distance from a populated area to prevent collateral damage if a firefight ensues;
(g) Police car lights must be turned on at all times during the operation;
(h) Identify yourself-rank, name, unit verbally and make known to the suspect/s that you are after
them through the use of a siren or megaphone;
(i) If the vehicle’s windows are heavily tinted and the occupants cannot be seen, instruct the driver
to open all windows to have a clear view of the interior of the vehicle;
(j) Instruct the driver to turn off the ignition (if this was not done when the vehicle stopped) and
order all the occupants to disembark, followed by their hands to be placed on top of the vehicle;
(k) The other members of the team must be on guard for any eventuality while the vehicle is being
approached;
(l) Intervention procedures upon stop of subject vehicle: Exert utmost effort to persuade the
suspects to halt or stop their movement;
i. Start with the procedural conduct of regular warrantless arrest where arrest is inevitable;
ii. Ensure proper documentation of the process; and
iii. Respect the rights of all the persons involved.
(m) Procedures when suspects open fire/engage the troops:
i. In the event that the occupants of the vehicle open fire on the personnel manning the
roadblock, reasonable force to overcome the suspects’ aggression may be employed;
ii. Use only necessary force to neutralize suspects;
iii. Prevent panic firing;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
iv. Prevent collateral damage; and
v. Account for the casualties.

(3) After the Roadblock:
(a) When suspect/s surrendered or are arrested:
i. Arrested persons must be apprised of their rights in reference to the Miranda Doctrine; and
ii. An After-Roadblock Operations Report must be submitted to their respective units or

organization for proper evaluation of the efficacy of the operation.
(b) When suspects engage with troops:
i. Account for the casualties and give immediate medical assistance to the wounded;
ii. Protect/preserve the crime scene/ engagement area; and
iii. Ensure proper documentation of the process.
(c) Fleeing Vehicles:
i. In the event that the motor vehicle did not stop and it evaded the roadblock despite the
warning given, inform Headquarters or adjacent units so that another roadblock can be set-up;
ii. Fleeing vehicles shall not be fired upon except by a sniper but only to disable the vehicle;
iii. Inform Headquarters of the make or type, plate number and color of the motor vehicle to be
accosted including the number of occupants and, if possible, their identity;
iv. State the reason(s) for flagging down the suspected motor vehicle;
v. Give mobile car’s location and its direction before making actual intervention; and
vi. Establish Hot Pursuit Operation.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
RULE 12. INTERNAL SECURITY OPERATIONS
12.1 General Mandate
The PNP is mandated to provide active support to the Armed Forces of the Philippines (AFP) in Internal
Security Operations (ISO) for the suppression of the Communist Terrorist Movement (CTM) and other
serious threats to national security.(Executive Order No. 546 series of 2006 “Directing the Philippine
National Police to Undertake Active Support to the Armed Forces of the Philippines in Internal Security
Operations for the Suppression of Insurgency and Other Serious Threats to National Security, Amending
Certain Provisions of Executive Order No. 110 series of 1999 and for Other Purposes”)
12.2 The PNP in an Active Support Role
The PNP shall perform the following:
a. Conduct sustained law enforcement actions against CTM atrocities;
b. In urban areas, the PNP may assume the lead role in ISO against the CTM, other threat groups
and organized crime groups engaged in armed offensives;
c. The PNP units may either operate as a single force or as a part of joint PNP-AFP combat
operations. In both cases, lateral coordination is a must;
d. The PNP units in CTM-affected areas may be placed under Operational Control (OPCON) of AFP
units but shall continue to perform law enforcement functions.
e. Specific areas where armed confrontations such as encounter, ambush, raid, liquidation and
other similar atrocities occur between government forces (PNP or AFP) and the Communist Terrorists
(CTs) shall be treated as a crime scene. The police unit that has jurisdiction over the areas shall conduct
the Crime Scene Investigation (CSI).
12.3 Defensive Position
Police Stations, especially those located in far-flung areas, are priority targets of attacks. As such,
security measures against CT atrocities must be undertaken as follows:
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
a. Continuously remind all PNP personnel to be extra vigilant and security conscious in their day-
to-day activities and during troop movements.
b. Duty station guards shall memorize, internalize and put into practice the 11 General Orders of a
Duty Guard. (Annex “Z”) Likewise, they shall always carry their issued long firearms and ammunition
rig/bandoliers with basic load.
c. Vigorously implement added security measures in all Police Stations and Police Community
Precincts.
d. Conduct sustained inspection of the operational readiness of PNP field units/stations.

e. Always keep in mind the modus operandi, strategies and tactics being practiced/employed by
the CTM and other threat groups.
f. Enhance the establishment of Advance Security Control Points (ASCPs) to control the ingress and
egress of people in Police Stations.
g. One of the strategies and tactics employed by CTM and other threats groups to gain access to
police stations is by wearing of PNP/AFP uniforms and that of other LEAs, hence, personnel assigned in
the advance security control points shall not allow entry of uniformed groups or any individuals without
prior coordination.
(1) Exercise sustained vigilance and maintenance of law, order and public safety in respective AOR
through the intensified conduct of police visibility patrols.
(2) Carry out Police Community Relation (PCR)/ Barangay Peacekeeping Operations (BPO) activities
in areas that are prone to influence, infiltration and infestation of CTM fronts organization.
RULE 13. ARREST
13.1 General Guidelines
a. All arrests should be made only on the basis of a valid Warrant of Arrest issued by a competent
authority, except in instances where the law allows warrantless arrest.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
b. No violence or unnecessary force shall be used in making an arrest, and the person to be
arrested shall not be subjected to any greater restraint than what is necessary under the circumstances.
c. As a general rule, arrests can be made on any day of the week and at any time of the day or
night.
d. Only judges are authorized to issue Warrants of Arrest.
e. A Warrant of Arrest is no longer needed if the accused is already under detention. An Order of
Commitment is issued by the judge in lieu of the Warrant of Arrest.
f. The following are immune from arrest:
(1) A Senator or Member of the House of the Representatives while Congress is in session for an
offense punishable by not more than six years of imprisonment; and
(2) Diplomatic Agents, Under the Vienna Convention on Diplomatic Relations.
13.2 Warrant of Arrest
The warrant of arrest is the written authority of the arresting officer when making an arrest or taking of
a person into custody in order that he may be bound to answer for the commission of an offense.
The head of the office to whom the warrant of arrest has been delivered for implementation shall cause
the warrant to be implemented within ten (10) days from receipt. Within ten (10) days after the
expiration of such period, the police officer to whom it was assigned for implementation shall make a
report to the judge who issued the warrant and in case of his failure to implement the same, shall state
the reasons thereof.
13.3 Arrests Without a Warrant
A peace officer or a private person may, without a warrant, arrest a person:
a. When, in his presence, the person to be arrested has committed, is actually committing, or is
attempting to commit an offense;
b. When an offense has just been committed and he has probable cause to believe, based on
personal
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
knowledge of facts or circumstances, that the person to be arrested has committed it;
c. When the person to be arrested is a prisoner who has escaped from a penal establishment or
place where he is serving final judgment or temporarily confined while his case is pending, or has
escaped while being transferred from one confinement area to another;
d. Where the accused released on bail attempts to leave the country without court permission;
e. Violation of conditional pardon, punishable under Article 159 of the Revised Penal Code as a
case of evasion of service of sentence; and
f. Arrest following a Deportation Proceeding by the Immigration Commissioner against illegal and
undesirable aliens.
13.4 Authority of the Arresting Officer when Making an Arrest
a. Police officer may summon assistance – A police officer making a lawful arrest may verbally
summon as many persons as he deems necessary to assist him in effecting the arrest.
b. Right of a police officer to break into building or enclosure – A police officer in order to make an
arrest, with or without warrant, may break into a building or enclosure where the person to be arrested
is or is reasonably believed to be, if he is refused admittance thereto after announcing his authority and
purpose.
c. Right to break out from building or enclosure – Whenever a police officer has entered the
building or enclosure to make an arrest, he may break out there from, when necessary, to liberate
himself.
d. Arrest after escape or rescue – If a person lawfully arrested escapes or is rescued, any person
may immediately pursue to retake him without a warrant at anytime and in any place within the
Philippines.
13.5 Procedures
a. Serving of Warrant of Arrest
(1) Verify the validity of the warrant and request for an authenticated copy from the issuing court;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(2) In serving the warrant, the police officer should introduce himself and show proper
identification;
(3) Make a manifestation of authority against the person to be arrested;
(4) If refused entry, the police officer may break into any residence, office, building, and other
structure where the person to be arrested is in or is reasonably believed to be in, after announcing his
purpose;
(5) The police officer need not have a copy of the warrant in his possession at the time of the arrest.
If the person arrested so requires, the warrant shall be shown to the arrested person as soon as
possible;
(6) Secure the person to be arrested and use handcuffs for the protection of the arresting officer,
other individuals or the arrested person himself;
(7) Conduct thorough search for weapons and other illegal materials on the person arrested and
surroundings within his immediate control;
(8) Inform the person to be arrested of his rights under the law (i.e. Miranda Warning and Anti-
torture Warning);
(9) No unnecessary force shall be used in making an arrest;
(10) Confiscated evidence shall be properly documented with the chain of custody of evidence duly
and clearly established;
(11) Bring the arrested person to the Police Station for documentation;
(12) Make a Return of Warrant to the court of origin
(Annex “B” - Return of Warrant Form); and
(13) Deliver the arrested person to jail/prison upon the issuance of a commitment order of the court.
b. Effecting Warrantless Arrest
(1) Freeze or restrain the suspect/s;
(2) Make proper introduction as to identity and authority to arrest;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(3) Inform the arrested person of the circumstances of his arrest and recite the Miranda Warning
and Anti- torture Warning to him;
(4) Secure the person to be arrested and use handcuffs for the protection of the arresting officer,
other individuals or the arrested person himself;
(5) Conduct thorough search for weapons and other illegal materials on the person arrested and
surroundings within his immediate control;
(6) Confiscated evidence shall be properly documented with the chain of custody of evidence duly
and clearly established;
(7) No unnecessary force shall be used in making an arrest; and
(8) Bring the arrested person to the Police Station for further investigation and disposition.
13.6 Duties of the Arresting Officer
a. It shall be the duty of the police officer implementing the Warrant of Arrest to deliver the
arrested person without delay to the nearest Police Station or jail to record the fact of the arrest;
b. At the time of the arrest, it shall be the duty of the arresting officer to inform the person
arrested of the cause of the arrest and the fact that a warrant had been issued for his arrest. The
arresting officer need not have the warrant in his possession at the time of the arrest but after the
arrest, if the person arrested so requires, the warrant shall be shown to him as soon as possible;
c. When women or children are among the arrested suspect/s, the arresting officer shall task the
Women’s and Children’s Protection Desks (WCPD) officer or a policewoman who is familiar with women
and children protection desk duties to conduct the pat-down search;
d. In case of arrest without a warrant, it shall be the duty of the arresting officer to inform the
person to be arrested of his authority and the cause of the arrest except when he flees or forcibly resists
before the arresting officer has the opportunity to inform him or when the giving of such information
will imperil the arrest;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
e. The person arrested, with or without warrant, shall be informed of his constitutional right to
remain silent and that any statement he makes could be used against him. Also, that he has the right to
communicate with his lawyer or his immediate family and the right to physical examination;
f. A person arrested without a warrant shall be immediately brought to the proper Police Station
for investigation without unnecessary delay. He shall be subjected to inquest proceedings within the
time prescribed in Article 125 of the Revised Penal Code (RPC);
g. No torture, force, violence, threat, intimidation, or any other means which vitiate the free will
shall be used against an arrested person. The bringing of arrested persons to secret detention places,
solitary confinement and the like is prohibited;
h. If the person arrested without a warrant waives his right under the provisions of Art 125 of the
Revised Penal Code, the arresting officer shall ensure that the former signs a waiver of detention in the
presence of his counsel of choice; and
i. If the person arrested waives his right against self- incrimination and chooses to give his
statement, the arresting officer shall ensure that the waiver is made in writing and signed by the person
arrested in the presence of a counsel of his own choice or a competent and independent counsel
provided by the government.
13.7 Physical Examination of Arrested Person/Suspect
Before interrogation, the person arrested shall have the right to be informed of his right to demand
physical examination by an independent and competent doctor of his own choice. If he cannot afford
the services of a doctor of his own choice, he shall be provided by the State with a competent and
independent doctor to conduct physical examination. If the person arrested is female, she shall be
attended to preferably by a female doctor.
RULE 14. SEARCH AND SEIZURE
14.1 Requisites for the Issuance of Search Warrant
A search warrant shall be issued only upon probable cause in connection with one specific offense to be
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
determined personally by the judge after examination under oath or affirmation of the complainant and
the witnesses presented. The search warrant shall particularly describe the place to be searched and the
things to be seized which may be anywhere in the Philippines.
a. The following properties may be the objects of a search warrant:
(1) Properties which are the subject of the offense;
(2) Stolen, embezzled proceeds, or fruits of the offense; and
(3) Objects including weapons, equipment, and other items used or intended to be used as the
means of committing an offense.
b. Objects that are illegal per se, even if not particularly described in the search warrant, may be
seized under the plain view doctrine.
14.2 Validity of Search Warrant
a. The warrant shall be valid for ten (10) days from date of issuance and may be served at any day
within the said period. Thereafter, it shall be void.
b. If, in the implementation of the search warrant, its object or purpose cannot be accomplished in
one day, the search can be continued the following day, or days, until completed, provided it is still
within the ten (10)- day validity period of the search warrant.
c. If the object or purpose of the search warrant cannot be accomplished within the ten (10)-day
validity period, the responsible police officer conducting the search must file, before the issuing court,
an application for the extension of the validity period of said search warrant.
14.3 Time of Search
The warrant should be served during daytime, unless there is a provision in the warrant allowing service
at any time of the day or night.
14.4 Applications for Search Warrant
All applications for Search Warrant shall be approved for filing by the Chief of Office. The application
shall indicate the following data:
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
a. Office applying for the Search Warrant;
b. Name of officer-applicant;
c. Name of the subject, if known;
d. Address/place(s) to be searched;
e. Specific statement of things/articles to be seized; and
f. Sketch of the place to be searched.

All approved applications shall be recorded in a log book, duly maintained for the purpose, indicating
the name of the applicant, name of the respondent, nature of the offense, and date of the application.
(Annexes “C”, “C-1” and “C-2”)
14.5 Authority of Police Officers when Conducting Search
In the conduct of search, if after giving notice of his purpose and authority, the police officer is refused
admittance to the place of search, he may break open any outer or inner door or window or any part of
a house or anything therein to implement the warrant or liberate himself or any person lawfully aiding
him when unlawfully detained therein.
14.6 Prohibited Acts in the Conduct of Search by Virtue of a Search Warrant
a. Houses, rooms, or other premises shall not be searched except in the presence of the lawful
occupant thereof or any member of his family or, in the absence of the latter, in the presence of two (2)
witnesses of sufficient age and discretion residing in the same locality.
b. Lawful personal properties, papers, and other valuables not specifically indicated or particularly
described in the search warrant shall not be taken.
14.7 Inventory and Delivery of Property Seized
a. The police officer who confiscates property under the warrant shall issue a detailed receipt of
property seized to the lawful occupant of the premises, or in the absence of such occupant, shall do so
in the presence of at least two (2) witnesses of sufficient age and discretion residing in the same locality;
b. The receipt shall likewise include items seized under the Plain View Doctrine;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
c. The police officer must then leave a receipt in the place in which he found the seized property
and a duplicate copy thereof with any barangay official having jurisdiction over the place searched
(Annexes “D” and “D-1”); and
d. The police officer must forthwith deliver the property seized to the judge who issued the
warrant, together with an inventory thereof, duly verified under oath. (Annexes “E” and “E-1”)
14.8 Valid Search and Seizures Without Search Warrant
a. Search made incidental to a valid arrest

A person lawfully arrested may be searched for dangerous weapons or anything which may be used or
which may constitute proof in the commission of an offense, without a search warrant. The warrantless
search and seizure as an incident to a lawful arrest may extend beyond the person of the arrested to
include the premises or surroundings under his immediate control.
b. Search of moving vehicles
If the police officers who will conduct the search have reasonable or probable cause to believe, before
the search, that either the motorist is a law offender or they will find the instrumentality or evidence
pertaining to a crime in the vehicle to be searched, the vehicle may be stopped and subjected to an
extensive search.
c. Seizure of evidence in plain view
Any object in the plain view is subject to seizure and may be introduced as evidence. Requirements
under the Plain View Doctrine are:
(1) The police officer must have prior justification for an intrusion or, otherwise, must be in a
position from which he can view a particular area;
(2) The discovery of the evidence in plain view is unintentional; or
(3) It is immediately apparent to the police officer that the item he observes may be evidence of a
crime, contraband, or is a valid subject of seizure.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
d. When there is waiver of the right or there is consented search
To constitute a waiver of this constitutional right, it must appear, first, that the right exists; second, that
the person involved had knowledge, either actual or constructive, of the existence of such right; that
said person had an actual intention to relinquish the right.
e. Searches Under Stop and Frisk Rule
The police officer has the right to stop a citizen on the street, interrogate him, and pat him for weapons
whenever he observes unusual conduct which convinces him that a criminal activity exists.
f. Emergency and Exigent Circumstances
A search warrant could be validly dispensed with in cases of exigent and emergency situation, and the
police officers have reasonable grounds to believe that a crime is being committed, and they have no
opportunity to apply for a search warrant from the courts because the latter were closed.
g. Tipped Information
If the police officers have reasonable grounds to believe that the subjects are engaged in illegal
activities, the tipped information is sufficient to provide probable cause to effect a warrantless search
and seizure.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
CHAPTER 3 INVESTIGATION PROCEDURES
RULE 15. INVESTIGATION BY THE TERRITORIAL POLICE UNIT AFTER AN ARMED CONFRONTATION
15.1 Responsibility of the Territorial Police Unit

The Police Unit that has territorial jurisdiction over the area where the armed confrontation occurred
shall secure the scene and immediately undertake the necessary investigation.
15.2 Scene of the Crime Operation (SOCO) Team to Process the Crime Scene
The concerned Police Unit shall immediately request the Scene of the Crime Operation (SOCO) Team to
conduct crime scene processing. (PNP Standard Operating Procedure No. ODIDM-2011-008 “Conduct of
Crime Scene Investigation”)
15.3 Mandatory Examination of Firearm Seized/Confiscated during Police Operation
a. All firearms, cartridges and slugs seized, captured or recovered during checkpoints or pursuit
operations or in any other police operations including those seized during the service of warrants and,
more importantly, those recovered from the crime scene shall immediately be submitted to the local
Crime Laboratory (CLO) which shall in turn process it for capturing and cross-matching through the
Integrated Ballistics Identification System (IBIS);
b. The field investigator or investigator-on-case (IOC) shall submit the photo of the firearm and the
receipt issued by the local Crime Laboratory Office for the said firearm/cartridges/slugs to the
prosecutor or the court;
c. Should the prosecutor eventually require the physical submission of the firearm, the
investigator-on-case shall manifest with the prosecutor or court that a subpoena be issued for the Crime
Laboratory which issued the receipt to present the said firearm; and
42 INVESTIGATION PROCEDURES Chapter 3
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
d. It is also imperative that the chain of custody be strictly observed and documented and
therefore, as much as practicable, it shall be the investigator-on-case (IOC) who shall personally submit
the recovered firearms/ shells/slugs to the local Crime Laboratory.
15.4 Inquest Proceeding Necessary When the Suspect Dies
In cases of armed confrontation wherein the suspect dies, the Team Leader of the operating unit shall
submit the incident for inquest before the duty Inquest Prosecutor prior to the removal of the body
from the scene, except in areas where there are no Inquest Prosecutors. In which case, the territorial
police unit can proceed with the investigation.
RULE 16. JUDICIAL AFFIDAVIT RULE
This Rule shall apply to all actions, proceedings, and incidents requiring the reception of evidence before
the court in place of the direct testimonies of witnesses in order to reduce the time needed for
completing their testimonies.
16.1 Application of Rule to Criminal Actions
This rule shall apply to all criminal actions where the maximum imposable penalty does not exceed six
years.
16.2 Contents of Judicial Affidavit
A judicial affidavit shall be prepared in the language known to the witness and, if not in English or
Filipino, accompanied by a translation in English or Filipino, and shall contain the necessary
data/information.
a. The name, age, residence or business address, and occupation of the witness;
b. The name and address of the lawyer who conducts or supervises the examination of the witness
and the place where the examination is being held;
c. A statement that the witness is answering the questions asked of him, fully conscious that he
does so under oath, and that he may face criminal liability for false testimony or perjury;
d. Questions asked of the witness and his corresponding answers, consecutively numbered, that:
(1) Show the circumstances under which the witness acquired the facts upon which he testifies;
Chapter 3 INVESTIGATION PROCEDURES 43
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(2) Elicit from him those facts which are relevant to the issues that the case presents; and
(3) Identify the attached documentary and object evidence and establish their authenticity in
accordance with the Rules of Court;
e. The signature of the witness over his printed name; and
f. A jurat or a proof that an oath was taken before an administering officer or a notary public.
16.3 Sworn Attestation of the Lawyer
The judicial affidavit shall contain a sworn attestation at the end, executed by the lawyer who conducted
or supervised the examination of the witness, to the effect that:
a. He faithfully recorded or caused to be recorded the questions he asked and the corresponding
answers that the witness gave; and
b. Neither he nor any other person then present or assisting him coached the witness regarding
the latter’s answers.
RULE 17. MAINTENANCE OF POLICE BLOTTER
17.1 Police Blotter
Each PNP operating unit shall maintain an official police blotter where all types of operational and
undercover dispatches shall be recorded containing the five “Ws” (who, what, where, when and why)
and one “H” (how) of an information.
A Police blotter is a logbook that contains the daily registry of all crime incident reports, official
summaries of arrest, and other significant events reported in a police station.
17.2 Police Blotter for Cases involving Women and Children
A separate Police Blotter, however, shall be maintained for crime incident reports involving violence
against women and children and those cases involving a child in conflict with the law to protect their
privacy pursuant to Republic Act (RA) 9262 (Anti-Violence Against Women and Children Act of 2004) and
RA 9344 (Juvenile Justice and Welfare Act of 2006), respectively.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
17.3 Crime Incident Reporting System (CIRS)
Each PNP operating unit shall also maintain and utilize the PNP Crime Incident Reporting System (CIRS),
an electronic reporting system that facilitates crime documentation, modernizes data storage and
provides quick and reliable transmission of crime information from lower units and NOSUs of the PNP to
the National Headquarters at Camp Crame, Quezon City.
17.4 Blotter Procedure

Before entry into the blotter book, the Duty Officer (DO) should first evaluate if the report is a crime
incident, arrest or event/activity, which is for records purposes only. If the report is a crime incident, the
DO shall first accomplish the Incident Record Form (IRF) from which the entry in the blotter book and IRS
shall be extracted. All other reports shall be recorded directly to the blotter book. (PNP SOP No. 2012-
001 “Incident Recording System”)
(Annex “F”- Incident Record Form) (Annex “G” -Blotter Procedure Flowchart)
RULE 18. UNIT CRIME PERIODIC REPORT (UCPER)
18.1 Purpose
To promote consistency in the recording of crime incidence, the PNP adopts a uniform procedure in
reporting and collecting crime data including cases reported to other law enforcement agencies that are
part of the Criminal Justice System.
18.2 Execution and Procedures
The Chief of Police is primarily responsible for the maintenance of accurate crime data. Accuracy and
integrity of crime recording processes must be ensured by the Chief of Investigation Section and Crime
Registrar.
The Chief of Police shall likewise ensure that crime data are gathered from all sources, such as:
Barangay, NBI, PDEA, BFAR, DENR, DSWD, BOC, BI and other agencies with law enforcement functions in
the locality.
Unit Commanders shall appoint a Crime Registrar who shall be responsible in consolidating and
maintaining crime data files of each unit to ensure consistency and continuity.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(Letter of Instructions 02/09 “Unit Crime Periodic Report”)
18.3 Recording
a. Incident Reports
All crime incidents whether reported by the victims, witnesses or third parties must be recorded in the
police blotter, even under the following circumstances.
(1) When the offender is ill and is unlikely to recover or is too senile or too mentally disturbed for
proceedings to take place;
(2) When the complainant or an essential witness is dead and the proceedings cannot be pursued;
(3) When the victim or an essential witness refuses, or is permanently unable to stand as a witness;
and
(4) The victim or complainant or witness is a minor.
b. Reporting Jurisdiction
The police unit with the territorial jurisdiction where the crime was committed shall have the primary
responsibility to record and report the same. If a continuing crime is committed in various areas of
responsibilities, it should be recorded and reported as a single crime by the unit taking cognizance of the
crime.
RULE 19. BOOKING OF ARRESTED SUSPECTS
Booking of arrested suspects shall be undertaken to record and document the information surrounding
the arrest of the suspect. (PNP Standard Operating Procedures No. 2011-013 “Booking of Arrested
Suspects”)
19.1 Policies and Guidelines
The following policies and guidelines shall be adhered to by all PNP personnel involved in the booking of
arrested suspects:
a. General Policy
After arrest, a suspect is taken into police custody and “booked” or “processed”. During booking, the
following procedures shall be performed by designated police officers.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(1) Record the arrest made in the Police Blotter;

(2) Conduct pat down or strip search of the suspect;
(3) Submit the suspect for medical examination;
(4) Take the criminal suspect’s personal information (i.e. name, date of birth, physical
characteristics, etc.);
(5) Record information about the suspect’s alleged crime;
(6) Perform a record search of the suspect’s criminal background;
(7) Fingerprint and photograph the suspect;
(8) Take custody of any personal property carried by the suspect (i.e. keys, purse), to be returned
upon the suspect’s release; and
(9) Place the suspect in a police station lock-up/holding cell or local jail.
b. Specific Functions, Responsibilities and Procedures
The following are the functions, procedures and responsibilities of the different personnel during the
booking of arrested suspects:
(1) Arresting Officer (AO):
(a) Upon arrest, the Arresting Officer (AO) shall immediately bring the suspect/s to the police
station and present the suspect/s to the Desk Officer (DO);
(b) The AO shall ask the Desk Officer to record in the police blotter the circumstances of the arrest
as well as the identity of the suspects and names of Arresting Officers (AO). This procedure of assigning a
blotter number to the arrest of the suspects signifies that the police station has officially taken
cognizance of the arrest. The AO shall sign in the blotter entry;
(c) The AO and the DO shall thereafter conduct a more thorough pat-down search of the suspects.
Any deadly weapon or contraband found and confiscated shall also be recorded in the blotter. When
women or children are among those arrested, the DO shall task the
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
duty WCPD officer to conduct the pat-down. A strip search may be conducted as the situation demands
but only with the authority of the Chief of Police (COP) or the Officer on Duty. A strip search, if
conducted, will be so indicated in the blotter;
(d) After the pat-down, the AO shall request the DO to prepare PNP Booking Form-1 (Annex “H”-
Request for Medical Examination of the Suspect)
(e) The AO shall receive the accomplished medical examination request form and then shall be
responsible for bringing/escorting the suspect/s to the government hospital referred to in the request
for for the examination of the suspect/s;
(f) The AO shall receive the Medical Examination results from the government physician and then
he shall bring back the suspect/s to the police station and turn-over the suspect/s and the results of the
medical examination to the Duty Investigator (DI); and
(g) The AO will obtain PNP Booking Form 2 - “Arrest and Booking Sheet” and refer it to the DI so
that both of them will accomplish the form, diligently providing all the information required in the form.
The copy of the Arrest and Booking Form shall form part of the Case folder and kept at the Investigation
Section at the police station (Annex “I”- Arrest and Booking Sheet)
(2) Desk Officer (DO):
(a) Upon presentation by the AO of the arrested suspect/s to the DO, the Desk Officer (DO) shall log
and record the details of the arrest made and assign a blotter entry number to the arrest. The entry shall
include the name of the arresting officer and information as to the identity of the suspects and shall
contain the five (5) “W”s and one (1) “H” (Who, What, Where, When, Why and How) of an information
as well as the name of the government hospital where the suspect/s will be referred for medical
examination;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(b) After recording in the police blotter, the DO together with the AO shall conduct a redundancy
pat-down search of the suspect/s. This procedure is necessary to ensure that the suspect/s do not carry
any deadly weapons or contraband when they are referred to a government hospital for medical
examination. Any weapons or contraband or any other items confiscated or taken in custody during the
pat- down search shall likewise be recorded in the blotter. (If the suspect is a woman or child, the Desk
Officer shall call for the duty WCPD officer who shall conduct the search); and
(c) The Desk Officer shall then prepare or accomplish PNP Booking Form (PNPBF)-1 “Request for
Medical Examination of the Arrested Suspect”. The Desk Officer shall have the police station Officer on
Duty (OD) to sign the request form, but in the absence of the OD, the Desk Officer may sign the request
form himself.
(3) Duty Investigator (DI):
(a) After medical examination, the Arresting Officer shall refer the suspect/s and the case to the
Duty Investigator (DI). The DI and the AO shall accomplish the PNP Booking Form-2 “Arrest and Booking
Form” and ensure that a copy of the results of the medical examination are attached to the booking
form;
(b) The DI shall obtain personal information from each suspect and accomplish PNPBF-2 with the
help of the AO. The PNPBD-2 booking sheet should contain among others the personal circumstances of
the suspect/s. Likewise, the initial determination of the nature of the offense is included in the booking
sheet. The last part of the booking sheet refers to the medical history or information known of the
suspect/s, this part should not be confused with the medical certification issued by a doctor upon his
arrest which shall be attached to the PNP Booking Form-2A (Annex “J”- Medical Examination Result
Sheet)
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(c) The DI shall conduct record check to determine if the arrested suspect/s have previous or
existing cases and/or standing warrant of arrest;
(d) The Duty Investigator shall not process suspects brought by the Arresting Officers who have not
undergone a medical examination in a government hospital;
(e) The DI shall ensure that Mug Shots or the photographic portrait of the suspects are taken in four
(4) different methods in accordance with the procedures. The 4R mug shots shall be attached to or
printed in the PNP Booking Form- 2B (Annex “K”- Mug Shots of Suspects)
(f) The Duty Investigator shall prepare a Turn-over Receipt Form (from Investigator to the Jailer)
known as PNP Booking Form-3 (Annex “L”- Turn Over of Arrested Suspects Form and Annex “L-1”-
Jailer’s Receipt of Suspects Form”). The Jailer of the Station will now take responsibility of the suspect. If
it is necessary that the arrested persons be placed in the lock- up cell, a complete body frisking of the
suspect by pat-down type search for any concealed weapon must be done. Strip search shall be
conducted if necessary. On body search of arrested male suspect, it is typically not required to same sex
pat down searches, but it is wise. When it comes to women and children, the WCPD officer who is
familiar with women and children protection duties will conduct the search. Search is done to ensure
that no prohibited object will be brought inside the lock-up cell, particularly sharp objects that can be
used to hurt other prisoners and ropes that might be used for entangling;
(g) All personal valuables of the suspect that are not allowed to be brought inside the lock-up cell
will be collected by the Investigator and shall be turned-over to the police station Property Custodian.
The Investigator shall prepare PNP Booking Form 4. (Annex “M”- Suspect’s Personal Property Receipt
Form)
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(h) The DI shall also be responsible for ensuring that the suspects’ fingerprints or tenprints are
taken by the Fingerprint Technician, using both the tenprint card and the PNPBF-2. Only a trained
Fingerprint Technician shall be allowed by the DI to take the tenprints of the suspects using the standard
PNP Crime Laboratory Form No 452-038 to ensure that this will be readable by the Automated
Fingerprint identification System (AFIS). The tenprint card is considered as an integral part of the
booking form and is known as PNP Booking Form-2C (Annex “N”- Tenprint Card);
(i) The DI must always inform the Desk Officer of the status of the case and the suspect so that
updates will be entered in the police blotter;
(j) The Investigator shall be responsible for preparing the necessary documents such as: Affidavit-
complaint; affidavit of witness; booking and arrest report; photo copy of recovered evidence if any; and
a letter of case referral to the Prosecutor’s Office that should be signed by the Station Commander or
police station Officer on Duty with the former’s unavailability. (Annex “O”-Booking of Arrested Suspects
Flowchart)
RULE 20. CUSTODIAL INVESTIGATION
20.1 Duties of the Police During Custodial Investigation
a. The arresting officer, or the investigator, as the case may be, shall ensure that a person arrested,
detained or under custodial investigation shall, at all times, be assisted by counsel, preferably of his own
choice;
b. The arresting officer, or the investigator, as the case may be, must inform the person arrested,
detained or under custodial investigation of the following rights under the Miranda Doctrine in a
language or dialect known to and understood by him:
(1) That he has the right to remain silent;

(2) That if he waives his right to remain silent, anything he says can be used in evidence against him
in court;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(3) That he has the right to counsel of his own choice;
(4) That, if he cannot afford one, he shall be provided with an independent and competent counsel;
and
(5) That he has the right to be informed of such rights.
c. If the person arrested, detained, or under custodial investigation has opted to give a sworn
statement, the arresting officer, or the investigator, as the case may be, must reduce it in writing (Annex
“P”- Sworn Statement);
d. The arresting officer must ensure that, before the sworn statement is signed, or thumb-marked
if there is inability to read and to write, the document shall be read and adequately explained to the
person arrested, detained or under custodial investigation by his counsel of choice, or by the assisting
counsel provided to him, in the language or dialect known to him;
e. The arresting officer, or the investigator, as the case may be, must ensure that any extrajudicial
confession made by a person arrested, detained or under custodial investigation shall be:
(1) In writing;
(2) Signed by such person in the presence of his counsel; or
(3) In the latter’s absence, upon a valid waiver, and in the presence of any of the parents, elder
brothers and sisters, his spouse, the municipal mayor, the municipal judge, district school supervisor,
priest, imam or religious minister chosen by him.
Failure of the arresting officer, or the investigator, to observe the above mentioned procedures shall
render the extrajudicial confession inadmissible as evidence in any proceeding;
f. The arresting officer, or the investigator, as the case may be, must, under established
regulations, allow the person arrested, detained, or under custodial investigation visits by or
conferences with any member of his immediate family, any medical doctor, priest, imam or religious
minister chosen by him or by any member of his immediate family or by his counsel, or
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
by any local Non-Governmental Organization (NGO) duly accredited by the Commission on Human
Rights (CHR) or by any international NGO duly accredited by the Office of the President. His “immediate
family” shall include his spouse, parent or child, brother or sister, grandparent or grandchild, uncle or
aunt, nephew or niece, guardian or ward, and fiancé or fiancée; and
g. After interrogation, the person under custodial investigation shall have the right to be informed
of his right to demand physical examination by an independent and competent doctor of his own choice.
If he cannot afford the services of a doctor of his own choice, he shall be provided by the State with a
competent and independent doctor to conduct physical examination. If the person arrested is female,
she shall be attended to preferably by a female doctor.
The physical examination of the person under custodial investigation shall be contained in a medical
report, which shall be attached to the custodial investigation report.
20.2 Detention
The following are the policies and procedures in the admission, visitation, transfer and release of
detainees:
a. Admission
The following can be detained/admitted in the PNP Detention/Custodial Center:
(1) Any person arrested due to the commission of a crime/s;
(2) Arrested suspects covered by a Commitment Order; and
(3) Arrested suspects who are under custodial investigation. However, under no circumstances
should the arrested suspects under custodial investigation be held in the detention center beyond the
prescribed reglementary period, unless, while in custody, appropriate charges have been filed and a
Commitment Order has been issued by the court concerned or he signed the required waiver of the
rights under the provisions of Article 125 of the RPC.

PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
b. Requirements for Admission
Prior to the admission of arrested suspect, the following mandatory requirements shall be submitted to
the Chief, Detention/Custodial Center:
(1) Request for Custody of the arresting unit or the Commitment Order from the Court;
(2) Proof of medical examination or medical certificate of the detainee to be provided by the
arresting unit requesting for custody; and
(3) Case folder of the detainee containing the accomplished booking sheet for the arrested suspect
and the Information filed with the Prosecutor’s Office.
c. Segregation of Detainees
As much as practicable, detainees must be segregated according to gender and to the classification of
crimes committed.
d. Visitation
Any person arrested and detained at the PNP Detention/Custodial Center shall be allowed visits by or
conferences with any member of his immediate family, or any medical doctor or priest or religious
minister chosen by him or by any member of his immediate family or by his counsel, or by any local NGO
duly accredited by the CHR or by any international NGO duly accredited by the Office of the President,
subject to the following conditions:
(1) The Chief, Detention/Custodial Center or his duly authorized representative is authorized to
apportion the number of visitors per detainee at any given time as the space of the visitor’s area may
allow.
(2) With respect to detainee’s family members, public and/or pertinent document must be
presented to prove their relationship with the detainee.
(3) Visitors wearing the color of the detainee’s uniform shall be advised to wear other colors.
(4) The Custodial Center, an informal and temporary penal facility for arrested suspects, shall not
allow conjugal visits for detention prisoners.

PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(5) The counsel of the accused has the right to visit the latter subject to the existing security rules
and regulation of the Center.
(6) No camera, video equipment, cellular phone and similar devices are allowed inside the visiting
area.
(7) All visitors shall be frisked for deadly weapons, firearms and other prohibited items.
e. Transfer of Custody
(1) Upon receipt of the Commitment Order from the court, the Chief, Detention/Custodial Center
shall personally coordinate with the issuing court to ascertain the validity of the order;
(2) Upon confirmation, the Chief, Detention/Custodial Center must coordinate with the receiving
detention facility for the immediate transfer of custody; and
(3) Prior to the transfer of custody, the arrested person shall be subjected to medical examination
by a PNP medico-legal officer or any government physician in the absence of PNP medico-legal officer.
Medical examination is mandatory before any transfer of custody of arrested person.
f. Release
(1) The Chief of Office shall be the sole approving authority in releasing detention prisoner.
(2) Upon receipt of the Release Order from the court, the Chief, Detention/Custodial Center shall
personally coordinate with the issuing court to ascertain the validity of the order.
(3) Upon confirmation, the Chief, Detention/Custodial Center must coordinate with the arresting
unit if there are other legal impediments to the release.
(4) The Chief, Detention/Custodial Center shall likewise check the Directorate for Investigation and
Detective Management (DIDM)’s Arrest and Warrant Registry to determine if the detainee to be
released has other pending warrants of arrest.
(5) Granting that all documents are legally in order, the Chief, Detention/Custodial Center shall
prepare the
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
memorandum addressed to the Chief of Office for the approval of the release.
(6) If there are valid grounds to sustain further detention, the Chief of Office in coordination with
the arresting unit, will prepare the appropriate manifestation to the court containing therein the
ground/s for objection.
(7) Prior to the official release of the detainee, the Chief, Detention/Custodial Center must bring the
detainee to the Office of the PNP Health Service or Rural Health Unit for medical examination, which
shall form part of the records/case folder of the subject detainee.
(8) The Property or Evidence Custodian Officer shall be responsible for the custody of all the
properties seized from the detainee prior to his detention. The former shall release the same to the
detainee immediately upon his discharge from detention.
20.3 Transporting Detention Prisoner
a. If transported by a patrol jeep, the subject must be seated on the right rear seat and a PNP
escort shall sit at the rear on the left side facing the subject. Hands of the subject should be secured by
handcuffs under his knees.
b. If transported by a patrol car, subject must be seated on the right rear seat and the PNP escort
personnel shall sit on the left rear seat. Hands of the subject should be secured by handcuffs under his
knees.
c. In no case shall a Detention Prisoner be transported using public utility land vehicles that are not
exclusively utilized for the purpose.
d. In no case shall a high-risk Detention Prisoner be transported without proper escort and
handcuffs.
e. Female detainees shall be transported in handcuffs, preferably aided by a police woman.
f. In no case shall a Detention Prisoner be allowed out of the Detention Cell without proper escort.
g. Transport and escort of Detention Prisoner shall be limited only from the detention cell to the
proper office for
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
inquest, or court for hearing, or to the nearest hospital/ clinic in case of the mandatory medical
examination prior to detention or during actual medical emergency, or in court-permitted transport.
h. In no case shall a Detention Prisoner be allowed travel and escort outside the detention cell to
places devoted for recreation, worship, entertainment, meals and dining and others of similar and
analogous description, unless upon lawful orders of the court.
i. Detention Prisoners shall as much as possible be transported wearing detention prisoner

uniform or proper attire that may identify them as a detention prisoner.
RULE 21. INQUEST PROCEDURES
21.1 Commencement of Inquest
The inquest proceedings shall commence upon the presentation of arrested person and witness/es by
the police officer before the inquest prosecutor. The concerned police officer shall also submit the
following documents:
a. Affidavit of Arrest;
b. Statement(s) of the complainant(s);
c. Affidavit(s) of the witness(es) if any; and
d. Other supporting evidence gathered by law enforcement authorities in the course of their
investigation of the criminal incident involving the arrested person.
21.2 Documents to Be Submitted
The investigator shall ensure that, as far as practicable, the following documents shall be presented
during the inquest proceedings:
a. Murder, Homicide and Parricide
(1) Certified true/machine copy of the certificate of death of the victim; and
(2) Necropsy Report and the certificate of Post-Mortem Examination, if readily available.
b. Frustrated or Attempted Homicide, Murder, Parricide, and Physical Injuries Cases
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(1) Medical Certificate of the complaining witness showing the nature or extent of the injury;
(2) Certification or statement as to the duration of the treatment or medical attendance; and
(3) Certificate or statement as to duration of incapacity for work.
c. Violations of the Dangerous Drugs Law
(1) Chemistry Report or Certificate of Laboratory Examination duly signed by the forensic chemist or
other duly authorized officer;
(2) Machine copy or photograph of the buy-bust money;
(3) Inventory/list of property seized; and
(4) Affidavit of Poseur-Buyer/Arresting Officer.
d. Theft and Robbery Cases, Violation of the Anti- Piracy Law, Anti-Highway Robbery Law, and
Violation of the Anti-Fencing Law
(1) List/Inventory of the articles and items subject of the offense; and
(2) Statement of their respective value.
e. Rape, Seduction, and Forcible Abduction with Rape Cases
(1) Medico-Legal Report (Living Case Report), if the victim submitted herself for medical or physical
examination;
(2) Statement of the victim/complainant;
f. Violation of the Anti-Carnapping Law
(1) Machine copy of the certificate of motor vehicle registration;
(2) Machine copy of the current official receipt of payment of the registration fees of the subject
motor vehicle; and
(3) Other evidence of ownership.
g. Violation of the Anti-Cattle Rustling Law
(1) Machine copy of the cattle certificate of registration; and
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(2) Picture of the cattle, if readily available.
h. Violation of Illegal Gambling Law
(1) Gambling paraphernalia; and
(2) Cash money, if any.
i. Illegal Possession of Firearms and Explosives
(1) Chemistry Report duly signed by the forensic chemist; and Photograph of the explosives, if
readily available; and
(2) Certification from the Firearms and Explosives Office, Civil Security Group, PNP.
j. Violation of the Fisheries Law
(1) Photograph of the confiscated fish, if readily available;
(2) Certification of the Bureau of Fisheries and Aquatic Resources; and
(3) Paraphernalia and equipment used in illegal fishing.
k. Violation of the Forestry Law
(1) Scale sheets containing the volume and species of the forest products confiscated, number of
pieces and other important details such as estimated value of the products confiscated;
(2) Certification of the Department of Environment and Natural Resources/Bureau of Forest

Management; and
(3) Seizure Receipt.
21.3 Waiver of Rights
The inquest shall proceed unless the arrested person opts for a preliminary investigation by executing
the required waiver of rights under Article 125 of the RPC. (Annex “Q”- Request for Preliminary
Investigation and Waiver of Article 125 of the Revised Penal Code)
21.4. Monitoring of Cases by the Investigators
An investigator’s job does not end upon the filing of the case with the Prosecutor’s Office. The
investigator on case shall continuously monitor the case up to its final resolution.

PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
RULE 22. CONDUCT OF CRIME SCENE INVESTIGATION
The Crime Scene Investigation (CSI) starts from the arrival of the PNP First Responders (FRs) to the
arrival of the Duty Investigator/ IOC and the SOCO Team until the lifting of the security cordon and
release of the crime scene. (Standard Operating Procedure No. ODIDM-2011-008 “Conduct of Crime
Scene Investigation)
22.1 Specific Functions, Responsibilities and Procedures of the First Responder, Investigation-On-Case
(IOC) and SOCO
The following are the functions and responsibilities of the investigators during the crime scene
investigation, as well as the procedures to be observed:
a. First Responder (FR)
(1) The first Police Officers to arrive at the crime scene are the FRs who were dispatched by the
local police station/unit concerned after receipt of incident/flash/ alarm report;
(2) Immediately, the FR shall conduct a preliminary evaluation of the crime scene. This evaluation
should include the scope of the incident, emergency services required, scene safety concerns,
administration of life-saving measures, and establishment of security and control of the scene;
(3) The FR is mandated to save and preserve life by giving the necessary first-aid measures to the
injured and their medical evacuation as necessary. The FR shall likewise secure and preserve the crime
scene by cordoning off the area to prevent unauthorized entry of persons;
(4) The FR shall take the dying declaration of severely injured person/s, if any. Requisites of a “Dying
Declaration” are:
(a) That death is imminent and the declarant is conscious of that fact;
(b) That the declaration refers to the cause and surrounding circumstances of such death;
(c) That the declaration relates to facts which the victim is competent to testify to; and
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(d) That the declaration is offered in a case where in the declarant’s death is the subject of the
inquiry. (Annex “R” – Dying Declaration)
(5) The FR shall make the initial assessment on whether a crime has actually been committed and
shall conduct the preliminary interview of witnesses to determine what and how the crime was
committed;
(6) If and when there is a suspect present in the area, the first responder shall arrest, detain and
remove the suspect from the area;
(7) The FR, upon the arrival of the IOC, shall turn- over the crime scene to the duty investigator/IOC
after the former has briefed the investigator of the situation. The FR shall prepare and submit the CSI
Form “1” - First Responders Report to the IOC and be prepared to assist the IOC in the investigation
(Annex “S”- First Responder’s Form); and
(8) The FR shall stay in the crime scene to assist the IOC in the maintenance of security, crowd
control, preservation of evidence and custody of witness/suspect until such time the investigation is
completed and temporarily turned over to the local Chief of Police (COP) for the continuance of crime
scene security.
b. Investigator-on-Case (IOC) /Duty Investigator
(1) Upon arrival at the crime scene, the IOC shall request for a briefing from the FR and make a
quick assessment of the crime;
(2) At this stage, the IOC shall assume full responsibility over the crime scene and shall conduct a
thorough assessment of the scene and inquiry into the incident. If necessary the IOC may conduct crime
scene search outside the area where the incident happened, employing any of the various search
methods;
(3) Based on the assessment, if the IOC determines that a SOCO team is required, he shall report
the matter to his COP and request for a SOCO, otherwise, the IOC shall proceed with the CSI without the
SOCO team and shall utilize CSI Form “4” (Annex “T”- SOCO Report Forms 1-4)
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(4) The IOC may by himself if the situation so demands, conduct CSI if, there is no Provincial Crime
Laboratory Office/Regional Crime Laboratory Office in the province. The IOC must, however, ensure that
the correct procedures in the collection of evidence are observed to ensure the admissibility of the
evidence;
(5) The Police Station Operation Center, upon directive of the COP, shall make the request for the
SOCO team through the Provincial/City Operations Center;
(6) It shall be the responsibility of the Provincial/City Operations Center to facilitate the request for
the SOCO Team;
(7) Upon the arrival of the SOCO Team, the IOC shall accomplish CSI Form “2” and submit the same
to the SOCO Team Leader. The SOCO team shall not enter the crime scene unless the IOC makes the
official written request wherein he assures the SOCO team of his presence and support (Annex “U”-
Request for the Conduct of SOCO); and
(8) The IOC shall brief the SOCO Team upon their arrival at the crime scene and shall jointly conduct
the preliminary crime scene survey.
c. SOCO Team
(1) The SOCO Team shall not join any operations conducted by the local police or accompany the
FRs or the IOC in going to the crime scene. They will only respond upon request through the Operations
Center and after the IOC has already made the proper assessment of the crime scene
(2) Upon receipt of the Request for Conduct of SOCO, the SOCO Team shall then conduct the scene
of the crime operations which include among others the narrative description of the crime scene,
photography, videography, crime scene search, crime scene sketch, crime scene location sketch,
physical evidence recording and collection, and other procedures necessary;
(3) In case the SOCO Team needs to temporarily suspend the processing, the Chief of Police shall be
primarily responsible and accountable for securing
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
the crime scene and ensuring its integrity until the return of SOCO Team and the conclusion of the CSI;
(4) After the termination of the SOCO, the SOCO Team Leader shall brief the IOC on the initial
results and thereafter conduct the final crime scene survey together with the IOC; and
(5) The SOCO Team shall accomplish the CSI Form “4” - SOCO Report Forms and furnish the IOC of
copies of the same before leaving the crime scene
22.2 Release of the Crime Scene
a. The IOC shall decide on the lifting of the security cordon and the release of the crime scene
upon consultation with the SOCO Team Leader and he shall be responsible in ensuring that all pieces of
potential evidence have been collected by the SOCO Team as any re-entry into the crime scene after its
release to the owner will require a Search Warrant issued by the Court;
b. The IOC shall accomplish the CSI Form “6” before the cordon shall be lifted (Annex “V”-
IOC/Investigator’s CSI Form);
c. The IOC shall ensure that the appropriate inventory has been provided by the SOCO Team and
shall only lift the security cordon and release the crime scene only after completion of the
documentation process;
d. The IOC or the COP shall turn-over the crime scene to the owner of the property or where the
crime scene is a public place, to any local person in authority using CSI Form “5” – (Annex “W”- Release
of the Crime Scene Form);
e. The IOC shall accomplish and submit the Investigator’s Report with all the required attachments
to the COP within two (2) working days from the date of incidence; and
f. The CSI Report shall be the first entry in the Case Folder for the investigation of the incident.
22.3 Crime Scene Investigation
(Annex “X”- Crime Scene Investigation Flowchart)
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
22.4 Special SOCO Procedures
In cases where the evidence gathered needs special processing due to significant or sensational cases,
the specialists from the Crime Laboratory shall be requested.
a. In bombing cases, the EOD personnel should first clear the area and declare it “secured” prior to
entry of the SOCO. The former, before entering the crime scene must submit to the latter for swabbing.
All evidence collected must be pre-cleared by the EOD prior to documentation.
b. In suspected or reported chemical, biological, radiological or nuclear (CBRN) situations, the

SOCO shall directly coordinate with the Special Rescue Team of the Bureau of Fire and Protection before
the conduct of the crime scene investigation.
c. In mass victim situation, the Regional/District SOCO who has jurisdiction over the area, in
addition to their function, shall act as the FR to the Interim Disaster Victim Identification Task Group
(IDVI TG) of the PNP Crime Laboratory. The IDVI TG shall immediately assess the forensic specialists
needed to be deployed at the crime scene and relay the requirements to the PNP Crime Laboratory
Headquarters.
d. The SOCO has motu proprio authority to direct all operating units involved in the police
operation to submit their respective personnel for forensic examination; their service firearms for
ballistic tests; and other pieces of evidence involved to expedite the investigation of the case.
22.5 Duties of the Territorial Police Unit
a. Provide assistance in the evacuation of the injured persons to the nearest hospital;
b. Provide area security;
c. Control the crowd at the crime scene;
d. Direct the flow of traffic away from the crime scene so as not to destroy and contaminate vital
evidence; and
e. Provide security back-up to the SOCO.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
22.6 Policy Guidelines on Processing of Persons Present at the Crime Scene
These policy guidelines prescribe the operational procedures in processing and handling persons present
at the crime scene; be they the suspects, victims or witnesses. The aim is to clearly define police courses
of actions in dealing with persons who, for any reason and personal circumstance, are at the crime
scene during the conduct of police operation.
a. Crisis Management
As soon as the perpetrators surrender, or when they are captured or neutralized, the On-Scene
Commander shall ensure that the following are accomplished:
(1) Processing and Debriefing:
(a) Hostages/Victims;
(b) Perpetrators;
(c) Witnesses; and
(d) Key participants in the incident.
(2) Documentation
Sworn Statement of the following:
(a) Witnesses;
(b) Hostages;
(c) Perpetrators; and
(d) Key participants in the incidents.
(3) Venue of Processing, Debriefing and Documentation. Considering the instability of the situation;
the safety of the responders and persons found at the scene of the crime; and the preservation of the
place of incident, the venue of the processing, debriefing and investigation shall be at a neutral and
secured place.
b. Hostage Negotiation
The following procedure shall be followed during a Hostage Situation:
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(1) Crisis Management Task Group shall be activated immediately;
(2) Incident scene shall be secured and isolated;
(4) Unauthorized persons shall not be allowed entry and exit to the incident scene; and
(5) Witnesses’ names, addresses, and other information shall be recorded. Witnesses shall be
directed to a safe location.
RULE 23. PROCEDURES IN THE INVESTIGATION OF HEINOUS AND SENSATIONAL CRIMES
The SITGs (Special Investigation Task Group) shall spearhead and coordinate the investigative and
prosecutorial efforts of the PNP to facilitate the speedy resolution and successful prosecution of
heinous/ sensational cases to include the conviction of the perpetrators. (PNPM-DIDM-DS-9-2 Field
Manual on Investigation of Crimes of Violence and other Crimes)
23.1 Policies
a. Institutionalization of Command Responsibility at all levels of the organization shall be highly

observed. As such, the respective Commanders/Supervisors in whose areas of jurisdiction the heinous/s
ensational crimes transpired are expected to personally and effectively manage their SITGs by closely
monitoring, supervising, directing, coordinating, and controlling the overall activities of their
subordinates. Hence, SITGs shall be created as follows:
Composition and Organization of SITG:
(1) Regional Level (To investigate killings and violence committed against Senators, Congressmen,
Governors, Cabinet Secretaries, Undersecretaries, and SC and CA Justices):
SITG Supervisor - Regional Director SITG Comdr - DRDO
Asst Comdr - DD/PD or CD, CPO Spokesperson - Regional PIO Members - RCIDU
- Regional Intelligence Div
- Regional Legal Office
- Regional Crime Laboratory
- COP, CPS/MPS/Station Comdr
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
- RIDMD
- Investigator–on-Case
(2) PPO/District/CPO Level (Killings and violence committed against Vice Governors, Provincial
Board Members, Mayors, Vice Mayors, Judges, Prosecutors & IBP lawyers, militants, media
practitioners, foreign nationals)
SITG Supervisor - Deputy Regional Director for
Operations (DRDO)
SITG Comdr - DD, PD/PF, PPO/CD, CPO
Asst Comdr - PO/Field Officer, CIDT Spokesperson - PIO (District/PPO/CPO) Members -

Provincial/City Legal Service
- Provincial/City Intelligence Section
- Provincial Crime Lab
- RIO
- PIDMB/CIDMB
- Investigator-on-Case
- Chief of Police
b. Whenever a heinous or sensational crime transpires, SITG shall be immediately organized and
be headed by the concerned District Director/Provincial Director/City Director or the Deputy Regional
Director for Operations depending on the gravity of the incident and/or upon order/discretion of the
CPNP.
c. It shall be the responsibility of every established SITG to properly manage the assigned case and
ensure its resolution by applying the best investigative techniques/ practices and utilizing all its available
resources.
d. CIDG shall assume the responsibility of pursuing the investigation when the case is not solved
within six (6) months and already classified as a cold case.
23.2 Organizational Procedures
a. Whenever a serious crime is committed, the concerned Chief of Police (COP) or Station
Commander shall immediately assess the situation and communicate to the DD/PD/CD the attendant
circumstances and its updates which will be the basis of the DD/PD/CD for recommending to the RD
whether or not there is a need to activate the SITG.
b. Concerned COP or Station Commander shall base his/ her assessment and recommendation on
the report
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
of the first responders and his assigned investigator- on-case. The creation of a SITG is not necessary for
crimes that can be resolved at the said level. Otherwise, a District/PPO/CPO level SITG shall be organized
that will take cognizance of the investigation of heinous and sensational cases initially investigated by
the City/ Municipal/District Police Stations.
c. The Regional Director (RD) shall issue orders organizing the District/PPO/CPO SITG, indicating
the ranks and names of its personnel complement. It shall be headed by the territorial
Chief/Commander/Head of Unit such as the District Director/Provincial Director/City Director:
(1) The SITG shall be composed of Investigation Team, Case Record Team, Technical/Legal Support
Team, Admin/Logistics Teams and Evidence Team;
(2) The Case Record Team shall be headed by an Officer from Investigation and Detective
Management Division/Branch /Section who shall be at the same time the Case Record Officer and the
Evidence and Record Custodian, responsible for the preservation of evidence;
(3) The Investigator-on-Case (IOC), who is part of the Investigation Team, shall gather and prepare
relevant documents for filing of appropriate case(s) in Court and serve as liaison with other law
enforcement agencies/government agencies, NGOs/NGAs, and other persons or entities which could
possibly help the SITG in the resolution of the case. The IOC shall also be the Evidence Custodian, except
for pieces of evidence which need to be submitted to Crime Laboratory, the courts, and other technical
agencies for technical Examination and analysis; and
(4) In cases where the designated Commander or members of the SITG cannot effectively comply
with the operational requirements, and/or has “perceived biases” of any kind, the RD shall immediately
reorganize the said SITG and designate other officers who are more capable of accomplishing the job.
d. Upon the creation of a SITG, a “Case Investigation Plan” must be made to serve as operating
guidelines in the conduct of investigation of heinous and sensational cases. This will include the journal
of the case which pertains to the daily progress on what has been done and
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
accomplished in the investigation of the case, to include the minutes of case conferences and
coordination with other offices/units. This will also be the basis of funding the SITGs activities. (Annex
“Y”- CIPLAN)
e. The CPNP may direct/task any operational support unit of the PNP to assist in the investigation.
Likewise, he may also order the reorganization of the SITG as he deems it necessary.
f. The SITG shall be deactivated upon the solution of the particular case being investigated.
g. Every SITG shall have six (6) months to resolve a case from the time it takes cognizance of the
said case.
23.3 Operational Procedures
The following are the operational procedures to be undertaken by the SITG pertaining to investigations
of all heinous/sensational crimes:
a. Investigation starts from the arrival of the First Responder on the ground who shall perform
important tasks as enumerated in Rule 22.1a;
b. Aside from the usual investigative procedures, the SITG shall immediately validate and confirm
the affiliations of the victims, issue press releases on a regular basis and establish an On-Scene
Command Post (OSCP) by putting up a tent or similar structures or deploying a Mobile Investigation Van
(if available) at/or near the crime scene. The SITG Commander or his deputy who is also a member of
the SITG must be present/available in the OSCP at all times;
c. The OSCP shall be maintained for as long as necessary and shall only be deactivated or
transferred with the clearance and approval of the Regional Director;
d. The OSCP shall be utilized by the SITG to conduct on-scene or on-the-ground investigation. The
tent or van of the OSCP shall be marked appropriately as “PNP On-Scene Command Post” and shall also
be posted with the mobile Phone or contact numbers of the SITG Commander, Assistant Commander
and the Investigator-On-Case;
e. The Police Station which has jurisdiction over the area shall be utilized as alternate OSCP of the
SITG;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
f. Follow-up actions and efforts must be undertaken to:
(1) Give special focus to ascertaining/establishing motive;
(2) Effectively conduct profiling of victims, suspects and witnesses;
(3) Proficiently link/matrix analysis and exploit evidence information; and
(4) Hold paramount the convenience of witnesses when extracting their Statement or affidavit.
g. The SITG Commander supported by the Investigation Team, Technical Teams, and Case Record
Officer shall prepare the CIPLAN and take notice, prepare, and observe the following:
(1) The Investigation Management System which consists of evidence matrix, resource spreadsheet,
standard tactical plan, and major investigation plan;
(2) The CIPLAN must be prepared and shall be in the following format (Six Point Plan); Situation,
Mission, Execution, Contingency, Administration and Logistics, Command, and Communication
(SMECAC);
(3) Prepare the Crime Scene Matrix Template which is necessary in the conduct of crime analysis. It
can come in tandem with the evidence and resource matrix of the investigation plan;
(4) Surveillance must also be done to assess and make decisions on competencies needed and
allocation of resources;
(5) Strengthen the coordinative mechanism in order to:
(a) Strictly observe the chain of custody of evidence and flow of communications; and
(b) Develop and resolve the issues under investigation through case conference/s with DOJ and
other concerned agencies.
(6) Initiate build-up and follow-up investigation;
(7) Consolidate all the forensic results, testimonial documents and investigation reports as well as
the compliances of the members of SITG;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(8) Initiate the crime matrix analysis in coordination with all members of SITG;
(9) Initiate the preparation of the case folder with the assistance of other members of SITG;
(10) File or refer the case to the Department of Justice (DOJ);
(11) Conduct case reviews (internal/external) to be done by senior investigators or detectives. It can
be seen as a form of risk management that seeks to apply the principle of system audit to reduce
recurrence of typical errors. Case reviews shall be in the form of:
(a) Informal “Golden Hour” Review (at the early stage of the investigation);
(b) Self Inspection (Self-Completion of a short pro forma to provide prompt actions and highlight
emerging problems);
(c) 28-Day Progress Review (assure quality and assist investigators identify investigative
opportunities to advance the inquiry);
(d) Concluding Reviews (provide overview), Case Development Reviews (Cold Case Review);
(e) Detective Case Review (review of their sample solve cases and learn best practices); and
(f) Thematic Review (focus upon specific issue);
(12) All case folders including pertinent documents must be kept by the case record officers, with
copies furnished to the evidence custodian of the local police station;
(13) In case the investigator-on-case is dismissed or retired or separated from the service, all
remaining members of the investigation team shall be responsible for the court presentation of the
case; and
(14) Conduct case tracking until the final disposition of the case.
h. The extension of the SITG can be considered based on the manifestation of the Regional
Director to TDIDM
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(Attn: C, CMD) as a result of his/her evaluation that the case could be resolved in a certain period of
time, but in no case shall this exceed a one (1) month period;
i. If the case has been solved, the SITG shall be deactivated immediately. The SITG Commander
shall inform TDIDM (Attn: C, CMD) regarding its deactivation;
j. Once the warrant of arrest has been issued, the RIDMD concern shall monitor the Unit
Commander concerned to serve the warrant. Further, the RIDMD shall monitor the Unit Commander
handling the case to ensure the attendance of prosecution witnesses when directed by the Court or
Prosecutor;
k. The RIDMD shall make a monthly progress report on all SITG cases filed in Court or Prosecutor’s
office to TDIDM (Attn: C, CMD);
l. If the SITG fails to resolve the case within six (6) months or after the extension, the case will be
considered a “cold case”. Hence, the SITG shall be deactivated under obligation to ensure that all
documents, pieces of evidence and any other related materials are accounted and secured;
m. All the records of cold cases and cleared cases including the pieces of evidence gathered shall be
officially turned over to the Regional Criminal Investigation and Detection Unit (RCIDU), CIDG in the
respective PROs for the continuation of the investigation. Likewise, chain of custody of evidence must be
strictly observed;
n. CIDG must submit to TDIDM (Attn C, RAD), a modified CIPLAN or new CIPLAN in the conduct of
follow-up investigations on all cases that were turned over to them.
o. Progress report on all “cold cases” that were turned over to CIDG shall be submitted to RIDMD
(copy furnished CMD, DIDM). The latter shall monitor and periodically evaluate the case being
investigated by CIDG and make appropriate assessment for its final disposition.
p. Strengthen the coordinative mechanism in order to:
(1) Strictly observe the chain of custody of evidence and flow of communications; and
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(2) Develop and resolve the issues under investigation through case conference with DOJ and other
concerned agencies.
q. Initiate case build-up and follow-up investigation;
r. All the case folders including pertinent documents must be kept by the case record officers, with
copies furnished the evidence custodian of the local police station;
s. In case the investigator in-charge is dismissed or retired or separated from the service, all
remaining members of the investigation team shall be responsible for the court presentation of the
case;
t. Conduct case tracking until the final disposition of the case;
u. All concerned PNP units are enjoined to exert extra efforts in order to identify, locate or cause
the identification and arrest of the culprit(s):
(1) They shall immediately organize a dedicated TRACKER TEAM to pursue a particular target
personality/suspect;
(2) They shall enhance information gathering and intelligence build-up for the identification and
apprehension of the suspects;
(3) They shall work in close coordination with the NBI, DOJ and all other law enforcement agencies,
as necessary. The SITG must therefore closely coordinate with their respective local prosecutors and
ensure that a prosecutor is included as a member of the Technical/Legal Support team; and
(4) They shall prepare posters of wanted personalities especially those covered with rewards.
Rogue galleries at the city and municipal levels shall also be prepared for this purpose;
(5) While the tasked units shall operate on existing logistical and financial allocations, Regional
Directors shall also provide logistical and financial support to SITG.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
CHAPTER 4 SPECIAL PROCEDURES
RULE 24. RULES ON LABOR DISPUTES
24.1 General Policy and Guidelines
a. The involvement of PNP personnel during strikes, lockouts and labor disputes in general shall be
limited to the maintenance of peace and order, enforcement of laws, and implementation of legal
orders of the duly constituted authorities.
b. The PNP shall only render assistance to labor disputes upon written request addressed to the
Regional Director/ District Director concerned. In case of actual violence, the police can respond without
the written request.
c. Insofar as practicable, no PNP personnel shall be allowed to render police assistance in

connection with a strike or lockout if there is question or complaint as regards his relationship by affinity
or consanguinity to any official/leader of the parties in the controversy or if he has financial or pecuniary
interest therein.
d. PNP personnel detailed as peace-keeping force in strike or lockout areas shall be in prescribed
uniform at all times.
e. They shall exercise maximum tolerance and when called for by the situation or when all other
peaceful and non-violent means have been exhausted, police officers may employ such means as may
be necessary and reasonable to prevent or repel an aggression.
f. The matter of determining whether a strike, picket or lockout is legal or not should be left to
Department of Labor and Employment (DOLE) and its appropriate agencies. PNP personnel should not
interfere in a strike, picket or lockout, except as herein provided.
g. No personal escort shall be provided to any of the parties to the controversy unless upon
written request from DOLE. Whenever escorts are to be provided, the other party shall be informed
accordingly. All escorts shall be in prescribed uniform at all times.
74 SPECIAL PROCEDURES Chapter 4
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
h. During the pendency of a strike/lockout, the police personnel concerned are prohibited from
socializing with any of the parties involved in the controversy.
i. Liaison shall be established and maintained with the representatives of DOLE, management and
the union in the strike/lockout area for the purpose of maintaining peace and order, as well as to
maintain a continuing peaceful dialogue between the parties to the strike/ lockout.
j. The peace-keeping detail shall not be stationed in the picket line (or confrontation line) but
should be stationed in such manner that their presence may deter the commission of criminal acts or
any untoward incident from either side. The members of the peacekeeping detail shall stay outside a
50-meter radius from the picket line. In cases wherein the 50-meter radius includes a public
thoroughfare, they may station themselves in such public thoroughfare for the purpose of ensuring the
free flow of traffic.
24.2 Applicable Legal Parameters

The pertinent provisions of the Public Assembly Act of 1985 (Batas Pambansa Bilang 880), the Labor
Code of the Philippines, as amended and other applicable laws, shall be observed during rallies, strikes,
demonstrations or other public assemblies. Law enforcement agents shall, at all times:
a. Exercise maximum tolerance.
b. In case of unlawful aggression, only reasonable force may be employed to prevent or repel it.
c. The employment of tear gas and water cannons shall be made under the control and supervision
of the Ground Commander.
d. No arrest of any leader, organizer, or participant shall be made during the public assembly,
unless he/she violates any pertinent law as evidence warrants.
24.3 Service of Lawful Orders or Writ
The service of Department of Labor and Employment (DOLE), court, or other lawful orders or writs is the
primary concern of the DOLE representative, sheriff, and representative of the government agency
issuing the order,
Chapter 4 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 75
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
respectively. The role of the PNP is only supportive. Only when specifically stated and requested in the
order or writ shall the PNP enforce such orders or writs.
24.4 Prohibited Labor Activities
No personnel of the PNP shall:
a. Bring in, introduce or escort in any manner, any individual who seeks to replace strikers in
entering or leaving the premises or a strike area; or
b. Work in replacement of the strikers.
RULE 25. RALLIES AND DEMONSTRATIONS
25.1 Policies
a. The PNP adheres to the Code of Conduct for Law Enforcement Officials adopted by the General
Assembly of the United Nations which requires law enforcement officials to respect and protect human
dignity, maintain and uphold the human rights of all persons, and limit the use of force to situations
where it is strictly necessary and to the extent required for the performance of their duty.
b. Public assemblies held in freedom parks or on private property do not need a permit for the
activity. Public assembly with permit or one held in a freedom park or private property shall not be
dispersed as long as it remains peaceful and no incidence of violence occurs.
c. The PNP shall provide police assistance only when requested by the leaders or organizers for
maintenance of peace and order or to ensure the safety of those participating in the public assemblies
held in freedom parks or on private property.
d. A public assembly held in a public place must have a permit from the mayor of the city or
municipality exercising jurisdiction over the place where it will be held.
e. A public assembly held with or without a permit may be peacefully dispersed. A public assembly
with a permit may be dispersed if the same is being held in violation of the terms and conditions
imposed in the permit. In both cases, before conducting any dispersal operation, the PNP shall notify the
concerned organizers and leaders of the public assembly.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
f. Lightning demonstrations or rallies in areas where public assembly is prohibited shall be

dispersed peacefully. However, should any of the participants refuse to disperse voluntarily or violate
any law or ordinance during an unauthorized public assembly; they shall be taken into police custody
and be charged accordingly.
g. Ground Commanders are responsible in determining whether there is a permit for the holding
of the public assembly.
h. Close coordination with the mayor of the city or municipality, or his representative, where the
public assembly is being held should always be maintained especially when a permit has not been issued
but an application has been filed prior to the holding of the public assembly.
i. Maximum tolerance shall be exercised in the conduct of dispersal operations. Violators of the
law shall be apprehended and brought to the nearest Police Station for proper disposition.
25.2 Limitations on the Role of the PNP
The PNP shall not interfere with the holding of a public assembly. However, to ensure public safety and
to maintain peace and order during the assembly, the police contingent under the command of a PCO
preferably with the rank of Police Senior Inspector may be detailed and stationed in a place at least one
hundred (100) meters away from the area of activity.
25.3 Guidelines for Civil Disturbance Management (CDM)
Contingent During Rallies/Demonstrations
a. CDM contingent shall be in prescribed uniform without firearm.
b. Tear gas, smoke grenades, water cannons, or any similar anti-riot device shall be used only when
the public assembly is attended by actual violence or serious threats of violence, or deliberate
destruction of property.
25.4 Dispersal of Public Assembly with Permit
All public assembly with a permit shall not be dispersed. However, when an assembly becomes violent,
the police may disperse such public assembly in the following manner:
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
a. At the first sign of impending violence, the Ground Commander of the PNP contingent shall call
the attention of the leaders of the public assembly and ask the latter to prevent any possible
disturbance;
b. If actual violence reaches a point where rocks or other harmful objects from the participants are
thrown at the police officers or at the non-participants, or at any property, causing damage to it, the
Ground Commander of the PNP contingent shall audibly warn the participants that if the disturbance
persists, the public assembly will be dispersed;
c. If the violence or disturbance does not stop, the Ground Commander of the PNP contingent
shall audibly issue a warning to the participants of the public assembly, and after allowing a reasonable
period of time to lapse, he shall immediately order it to disperse; and
d. No arrest of any leader, organizer or participant shall be made unless he violates during the
assembly a law, statute, or ordinance.
25.5 Dispersal of Public Assembly Without Permit
When the public assembly is held without a permit where a permit is required, the said public assembly
may be peacefully dispersed. However, when the leaders or organizers of public assembly can show an
application for permit duly filed at the Office of the Mayor which has jurisdiction over the place where
the rally will be held, at least five (5) days prior to the intended activity and the Mayor did not act on the
same, the grant of the permit being then presumed under the law, and it will be the burden of the
authorities to show that there has been a denial of the application, in which case, the rally may be
peacefully dispersed following the procedure of maximum tolerance prescribed by law.
25.6 Prohibited Acts
It shall be prohibited for a police officer to commit the following acts during peaceful assembly:
a. Obstructing, impeding, disrupting or otherwise denying the exercise of the right to peaceful
assembly;
b. The unnecessary firing of firearms to disperse the public assembly;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
c. Acts in violation of Rule 25.5 hereof;
d. Acts described hereunder if committed within one hundred (100) meters from the area of
activity of the public assembly;
(1) The carrying of a deadly or offensive weapon or device such as firearm, pillbox, bomb, and the
like;
(2) The carrying of a bladed weapon;
(3) The malicious burning of any object in the streets or thoroughfares;
(4) The carrying of firearms by CDM contingents;
(5) The interfering with or intentionally disturbing the holding of a public assembly by the use of a
motor vehicle, its horns and loud sound systems;
(6) The drinking of liquor or alcoholic beverages; and
(7) Gambling of any kind.
25.7 Police Responses During Public Assembly
The following are the police responses during the planning stage, initial and peaceful stage,
confrontational stage, violent stage and post operation stage:
a. During Planning Stage
(1) Initiate dialogue with the leaders/organizers to ensure the peaceful holding of a public
assembly, including among others, the detail of police escorts.
(2) Prepare appropriate security and CDM contingency plans.
b. During Initial and Peaceful Stage
(1) With Permit or Held in Freedom Parks/ Private Properties
(a) The PNP shall not interfere with the holding of a public assembly. However, to adequately
ensure public safety, a CDM contingent, under the control and supervision of a PCO shall be stationed at
least one hundred (100) meters away from the area where the public assembly is being held.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(b) Monitor the activities at the public assembly area and respond to any request for police
assistance.
(2) Without Permit or Permit has been revoked
(a) As soon as it becomes apparent that an assembly is being held in a public place, the Ground
Commander shall immediately conduct an inquiry whether the assembly is covered with a permit or not.
If a permit could not be shown, verification should immediately be done with the Office of the Mayor
having jurisdiction over the place where the public assembly is being held. Should the Office of the
Mayor confirm that a permit has not been issued, the leaders/organizers shall be informed of the fact
that they are violating the law and will be asked to disperse peacefully.
(b) The PNP shall exhaust all peaceful remedies to persuade the demonstrators to disperse. This
may include the involvement of Local Chief Executives / community leaders when available to intervene
in the situation so that dispersal operations could be avoided.
(c) Should negotiation fail and the demonstrators refuse to disperse voluntarily and peacefully,
thereby causing public inconvenience, CDM contingents may commence dispersal operations.
c. During Breach of Peace/Confrontational Stage (With or without permit)

No public assembly with a permit shall be dispersed. However, when a public assembly becomes violent,
the CDM contingents may disperse such public assembly in the following manner:
(1) At the first sign of impending violence, the Ground Commander shall call the attention of the
leaders/ organizers of the public assembly and ask the latter to prevent any possible disturbance. CDM
contingents shall hold the line to prevent demonstrators from proceeding to other areas where the
holding of a public assembly is prohibited.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(2) If actual violence reaches a point where rocks or other harmful objects from the participants are
thrown at the CDM contingents or the non- participants, or at any property causing damage to it, the
Ground Commander shall audibly warn the participants that if the disturbance persists, the public
assembly will be dispersed;
(3) If the violence or disturbance does not stop, the Ground Commander shall audibly issue a
warning to the participants of the public assembly, and after allowing a reasonable period of time to
lapse, shall immediately order it to disperse. With the use of CDM formations, the rank of
demonstrators shall be disbanded, contained, and isolated from each other, and should be prevented
from regrouping.
(4) Water cannons and riot sticks maybe used to repel aggression and to disperse demonstrators
and reserve CDM contingents may be employed when situation requires.
(5) No arrest of any leader, organizer or participant shall be made unless he violates a law, statute,
or ordinance during the assembly.
d. During Violent Stage
(1) Non-lethal weapons and equipment may be used to suppress violence, to protect lives and
prevent further damage to properties.
(2) PNP security elements shall be tactically deployed to provide immediate assistance to the CDM
contingents.
e. Post-Operation Stage:
(1) CDM contingents shall be withdrawn after the area has been cleared of possible danger to
public safety.
(2) Sufficient police force shall be maintained to ensure peace and order in the area.
25.8 Guidelines in the Use of Non-Lethal Weapons
a. Shield and Truncheon
During the confrontational stage, truncheon or baton may be utilized only to push back demonstrators
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
and not as an instrument to strike individuals. However, when demonstrators become aggressive,
truncheon shall be the principal non-lethal weapon for dispersal. In such situation, CDM contingents
shall nonetheless, use the same with caution and due diligence to avoid unnecessary injury.
b. Water Cannons
Water cannons may be utilized when demonstrators become unruly and aggressive forcing troops to fall
back to their secondary positions.
c. Tear Gas
Tear gas and pepper spray may be utilized to break up formations or groupings of demonstrations who
continue to be aggressive and who refuse to disperse despite earlier efforts.
25.9 Guidelines in dealing with Assemblies, Rallies,
Demonstrations and Marches
a. To ensure the protection, safety and welfare of the public and demonstrators as well, the
following must be observed:
(1) Confined Assemblies in Private Property (Churches, Schools, etc.)
(a) Initiate the conduct of dialogue with the leaders/ organizers.
(b) Secure and maintain order within the perimeter.
(2) Confined Assemblies in Freedom Parks

(b) Request for the permit from the leaders/ organizers if the local ordinance of the area requires
one.
(c) Secure and contain the area within the limits of the permit to ensure the orderly and peaceful
conduct of the assembly.
(3) Mobile Assemblies in a Private Area
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(b) Secure and maintain order within the perimeter.
(4) Marches and Motorcades along Public Thoroughfares
(b) Request for the permit from the leaders/ organizers if the local ordinance of the area requires
one.
(c) Ensure the orderly and peaceful conduct of the marches and motorcades to ensure public safety
and to prevent compromise of public convenience.
b. There shall always be a designated Ground Commander at the rally site;
c. Apply slow dispersal technique whenever it is applicable. Take the ground inch by inch. Ground
Commander shall refrain from using water cannon and tear gas as much as possible; and
d. If necessary, provide a medical team to extend assistance;
e. All CDM operations shall be properly documented with video and photo coverage;
f. Respect for human rights and equal treatment and protection for everybody shall be strictly
observed; and
g. PNP personnel shall observe maximum tolerance.
RULE 26. CIVIL DISTURBANCE MANAGEMENT OPERATIONS
26.1 General Guidelines

The PNP units tasked to maintain peace and order shall not interfere with the holding of public
assembly. To ensure public safety, a Civil Disturbance Management (CDM) contingent under the
command of a Police Commissioned Officer (PCO) with the rank of Police Senior Inspector or higher shall
be detailed and stationed at least 100 meters away from the place where the public assembly is being
held. In the absence of any permit from the LGU concerned, the PCO in command should exert effort in
persuading the demonstrators to disperse peacefully and vacate the public place.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
In lightning rallies or demonstrations, the Ground Commander shall exhaust efforts through dialogue
with the leaders/organizers for voluntary dispersal. In case of failure, orderly dispersal to include
apprehension of those responsible is resorted to.
26.2 Specific Guidelines
When assistance is requested by the leaders/organizers, it shall be imperative for the CDM contingent to
perform their duties while observing the rights of demonstrators. Further, the members of the CDM
contingent dealing with the demonstrators shall be in prescribed uniform.
a. The CDM contingent shall not carry any kind of firearms but may be equipped with baton or riot
sticks, crash helmets with visor, gas masks, boots or ankle-high shoes with shin guards.
b. Tear gas, smoke grenades, water cannons, or any similar anti-riot device shall not be used unless
the public assembly is attended by actual violence or serious threats of violence, or deliberate
destruction of property. Maximum tolerance shall always be observed.
c. The organization and membership of CDM contingents, as well as their deployment and
employment, shall be in accordance with existing PNP rules and regulations.
26.3 CDM Operational Tasks
a. Isolate the area;
b. Secure likely targets;
c. Control crowds;
d. Establish area control; and
e. Neutralize special threats.
26.4 CDM Operational Approaches

a. The commitment of a CDM contingent must be viewed as a last resort. Their role, therefore,
should never be greater than what is necessary under the circumstances. This does not mean though
that the number of troops employed should be minimized. Doubts concerning the number of troops
required should normally be resolved in favor of deployment of large number since the presence
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
of such large number may prevent the development of situations in which the use of excessive force
would be necessary. A large reserve of troops should be maintained during civil disturbance operations.
b. In selecting an operational approach to a civil disturbance situation, the Ground Commander

and his personnel must adhere to the “minimum necessary force” principle.
c. Efforts should be exerted to create the image of a restrained and well-disciplined force, the sole
purpose of which is to assist in the restoration of law and order. Further, while CDM contingent should
be visible, any activity which might excite rather than calm should be avoided when possible.
d. Consistent with the controlling principle “that he must use the minimum necessary force to
accomplish his mission”, the Ground Commander shall equip the CDM contingent only with rattan
stick/truncheon/baton, shield, Kevlar helmet and handcuffs.
e. In situations requiring the use of baton/ truncheons should only target fleshy part of the body
such as arms, torso, legs, and thighs. Hitting protesters with the baton or truncheon on the head, face,
neck, shoulders blades, elbows, fingers, groins, knees, and ankles must be avoided since strikes to these
part may cause serious to permanent injuries, or even death.
f. Protesters that are arrested must be properly restrained/handcuffed using scientific control
methods; and thereafter, brought safely to the police station for processing. Arrested protesters must
not be kicked, punched, or dragged by hair or feet.
g. Whenever appropriate, deploy properly trained and equipped female CDM personnel as front-
liners.
RULE 27. DEMOLITION AND EJECTMENT ORDERS
27.1 Role of the PNP in the Enforcement of a Demolition and/ or Ejectment Orders
a. Police assistance in the enforcement or implementation of a demolition or ejectment order shall
be granted only upon a written request of the Sheriff or equivalent officer in quasi-judicial and
administrative bodies
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
accompanied by a valid order issued by a competent court, quasi-judicial or administrative body and,
when required, with written permission from the Local Housing Board in accordance with EO 708
amending EO 152 and DILG Memo Circular No. 2008-143. The proponent shall only be provided with
police assistance upon compliance with the requirements including the requirements under Sections 27,
28, and 30 of RA 7279 (Urban Development and Housing Act), when applicable. Moreover, said police
assistance shall be coordinated with the concerned local Chief Executive before its enforcement. In no
case shall a demolition involving informal settlers be effected without a pre- demolition conference
being conducted between and among the parties involved.
b. The conduct of pre-demolition conference in cases where the affected families are informal
settlers shall be mandatory.
c. The duties of PNP personnel in any demolition or ejectment activity shall be limited to the
maintenance of peace and order, protection of life and property, and enforcement of laws and legal
orders.
d. PNP personnel tasked to provide police assistance shall be in prescribed uniform during the
actual demolition. They shall be limited only to occupying the first line of law enforcement and civil
disturbance control; shall not participate in the physical dismantling of any structure subject of
demolition; and shall use only necessary and reasonable force.
27.2 Procedures in the Enforcement of a Demolition and/or Ejectment Order
a. PNP personnel should be informed of the prevailing situation, their tasks, and strict observance
of Human Rights.
b. As much as practicable, the Chief of Police (COP) shall lead the PNP contingent detailed to assist
the Sheriff or equivalent officer during the demolition/ejectment activity.
c. All PNP personnel involved shall desist from the use of any unnecessary force or any act that
may harm, harass, or terrorize the affected parties.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
d. The mode of participation shall be limited to the maintenance of peace and order during the
entire demolition/ejectment activity, ensuring the protection of all parties from harm and injury.
e. Tear gas, water cannon, and reasonable force shall be used only when all other peaceful and
non-violent means have been exhausted.
RULE 28. POLICE ASSISTANCE IN THE IMPLEMENTATION OF FINAL DECISIONS OR ORDERS OF THE
COURTS IN CIVIL CASES, OF QUASI-JUDICIAL BODIES AND OF ADMINISTRATIVE BODIES ON
CONTROVERSIES WITHIN THEIR JURISDICTION
28.1 Police Assistance in the Implementation of Final Decisions or Orders or Resolutions of the Courts
in Civil Cases, of Quasi-Judicial Bodies and of Administrative Bodies, (Except Cases with Issued
Temporary Restraining Order or Injunction)
The request for police assistance shall be submitted to the Office of the Chief, PNP in case the final
decision or order to be implemented is rendered by the Supreme Court, the Court of Appeals, the Court
of Tax Appeals, the Sandiganbayan, quasi-judicial bodies or administrative bodies.
If the final decision or order is rendered by the Regional Trial Court or the Municipal Trial Court, the
request shall be submitted to the Office of the Regional Director of the Police Regional Office (RD, PRO)
having territorial jurisdiction over the place of implementation.
The request for police assistance of quasi-judicial or administrative bodies shall be submitted to the
Office of the Chief, PNP regardless of the place where the police assistance shall be rendered, but the
same maybe delegated to the Regional Director upon the discretion of the Chief, PNP in accordance
with Section 26, RA 6975.
28.2 Requirements for Police Assistance
Request for police assistance in the implementation of final decisions/orders/writs shall be acted only,
upon compliance of the following conditions:
a. The request for police assistance is based on an order of the court, quasi-judicial or
administrative bodies;

PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
b. The written request for police assistance shall be signed by the Sheriff or equivalent officer in
quasi-judicial or administrative bodies;
c. The request is filed at least five (5) working days prior to the actual implementation; and
d. The original document of the final decision/order/ resolution must be presented. In the absence
of the same, a copy duly authenticated by the Clerk of Court or other authorized representative of the
court, quasi- judicial or administrative body will suffice.
28.3 Period to Render Police Assistance
If the request for police assistance satisfies all the requirements, police assistance shall be rendered
within three (3) working days from receipt of the directive from the C, PNP or RD, PRO, unless a specific
period is written in the order or due to inherent impossibility of rendering assistance, a longer period is
required.
28.4 Office or Unit That May Be Tasked to Render Police Assistance
The Chief, PNP, as may be recommended by the Director for Operations, may task any operational
support unit of the PNP or the PRO that has jurisdiction in the area where the decision/order/resolution
shall be implemented to render police assistance.
In case of request to the RD, PRO, the latter may task the Public Safety Company/Batallion, Police
Provincial Office (PPO), City Police Office/Station (CPS) or Municipal Police Station (MPS) within his
jurisdiction to render police assistance. In case of direct filing or request to local police units or
operational support units, the request shall be referred to the OCPNP or RD, PRO, as appropriate. In the
meantime, no police assistance shall be rendered until the C, PNP or RD, PRO shall have acted on the
request.
28.5 Extent of Police Assistance
The head of office or unit tasked to render police assistance shall have the discretion to employ
sufficient number of PNP uniformed personnel after taking into consideration the importance of the
case, the scope of the resistance to be encountered, if there is any, and the general peace and order
condition in the area. Unless a higher ranking Officer is necessary and more PNP personnel

PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
shall be required, the police team that will render police assistance shall be led by a Police
Commissioned Officer (PCO) with the rank of Police Senior Inspector. All the team members shall be in
prescribed uniform while rendering assistance.
28.6 Role of PNP Personnel Rendering Police Assistance
PNP personnel shall observe maximum tolerance and respect for individual rights at all times. Dialogue
with those who may be affected by the implementation of the decision/ order/resolution is encouraged
to prevent violence, and the assistance of local public officials, when warranted, should be requested.
However, the Sheriff or the equivalent officer of quasi-judicial or administrative bodies shall have the
final disposition whether to proceed with the implementation of the decision/order/resolution or not.
The use of reasonable force shall only be resorted to for self-defense and defense of strangers.
The role of the PNP shall be limited to the maintenance of peace and order, crowd control, and the
security of the Sheriff or equivalent officer of quasi-judicial or administrative body. In no case shall PNP
personnel participate in the implementation of the decision/order/resolution by performing acts not
herein mentioned, such as, but not limited to, dismantling, hauling of personal property and other
analogous acts.
RULE 29. POLICE ASSISTANCE IN THE IMPLEMENTATION OF FINAL DECISIONS OR ORDERS OR

RESOLUTIONS OF THE COMELEC OR DILG OR LOCAL GOVERNMENT UNIT EXERCISING DISCIPLINARY
POWERS IN ADMINISTRATIVE CASES OF ELECTED OFFICIALS
29.1 Requirements for the Request for Police Assistance
The police assistance shall only be granted upon the written request of COMELEC or DILG, accompanied
with the original or authenticated copy of the final decision or order or resolution to be implemented.
29.2 Period To Render Police Assistance
If the request for police assistance satisfies all the requirements and the clearance to render police
assistance is approved by the C, PNP the police assistance requested
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
shall be rendered within three (3) working days from receipt of the directive from the C, PNP or for a
longer period when required by the circumstances.
The Special Task Group Commander tasked to render police assistance shall have the discretion to
employ sufficient number of PNP uniformed personnel after taking into consideration the scope of the
resistance to be encountered, if there is any, and the general peace and order condition in the area.
Unless a higher ranking Officer is necessary and more PNP personnel are required, the police team that
will render police assistance should be led by a Police Commissioned Officer (PCO) with the rank of
Police Senior Inspector. All members of the Special Task Group shall be in prescribed uniform when
rendering police assistance.
The role of the PNP when rendering police assistance shall be limited to the maintenance of peace and
order, crowd control, and the security of the duly authorized officer of the COMELEC, DILG or the Local
Government Unit implementing the decision/order/resolution. In no case shall PNP members participate
in the implementation of the decision/order/resolution which shall be undertaken by the duly
authorized officer of the COMELEC or DILG or the Local Government Unit concerned.
In performing their role, the PNP personnel shall at all times observe maximum tolerance and respect
for human rights. The use of reasonable force shall only be resorted to for self-defense and defense of
strangers. Moreover, the PNP personnel shall always exercise utmost impartiality and neutrality in
effecting its role.
The duly authorized officer of the COMELEC or DILG or the Local Government Unit personally leading the
implementation of the said decision/order/resolution shall have the final disposition whether to
proceed or not with the implementation of the decision/order/resolution.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
RULE 30. POLICE ASSISTANCE IN THE IMPLEMENTATION OF COMPREHENSIVE AGRARIAN REFORM
PROGRAM (CARP)
30.1 Coverage
a. Final Orders
(1) Final Orders/Resolutions/Decisions Issued by DAR
(2) Order of Installation or Certificate of Land Ownership Award (CLOA)
b. Preliminary Agrarian Activities
(1) Land survey
(2) Field Investigation
(3) Ocular Inspection
(4) Meeting between actual and potential Agrarian Reform Beneficiaries
(5) Post Installation
(6) Landholding tagging
(7) Analogous cases
30.2 Requirements in the Granting of Police Assistance
a. Police assistance in the implementation of final orders, decisions, resolutions or CLOAs issued
DAR shall be rendered only upon a written request submitted by the Agrarian Reform Officer or any
authorized Officer of DAR, accompanied with the original or authenticated copy of the final decision,
order or CLOA to be implemented. The request and its attachments, regardless of the place of
execution, shall be submitted to the Office of the Chief, PNP for his approval.
b. Police assistance during the conduct of preliminary agrarian activities as provided in Rule 30.1b
shall be rendered only upon a written request submitted by the Agrarian Reform Officer or any
authorized Officer of DAR, accompanied with the original or authenticated copy of the Order issued for
the activity (if applicable). The request shall be submitted to the Office of the Regional Director of the
Police Regional Office having jurisdiction over the area of execution for his approval.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
30.3 When to Render Police Assistance
Police assistance in the implementation of CARP shall be provided only as requested by DAR. In no case
shall the PNP act on its own without the request and/or representative from DAR to prevent extending
police assistance in cases where same is not necessary.
The head of office or unit tasked to render police assistance shall have the discretion to employ
sufficient number of PNP uniformed personnel after taking into consideration the scope of the
resistance to be encountered, if there is any, and the general peace and order condition in the area.
Unless a higher ranking Officer is necessary and more PNP personnel are required, the police team that
will render police assistance should be led by a Police Commissioned Officer (PCO) with the rank of
Police Senior Inspector. All members of the team shall be in prescribed uniform when rendering police
assistance.
The PNP personnel shall observe maximum tolerance and respect for individual rights at all times. The
use of reasonable force shall only be resorted to for self-defense and defense of strangers. Moreover,
the PNP personnel shall always exercise utmost impartiality and neutrality in effecting its role.
The role of the PNP when rendering police assistance shall be limited to the maintenance of peace and
order, crowd control, and the security of the duly authorized officer of the DAR. In no case shall PNP
members participate in the implementation of the decision/order/resolution or in the conduct of any of
the preliminary agrarian activities, which shall be undertaken by the duly authorized officer of the DAR.
The duly authorized officer of the DAR leading the implementation of the
decision/order/resolution/CLOA or leading the conduct of the preliminary agrarian activity shall have
the final disposition whether to proceed or not with the implementation of the
decision/order/resolution/CLOA or conduct of the activity.
30.6 When Entry to the Property is Refused by the landowner
When the DAR personnel are refused admittance into the property, the PNP personnel cannot encroach
on the
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
property without an order from the DAR specifically for the purpose. In the implementation of final
orders or in the conduct of preliminary agrarian activities, the authority to break into the property or
into a building shall be specifically provided in the order or resolution or in the request for police
assistance. The authority to break out to liberate themselves shall also be specifically provided.
RULE 31. POLICE ASSISTANCE IN THE IMPLEMENTATION OF DECISIONS/ORDERS OF THE COURT, QUASI-
JUDICIAL OR ADMINISTRATIVE BODIES THAT ARE IMMEDIATELY EXECUTORY
This rule sets forth the procedure in the granting of police assistance in the implementation of
decisions/orders that are immediately executory like, but not limited to the following:
a. Temporary Restraining Order
b. Writ of Preliminary Injunction
c. Replevin
d. Writ of Preliminary Attachment
e. Receivership
f. Provisional Remedies under the Human Security Act
g. Temporary Protection Order under the Anti-Violence Against Women and their Children Act
h. Protection Order under the Anti-Child Pornography Act
i. Analogous cases
31.1 Where to File
Decisions/Orders issued by the court, quasi-judicial or administrative bodies that are immediately
executory shall be submitted to the Regional Director (RD) of the Police Regional Office (PRO) having
jurisdiction of the place where the decision/order shall be implemented. Given the urgency of the
matter, the RD, PRO shall be the approving authority. The request for police assistance, however, shall
only be acted, upon the submission of the written request of the Sheriff or equivalent officer in quasi-
judicial or administrative bodies, accompanied by the original or authenticated copy of the
decision/order/writ sought to be implemented.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
PNP personnel shall observe maximum tolerance and respect for individual rights at all times. Dialogue
with those who may be affected by the implementation of the decision/ order/resolution is encouraged
to prevent violence, and the assistance of local public officials, when warranted, should be requested.
However, the Sheriff or the equivalent officer of quasi-judicial or administrative bodies shall have the
final disposition whether to proceed with the implementation of the decision/order/resolution or not.
The use of reasonable force shall only be resorted to for self-defense and defense of strangers.
RULE 32. HOSTAGE SITUATION/BARRICADED SITUATIONS
32.1 Procedure to be followed in a Hostage Situation
The following steps shall be undertaken:
a. A Critical Incident Management Committee shall be activated immediately; (PNP Standard

Operating Procedure No. ODO-2010-003 “Organization and Procedures of Critical Incident Management
Committee and Critical Incident Management Task Group)
b. Incident scene shall be secured and isolated;
c. Identify and secure the stronghold;
d. As much as possible, ensure the control of communication lines, and cut-off all other lines as
well as electricity and water supply to allow for more bargaining;
e. Unauthorized persons shall not be allowed entry and exit to the incident scene;
f. Witnesses’ names, addresses, and other information shall be recorded;
g. Witnesses shall be directed to a safe location;
h. Evacuate all victims/injured persons immediately when the opportunity permits;
i. The arrest of the perpetrator shall be the last paramount concern; and
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
j. Conduct debriefing immediately after the conclusion of the incident.
32.2 Ground Commander/On-Scene Commander
There shall be only one Ground Commander/On-Scene Commander holding at least a senior rank and/or
one (1) with experience in hostage/crisis situation or relative training. Until such time that he officially
designates a spokesperson, he may issue appropriate press statements and continue to perform the role
of the spokesperson.
32.3 Negotiators/ Negotiation Team
Negotiators shall be designated by the Ground Commander. No one shall be allowed to talk to the
hostage- taker without clearance from the negotiator or Ground Commander. The Negotiation Team is
directly under control and supervision of the On-Scene Commander.
Negotiation team structure will be as follows:
a. Negotiation Team Leader (NTL)/coordinator;
b. Primary Negotiator;
c. Secondary Negotiator;
d. Intelligence liason/recorder; and
e. Board Negotiator.
32.4 Assault Team
An assault team shall be alerted for deployment in case the negotiation fails. Members of the assault
team shall wear authorized and easily recognizable uniform during the conduct of the operation.
32.5 Support Personnel
An ambulance with medical crew and a fire truck shall be detailed at the incident area.
32.6 Plans
The On-Scene Commander shall, upon the assessment of the situation, prepare necessary plans to
include but not limited to:
a. Emergency Response Plan - depends on the threat posed by the hostage-takers and need of the
Negotiation Team and On-Scene Commander.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
b. Breakout Plan - possibility of breakout shall be considered immediately upon drawing up
negotiation strategy. This should be considered as one of the priority plans.
c. Delivery plan - in case the hostage-takers change plans in the middle of the execution.
d. Surrender plan- should be drawn up in a way that the hostages’ lives will not be jeopardized.
e. Hostage Reception/ Release - for security reasons, released hostages should be contained and
isolated.
f. Collection plan - safety of the police personnel involved is the priority consideration.
32.7 Coordination
Proper coordination with all participating elements shall be done to consolidate efforts in solving the
crisis.
32.8 Safety of Hostage(s)
In negotiating for the release of a hostage, the safety of the hostage shall always be paramount.
32.9 Guidelines during Negotiations
a. Situation must be stabilized first and contained before the start of the negotiation;
b. All relevant tools and information that can strengthen a negotiator’s position and create a
favorable climate for a successful negotiation must be prepared e.g. facts relevant to the situation,
financial and non-financial terms, issues and concerns, etc;
c. Do not introduce outsiders (non-law enforcement officers) into the negotiation process, unless
their presence is extremely necessary in the solution of the crisis. If so introduced, they shall be properly
advised on the do’s and don’ts of hostage negotiations;
d. In case the negotiator breaks down or he/she finds himself/herself in a deadlock, it is

recommended to employ the service of a mediator.
e. Police officers without proper training shall not be allowed to participate in hostage
negotiations.
f. Whatever the scale of an incident and the extent of resources deployed, it is essential that
proper liaison

PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
exist between Tactical/Assault Team, Technical Support Team and the Negotiation Team.
g. All activities on the scene, even the delivery of food to the stronghold, must have tactical
coordination with the NTL/Coordinator.
32.10 Negotiation through Mediator
a. The mediator will act as a referee, helping the negotiators resolve their differences.
b. The mediator must be well-versed about the issues in order to be able to eventually recommend
an effective solution.
c. The main object is to reconcile the object of the negotiator with that of the other party.
RULE 33. INVESTIGATION OF VIOLENCE AGAINST WOMEN AND THEIR CHILDREN (VAWC) AND OTHER
CASES OF CHILD ABUSE
33.1 Investigation of Complaints and Reports Involving All Forms of Violence against Women and
Their Children
The PNP Women and Children Protection Desks (WCPD) in coordination with the Local Social Welfare
Development Office (LSWDO), shall conduct a timely, thorough and comprehensive investigation of all
cases involving violence against women and their children, committed within their respective area of
responsibility, consistent with domestic laws, rules and regulations, and international human rights
standards. They shall observe the rules and procedures as provided in section 48 of the Implementing
Rules and Regulations of RA 9262 (Anti- Violence Against Women and Their Children Act of 2004).
“Children” refers to those below eighteen (18) years of age or older but are incapable of taking care of
themselves as defined under Republic Act No. 7610. As used in this rule, it includes the biological
children of the victim woman and other children under her care.
a. Upon the receipt of complaint, the WCPD officer shall conduct appropriate investigation which
includes, but is not limited to, taking the formal statement of the victim- survivor and collecting other
evidence necessary for the filing of the case under the Act;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
b. Immediately after taking the essential elements of information during the course of
investigation, the WCPD officer shall refer the victim-survivor to the nearest PNP Crime Laboratory
and/or hospital or any medical facilities for appropriate medico-legal examination. It shall be the WCPD
officer’s duty to ensure that as far as possible, the examining physician must be of the same gender as
the victim-survivor, especially in sexual violence cases;
c. Except in the case of a child who is a victim-survivor of the Act, by which other existing laws
require immediate presence of the unoffending parent or guardian and social worker, only persons
expressly authorized by the victim-survivor shall be allowed by the WCPD officer inside a room where
police investigation as well as the medical/physical examination are being conducted in private;
d. Ensure the confidentiality of identity of the victim- survivor and all other parties directly
involved with the case under investigation. For this purpose, the WCPD officer must maintain a separate
blotter on crimes committed under the Act. Under no circumstances shall any police officer allow media
access to information concerning VAWC reported to PNP;
e. After the conduct of police investigation, the WCPD officer shall refer the victim-survivor to the
social worker of the LGU, any available DSWD shelters, NGOs and other service providers for psycho-
social intervention and other rehabilitation programs;
f. The WCPD officer shall forward the investigation report, together with the relevant evidence,
including the formal statements of witnesses and result of medico-legal examination, to the prosecutor
for filing of appropriate criminal action under the Act;
g. If victim-survivor is found to have manifestations of the Battered Woman Syndrome which is

validated by past police records and testimonies from witnesses in interest, the WCPD officer shall
inform the Punong Barangay, the local social worker, or the concerned NGOs, local professional or civic
groups in the area for appropriate psychiatric and psychological evaluation which may form part of the
evidence to be presented in court;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
h. Assist in the application and enforcement of the provisions of the protection order as may be
issued by the barangay or the court;
i. Respond, with the assistance of other police personnel, barangay officials, and other parties-in-
interest, to a call for emergency assistance to ensure immediate protection of the victim-survivor by
entering the dwelling if necessary, whether or not a protection order has been issued;
j. In case where the perpetrator is armed or in possession of deadly weapon in plain view, cause
the confiscation thereof with the assistance of other police personnel;
k. Effect the arrest of the perpetrator by virtue of a warrant issued by the court pursuant to
existing laws. In the event that any crime under the Act has been committed, is being committed or
about to be committed, or that any police officer has personal knowledge of the facts indicating the
commission of such time, it shall be his or her duty to arrest the perpetrator even without the strength
of a warrant, provided the offender shall be processed in accordance with Section 5, Rule 113 of the
Rules of Court;
l. Except when the victim-survivor is deemed more secure to stay in their place of residence, in
which case the perpetrator has been removed by virtue of protection order issued by the barangay or
the court, the WCPD officer or any designated police officer shall provide assistance to help facilitate the
transfer of the victim- survivor to a safe place of her own choice, including the removal of some of the
victim-survivor’s personal belongings;
m. Monitor and follow up any case in violation of the Act that has been filed in court. In this regard,
the WCPD officer must maintain a periodic assessment report of all cases reported to the police in
violation of the Act; and
n. Participate in multi-disciplinary mechanisms to help address the protection needs of the victim-
survivor of VAWC.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
33.2 Investigation of Complaints and Reports Involving Other Forms of Child Abuse
Police Officers, in coordination with the PNP Women and Children Protection Desks (WCPD) and Local
Social Welfare Development Office (LSWDO), shall conduct an investigation on all cases of child abuse
committed within their respective area of responsibility, consistent with domestic laws, rules and
regulations, and international human rights
a. Police officers shall, upon receipt of a complaint or report or information that a child has been or
is being abused, maltreated, discriminated, exploited, neglected, or abandoned, or is under imminent
danger of being abused or exploited, shall take immediate action thereon, but under no circumstance
shall be beyond forty-eight (48) hours;
b. Police officers shall immediately coordinate with the WCPD and report the matter to the
LSWDO.
c. In situations where immediate rescue operations are necessary, the police officers and WCPD in
coordination with the LSWDO and other stakeholders shall prepare the corresponding rescue operations
plan;
d. The police officers, together with the WCPD, LSWDO and other stakeholders/authorities like the
Barangay or Municipal or City Health Officer, Barangay Officials in the place where the incident occurred
or is taking place, the Barangay Human Rights Action Officer or any officer of the Commission on Human
Rights (CHR) in or near the area of operation shall, without delay, proceed to the place where the child-
victim is located and execute the rescue operations plan;
e. Upon rescue of the child-victim, the law enforcers shall turn over the child-victim to the LSWDO
for protective custody;
f. The police officer, together with the LSWDO, shall ensure that the child-victim shall be
immediately taken to the nearest government medical center or hospital or clinic for physical and
psychological examination, treatment and/or confinement;
g. The police officer, in coordination with the LSWDO, shall gather the necessary/relevant and
material data and evidence to support the filing of appropriate
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
charges before the Prosecutor’s Office and trial of the child-abuse case/s before the court;
h. The police officer shall ensure that the child-victim shall not be subjected or exposed to multi-
victimization in the course of investigation. Hence, the police officer shall see to it that the interviews
and statements of the victim shall be recorded and/or video-taped; and
i. Investigation of child abuse cases shall be assigned preferably to members of the Women and
Children Protection Desk (WCPD) or in their absence, the police officer of the same gender who has
appropriate training on child rights, and investigation and handling of child- abuse cases.
33.3 Right to Privacy of the Child and Confidentiality of Records
The police officer shall at all times respect the right to privacy of the child and shall observe
confidentiality of information and records pertaining to child rights cases he investigated or is
investigating, from the beginning of the investigation and/or initial custody of the child-victim and at all
times thereafter, except when the release of any information about the child’s case is pursuant to an
Order issued by a competent court.
33.4 Procedure in the Rescue of Minors
a. Planning
All police operations regarding rescue of minors who are victims or subject of physical, sexual,
psychological abuse, exploitation, discrimination, negligence, and other forms of abuse, shall be
properly planned, in coordination with stakeholders concerned. The plan shall be drawn and discussed
in a pre-conference with national and/or local authorities such as: the Department of Social Work and
Development (DSWD) or the LSWDO, female Police Investigator, preferably from the WCPD or one
trained in the handling of investigation of child rights cases, the local police units, police photographer,
Public Attorneys’ Office (PAO), barangay officials, City and Municipal Licensing and Permit Division, the
Department of Health or the City or Municipal Health Office, Barangay Human Rights Action Officer or
officer of the CHR, and/or the DOLE.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
For this purpose, the PNP shall activate a Rescue Team to be headed by officer/s of the WCPD, in
coordination with concerned national and/or local authorities mentioned above.
b. Rescue operations
(1) All police officers participating in the rescue operations shall be in prescribed uniform. Should
circumstances require that certain police officer/s be in civilian clothes during the actual operations, he
must have the official identification card which he must show when required.
(2) Upon arrival at the operation scene, the police officers shall properly introduce themselves and
inform the people in the area where the child-victim is located as to the purpose of their operation.
(3) Police officer shall not use force unless necessary under the circumstances. In circumstances
where reasonable force is allowed, the police officers/ rescue team shall ensure and/or avoid collateral
damage or hitting innocent civilians within the vicinity of operations.
(4) The child-victim shall be handled preferably by a police officer of the same gender as the victim,
who has appropriate training on child rights, and in the investigation and handling of child-abuse cases.
33.5 Procedure to be Observed in the Handling of Children in Conflict with the Law (CICL)
From the moment a child is taken into custody, the law enforcement officer shall:
a. Properly identify himself as police officer and present the proper identification to the child;
b. Explain to the child, in simple language and in the dialect that he can understand, the reason
why he is being taken into custody and the offense he allegedly committed;
c. Refrain from using vulgar or profane words and from sexually harassing or abusing, or making
sexual advances to the child in conflict with the law;
d. Avoid displaying or using any firearm, weapon, handcuffs or instruments of force or restraint,
unless
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
absolutely necessary and only after all other methods of control have been exhausted and have failed;
e. Refrain from subjecting the child in conflict with the law to greater restraint than is necessary
for his apprehension;
f. Avoid the use of unnecessary force;
g. Search on a child in conflict with the law shall only be done by a police officer of the same
gender as the child;
h. Determine the age of the child;

i. Take the child immediately to the proper medical and health officer for a thorough physical and
mental examination. The examination results shall be kept confidential, unless otherwise ordered by the
Family Court. Whenever medical treatment is required, steps shall be immediately undertaken to
provide the same;
j. Turn over custody of the child to the LSWDO or other accredited NGOs immediately but not
later than eight (8) hours after apprehension and notify the child’s parents/ guardians and the PAO of
the child’s apprehension;
k. When the child is fifteen (15) years or below, he shall be immediately released to his parents or
guardian or nearest relative. However, if the child is above twelve
(12) years of age up to fifteen (15) years of age and commits serious crimes such as parricide, murder,
infanticide, kidnapping and serious illegal detention where the victim is killed or raped, robbery with
homicide or rape, destructive arson, rape, or carnapping where the driver or occupant is killed or raped
or offenses under RA 9165 (Comprehensive Dangerous Drugs Act of 2002) punishable by more than
twelve (12) years of imprisonment, shall be deemed a neglected child under PD 603, as amended, and
shall be mandatorily placed in a special facility within the youth care facility or “Bahay Pag-asa” called
the Intensive Juvenile Intervention and Support Center (IJISC). (Sec 20-A of RA 10630)
l. A child who violated local ordinances concerning juvenile status offenses shall be considered as
“child at risk” and not as “child in conflict with the law”. Hence, no penalty shall be imposed on them for
said violations, and they shall be instead brought to their residence or to any barangay official at the
barangay hall to be
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
released to the custody of their parents and appropriate intervention program will be provided. (Sec 20-
A of RA 10630)
m. Ensure that should detention of the child in conflict with the law be necessary, the child shall be
secured in quarters separate from that of the opposite sex and adult offenders. The child shall not be
locked up in a detention cell;
n. Take the statement of the child in the presence of:
(1) The child’s counsel of choice or in the absence thereof, a lawyer from the PAO;
(2) The child’s parents, guardian, or nearest relative, and

(3) LSWDO;
o. In the absence of the child’s parents, guardian, or nearest relative, and the LSWDO, the
investigation shall be conducted in the presence of an NGO, religious group, or member of the Barangay
Council for the Protection of Children (BCPC).
p. Ensure that all statements signed by the child during investigation shall be witnessed by the
child’s parents or guardian, social worker, or legal counsel in attendance who shall affix his signature to
the said statement;
q. Record the following in the initial investigation:
(1) Whether handcuffs or other instruments of restraint were used, and if so, the reason for such;
(2) That the parents or guardians of a child, the DSWD, and the PAO have been duly informed of the
apprehension and the details thereof; and
(3) The exhaustion of measures to determine the age of a child and the precise details of the
physical and medical examination or the failure to submit a child to such examination.
33.6 Guidelines
The police officer shall at all times ensure respect for the rights of the child in conflict with the law as
provided in the Philippine Constitution, domestic laws, the Convention on the Rights of the Child and
other related international human rights instruments.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
RULE 34. BOMB, BOMB THREAT AND BOMB INCIDENT EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES
34.1 Bomb
A bomb is a container filled with explosive, incendiary material, smoke, gas, or other destructive
substance, designed to explode. It can appear obvious or concealed and can vary in size, shape or
sophistication and may not necessarily explode such as in the case of incendiary and dirty bombs. It may
be referred to as Improvised Explosives Device (IED) or ordnance.
34.2 Bomb Threat
Bomb threat is either a written or verbal threat communicated through electronic, oral or other means
that threatens to place or use an IED at a certain time, date, or place against any specific person or
place. The First Responder (FR), the police investigator, and the police detective must remember the
following basic facts on bomb threat:
a. A threat is considered only a threat until something visible is found;
b. Determined bombers do not frequently give warnings of a possible explosion/incendiary attack;
c. Threats are an excellent way to disrupt
-ygproductivity without actually risking life, limb and/or property; and
d. The consequences of conviction for “threatening” are not necessarily as serious as those that
could result from actual placement/initiation of a bomb.
34.3 First Responder’s Procedure on Bomb Threat
The following are the guidelines for FRs during a bomb threat:
a. Upon receipt of the information:
(1) Treat all threats as serious until proven otherwise;
(2) Determine the exact location of the establishment under threat;
(3) Assess or analyze the threat whether it is a long term or a short term threat;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(4) Consider evacuation options as follows:
(a) Option 1 - Do Nothing
(b) Option 2 - Search with partial evacuation
(c) Option 3 - Search and evacuation
(d) Option 4 - Evacuate immediately
(5) Alert Explosives Ordnance Demolition Team (EODT) for bomb search mission and emergency
readiness before going to the crime scene;
(6) Proceed immediately to the scene; and
(7) Notify Higher Headquarters of any development.
b. Upon arrival at the scene:

(1) Confirm the reported bomb threat and notify EODT on the need to conduct a bomb sweep;
(2) Conduct or cause a search for suspicious device/s together with persons familiar with the
location; and
(3) Unless a bomb is found, personnel may not order an evacuation of the affected area, but may
inform the person in-charge of the property of the need to evacuate. The following procedures shall be
followed during evacuation:
(a) Evacuation and assembly point routes must be searched to ensure that personnel are not
unnecessarily exposed to danger during the evacuation;
(b) Designate a “safe” assembly area, well away from the threatened structure, out of line-of-sight
of the building and well clear of windows. A minimum distance of 150 meters is recommended;
(c) Never assemble personnel in front of or directly below glassed areas;
(d) Advise employees and visitors to take their personal belongings to eliminate superfluous
“suspicious objects” and to reduce the number of items to be “checked out”;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(e) Select safe and climatically acceptable assembly areas where evacuees may wait for a
considerable period;
(f) Avoid car parks as assembly areas and be mindful of the car bomb potential;
(g) Install procedures to ensure that escape routes are clear. Evacuation routes and assembly areas
must be searched before evacuation;
(h) Install procedures to ensure windows and doors are left open and lights left on; and
(i) Include a procedure for machinery shut- down. This can include plant and equipment,
electronics, computer equipment, securing files and correspondence.
(4) If a suspected device is discovered, cause the evacuation of people in the affected area to a
distance of at least 300 meters away, and maintain security for the protection of life and property:
(a) Any discovered device shall be isolated;
(b) Do not touch, tamper with or disarm any suspected bomb or IED;
(c) Report discovery of suspected device;
(d) Do not permit radio transmission within the premises/building;
(e) Turn off all electricity and gas units within the premises/building;
(f) Secure the area and prevent people from approaching;
(g) Establish traffic control;
(h) Summon ambulance and fire trucks to the scene;
(i) Await the arrival of bomb disposal team; and
(j) Notify Higher Headquarters of the situation.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
34.4 First Responder’s Procedure in Case of Actual Bomb Explosion
The following are guidelines for FRs during cases of actual bomb explosions:
a. Upon receipt of the report:
(1) Identify exact location of the incident;
(2) Alert EOD teams and direct them to proceed to the area;
(3) Notify Higher Headquarters of the situation;
(4) Request assistance of medical personnel; and
(5) Proceed to the scene immediately.

b. Upon arrival at the scene:
(1) Cause immediate evacuation of the injured;
(2) Direct occupants of the establishment to evacuate;
(3) Maintain order and control crowd;
(4) Notify Higher Headquarters of the situation;
(5) Seal off location until EOD Team determines if a secondary device exists;
(6) Conduct rescue operations at the scene when necessary;
(7) Initiate immediate investigation if investigators have not yet arrived and determine the
following:
(a) Time of detonation/explosion;
(b) Time when the call for bomb threat was received; and
(c) Type of device.
(8) Submit incident report immediately; and
(9) Avoid issuing “speculative” press releases or statements.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
RULE 35. PROCEDURES IN DETERMINING AND REPORTING OF TERRORISM INCIDENTS/CASES

The Anti-Terrorism Council headed by the Executive Secretary as Chairman was mandated by law to
assume the responsibility for the proper and effective implementation of the anti-terrorism policy of the
country. The Philippine National Police, among other law enforcement agencies, serves as support
agency for the Council.
35.1 Procedures
a. The On-Scene Commander shall initially determine if there is a high degree of probability that
the incident is a terrorist attack. He also establishes the On-Scene Command Post and initiates the
convening of the Critical Incident Management Task Group (CIMTG) and the Critical Incident
Management Committee (CIMC) regardless of the nature of the attack. (Standard Operating Procedure
No. ODO-2010-003 “Organization and Procedures of Critical Incident Management Committee and
Critical Incident Management Task Group”)
b. In the event of a suspected terrorist attack, the PROs shall ensure the management and
containment of the incident and shall coordinate with the Task Force (TF) Sanglahi-Alpha Commander
during the development of the case.
c. Bombing attacks and explosions perpetrated by the terrorist, the Inter-Agency Protocol on
Explosives and Related Incidents investigation among the PNP, AFP, NBI and PCG shall be strictly
followed.
d. The Philippine Bomb Data Center (PBDC) will be the fusion center for the reporting of ERIs. As
such, PBDC will be furnished with all Post-Blast Investigation (PBI) and initial reports pertaining to ERI.
RULE 36. CYBERCRIME INCIDENT RESPONSE PROCEDURE
36.1 Cybercrime Response
Cybercrime Response is the actual police intervention in a cybercrime incident where the acquisition of
matters of evidentiary value is traceable within the computer’s hardware, software, and its network.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
36.2 Guidelines for Cybercrime Incident First Responder

a. When responding to a cybercrime incident, or to a scene of the crime where computers (or
electronic device, digital media, and other similar devices) are present, it is imperative for the First
Responder (FR) to be able to protect, seize, and search the same and to be able to recognize potential
evidence, using the following questions as guidelines to determine its role in the commission of the
crime:
(1) Is it a contraband or fruit of a crime?
(2) Is it a tool used for the commission of the crime?
(3) Is it only incidental to the crime, i.e. being used to store evidence of the crime?
(4) Is it both instrumental to the crime and a storage device for evidence?
b. After identifying the theories as to the role of the computer in the commission of the crime, the
following questions essential to any further police intervention should be considered by the first
responder:
(1) Is there probable cause to seize the hardware?
(2) Is there probable cause to seize the software?
(3) Is there probable cause to seize the data?
(4) Where will the search and seizure be conducted?
c. Search of computers (or electronic device, digital media, and other similar devices) and seizure
of data therefrom require a warrant issued by the court.
d. Appropriate collection techniques shall be used to preserve the data sought to be seized.
e. The evidence seized shall be subjected to forensic examination by trained personnel. The result
of the forensic examination, as well as the testimony of the forensic expert, shall be made available
during the trial.
36.3 Search and Seizure of Computer
Upon determination of how the computer was utilized in the commission of the crime, and once the
legal requirements have been complied with, the following are the guidelines for the conduct of search
and seizure:
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
a. Secure the Scene
(1) Officer’s safety is always paramount.
(2) Preserve the area for potential fingerprints.
(3) Immediately restrict access to the computer.
(4) Isolate from phone lines.
b. Secure the computer as evidence
(1) If the computer is “OFF”, do not turn it “ON”.
(2) If the computer is “ON”, do not turn it “OFF”, nor touch its mouse or its keyboard.
c. For stand-alone connection or single area connection computers (non-

networked)
(1) Consult a computer specialist.
(2) If a specialist is not available:
(a) Photograph screen and disconnect all power sources and plugs including those at the back of
the computer;
(b) Place evidence tape over each drive slot;
(c) Photograph (or make a diagram) and label parts located at the back of the computer including
its connections;
(d) Label all connectors and cable end to allow reassembly as needed (Example: “Socket” marked
“A” and the “cable End” also marked “A”);
(e) If transport is required, pack the components as “fragile cargo” prior to transport;
(f) Keep it away from magnets, radio transmitters, and from other hostile environment;
(g) Ensure that only a computer forensic expert conducts the search for any evidence contained in
the computer hardware; and
(h) Ensure that the computer hard disk is duplicated by the forensic expert and the original is kept
by the evidence custodian for future court presentation. Further search and analysis shall be undertaken
using only the imaged disk.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
d. For Networked Computers (or business computers)
(1) Consult a Computer Specialist for assistance.
(2) Do not immediately pull the plug to prevent
(a) Severe damage to the system;
(b) Disrupting the legitimate business; and
(c) Possible liability of the officers.
36.4 Guidelines in the Treatment of Other Electronic Data Storage Devices
The FR should understand that other electronic devices may contain viable evidence associated with the
crime. The FR must ensure that, unless an emergency exists, the device should not be accessed. Should
it be necessary to access the device, the FR should ensure that all actions associated with the
manipulation of the device should be noted in order to document the chain of custody and ensure its
admission as evidence in court.
36.5 Search and Seizure of Wireless Telephones
Upon determination of how the wireless telephone device was utilized in the commission of the crime,
and once the legal requirements have been complied with, the following are the guidelines for the
conduct of search and seizure:
a. If the device is “ON”, do not turn it “OFF”:
(1) Turning it “OFF” could activate lockout feature.
(2) Write down all information on display and, if possible, secure a photograph.
(3) Power down prior to transport (bring all power supply cords found at the scene).
b. If the device is “OFF”, leave it “OFF”:
(1) Turning it on could alter evidence in the device.
(2) Upon seizure, take it to an expert as soon as possible, or contact local service provider.
(3) Exert an effort to locate any instructions manual pertaining to the device.

PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
36.6 Search and Seizure of Electronic Paging Devices
The FR should remember that search of stored data in an electronic paging device can be made only
when incidental to a lawful arrest, when consent has been given, and when a warrant has been issued.
36.7 Search and Seizure of Facsimile or Fax Machines
The FR should remember that, if the fax machine is “ON”, powering it down may cause loss of the last
number dialed or other stored fax numbers. The FR should also remember that the header line should
be the same as the phone line, and that if possible, all manuals should be seized along with the machine.
36.8 Search and Seizure of Caller ID Devices
a. The FR should be able to recognize potential evidence contained in caller ID devices such as
telephone numbers and subscriber’s information from incoming phone calls.
b. The FR should remember that interruption of the power supply of the caller ID device may cause
loss of data if not protected by an internal battery back-up.
c. The FR must also make sure to document all stored data prior to seizure of the device,
otherwise, loss of data may occur.
All seized electronic equipment shall be turned over to the Anti-Cybercrime Group (ACG), and in the
absence of ACG in the area, to the local Regional/Provincial Crime Laboratory Office (R/PCLO).
RULE 37. RULES ON ANTI-ILLEGAL DRUGS OPERATIONS
37.1 General Policy and Guidelines
a. The Philippine Drug Enforcement Agency (PDEA) was mandated by law to carry out the
provisions of RA 9165 (Comprehensive Dangerous Drugs Act of 2002), serve as the implementing arm of
the Dangerous Drugs Board, and be responsible for the efficient and effective enforcement of all the
provisions on any dangerous drug and/or controlled precursor and essential chemical as provided in the
Act.

PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
b. The PNP, however, still possesses the authority to conduct anti-illegal drug operations, Provided
that the case shall eventually be transferred to the PDEA based on the Supreme Court Decisions in
People of the Philippines vs. Sta Maria (GR No. 171019, February 23, 2007 and People of the Philippines
vs. Rashamia Hernandez et al., (GR No. 184804, June 18, 2009). PDEA deputation is no longer necessary
or required for PNP personnel assigned with anti-drug units. (PNP Manual on Anti-illegal Drugs
Operation and Investigation CY 2010)
c. The PNP is not prevented from conducting warrantless arrest under Section 5, Rule 113 and
search incident to a lawful arrest under Section 13, Rule 126 of the Rules of Court.
37.2 Coordination Requirements
a. PNP units, prior to any anti-drug operations shall, as far as practicable, coordinate with the
PDEA;
b. In any case, the PNP anti-drug units shall coordinate/ inform the PDEA of the anti-drug
operation within 24-hours from the time of the actual custody of the suspects or seizure of said drugs
and substances as well as paraphernalia and transport equipment used in illegal activities involving such
drugs and/or substances and shall regularly update the PDEA on the status of the cases involving the
said anti-drug operation. (Section 86(a) IRR of RA 9165)
c. The word “as far as practicable” means that the prior coordination with the PDEA may be done,
practiced or accomplished as maybe feasible and possible to be performed. Under the following
instances, prior coordination is validly dispensed:
(1) In remote places where coordination is not possible
(2) When coordination will compromise the lives of police operatives, informant and witnesses,
involved in anti-drug operation;
(3) When coordination will prejudice the apprehension of drug suspects and confiscation of
dangerous drugs and CPECs;
(4) When prior coordination will compromise the entire police operation
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(In the above instances, post coordination shall be made in lieu of prior coordination)
37.3 Handling, Custody and Disposition of Evidence
a. In the handling, custody and disposition of evidence, the provision of Section 21, RA 9165 and its
IRR shall be strictly observed.
b. The apprehending officer/team having initial custody and control of the drugs shall, immediately
after seizure and confiscation, physically inventory and photograph the same in the presence of the
accused or the person/s from whom such items were confiscated and/or seized, or his/her
representative or counsel, a representative from the media and the Department of Justice (DOJ), and
any elected public official who shall be required to sign the copies of the inventory and be given a copy
thereof.
c. The physical inventory and photograph shall be conducted at the place where the search
warrant is served; or at the nearest police station or at the nearest office of the apprehending
officer/team, whichever is practicable, in case of warrantless seizures; Provided, that non-compliance
with these requirements under justifiable grounds, as long as the integrity and the evidentiary value of
the seized items are properly preserved by the apprehending officer/team, shall not render void and
invalid such seizures of and custody over said items.
d. Photographs of the pieces of evidence must be taken upon discovery without moving or altering
its position in the place where it was situated, kept or hidden, including the process of recording the
inventory and the weighing of dangerous drugs, and if possible under existing conditions, with the
registered weight of the evidence on the scale focused by the camera, in the presence of persons
required, as provided under Section 21, Art II, RA 9165.
e. The seizing officer must mark the evidence with his initials indicating therein the date, time and
place where the evidence was found and seized. The seizing officer shall secure and preserve the
evidence in a suitable evidence bag or in an appropriate container for further laboratory examination.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
f. Where the situation requires urgent action suspected drug evidence acquired may be “field-
tested” using a drug test kit. If the result is positive this will be the basis of the seizure and the conduct
of further drug analysis.
g. Within twenty-four (24) hours upon confiscation/seizure of dangerous drugs, plant sources of
dangerous drugs, controlled precursors and essential chemicals, as well as instruments/paraphernalia
and/or laboratory equipment, the same shall be submitted to the PNP Crime Laboratory for laboratory
examination and proper disposition.
h. Containers, packaging, equipment, etc., suspected of containing trace amounts of drugs

including controlled precursors and essential chemicals will be considered drug evidence and shall be
submitted for analysis.
i. In every negotiation operation, a “seizing officer” shall be designated who shall be responsible
for the inventory and initial custody of all drug and non-drug evidence during the anti-drug operations.
These will later be turned over to the investigation officer or any member of the apprehending team, as
the case maybe, or to the Crime Laboratory for laboratory examination and proper disposition. (Annex
“GG”- Chain of Custody Form)
j. Cellphones, computers/laptops or any other electronic equipment or gadgets shall be properly

preserved for evidentiary purposes and technical exploitation.
k. A certification of the forensic laboratory examination results, which shall be done under oath by
the forensic laboratory examiner, shall be issued within twenty- four (24) hours after the receipt of the
subject item/s: Provided, that when the volume of the dangerous drugs, plant sources of dangerous
drugs, and controlled precursors and essential chemicals does not allow the completion of testing within
the time frame, a partial laboratory examination report shall be provisionally issued stating therein the
quantities of dangerous drugs still to be examined by the forensic laboratory: Provided, however, that a
final certification shall be issued on the completed forensic laboratory examination on the same within
the next twenty-four (24) hours.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
RULE 38. RULES ON ANTI-KIDNAPPING OPERATIONS
The Anti-Kidnapping Group (AKG) is the PNP’s lead unit in the conduct of anti-kidnapping operations
which operates in close coordination with the local police units, other law enforcement agencies and the
community.
38.1 Types of Kidnapping
a. Kidnapping by Organized Crime Group/Criminal Group (with ransom)
b. Kidnapping by Threat Groups/Terrorists
c. Kidnapping by Other Individuals
38.2 Concept of Operation
a. Upon receipt of kidnapping incident report, the police officer shall make an incident recording,
deploy first responders and alert all concerned authorities/ tasked groups like the local territorial units,
Criminal Investigation and Detection Group and the Anti- Kidnapping Group (AKG).
b. Upon initial assessment of the type of kidnapping and upon confirmation that the kidnapping
incident is true, the case shall be referred to the AKG, other territorial units or to higher authority
c. If the kidnapping was perpetrated by Organized Crime Group/Criminal Group (OCG/CG) and
with ransom demand, it shall be referred to the AKG for their initial action/operational response.
d. If the kidnapping was perpetrated by Threat Groups/ Terrorists, it shall be referred to the higher
authorities for the activation of AFP-PNP Joint Task Force, Critical Incident Management Committee
(CIMC) or Critical Incident Management Task Group (CIMTG); local Chief Executive; and other concerned
agencies.
e. If kidnapping was perpetrated by other individuals, it shall be referred to the concerned PNP
territorial units for appropriate operational response.
38.3 Anti-Kidnapping Operation Flowchart
(Annex “HH” – Anti Kidnapping Operation Flowchart)
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
RULE 39. PNP CRITICAL INCIDENT MANAGEMENT OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES
As a matter of policy, human-induced (man-made) critical incidents are the responsibilities of the
National and Local Peace and Order Council (NPOC) while natural calamities and disasters are the
responsibilities of the National and Local Disaster Risk Reduction and Management Council (NDRRMC).
Lower level organizations of the NPOC and NDRRMC take cognizance of the responsibilities ascribed in
their national organization. The PNP, being at the forefront of crisis situations, must play an active role
by organizing its own Incident Management Committee (IMC) in support to the NPOC and NDRRMC.
The Secretary of the Interior and Local Government is designated as the Cabinet - Officer Primarily
Responsible (C-OPR) for threats to peace and order such as civil disturbance, violent labor strikes, riots,
anarchy, disorderly mass demonstrations. The SILG acts also as the Vice Chairman on Disaster
Preparedness, NDRRMC.
39.1 Types of Incidents:
PNP incident management operations complement the Peace and Order Councils (POCs) – CMCs and
DRRMCs at all levels from the national, regional, provincial, city and municipal levels. The procedures
under this Rule shall be observed by all PNP Units/Offices with respect to their roles in addressing man-
made incidents and police responses to natural/disaster incidents. (PNP MC 2013-021 “PNP Critical
Incident Management Operational Procedures”)
a. Man-Made Incidents - In the event of man-made incidents, the PNP shall respond to two
different situations:
(1) To manage an incident that could be resolved by the responding policemen without the
involvement of CMC (ex: hostage-taking of a father to his son);
(2) To manage an incident that needs a CMC–directed operations that requires the implementation
of special tasks by one or more of the urgent services of the Philippine government (ex: raids or attacks
by lawless elements on a community causing significant impacts on the social, economic, security, and
political situation in the affected area). Both actions of the PNP in either situation follow the ICS
operational procedures.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
b. Natural/Disaster Incidents - In the event of natural/ disaster incidents, the PNP shall act as the
first responder in the affected area in order to provide area security and support to the conduct of
search and rescue operations to be spearheaded by the area DRRRMCs.
All actions of the PNP in addressing these critical incidents are in support to the POC – CMCs and
DRRMCs with common objectives of saving lives and properties, resolution of the critical incidents at the
earliest possible time, and restoration of normalcy in the affected areas.
Based on the new National Crisis Management Core Manual series of 2012, the National Crisis
Management Framework provides a comprehensive approach to understanding the components of a
crisis or the 5Ps of crisis management: Predict, Prevent, Prepare, Perform and Post-Action and
Assessment.
39.2 5 P’s of Crisis Management
The 5 Ps are executed in three phases – proactive (predict, prevent, prepare); reactive (perform); and
post conflict (post action and assessment).
PROACTIVE PHASE - is designed to predict or prevent the probability of occurrence of crises at the same
time prepare to handle them when such occur.
a. Predict - attempts to remove uncertainty from the future. The Predict component is undertaken
through Strategic, Operational and Tactical Situation Awareness (SA) processes. Strategic SA is producing
foresight and conveying strategic warnings through Horizon Scanning or Strategic Forecasting. It scans
the environment, identifying weak signals, drivers, inhibitors, wildcards, threats, hazards, risks,
opportunities and vulnerabilities, among others, develops foresight and conveys strategic warnings.
Operational and Tactical SA is producing detailed reports against a specified threat, describing the
operating environment where a threat or a crisis could emerge; the threat or the crisis itself, its
potential of becoming a crisis; and current efforts and capabilities of agencies/departments addressing
the threat or crisis.
b. Prevent - a deliberate action aimed at avoiding future harm by addressing its causes. It is closely
related to mitigation which accepts that a potentially
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
harmful incident cannot be prevented, but harmful consequences arising from it can be minimized by
precautionary measures. The two (2) preventive measures are: the first involves a long-term strategy
that is expected to yield effects over years; and, the other is operational in nature (e.g. target
hardening). Prevention capability is essentially physical security. It is the responsibility of government
security forces with the support of Barangay Peacekeeping Action Teams (BPATs). For man-made
incidents, it requires vigilance and alertness to signs and manifestations of suspicious looking
individuals; warning and alert systems have to be established to alert the population to minimize the
effects of terrorism attacks in terms of casualties and damages, active and passive security measures.
c. Prepare - essential for effective response. It covers six (6) essential activities: Plan, Organize,
Train, Equip, Exercise and Evaluate and Improve. Simulation and tabletop exercises evaluate the
effectiveness of preparations, bring out flaws and weaknesses and enable corrections and remedies to
be effected, to heighten levels of readiness of systems, procedures, organization, equipment and
logistics, to better cope with actual crisis.
REACTIVE PHASE - is the institution of passive and active security measures, remedy or solution to
destabilizing factors or security flaws to such crisis, or emergency, vigilance and alertness to signs or
manifestations of developing crisis, or emergency and establishment of alert systems.
d. Perform - the actual implementation of contingency plans when a crisis occurs, despite the pro-
active measures undertaken. Once a crisis occurs, priorities shift from building or enhancing capabilities
to employing resources to save lives, protect property and environment, and preserve the social,
economic and political structure of the jurisdiction.
POST CONFLICT PHASE - is the situation when the proactive and reactive phases were all done.
e. Post-Action and Assessment - a component which begins when the crisis has been addressed
and the situation is deemed clear. It is in this phase where the organization is returning to business as
usual. Post –
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Action activities seek ways to evaluate and improve prevention, preparation and the actual execution.
39.3 Incident Command System (ICS)
The PNP’s ICS, patterned under NCMCM’s ICS is structured on six major functional areas: Command,
Operations, Planning, Logistics, Finance/Administration and Intelligence/Investigation as an optional
sixth functional area that is activated on a case to case basis. (Annex “AA”- Incident Command System
Organizational Structure)
Every level of the ICS has the corresponding role to play in Critical Incident Management operations.
a. Incident Command/ Incident Commander (IC) – the person designated by the Chairman, CMC to
provide the overall supervision and management in handling incident response operations. He manages
the human and other resources necessary to address the crisis.
b. Command Staff (CS) – Provides technical advice to the IC and they are:
(1) The Safety Officer (SO) – monitors safety conditions and develops measures for assuring the
safety of all assigned personnel.
(2) The Public Information Officer (PIO) – serves as the conduit for information to internal and
external stakeholders, including the other organizations seeking information directly from the incident
or event.
(3) Liaison Officer (LO) – serves as the primary contact for supporting agencies assisting at the
incident.
(4) Negotiation Team (NT) – serves as the lead team in communicating/negotiating with the
suspects or perpetrators of the crisis incident (Negotiation Team will be included only when the critical
incident requires like during hostage incidents).
c. General Staff (GS) – provides planning and operations direction and supervision, resources
procurement and allocation, and support services.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
They are primarily composed of:
(1) Operations/Plans Staff (OPS) – tasked with directing all actions to meet the incident objectives.
(2) Intelligence and Investigation Staff (IIS) – tasked with the collection and display of incident
information, primarily consisting of the status of all resources and overall status of the incident.
(3) Budget and Logistics Staff (BLS) – tasked with tracking incident related costs, personnel records,
requisitions, and administrating procurement contracts required by Logistics.
(4) Administrative Staff (AS) – tasked with supervising all human resources and other administrative
services and support required by the incident.
39.4 Alert Levels During Human-Induced (Man-Made) Critical Incident

Appropriate man-made critical incident alert level shall be disseminated by DO to all concerned offices
through the PNP National Operations Center (NOC).
a. Level 1 (Low) – There is no information to suggest a specific man-made Critical Incident may
occur.
b. Level 2 (Moderate) – Man-made Critical Incident is possible, but not likely.
c. Level 3 (High) – There is a strong possibility that man- made Critical Incident may occur within a
short period of time.
d. Level 4 (Extreme) – A man-made Critical Incident has just occurred or has just been pre-empted;
or incidents are expected.
39.5 Stages in Disaster Management
a. Pre- Disaster Stage - Pro-active Assessment (Level 1 - Green):
When there are no disasters or calamities:
(1) Conduct of Risk Mapping and identification of disaster-prone areas;
(2) Identification of staging areas, evacuation routes and evacuation centers;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(3) Conduct of disaster drills (earthquake, fire, etc.) simulation exercises and trainings;
(4) Holding of regular Task Groups and Sub-Task Groups meeting together with respective levels of
the National Disaster Risk Reduction and Management Councils;
(5) Capability enhancement (Manpower, Machines, Materials, Money and Methods);
(6) Production and distribution of Information Education Campaign materials; and
(7) Conduct of community organizational work for various purposes such as:
(a) Sewerage clean-up;
(b) De-clogging of water ways, canals, esteros;
(c) Clearing of squatter shanties and unauthorized occupants in disaster prone areas; and
(d) Other community mobilization activities.
b. Disaster Response Stage - Disaster Incident Management (Level 2 - Red):
When there is an official forecast of an incoming natural disaster in the country and when an
unexpected natural disaster suddenly occurs in the country:
(1) Activation of Disaster Incident Management Task Groups in areas expected to be hit by the
weather disturbance twenty-four (24) hours prior to the expected landfall or occurrence;
(2) Employment of alarm and warning systems as stipulated under DILG MC 2009-165, such as the
use of police sirens and other portable warning systems capable of producing loud wailing sound;
(3) Activation of the PNP Disaster incident Management Committee;
(4) Coordination with NDRRMC to support its disaster response;
(5) Activation of PNP SCDM National Disaster Operations Center (NDOC) to be co-located at the
NHQ PNP National Operations Center;
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(6) Activation of Command Post by Task Groups whose area is hit by the disaster;
(7) Forced relocation/pre-emptive evacuation of residents in flood-prone areas in coordination with

corresponding LDRRC; and
(8) Conduct of timely and rapid disaster response according to the needs in the disaster/calamity
area such as search & rescue operation, evacuation & relief operation, emergency medical services, and
security & traffic management operation in support and coordination with NDRRMC.
c. Post-Disaster Stage - Support to Recovery and Rehabilitation Efforts (Level 3- White):
(1) Get reports from concerned Disaster Risk Reduction and Management Council the Damage
Assessment and Needs Analysis of the affected areas;
(2) Deployment of relief personnel for relief operations;
(3) Provide security and traffic assistance to returning evacuees;
(4) Submit After Disaster Response Report to C, PNP copy furnished DRRMC; and
(5) De activation of the PNP SCDM by the C, PNP through the Chairman/Task Coordinator, PNP
SCDM when the situation is already manageable in disaster-stricken area.
39.6 ORGANIZATION AND STRUCTURE OF CIMC/CIMTG/ DIMTG
In accordance with Executive Order 320, as amended, NPOC has constituted Crisis Management
Committees (CMCs) at all levels specifically to take decisive action in emergency situations.
a. The Peace and Order Council (POC) Crisis Management Committee (CMC)
The Crisis Management Committee (CMC) is primarily concerned with the formulation of crisis
management procedures, integration and orchestration of government, military/police and public
efforts towards the prevention and control of crisis incidents. All actions and decisions taken by the CMC
shall be within
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
the policies laid down by the corresponding Peace and Order Councils (PCOs). (Annex “BB”- Crisis
Management Committee Organizational Structure)
b. THE PNP NHQ CRITICAL INCIDENT MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE (PNP NHQ CIMC)
In support to the mandates of CMCs, the PNP NHQ shall organize its Critical Incident Management
Committee (PNP CIMC) with four (4) sub- committees namely: sub- committee on criminality, sub-
committee on destabilization/public disturbances, sub- committee on terrorism and sub- committee on
disasters.
This Committee shall take cognizance of all human-induced (man-made) critical incidents at the national
level and shall supervise/oversee operations of concerned units and agencies to mitigate its effects on
the general populace. It shall be composed of TDCA as the Chairman, TDCO as the Vice-Chairman with
TDPRM, TDI, TDO, TDL, TDPL, TDC, TDIDM,
TDHRDD, TDRD, TDICTM and TDIPOs as Members of NHQ CIMC and C, NOC,DO as the Head Secretariat.
(Annex “CC”- PNP NHQ CRITICAL INCIDENT MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE)
(PNP NHQ CIMC)
(1) Sub-Committee on Criminality – shall take cognizance on act/s or omission/s against public law/s
which tends to prejudice the community and is punishable by the courts of justice. TDIDM as Chairman,
Deputy DIDM as Vice-Chairman with the following members: DIPO, DPCR, DO, DI, DC, DL, CIDG, CL, IG,
LS, HPG, MG, SAF, AvSeGrp, AKG, NOC, PIO, RD, PRO, Other NSUs, and CMD, DIDM as the Secretariat.
(2) Sub-Committee on Destabilization/Public Disturbances – shall take cognizance on threats posed
by destabilizers which include military uprisings, demonstrations, rallies, sabotage of key installations,
etc., or a combination thereof, undertaken separately or jointly by anti-government forces from the left
and right of the political spectrum. These critical incidents, backed oftentimes by disgruntled uniformed
personnel and politicians with vested interest, are undertaken primarily to undermine the present
leadership, thereby
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
rendering it unstable and incapable of effective governance or surviving with the end in view of averting
the status quo to replace the government. TDO as Chairman, Deputy DO as Vice-Chairman with the
following members: DIPO, DPCR, DPRM, DC, DL, DIDM, IG, CIDG, MG, CL, HPG, LS, SAF,
AvSeGrp, NOC, PIO, RDs PRO, other NSUs and SOD, DO as the Secretariat.
(3) Sub-Committee on Terrorism – shall take cognizance on acts punishable under any of the
following provisions of the Revised Penal Code: Article 122 (Piracy in general and Mutiny in the High
Seas or in the Philippine Waters); Article 134 (Rebellion or Insurrection); Article 134a (Coup d- etat)
including acts committed by private persons; Article 248 (Murder) thereby sowing and creating a
condition of widespread and extraordinary fear and panic among the populace, in order to coerce the
government to give in to an unlawful demand. TDI as Chairman, Deputy, DI as Vice-Chairman with the
following members: DIPO, DC, DL, DPCR, DIDM, DO, SAF, HPG, MG, IG, CIDG, CL, HS, AvSeGrp, LS, NOC,
PIO, RD, PRO, other NSUs and IOD, DI as the Secretariat.
(4) Sub-Committee on Disaster Management (PNP SCDM) – TDPCR as the Chairman/Task Force
Commander, Dep DPCR as the Deputy, Chairman and the following are the members: DPRM, DI, DL, DPL,
DC, DIDM, DHRDD, DRD, DICTM Other NSUs and Community Affairs Division (CAD), DPCR as the
Secretariat.
The PNP shall organize Task Groups from the National Hqs down to the City/Municipal Police Stations
following the Incident Command System ICS Structure: Critical Incident Management Task Group
(CIMTG) to address human-induced (man- made) incidents and Disaster Incident Management Task
Group (DIMTG) to address disaster incidents.
c. The Critical Incident Management Task Group (CIMTG)
To carry out the mandates of the PNP Critical Incident Management Committee (PNP CIMC) on human-
induced (man-made) incidents, Critical Incident
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Management Task Groups (CIMTGs) shall be organized and replicated at the PRO/NCRPO (Regional)
level down to the PPO/CPO; CPS/MPS (City/Municipal) level following the PNP’s ICS structure. (Annex
“DD”- CRITICAL INCIDENT MANAGEMENT TASK GROUP ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE) (PNP CIMTG)
The Incident Commander shall be designated by the Chairman, CMC and CIMTG to be complemented by
the Officers of the Office/unit who has functional staff functions in the organization.
At the Regional/Provincial/City/Municipal level, the PNPs response to any crisis will be to activate CIMTG
for human-induced incident and DIMTG for natural disaster. The Regional Director/Provincial/City
Director/ COP shall have the authority to activate the CIMTG or DIMTG.
The following are considered as human – induced critical incidents:
(1) Incidents like abduction, involving prominent personalities such as national and local
government officials, foreign nationals (diplomats, ambassadors, consuls, attachés, foreign tourists),
religious leaders from various religious congregations, and other personalities whose involvement in
incidents may result in controversies;
(2) Incidents involving national security such as attacks on vital installations, communities and
prominent personalities.
(3) Jailbreaks;
(4) Heinous crimes like assassination, ambush involving prominent personalities;
(5) Robbery hold-up, armored van robbery, and bank robbery perpetrated by syndicated groups;
(6) Election –Related Violent Incident (ERVi);
(7) Surrender of enemy personalities and notorious criminals wanted by law;
(8) Coup d’etat; and

PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
(9) Other similar man-made critical incidents that may result in human casualties and/or
destruction of properties.
As applicable, the following shall be designated to handle the functional responsibilities of the CIMTG
depending on the level of its activation:
Incident Commander : DRDO/DDO/DPDO/
DCDO/DCOPO
Deputy Incident: C, ROPD/C, DOPD/C,
Commander OPB/ C, OPNS Public Information Officer : Unit C, PIO Liaison Officer : PCR
Officer
Safety Officer : AC, ROPD/AC, DOPD/ AC, OPB/ AC, OPNS
Operations /Plans Staff : C, ROPD/C, DOPD/C,
OPB/ C, OPNS
Intel/Invest Staff : C, RID/ C, DID/C, PIIB/ CIIB/C, IIS
Budget And Logistics Staff : C, RLRDD/C, DLRDD/
C, PLRDD/CLRDD/ C, C/MLRDD
Admin Staff : C, RPHRDD/C, DPHRDD/C, PHRDD/ CHRDD/C, C/M HRDD
d. Disaster Incident Management Task Group (DIMTG)
A Disaster Incident Management Task Group shall also be established and shall serve as a special
operating task group of the PNP SCDM and assist the PRO Disaster Incident Management Task Groups as
the Chairman/Task Coordinator, PNP SCDM may direct. The NHQ PNP shall be composed of the NSUs to
be headed by the Director, PNP Special Action Force (PNP SAF) as Task Group Commander with the
Deputy Director of PCRG as the Deputy Task Group Commander. (Annex “EE”- PNP NHQ DISASTER
INCIDENT MANAGEMENT TASK GROUP ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE) (PNP NHQ DIMTG)
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
DIMTGs shall also be activated at the PRO/ PPO/CPO/CPS/MPS level depending on the affected area. As
a matter of rule, a Regional DIMTG shall be activated if two (2) or more Provinces/Cities are affected by
disaster, a Provincial DIMTG shall be activated if two (2) or more municipalities are affected and a
Municipal DIMTG shall be activated if two (2) or more barangays are affected (refer to LOI 35/10
“SAKLOLO REVISED”). (Annex “FF”- PNP DISASTER INCIDENT MANAGEMENT TASK GROUP
ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE) (PNP DIMTG for PRO/PPO/CPO/CPS/ MPS)
The following are considered natural disaster incidents:
(1) Floods;
(2) Landslides;
(3) Volcanic Eruption;
(4) Earthquake;
(5) Tidal Wave;
(6) Tsunami;
(7) Typhoons;
(8) Drought; and
(9) Other natural hazards that may lead to colossal loss of property and lives.
As applicable, the following shall be designated to handle the functional responsibilities of the DIMTG:
Incident Commander : D, SAF/DRDA/DDA/
DPDA/DCDA/DCOPA
Deputy Incident: DEP IC- DD, PCRG/ Commander DRDO/DPDO/DCDO/
DCOPO
Public Information Officer : Unit C, PIO Liaison Officer : DD, PCRG/C,
RPCRD/C, P/CPCRB/C, C/MPCRS

PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Safety Officer : C, CAD, PCRG/C,
IOB RPCRD/C, IOS P/ C PCRB/C,
Operations/Plans Staff : DD, SAF/ C, ROPD/C,
DOPD/C, P/C OPB/C,
C/M
Budget And Logistics Staff : DD, LSS/ C, RLRDD/C,
DLRDD/ C, P/C LRDB/C, C/M LRDS
Admin Staff : DD, DPRM /C, RPHRDD/C, DPHRDD/C, P/C HRDD/C, C/M HRDD
RULE 40. CRISIS ESCALATION PROTOCOL
The responsibility of addressing crisis can be transferred during an incident if it grows beyond the
capability of the established CIMTG in handling the growing needs of the incident or if there is
jurisdictional change, when the incident moves location or area of responsibility.
Whatever the reason, the transfer of responsibility during crisis must always include transfer of
command briefing which may be oral, written or a combination of both that should be attended by the
key members of the CIMC/CIMTG.
To attain a smooth transition of command responsibility, the table below shows the conditions or
situations in any crisis level that will be considered in the handover of responsibilities from local to
national:
Involve CMC Conditions or Situations
Municipal/City • Local PNP and CMC are in control of the situation

• Appropriate resources are available and capable at Municipal/City level
Provincial • Local PNP at the Municipal/City level are unable to resolve the crisis within their
capabilities
• Municipal/City CMC recommends elevation of the crisis level
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
• Situation requires employment of security forces and utilization of resources of the

provincial level organizations and beyond
• Incident affects two or more municipalities within the same province
Regional • Situation requires employment of security forces and utilization of resources of

the Regional level organizations and beyond
• Upon the recommendation of the Provincial CMC
• Incident involves foreign nationals, either perpetrators or victims
• Crisis affects peace process, national tourism industry and other major industries
National • Incident affects two or more region
• The highest terrorist threat level involving mass casualty attacks
• National issues are at stake such as food, water, energy, security, critical transportation and
communication structure, and environment are threatened
• Upon recommendation of the Regional CMC
RULE 41. GENERAL RULES ON MEDIA RELATIONS DURING CRISIS
a. It is the responsibility of any Unit Head/Chief or Ground Commander to respond to queries

raised by the press, as well as decide on what media lines or press releases would be given out to the
media unless, he delegates this responsibility to the unit PIO or spokesperson.
b. No information regarding the incident shall be released without clearance from the Ground
Commander.
c. Ground Commander must designate/establish a media area for pooled coverage and ensure
safety of all media personnel covering the incident.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
d. Media practitioners shall be confined to an area designated by the incident commander and
never, in the process of hostage-taking incident, be allowed to air live coverage of unfolding event.
e. Suspect/s arrested for any violation of the law shall in no case be presented in a ‘firing line’ to
the media and must maintain a limit of disclosure.
f. In cases when information must be denied/withheld to the press, the basis for such shall be fully
and courteously explained.
g. Ranking officer at crime or incident scenes may provide factual information to the media subject
to the limitation by existing policies.
h. In cases of inter-agency operations, the department/agency with primary jurisdiction will

determine the dissemination of appropriate media lines.
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
The following are new procedures that were incorporated in this Revised Police Operational Procedures
series of 2013:
General Principles
Categories of Police Operations
Operational Procedures
Police Defensive Roadblock
Investigation Procedures
Judicial Affidavit Rule
Crime Incident Reporting System (e-blotter) Unit Crime Periodic Report;
Booking of Arrested Suspects Conduct of Crime Scene Investigation
Procedures in the Investigation of Heinous and Sensational Crimes
Special Procedures
Conduct of Pre-demolition Conference
Police Assistance in the implementation of Comprehensive Agrarian Reform Program
Police Assistance in the implementation of decisions/orders of the court, quasi-Judicial and

administrative bodies that are immediately executory;
Investigation of Violence Against Women and their Children (VAWC)
Procedures in Determining and Reporting of Terrorism Incident/Cases
Cybercrime Incident Response Procedure Rules on Anti-Illegal Drugs Operations Rules on Anti-
Kidnapping Operations
PNP Critical Incident Management Operational Procedures Crisis Escalation Protocol.
SUMMARY OF CHANGES 133
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
ABBREVIATIONS
AFIS - Automated Fingerprint Identification System

AFP - Armed Forces of the Philippines
AKG - Anti-Kidnapping Group
AO - Arresting Officer
AOR - Area of Responsibility
BCPC - Barangay Council for the Protection of Children
BPO - Barangay Peacekeeping Operations CARP - Comprehensive Agrarian

Reform Program CDM - Disturbance Management
CHR - Commission on Human Rights
CG - Criminal Group
CIMC - Critical Incident Management Committee CIMTG - Critical Incident Management Task
Group CIRS - Crime Incident Reporting System
CL - Crime Laboratory
CLOA - Certificate of Land Ownership Award
COMELEC - Commission on Elections
COP - Chief of Police
CPS - City Police Office
CSI - Crime Scene Investigation
CT - Communist Terrorists
CTM - Communist Terrorist Movement DAR - Department of Agrarian Reform DI - Duty

Investigator
DILG - Department of the Interior and Local Government
DPRTG - Disaster Preparedness and Response Task Group
134 ABBREVIATIONS
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
DOLE - Department of Labor and Employment
EO - Executive Order
EODT - Explosive Ordnance Disposal Team
FR - First Responder
IBIS - Integrated Ballistics Identification System
IDVI TG - Interim Disaster Victim Identification Task Group
IED - Improvised Explosives Device
IOC - Investigator-On-Case
IRS - Incident Recording System
ISO - Internal Security Operations
LEA - Law Enforcement Agency
LGU - Local Government Unit
LSWDO - Local Social Welfare Development Office
MPS - Municipal Police Station
NDRRMC - National Disaster Risk Reduction and Management Council
NGO - Non-Governmental Organization NPOC - National Peace and Order Council NSU
- National Support Unit
OCG - Organized Crime Group
OD - Officer on Duty
OPCON - Operational Control OSCP - On-Scene Command Post PAO - Public

Attorney’s Office
PBDC - Philippine Bomb Data Center
PBI - Post-Blast Investigation PCO - Police Commissioned Officer PCP -

Police Community Precinct
PCR - Police Community Relation
ABBREVIATIONS 135
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
PDEA - Philippine Drug Enforcement Agency
PPO - Police Provincial Office
RPC - Revised Penal Code
SITG - Special Investigation Task Group SOCO - Scene of the Crime Operation TCT
- Traffic Citation Ticket
TL - Team Leader
TOC - Tactical Operation Center
TVR - Violation Report
VAWC - Violence Against Women and their Children
WCPD - Women’s and Children’s Protection Desk

136 ABBREVIATIONS
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
GLOSSARY
AFIS (Automated Fingerprint Identification System) – is the PNP Crime Laboratory’s computerized
system that captures, matches, compares identifies and verifies stored digitized fingerprints.
Arrest – is the taking of a person into custody in order that he may be bound to answer for the
commission of an offense.
Buy Bust Operation – is an entrapment technique employed by a peace officer as an effective way of
apprehending a criminal in the act of the commission of the offense.
Chain of Custody – the duly recorded authorized movements and custody of seized drugs or controlled
precursors and essential chemicals or plant sources of dangerous drugs or laboratory equipment at each
stage, from the time of seizure/confiscation to receipt in the forensic laboratory to safekeeping to
presentation in court and destruction. Such record, of movements and custody of seized item shall
include the identity and signature of the person who held temporary custody of the seized item, the
dates and times when such transfers of custody were made in the course of safekeeping and use in
court as evidence and the final disposition.
Child Abuse – refers to the maltreatment, whether habitual or not, of the child which includes any of the
following:
a. Psychological and physical abuse, neglect, cruelty, sexual abuse and emotional maltreatment;
b. Any act by deeds or words which debases, degrades or demeans the intrinsic worth and dignity
of a child as a human being;
c. Unreasonable deprivation of his basic needs for survival, such as food and shelter; or
d. Failure to immediately give medical treatment to an injured child resulting in serious

impairment of his growth and development or in his permanent incapacity or death.
Child in conflict with the law – refers to a child who is alleged as, accused of, or adjudged as, having
committed an offense under Philippine laws.
A “child at risk” refers to a child who is vulnerable to and at the risk of committing criminal offenses
because of personal, family and social circumstances, such as, but not limited to, the following:
GLOSSARY 137
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
• being abused by any person through sexual, physical, psychological, mental, economic or any
other means and the parents or guardian refuse, are unwilling, or, unable to provide protection for the
child;
• being exploited including sexually or economically;
• being abandoned or neglected, and after diligent search and inquiry, the parent or guardian
cannot be found;
• coming from a dysfunctional or broken family or without a parent or guardian;
• being out of school;
• being a streetchild;
• being a member of a gang;
• living in a community with a high level of criminality or drug abuse;
• living in situations of armed conflict;
• being in any other similar situation.
Children – refers to persons below eighteen years of age or older but are unable to fully take care of
themselves from abuse, neglect, cruelty, exploitation or discrimination because of a physical or mental
disability or condition.
Conjugal Visit – refers to the visit of the spouse of the detainee for the purpose of fulfilling marital
obligation.
Crime Scene – is the place from which most physical evidence associated with crime will be obtained.
Critical Incident – is any emergency event, whether man-made or natural, that requires the
implementation of special tasks by one or more of the urgent services of the government and will
generally include the involvement, either directly or indirectly, of the Philippine National Police. It is a
crucial and rapid intervention point at the acute phase of a crisis.
Crime Scene Investigation – is the conduct of processes more particularly the recognition, search,
collection, handling, preservation and documentation of physical evidence to include identification of
witnesses and arrest of suspect at the crime scene.
Custodial Investigation – investigation conducted by law enforcement officers after a person has been
arrested or deprived
138 GLOSSARY
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
of his freedom of action. It includes invitation to a person who is investigated in connection with an
offense.
Destabilization – are threats posed by the destabilizers which include military uprisings, demonstrations,
rallies, sabotage of key installations, etc, or a combination thereof, undertaken separately or jointly by
anti-government forces from the left and the right of the political spectrum. These critical incidents,
backed oftentimes by disgruntled uniformed personnel and politicians with vested interests, are
undertaken primary to undermine the present leadership, thereby rendering it unstable and incapable
of effective governance or surviving with the end in view of averting the status quo to replace the
government.
Detainee/Detention Prisoner – refers to a person arrested due to the commission of a crime/offence by

the arresting unit for custodial investigation. It likewise includes person arrested for crimes which are
heinous in nature, against national security and high profile crimes.
Detention – a restraint of personal liberty or deprivation of freedom of action in any significant manner.
Detention/Custodial Center – an institution secured by the PNP Units concerned for the purpose of
providing short term custody of detention prisoner thereby affording his safety and preventing escape
while awaiting the court’s disposition of the case or transfer to appropriate penal institution.
Detention Officer – a Police Commission Officer (PCO) or Police Non-Commission Officer (PNCO) directly
responsible for the administration and management of the detention facility and the detainees housed
therein.
Disaster Incident – refers to serious disruption of the functioning of a community or a society involving
widespread human, material, economic or environmental losses and impacts, which exceeds the ability
of the affected community or society to cope using its own resources. Disaster are often described as a
result of the combination of the exposure to a hazard; the conditions of vulnerability that are present;
and insufficient capacity or measures to reduce or cope with the potential negative consequences.
Disaster impacts may include loss of life, injury, disease and other negative effects on human, physical,
mental and social well-being, together with damage to property, destruction and environmental
degradation.
Dragnet Operation – is a police operation purposely to seal-off the probable exit points of fleeing
suspects from the crime scene to prevent their escape.
GLOSSARY 139
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Electronic Blotter – is a computerized system that is now being used in Davao City Police Office which
was accepted by the courts, prosecutors’ office and the public in general. Coordination with Supreme
Court administrator disclosed that they are amenable to the idea of using e-blotter for the PNP.
First Responder – refers to a Police Officer who is the first to arrive at the crime scene to provide initial
police actions on the information or complaint received.
Freedom Park – shall mean the venue or place established or designated by local government units
within their respective jurisdictions where a public assembly could be held without securing any permit
for such purpose from the local government unit concerned.
Hasty Checkpoint – is an immediate response to block the escape of lawless elements from a crime
scene, and is also established when nearby checkpoints are ignored or during hot pursuit operations. It
is set up by police personnel conducting mobile patrol on board a marked police vehicle, or those
conducting ISO and foot patrol operations within the vicinity/periphery of the national or provincial
highways.
High Risk Arrest – is the actual restraint of armed persons following a high-risk stop.
High Risk Stop – is the actual stopping or accosting of armed and dangerous person or persons, aboard a
vehicle or on foot, including the power to use all necessary and legal means to accomplish such end.
Hot Pursuit (Cross Jurisdictional Pursuit) – (also termed in the US as fresh pursuit) shall mean an
immediate, recent chase or follow- up without material interval for the purpose of taking into custody
any person wanted by virtue of a warrant, or one suspected to have committed a recent offense while
fleeing from one police jurisdictional boundary to another that will normally require prior official inter-
unit coordination but which the pursuing unit cannot, at that moment, comply due to the urgency of the
situation.
Immediate Family Members – shall refer to the detainee’s spouse, fiancé or fiancée, parent or child,
brother or sister, grandparent or grandchild, uncle or aunt, nephew or niece, and guardian or ward.
Imminent Danger – the danger is “imminent” if it is on the point of happening. It is not required that the
attack already begins, for it may be too late. (The Revised Penal Code, Book I, JBL Reyes). The elements
of imminent danger are the following:
140 GLOSSARY
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
1. Intent of the suspect to harm the policeman;
2. The capability of the suspect to harm the policeman or other persons; and,
3. Accessibility or the proximity of the suspect in harming the policeman and other persons.
Inquest Proceedings – is the informal and summary investigation conducted by a public prosecutor
(called the inquest prosecutor) in criminal cases involving a person arrested, without the benefit of a
warrant issued by the court, and thereafter detained, for the purpose of determining whether or not the
warrantless arrest is valid, said arrested person should remain under custody, and be correspondingly
charged in court.
Investigator-on-Case (IOC) – is the police officer who determines the cause or motive of the crime,
identify and interview witnesses, and effects arrest of suspect/s.
Man-made Critical Incident – refers to special events, acts of terrorism, destabilization and criminal
activities that require prompt implementation of police procedures or interventions to contain and
mitigate the incident as well as to normalize the situation.
Maximum Tolerance – means the highest degree of restraint that the police, military and other peace
keeping authorities shall observe during a public assembly or in the dispersal of the same.
Miranda Doctrine – a principle on the rights of a suspect from forced self-incrimination during police
interrogation as enshrined in the 1987 Philippine Constitution’s Bill of Rights (Article III, Sec. 12).
Missing – Anyone whose whereabouts cannot be established and where the circumstances are out of
character or the context suggests the person may be subject of crime or at risk of harm to themselves or
another.
Mug shot (or booking photograph) – it is a photograph of the suspect taken after one is arrested. The
purpose of the mug shot is to allow law enforcement agency to have a photographic record of the
arrested individual to allow for identification by victims and investigators. They may be compiled into a
mug book or rogues gallery in order to help determine the identity of a criminal in high- profile cases,
mug shots may also be published by the media. The mug shot shall be taken in four (4) manners, front
view half body, left side view half body, right-side view haolf body, front-view whole body. It shall be
printed in 4R size and attached or printed on the Mug Shot Sheet of the PNP-BF. It a digital camera is
used, the camera should
GLOSSARY 141
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
have a resolution of not less than 5 Mega Pixel (MP), pro forma can be downloaded through
didm.pnp.gov.ph)
Necessary and Legal Means – as used in the definition shall include, but not limited to, the employment
of appropriate number of troops, armor assets and tactical or special units to effectively and
permanently quell the threat or present danger, or to swiftly restrain or arrest the suspect or suspects.
On-Scene Command Post – refers to a temporary area established in the vicinity of a crime scene for the
purpose of coordinating all activities or actions relevant to the investigation of the case.
Pat-down Search – is a “frisk” or external feeling of the outer garments of an individual for weapons
only.
Police Checkpoint – a location where the search, which is duly authorized by the PNP, is conducted to
deter/prevent the commission of crimes, enforce the law, and for other legitimate purposes.
Pre-Determined Area – is the specific or projected spot where the armed and dangerous person or
persons would pass or likely to pass and so tactically located as to gain calculated advantage against said
person or persons.
Property Custodian – the Property Custodian is a designated individual who has the authority and
responsibility for the immediate physical custody of all personal property under their control and within
their custodial area. He is the person designated to receive, store, issue properties, attach identification
tags or labels to property to type of object and keep records of incoming and outgoing properties.
Public assembly – means any rally, demonstration, march, parade, procession or any other form of mass
or concerted action held in a public place for the purpose of presenting a lawful cause; or expressing an
opinion to the general public on any particular issue; or protesting or influencing any state of affairs
whether political, economic or social; or petitioning the government for redress of grievances.
Public Place – shall include any highway, boulevard, avenue, road, street, bridge or other thoroughfare,
park, plaza, square, and/ or any open space of public ownership where the people are allowed access.
Reasonable Suspicion – facts that, within totality of the circumstances, lead an officer to reasonably
suspect, or to have probable cause to believe, that criminal activity has been, is being, or is about to be
committed.
142 GLOSSARY
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Rogues Gallery (or rogues’ gallery)/mug shot book – is a police collection of mug shots and pictures or
photographs of criminals and suspects kept to identification purposes.
Scene of the Crime Operation (SOCO) – is a forensic procedure performed by trained personnel of the
PNP Crime Laboratory through scientific methods of investigation for the purpose of preserving the
crime scene, gathering information, documentation, collection and examination of all physical evidence.
Search Warrant – is an order in writing issued in the name of the People of the Philippines, signed by a
judge and directed to a peace officer, commanding him to search for personal property described
therein and bring it before the court.
Security Officer – a properly trained and cleared officer whose appointment is covered by appropriate
orders with the concurrence of the Directorate for Intelligence and possesses the following
qualifications: (1) Cleared in accordance with provision of PNPRG 200-012 dated 29 June 1991, for
access to the highest classified material his office is authorized to handle; (2) Possess a certificate of
training in a regular Security Course or its equivalent In-Service Training Security Course with POI
patterned after an approved Security Training Course; (3) Be conversant with the provisions of PNPRG
200-012 and all other publications pertinent to the duties and responsibilities of a security officer.
Spot Check/Accosting – is the brief stopping of an individual, whether on foot or in a vehicle, based on
reasonable suspicion/ probable cause, for the purpose of determining the individual’s identity and
resolving the officer’s suspicion concerning criminal activity.
Stopping Zone – is the strategic predetermined area strongly sealed off, barricaded and occupied by
tactical forces in a lawful display of authority to maintain law and order or in d efensive response to an
event of criminal nature or of such gravity that occurred or likely to occur calling for a high risk stop or
arrest.
Terrorism – is an act punishable under any of the following provisions of the Revised Penal Code: Article
122 (Piracy in General and Mutiny in the High Seas or in the Philippines Waters; Article 134 (Rebellion or
Insurrection); Article134a (Coup d’-état); including acts committed by private persons; Article 248
(Murder) thereby sowing and creating a condition of widespread and extraordinary fear and panic
among the populace, in order to coerce the government to give in to an unlawful demand shall be guilty
of the crime of terrorism and shall suffer the penalty of forty (40) years imprisonment, without the
benefit of parole as provided for under Act No.4103, otherwise as the
GLOSSARY 143
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Indeterminate Sentence Law as amended. (Source RA 9372-Human Security Act of 2007)
Unlawful Aggression – refers to an attack amounting to actual or eminent threat to the life, limb, or right
of the person claiming self- defense.
144 GLOSSARY
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
ANNEXES
Annex “A”
(Coordination Form)
(Letterhead of Coordinating Unit)
I. (To be accomplished by Coordinating Unit)
a. Date/Time of Coordination:
b. Coordinating Unit:
c. Team Leader:
(Rank/Surname/First Name/MI/Designation)
d. Number of Personnel Involved:
e. Description of Vehicles Involved:

TYPE
MAKE
COLOR
PLATE NR
1.
2.
3.
f. Nature of Operations:
g. Duration of Operations:
(Signature over printed name)
II. (To be accomplished by receiving Territorial Police Unit)
a. Date/Time Received:
b. Name of Receiving Personnel:
(Rank/Surname/First Name/MI/Designation)
c. Name of Receiving Unit:
(Signature)
Note: (To be accomplished in three (3) copies).
ANNEXES 145
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “B”
(Return of Warrant)
(Letterhead of Arresting Unit)
Date
Honorable Presiding Judge
Sir/Madam:
Respectfully return the attached Warrant of Arrest in Criminal Case No.
for Violation of [Annex“A”] issued by the
Honorable Court on with the information that accused,
was arrested by elements of this unit led by
inside the residence of
Arrested person was apprised of his constitutional rights during the arrest and
then brought to the for documentation and proper
disposition. [Annex “B”]. He was referred to the PNP Crime Laboratory Group for physical and medical
examination [Annex “C”] and subsequently turned over to
for temporary commitment [Annex “D”] pending the issuance of a Commitment Order by the
Honorable Court.
Request acknowledge receipt.
Very truly yours,
Incls:
A – Warrant of Arrest in CC No. ; B – Booking Sheets;
C – Request for Physical Exam;
D – Request for temporary commitment; and E – Photo of accused.
146 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “C”
Republic of the Philippines REGIONAL TRIAL COURT
NATIONAL CAPITAL JUDICIAL REGION
Branch , City of
PEOPLE OF THE PHILIPPINES, SEARCH WARRANT NO.
Plaintiff, FOR: Violation of Article , RPC (State the Specific Violations)

-versus-
Respondent
x x
APPLICATION FOR SEARCH WARRANT
COMES NOW, the undersigned,
presently
assigned at and having been duly sworn to in accordance with law do hereby depose and state the
following under oath:
1. That he was informed and verily believes that (name of the person to be searched), who may
be found at the premises (complete address of the place to be searched), is in
possession or has in his control a property (subject of the offense; stolen or embezzled and other
proceeds or fruits of the offense; used or intended to be used as a means of committing an offense),
which he is keeping and concealing in the premises above described.
2. That the undersigned has verified the report and found it to be a fact and was confirmed to him
by his witnesses, Police Officer and Police Officer , who were able to gain entry into the
aforementioned premises of the respondent, and has therefore reason to believe that search warrant
should be issued to enable the undersigned to take possession and bring to this Court the following
described property:
a.
b. (Complete and detailed description of the property to be seized)
3. WHEREFORE, the undersigned prays to this Honorable Court to issue a search warrant
authorizing him and or his men or any peace officer to search the premises and if machines are attached
to the ground, padlock the premises described in this application and to seize and bring to this
Honorable Court the personal property above described to be dealt with the full accord with existing
laws.
City of , Philippines, day of , 20 .
Applicant
RECOMMEND APPROVAL FOR FILING: APPROVED FOR FILING:
(Unit Head) (Chief of Office)
ANNEXES 147
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “C-1”
Republic of the Philippines)
x x
JOINT AFFIDAVIT
We, PO1 and PO1 , both of legal age, bonafide members of the Philippines National Police
and presently assigned with
after having been duly sworn to in accordance with law, hereby depose and declare the
following:
That we were the investigators/operatives tasked to conduct necessary surveillance on (state the
purpose or reasons for such surveillance) located at
That on , at around , in order to ascertain the veracity of the report, we proceeded to (the
exact location of the place intended to be searched), where we were able to gain entry inside the said
premises (state the means employed in gaining entry into the premises) and we were able to see for
ourselves the properties (subject of the offense; stolen or embezzled and other proceeds or fruits of the
offense; used or intended to be used as a means of committing an offense), being kept and concealed in
the above stated premises and particularly described as follows:
a.
b. (Complete and detailed description of the properties)
That having confirmed the presence of said properties on the above stated premises, we are executing
this affidavit to support our application for the issuance of a Search Warrant for the projected search
and seizure of (state the properties intended to be seized) at the aforementioned address and the arrest
of suspects for violation of .
IN WITNESS HEREOF, we affixed our signatures over our printed names below this
day of 20 at Camp Crame, Quezon City.
Affiant Affiant
SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN to before me this
at .
day of
Administering Officer
This further certifies that I personally examined both affiants and I am personally satisfied that they fully
read and understood its contents and that they freely and voluntarily executed the same.
148 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “C-2”
Branch , City of
Plaintiff, FOR: Violation of Article , RPC
-versus-
Respondent
x x
(State the Specific Violation)

DEPOSITION OF WITNESSES
We, after having been duly sworn to testifies, as follows:
Q - What are your names and other personal circumstances?
A - We are and both of legal ages, and married and single, respectively, bonafide members of
the Philippine National Police and presently assigned with the .
Q - Do you know , the applicant for search warrant? A - Yes Sir, he is presently assigned with
. Q - Do you know the premises of in ? A - Yes Sir.
Q - Do you have personal knowledge that in said premises the following properties are being kept, being
used or intended to be used without proper document?:
A - Yes Sir.
Q - Do you personally know who is/are the person/s who has/ have control of the above-described
properties?
A - Yes Sir.
Q - How did you know that the said properties are kept in his/her premises which are subject of the
offense?
A - We conducted discreet surveillance and it was confirmed that
is keeping in his/her premises/residence.
Deponent Deponent
20 at .
day of
ANNEXES 149
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “D”
Date
RECEIPT FOR PROPERTY SEIZED
THIS IS TO CERTIFY that the undersigned has seized and taken possession of the property herein
below described from Mr./Ms. , at
in accordance with Search Warrant No. issued by Honorable Judge

of RTC Branch , dated
which seizure was done in the presence of
Mr./Ms. to whom the original of this receipt was given, in the presence of and
as witnesses, on
20 .
QUANTITY DESCRIPTION REMARKS

Signature over printed name
Seizing Officer
WITNESS TO SEIZURE AND INVENTORY:
1. Signature over printed name
2. Signature over printed name
Address
Date/Time
150 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “D-1”
CERTIFICATION OF ORDERLY SEARCH
TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN:
THIS IS TO CERTIFY that at about of 20 , a team from led by

conducted search in my residence/premises at by virtue of Search
Warrant No.
issued by Judge
of RTC Branch
Quezon City on 20 .
That I was present at all times and has witnessed the conduct of the search which was done in an
orderly manner, no unnecessary force was employed, nobody was hurt nor was there anything lost nor
property taken without official receipt.
That the search was conducted in accordance with law and in view hereof, I do not have any complaint
whatsoever against any member of the
team that conducted the search.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I/WE have hereunto affixed my/our signature this
20 at .
Owner/Custodian of Property Subject of Search
WITNESSES:
20 at .
CERTIFICATION
day of
THIS IS TO CERTIFY that I have personally examined the herein affiant and I am fully satisfied that he/she
voluntarily executed and understood his/her statement.
ANNEXES 151
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “E”
Branch , City of
Plaintiff, FOR: Violation of Article ,RPC
-versus-(State the Specific Violations)
Respondent.
x x
COMPLIANCE/RETURN OF SEARCH WARRANT
COMES NOW, the undersigned Police Inspector of the
, and unto this Honorable Court, most respectfully return the original Search Warrant
No. duly issued by this Honorable Court dated and manifest that:
On , at about , a Search Warrant issued by this Honorable Court was served at the premises of
the above-named respondent at
. (Annex A)
The following articles, subject of the warrant, were found by the said office during the search:
a.
b.
c.
All the articles confiscated were under proper receipts and are now in the custody of the undersigned.
WHEREOF, it is respectfully prayed of this Honorable Court that the return of the Search Warrant No.
be accepted and granting the undersigned to have the custody of the afore-cited articles until
the termination of the investigation.
Camp Crame, Quezon City, this .
Applicant
152 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “E-1”
REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES )
) x---------------------------------------------x
VERIFICATION
I, , after having been sworn to in accordance with law, hereby depose and say:
That all the allegation contained on the Compliance/Return of the Search Warrant are true and correct
and are of my personal knowledge.
Applicant
SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN to before me this day of at
ANNEXES 153
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “F”
FOR POLICE BLOTTER ENCODER USE ONLY Philippine National Police
INCIDENT RECORD FORM
BLOTER ENTRY NUMBER
TYPE OF INCIDENT
INSTRUCTIONS: Refer to PNP SOP on ‘Recording of Incidents in the Police Blotter’ in filling up this form.
This Incident Record Form (IRF) may be reproduced, photocopied, and/or downloaded from the DIDM
website, www.didm.pnp.gov.ph.
DATE AND TIME REPORTED: DATE AND TIME OF INCIDENT: ITEM “A” - REPORTING PERSON
FAMILY NAME FIRST NAME MIDDLE NAME QUALIFIER NICKNAME
CITIZENSHIP SEX/GENDER CIVIL STATUS DATE OF BIRTH (DD/MM/YY) AGE PLACE OF

BIRTH HOME PHONE MOBILE PHONE
CURRENT ADDRESS (HOUSE NUMBER/STREET) VILLAGE/SITIO BARANGAY TOWN/CITY

PROVINCE
OTHER ADDRESS (HOUSE NUMBER/STREET) VILLAGE/SITIO BARANGAY TOWN/CITY
PROVINCE
HIGHEST EDUCATIONAL ATTAINMENT OCCUPATION ID CARD PRESENTED EMAIL ADDRESS (If Any)
ITEM “B” - SUSPECT DATA
CHECK HERE IF THERE IS NO SUSPECT INVOLVED AND THEREAFTER PROCEED TO ITEM “C”.
CHECK HERE IF THERE ARE TWO OR MORE SUSPECTS. THEREAFTER, USE ADDITIONAL INCIDENT REPORT
FORM SHEETS FOR EACH OF THE SUSPECTS.


PROVINCE

PROVINCE
HIGHEST EDUCATION ATTAINMENT OCCUPATION WORK ADDRESS RELATION TO VICTIM

EMAIL ADDRESS (If Any)
IF AFP/PNP PERSONNEL: RANK UNIT ASSIGNMENT GROUP AFFILIATION WITH PREVIOUS

CRIMINAL RECORD? [ ] YES [ ] NO
(If Yes, Pls. Specify) STATUS OF PREVIOUS CASE
HEIGHT WEIGHT COLOR OF EYES DESCRIPTION OF EYES COLOR OF HAIR DESCRIPTION OF HAIR
UNDER THE INFLUENCE? NO DRUGS LIQUOR
OTHERS
FOR CHILDREN IN CONFLICT WITH THE LAW
NAME OF GUARDIAN GUARDIAN ADDRESS HOME PHONE MOBILE PHONE
DIVERSION MECHANISM
OTHERDISTINGUISHING FEATURES (DESCRIBE INDETAIL CLOTHES, VEHICLE, SUNGLASSES, WEASPON/S,

SCARS, ANDOTHERDATA ORACTIVTITHYEOSFUSPECT/SWHICHWEREOBSERVEDBY THE REPORTING
PERSON AND/OR WITNESS/ES TO IDENTIFY THE SUSPECT/S. THESE ARE IMPORTANT AND MAY BECOME
EVIDENCE TO IDENTIFY, ANTDOLTINHKE CRIME, THE SUSPECT/S. USE ADDITIONAL SHEET/S IF
NECESSARY)
CUT HERE. ISSUE THIS RECEIPT TO THE REPORTING PERSON

154 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
ITEM “C” - VICTIM DATA
CHECK HERE IF THE REPORTING PERSON (ITEM “A” IS THE VICTIM. PROCEED TO ITEM “D”.
CHECK HERE IF THERE ARE TWO OR MORE VICTIMS. USE ADDITIONAL INCIDENT REPORT FORM SHEETS
FOR THE DATA OF THE ADDITIONAL VICTIMS.


PROVINCE

PROVINCE
HIGHEST EDUCATIONAL ATTAINMENT OCCUPATION WORK ADDRESS EMAIL ADDRESS (If Any)
ITEM “D” - NARRATIVE OF INCIDENT
BLOTTER ENTRY NUMBER TYPE OF INCIDENT TIME DATE PLACE OF INCIDENT
ENTER IN DETAIL THE NARRATIVE OF THE INCIDENT OR EVENT, ANSWERING THE WHO, WHAT, WHEN,
WHERE, WHY AND HOW OF REPORTING. (USE ADDITIONAL SHEET/S IF NECESSARY)
(DETAILS OF THIS NARRATIVE SHALL BE THE BASIS IN THE ENTRY OF RECORD IN THE PLICE BLOTTER)
AUTHENTICATION
I HEREBY CERTIFY TO THE CORRECTNESS OF THE FOREGOING TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE AND
BELIEF. NAME/SIGNATURE OF REPORTING PERSON NAME/SIGNATURE OF DESK OFFICER
CASE DISPOSITION (For Chief/Head of Office Use Only)
CHIEF OF STATION/OFFICE INSTRUCTIONS NAME OF DESIGNATED INVESTIGATOR-ON-CASE

NAME OF CHIEF OF STATION/OFFICE
CUT HERE CUT HERE
INSTRUCTIONS TO REPORTING PERSON
Keep this Incident Record Transaction Receipt (IRTR). An update of the progress of the investigation of
the crime or incident that you reported will be given to you upon presentation of this IRTR. For your
reference, the data below is the contact details of this police station.
Name of Police Station Telephone
Investigator-on-Case Mobile Phone
Name of Chief/Head of Office Mobile Phone

ANNEXES 155
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Legend
DO - Desk Officer
INCIDENT RECORDING SYSTEM
(Blotter Procedure Flowchart)
START
Annex “G”
WCPD - Women & Children Protection Desk IRF - Incident Record Form
IRTR - Incident Record Transaction Receipt
Note
Where available, the data shall also be encoded/recorded in the e-Blotter.
Quality Service Lane (QSL) is observed throughout the entire process.
Desk Officer Receives Report of a Crime Incident, Arrest or Event/Activity.
Is it a No
Crime Incident?
Yes
Is it an arrest No of a suspect of a
crime?
Yes
Yes
Is the incident concerns WCPD?
No Is the incident an
emergency?
Reporting Person is referred to Duty Officer of the WCPD.

WCPD Duty Officer assists Reporting Person in accomplishing the IRF.
Report is recorded by the WCPD Duty Officer in the separate WCPD Blotter.
WCPD Duty Officer issues IRTR to the Reporting Person.
No Yes
DO immediately dispatches the Alert Team to respond to the emergency,
pursuant to PNP POP.
No Was a suspect Yes arrested?

QSL Duty Officer assists Reporting Person
in accomplishing IRF.
Report is recorded by the DO in the Police Blotter.
DO issues IRTR to the Reporting Person.

Proceed pursuant to DIDM SOP 2011-006 on
Booking of Arrested Suspect.
Report is treated as an Event or Activity.
Report is recorded by the DO in the Police Blotter.
Forward IRF to the Station Investigation Section.

e-Blotter END
156 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “H”
PNP BOOKING FORM - 1 “Medical Examination of Arrested Suspects,
Request Form”
Republic of the Philippines Department of the Interior and Local Government
PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE
Date:
Request for Medical Examination of Arrested Suspect/s
The Duty Physician:

Sir/Madam:
Respectfully request for the Medical Examination of the following suspects who were arrested by
personnel of this Office on 20 :
a. sex
b. sex
c. sex
d. sex
e. sex
Please furnish the arresting officer/escort officer, (Rank/Name)
a copy of the result of the Medical Examination for our reference.
Rest assured of our continuous support on matters of mutual interest. Thank you.
For the Chief of Police:
Rank/Name/Signature of the Desk or Duty Officer
REF: (BLOTTER ENTRY NR: )
Rank/Name/Signature of the Arresting Officer
ANNEXES 157
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “I”
158 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
ANNEXES 159
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “J”
PNP Booking Form - 2A ”Medical Examination Result Sheet”
Republic of the Philippines Department of the Interior and Local Government
PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE

MEDICAL EXAMINATION RESULT
BLOTTER ENTRY NR:
(Attach Medical Certificate)
NAME OF ARRESTING OFFICER/S:
UNIT: UNIT: UNIT: UNIT:

MEDICAL EXAMINATION CONDUCTED AT:
BY: DR. ON:
160 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “K”
PNP Booking Form 2-B
BOOKING MUG SHOTS
NAME OF SUSPECT : _
(Family)(First) (Middle)
Blotter Entry Nr:

ANNEXES 161
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
BOOKING MUG SHOTS BACKDROP
162 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “L”
PNP Booking Form-3 “Turn-over of Arrested Suspect/s Form
Republic of the Philippines PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE
TURN-OVER OF ARRESTED SUSPECT
BLOTTER ENTRY NR:
Date
This is to certify that the following arrested suspect/s identified as indicated:
Name: _ Address: Sex: Age: DOB:

POB

POB

POB
Who was/were arrested on 20 at
_ (time/date).
This further certifies that the arrested suspect/s have been examined by Dr. on at
Rank/Name/Signature of Duty Investigator Rank/Name/Signature of Arresting

Officer
Received By:
Rank/Name/Signature of Duty Jailer
Time/Date:
ANNEXES 163
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “L-1”
Blotter Entry Nr: Date
JAILER’S RECEIPT OF SUSPECT/S
This is to certify that the following arrested suspect/s identified as indicated:
Name: Address: Sex: Age: DOB: POB

POB

POB
who was/were arrested by the (Rank/name)
(designation) ,
on
20
at
were turned over by (rank/name)
(designation) on (time/date) to the Duty Jailer.
This further certifies that the arrested suspect/s have been examined by Dr.
on at
(attached copy of Medical Examination results)
Rank/Name/Signature of Arresting Officer/s
or _
Rank/Name/Signature of Duty Investigator Time/Date:
Rank/Name/Signature of Duty Jailer
Time/Date
Rank/Name/Signature of Witness
164 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “M”
PNP Booking Form – 4 “Suspects Property Receipt”
Suspect’s Personal Property Receipt Form
Date
This is to certify that the suspect’s personal properties/valuables as properly itemized and described
below was received for safe keeping. The items are as follows:
Quantity Items Detailed Description with Brand Name, Serial
Number and other identifiable characteristics

Turned over by: Time/Date:
Received by: Time/Date:
Suspect’s acknowledgement (name and signature over printed name):
Witnessed by: Time/Date:
ANNEXES 165
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “N”
PNP Booking Form – 2C “Tenprint Card”
Tenprint Card (AFIS)
PNPCL FORM NR 452:038 Republic of the Philippines

Revised: 10 Jan 2008 HEADQUARTERS PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE
CRIME LABORATORY
IMPORTANT: (Type or print all information) Camp Crame, Quezon City PNP Control Nr.
Date Taken MM DD YYYY
Region Province City APPREHENSION DATA
Case No. Arrest No.
District Barangay / Zone Police Station No. Charge or Offense
Business Address/ Company / School Place of Arrest:
Photo
Signature of Person Fingerprinted
Date of Arrest: MM DD YYYY
Name & Signature of Official Taking Fingerprint
Arresting Officer/s:
Court /
Final Disposition
Identifying Marks
CRIMINAL HISTORY
1st Offense 2nd Offense 3rd Offense
Region / Province / District
Date Taken MM DD YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD YYYY
Date of Arrest: MM DD YYYY MM DD YYYY MM DD YYYY
Case No.
Place of Arrest:
Charge or Offense
Final Disposition
Arresting Officer
Identifying Marks
Remarks
166 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “O”
BOOKING OF ARRESTED SUSPECTS FLOWCHART

ANNEXES 167
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “P”
(Sworn Statement)
MALAYA AT KUSANG LOOB NA SALAYSAY NI NA BINIGAY KAY
DITO SA HIMPILAN
NG NGAYONG HUMIGIT
KUMULANG
NG
SA HARAPAN NI
AT .
x---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------x
PASUBALI: , ikaw ngayon ay nahaharap sa isang pagsisiyasat na may kaugnayan sa kasong paglabag
sa .
Bago natin ipagpatuloy ang pagsisiyasat na ito, nais ko munang ipaalam sa iyo ang iyong mga karapatan
alinsunod sa itinadhana ng umiiral na Bagong Saligang Batas ng Republika ng Pilipinas na nagsasaad ng
mga sumusunod na karapatan:
a. Na ikaw ay may karapatang manahimik o di kaya huwag sumagot sa lahat ng aking itatanong sa
iyo. Naiintindihan mo ba ito?
SAGOT: Opo.
b. Na ikaw ay may karapatang kumuha ng isang abogado na iyong pinili at kung wala kang
makuhang sarili mong abogado, ang opisinang ito ay nakahandang bigyan ka ng isang libreng abogado
upang siya ang iyong maging gabay o patnubay sa imbestigasyong ito. Naiintindihan mo ba ito?
SAGOT: Opo.
c. Na ikaw ay may karapatang malaman na ang iyong mga karapatang itinadhana ng ating Bagong
Saligang Batas at ang dahilan ng imbestigasyon na ito at ang lahat ng iyong sasabihin dito ay maaring
gamitin pabor o laban sa iyo sa lahat ng hukuman dito sa Pilipinas.
SAGOT: Opo.
TANONG 1: , matapos kong maipabatid sa iyo ang iyong mga karapatan pantao na naaayon sa ating
Bagong Saligang Batas, ang mga ito ba ay iyong nauunawaan?
SAGOT 1: Opo.
T2: Nais mo bang ipagpatuloy ang pagsisiyasat na ito? SAGOT 2: Opo.
T3: Kung gayon, ikaw ba ay nakahandang magbigay ng iyong malaya at kusang loob na salaysay na ito sa
harap ng mga saksi?
168 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
SAGOT3 : Opo.
T4: Kailangang mo pa ba ang patnubayan ng isang abogado sa pagsisiyasat na ito?
SAGOT 4: Opo.
T5: Mayroon ka bang napiling abogado na siyang gagabay sa iyo sa pagsisiyasat na ito?
SAGOT 5: Opo.
T6: Sino naman ang abogadong napili mo? SAGOT 6: Si Atty. po.
T7: Nakahanda ka bang lumagda sa isang pagpapatunay na ikaw ay magbibigay ng iyong malaya at
kusang loob na salaysay sa harapan ng iyong piling abogado na si Atty. , na hindi ka pinilit, tinakot, o di
kaya ay pinangakuan ng ano pa mang pabuya kapalit ng gagawain mong salaysay?
SAGOT 7: Opo.
T8: Ikaw ba ay nakahandang magsabi ng katotohanan at pawang katotohanan lamang?
SAGOT 8: Opo.
PAGPAPATUNAY
Ako, si , taong, nakatira sa
, ay pinaliwanawagan ni
ng aking mga karapatan na itinadhana alinsunod sa ating Bagong Saligang Batas at ang lahat ng
ito ay naganap sa harap ng aking piling abogado na si Atty. .
Ang lahat ng ito ay aking naunawaan. Ako ay hindi tinakot, pinilit, o di kaya ay pinangakuan ng ano pa
mang bagay of pabuya kapalit ng aking salaysay.
Nagsasalaysay
Nagbigay ng Patnubay:
Atty.
ANNEXES 169
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “Q”
Republic of the Philippines Department of Justice
OFFICE OF THE CITY/PROVINCIAL PROSECUTOR
City/Province of
I.S. No.
Complainant, FOR: Violation of Article , RPC (State the Specific Violations)
-versus-
Respondent x x
REQUEST FOR PRELIMINARY INVESTIGATION AND WAIVER OF ARTICLE 125, REVISED PENAL CODE
I, , respondent in the above entitled complaint, and with the assistance of my counsel, wish to
avail myself of my right to a preliminary investigation and for this purpose, I hereby voluntarily waive my
rights under the provisions of Article 125 of the Revised Penal Code. Pending the completion of the
preliminary investigation proceedings, I agree to remain under police custody.
, Philippines , 20
Respondent (Signature over printed name)
ASSISTED BY:
Counsel
(Signature over printed name)
Address Tel No.
Rolls of Attorney No.

170 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “R”
DYING DECLARATION
Contents of the Declaration:
1. Identity of the assailant
2. Consciousness of an impending death
3. Surrounding circumstances of the incident
Questions to be asked when the victim can identify the assailant:
1. Sino po ang sumaksak (bumaril, pumalo, etc) sa inyo?
2. Naniniwala po ba kayo na kayo ay mamamatay na dahil sa tinamo ninyong sugat?
3. Ano po ba ang nangyari at sinaksak (binaril, pinalo etc.) kayo?

Questions to be asked when the victim cannot identify the assailant:
1. a. Ano po ang suot niyang damit?
b. Gaano po siya kataas?
c. Mga ilang taon na po siya?
d. Hugis ng mukha?
e. Tabas ng buhok?
f. Mga ibang pagakakilanlan?
g. Saan po siya tumakbo?
2. Naniniwala po ba kayo na kayo ay mamamatay na dahil sa tinamo ninyong sugat?
3. Ano po ba ang nangyari at sinaksak (binaril, pinalo etc.) kayo?
ANNEXES 171
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “S”
CSI Form 1: First Responder’s Form
FIRST RESPONDER’S FORM
(This Form shall be brought by the First Responder and/or Investigator at the Crime Scene and shall be
accomplished by the First Responders at the On Scene Command Post (OSCP)
Date
THIS IS TO CERTIFY that the Crime Scene (CS) described hereunder was turned over by the First
Responder (FR) to the Duty Investigator /Investigator-On- Case (IOC) with the following gathered
information:
Primary Place of Occurrence:
Secondary Place of Occurrence:
Type/Nature of Incident:
Rank and Names of First Responders:
Time/Date Report of Incident was received by FRs:
Time FRs Arrived at the Crime Scene:
Weather Condition
Time CS Cordoned Off and Secured/Signs Posted:

Time Flash Alarm/Request for Support Relayed by FR to TOC:
A. Names of Victims and Status (Safe/Injured/Hospitalized/Deceased, etc.,):
172 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “T”
CSI Form “4”
SOCO REPORT FORM “1”
Republic of the Philippines National Police Commission PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE CRIME
LABORATORY
DATE
RE SOCO REPORT NR:

PERSON PRESENT AT THE CRIME SCENE
(Note: Please include the middle name of the person.)
Prepared by: Certified by: Noted by:
Recorder SOCO Team Leader Chief of Office
ANNEXES 173
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
CSI Form “4”
LABORATORY
DATE
RE SOCO REPORT NR:
EVIDENCE LOG
Prepared by: Certified by: Noted by:
Evidence Custodian
SOCO Team Leader
Chief of Office
174 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
CSI Form “4”
LABORATORY
DATE
RE SOCO REPORT NR:
SCENE OF CRIME EXAMINATION WORKSHEET SKETCH DETAILS AND MEASUREMENT

N
NOTE: NOT TO SCALE
LEGEND:
TITLE BLOCK
Nature of Case:
Requesting Party:
Victim/s:
Officer-on-Case:
Date & Time Sketched:
Place of Incident:
Weather Condition:
Sketched by:
Witnesses: 1.
2.
Remarks:
ANNEXES 175
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
CSI Form “4”
LABORATORY
INVENTORY OF EVIDENCE COLLECTED
1. SOCO Case Number:
2. Time and Date of Inventory:
3. Facts of the Case:
a. Nature of the Case:
b. Victim/s or Complainant:
c. Place of Incident:
1. Evidence Collected at the Crime Scene:
a.
b.
c.
d.
CONCURRED: PREPARED BY:
Investigator-on-Case
WITNESSES:
Signature over Printed Name
Evidence Custodian
Address
176 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “U”
CSI Form 2: Request for the Conduct of SOCO
Republic of the Philippines NATIONAL POLICE COMMISSION PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE
REQUEST FOR THE CONDUCT OF SOCO
(This shall be brought to the Crime Scene by the Investigator/SOCO Team and to be accomplished by the
Investigator/Investigator-On-Case
before the SOCO Team process the Crime Scene)
Time and Date
FOR : Chief, , CLO FROM :
SUBJECT : SOCO Assistance
1. Request for the availability of SOCO Team to process the crime scene located at
. NATURE OF CASE :
Time and Date of Incident:

2. This request is made with the assurance that the Duty Investigator/ Investigator- On-Case, being
in- charge of the Crime Scene shall remain and provide all the necessary security and support to the
SOCO Team during the whole process until after the crime scene is released.
3. Further request that this Office be furnished a copy of the list of evidence gathered and the
result of the examination conducted thereon.
4. For consideration and approval.
For the Chief of Police:
(Duty Investigator/Investigator-On-Case)
ANNEXES 177
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “V”
CSI Form 6: IOC/Investigator’s CSI Form
Republic of the Philippines NATIONAL POLICE COMMISSION PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE

IOC/INVESTIGATOR’S CSI FORM
(This Form shall be brought by the IOC/Investigator at the Crime Scene and shall be accomplished by the
IOC/Investigator-on-Case at the On-Scene Command Post (OSCP)
Primary Place of Occurrence:
Date
Secondary Place of Occurrence or Finding Place:
Type/Nature of Incident:
_ Time IOC/Investigator’s arrived at the Crime Scene:
_ Weather Condition Time Flash

Alarm/Request for Support Relayed by IOC to TOC:
Time SOCO Team Arrived:
_
A. Names of Victims and Status (Safe/Injured/Hospitalized/Deceased, etc.,):
B. Names of Persons Found at (inside) the Crime Scene by the IOC/Investigator (Address/Contact
Nrs):
(Note: Use the overleaf or back page for extra entries)
178 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
C. Names of Suspects and Status (Arrested/At-large, etc..) and Weapons, if any:

D. Name of Person Found Near or at the Vicinity of CS by the IOC/Investigator (Address/Contact
Nr):
E. Names of Persons Interviewed by the IOC/Investigator (Address/Contact Nr):
F. Names of Persons Who Entered the CS in the presence of the IOC (Medics, Local Officials, etc)
(Address/Contact Nr):
G. List of Evidence That May Have Been Seized or Collected by the IOC/Investigator (If Any):
Description Disposition

ANNEXES 179
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
H. Areas where Initial Search were conducted:
On-Scene Command Post (OSCP) established at:
Names of Other PNP Personnel who participated in the CSI:
Initial Assessments and Impression of the Crime and the Crime Scene:
Possible Motive: _
Other Significant Information Gathered:
Prepared by:
_ Rank/Name/Designation of IOC/Investigator
Signature over Printed Name
180 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “W”
CSI Form 5 - Release of Crime Scene Form
Republic of the Philippines National Police Commission PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE
RELEASE OF THE CRIME SCENE
TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN:
This is to certify that a Crime Scene Investigation was conducted at
from (time/date) to (time/date) by the members of the
Police Station and SOCO Team in connection with the incident.
This is to further certify that a final crime scene survey was conducted on or about and that the CSI
was concluded and the cordon was officially lifted and crime scene was officially released at around
(time) .
SIGNED:
(Chief of Police/IOC) (Time and Date)

(SOCO Team Leader) (Time and Date)
Conformed by:
Owner of the Property/Local Authority/Representative
(Time and Date)
Witness:
ANNEXES 181
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “X”
CRIME SCENE INVESTIGATION FLOWCHART

182 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “Y”
Copy of Copies Philippine National Police Date

CIPLAN (Name of CIPLAN LIKE Ruby Rose)
I. FACTS OF THE CASE (State the brief narrative of the incident)
II. OBJECTIVES
A. IDENTIFY THE SUSPECT/S IF NOT IDENTIFIED
B. GATHER ADDITIONAL PHYSICAL AND TESTIMONIAL EVIDENCE
C. PREPARE AN AIRTIGHT CASE AGAINST THE SUSPECTS
D. (OTHERS MAY BE INCLUDED IN ORDER TO SUPPORT THE SUCCESSFUL PROSECUTION OF THE

CASE)
III. CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS
A. PROFILLING OF THE VICTIM/S
B. DETERMINATION OF POSSIBLE MOTIVE/S
C. IDENTIFICATION AND PROFILLING OF THE SUSPECT/S
D. INVENTORY AND COLLATION OF PIECES OF EVIDENCE GATHERED
E. PROCUREMENT OF TESTIMONIAL EVIDENCE (FROM THE VICTIM if alive, WITNESS/ES, SUSPECT/S

IF WILLING WITH THE OBSERVANCE OF RIGHTS OF PERSON UNDER CUSTODIAL INVESTIGATION)
F. EVALUATION OF THE PIECES OF EVIDENCE GATHERED
G. PREPARATION OF THE CAES FOLDER FOR FILING BEFORE THE PROSECUTOR’S OFFICE
H. FILING OF THE CASE BEFORE THE PROSECUTOR’S OFFICE OR FILING SUPPLEMENTAL PIECES OF
EVIDENCE (IF THE CASE HAS BEEN FILED UNDER INQUEST)
I. MONITORING
IV. ADMINISTRATION
A. SITG ORGANIZATION
B. FINANCES
C. SUPPLIES AND EQUIPMENT
D. TRANSPORTATION
E. COMMUNICATION
F. COORDINATION (WITH OTHER GOV’T OFFICES AND LAW ENFORCEMENT UNITS/AGENCIES)
V. CASE JOURNAL (DOCUMENTATION OF THE DAILY PROGRESS OF THE CASE)
(This format can be modified in order to suit the requirements of the SITG)
ANNEXES 183
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “Z”
Eleven General Orders of a Duty Guard
1. To take charge of this post and all government property in view.
2. To walk my post in a military manner, keeping always on the alert and observing everything that
takes place within sight or hearing.
3. To report all violations of orders I am instructed to enforce.
4. To repeat all calls from post more distant from the guardhouse than my own.
5. To quit my post only when properly relieved.

6. To receive, obey, and pass on to the sentinel who relieves me all orders from the Commanding
Officer, Officer of the Day, and officers and noncommissioned officers of the guard only.
7. To talk to no one except in the line of duty.
8. To give the alarm in case of fire or disorder.
9. To call the commander of the relief on any case not covered by instructions.
10. To salute all officers, and all colors and standards not cased.
11. To be especially watchful at night and during the time for challenging to challenge all persons on
or near my post and to allow no one to pass without proper authority.
184 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “AA”
PNP’s INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM (ICS)
Organizational Structure
ANNEXES 185
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “BB”
CRISIS MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE (CMC)
186 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “CC”
PNP NHQ CRITICAL INCIDENT MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE (PNP NHQ CIMC)
ANNEXES 187
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “DD”
PNP CRITICAL INCIDENT MANAGEMENT TASK GROUP (PNP CIMTG)
Organizational Structure at PRO/PPO/CPO/CPS/MPS
188 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “EE”
PNP NHQ DISASTER INCIDENT MANAGEMENT TASK GROUP (PNP NHQ DIMTG)
ANNEXES 189
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “FF” PNP DISASTER INCIDENT MANAGEMENT TASK GROUP
(DIMTG)
Organizational Structure at PRO/PPO/CPO/CPS/MPS
190 ANNEXES
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
Annex “GG”
Republic of the Philippines National Police Commission PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE
CHAIN OF CUSTODY FORM
Nature of Case: _ Name of Suspects: Time,

Date and Place of Occurrence: Arresting
Officers/Operating Unit: Description of Evidence:
TURNED OVER BY :
(Name and Designation)
Agency/Address :
Time and Date :
Remarks :
RECEIVED BY :
Agency/Address :
Time and Date :

Remarks :
TURNED OVER BY :
Agency/Address :
Time and Date :
Remarks :
RECEIVED BY :
Agency/Address :
Time and Date :
Remarks :
ANNEXES 191
ANTI-KIDNAPPING OPERATIONS FLOWCHART

NO
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
BIBLIOGRAPHY
a. Manual on illegal Drugs Operation & Investigation (AIDSOTF)
b. Criminal Investigation Manual (CIDG)
f. SOCO Scene of Crime Operation Manual (CRIME LAB)
g. Crime Laboratory Operations (CRIME LAB)
h. Crime Scene and Evidence Manual (CRIME LAB)
i. Handbook on Personal Security for Candidates of Elective Positions (DO)
j. PNP Combat Operations Checklist Handbook (DO)

k. PNP National Operations Center (NOC) Incident Management & Monitoring Handbook (NOC-
DO)
l. PNP critical Incident Management Action Flowcharts & Checklist Handbook (DO)
m. Hostage Negotiation (DO)
n. Human Rights Desk Operations Manual
o. Handbook on PNP Three-tiered Defense Manual (DO)
p. Rules of Engagement (DO)
q. Intelligence Handbook (DI)
r. Detective Beat System (DI)
s. Manual for Police First Responders (DPCR)
t. A Manual for Police First Responders (How to Handle Gender- Based Violence) (DPCR)
u. BPAT (Brgy Peacekeeping Action Team) Manual (DPCR)
v. PNP PCOPER (DPL)
w. PNP PNCOPER (DPL)
x. Field Manual on Investigation of Crimes of Violence and Other Crimes (DIDM)
y. Pre-Charge Evaluation & Summary Hearing Guide (PNP Internal Discipline Mechanism) (DIDM)
z. Criminal Investigation Manual (Revised) (DIDM)
BIBLIOGRAPHY 193
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
aa. Investigative Manual (DIDM)
bb. Chiefs of Police Manual (DHRDD)
ii. COPS Manual (DHRDD)
jj. Fundamental Doctrine (DHRDD)
kk. Manual on Crisis Management (DO)
ll. Training Manual for Police Trainers on Human Rights (HRAO)

mm. PNP Guidebook on Human Right-Based Policing (HRAO) nn. Police Manual on the Management of
Cases of Children in
Conflict with the Law (HRAO) oo. Media Relations Manual (PIO)
194 BIBLIOGRAPHY
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
TECHNICAL WORKING GROUP
PCSUPT (ATTY.) ASHER A DOLINA, CEO VI (Ex-O, DO) - Chairman
PSSUPT ROLANDO E ASUNCION (Ex-O, DI) - Vice-Chairman
Members
PCSUPT NESTOR M FAJURA (C,HRAO) PSSUPT THERESEA ANN B SID (C, WCPC)
PSSUPT ERICKSON T VELASQUEZ (C,RAD,DIDM) PSSUPT RODEL D SERMONIA (C,ARMD, CIDG) PSSUPT
JOSE RONY T FORRO (CDS, CL) PSSUPT DANILO S PELISCO (C, LED, DO)
PSUPT MARLON A SAPLA (AC, IOD, DI) PCINSP (ATTY.) ROCHEL S RUMA (LS)
Directorate for Operations:
PCSUPT MIGUEL C ANTONIO, JR Deputy Director for Operations PSSUPT NESTOR M. BERGONIA C,
Special Operations Div PSSUPT WILSON CAUBAT C, Public Safety Division PSSUPT MELVIN RAMON
BUENAFE C, Internal Security Opns Div PSSUPT VALERIANO T DE LEON C, Statistics and
Research Div PSUPT ALETA F ASTRONOMO C, Admin
PSUPT ERIC E NOBLE C, Budget and Fiscal
Chiefs, Regional Operations and Plans Division and Chiefs, Operations Management Division
PSSUPT MARCELO C MORALES NCRPO
PSSUPT ANGELITO D DUMANGENG PRO 1
PSSUPT ALEXANDER P SANTOS PRO 2
PSSUPT SIDNEY N VILLAFLOR PRO 3
PSSUPT MARCELIANO VILLAFRANCA PRO 4A
PSUPT HERMINIO M CALLUENG PRO 4B
PSSUPT LITO B PITALLANO PRO 5

PSUPT SAMUEL C NACION PRO 6
PSSUPT ERSON U DIGAL PRO 7
PSSUPT MANUEL E CUBILLO PRO 8
PSSUPT NARCISO B VERDADEROPRO 9
TECHNICAL WORKING GROUP 195
PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13
PSUPT LEONY ROY G GAPRO 10
PSUPT FERDINAND SIFUENTES PRO 11
PSSUPT FLORENDO F QUIDILLA JR PRO 12
PSSUPT ARTHUR M SANCHEZ PRO 13
PSUPT JAIME C MOJICA JR PRO ARMM
PSSUPT OLIVER A ENMODIAS PRO COR
PSSUPT EDUARDO A DOPALE DIPO-NL
PSSUPT PRIMO B GOLINGAY DIPO-SL
PSSUPT ALBERTO A LUCEA DIPO-VIS
PSSUPT ARNI DEAN DC EMOCK DIPO-EM
PSSUPT JOSELITO D PAJARILLAGA DIPO-WM
PSSUPT MELCHOR B CORONEL CSG
PSUPT ROMAN B DELA CRUZ JR AVSEGRP
PSUPT RONALD MAGNO D BARBOSA MG
PSSUPT PETER D GUIBONG HPG
PSUPT LAWRENCE B COOP SAF
PSSUPT ROLANDO F MIRANDA AKG
PSUPT BEATRIZ S LISINGAIDSOTF
PSUPT WILLY P ATUN PSPG

PSUPT ISMAEL C FERNANDEZ CIDG
PSSUPT ENRIQUE N MAGALONAIG
PSSUPT CARLITO N. FELICIANO PCRG
PSSUPT ELIMER B CATABAY CLG
PSUPT RONALD N ASTRONOMO LSS
PSUPT JONATHAN A CABAL PIO
PSUPT JANET M HOMO HS
PSUPT SIDNEY S HERNIA ODCO
PSUPT DARWIN S MIRANDA EPD
PSUPT FROILAN R UY MPD
PSUPT PERCIVAL P PLACER SPD
PCINSP ARIEL A CAPOCAO QCPD
PSUPT DOMINADOR M MATALANG PNPTS
PSUPT SALVADOR T ALACYANG PNPTS
PSUPT RUBEN B BORRES ITMS
PSUPT RONALD O LEE RID/NCRPO
PSUPT LEO M FRANCISCO ACG
PSUPT GIL FRANCIS G TRIA OTCDS
PSUPT WESTRIMUNDO D OBINQUE ODC
196 TECHNICAL WORKING GROUP

Published by:
Directorate for Operations Philippine National Police 2013
PNP MANUAL
DRILLS AND CEREMONIES AND
PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE

SECTION I
GENERAL DRILLS INFORMATION
1.1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE
This manual provides guidance for PNP-wide uniformity in the conduct of drills and ceremonies. It
includes instructional drills, teaching techniques, individual and unit drill, manual of arms for police
weapons and various other aspects of basic drill instruction.
This is design for used by policeman of all PNP occupational skills, including cadets and recruit in the
initial training environment. So as to maintain consistency throughout the PNP, the procedures
prescribed herein should be adhered to as strictly as possible.
1.2. GENERAL
a. The PNP has prescribed its own drill regulations with the end goal of cultivating
to the full, alertness in the presence of mind of each and every police personnel, not only during drill but
at all times. These attributes of character are essential to the members of the PNP.
b. Drill consists of certain movements by which the police-type squad, platoon, company or
battalion is moved in an orderly manner from one formation to another or from one place to another or
both. These movements are executed with smartness, order and precision. Each individual in the squad,
platoon or company does his part exactly as what he is supposed to do.
c. The primary purpose of drill is to teach a precise and orderly way of doing things. As drill
increases skill and coordination, it accustoms a police to group response, to commands and it promotes
teamwork and discipline. It is important for police personnel to know and understand drill; otherwise its
value is lost. Remember drill is conducted with precision, hence perfection is the only accepted
standard. Drill periods are frequent and of short duration.
d. Ceremonies consist of formations and movements in which large number of police troops takes
part. The troops execute movements together at a simple command. This therefore requires unified
action – teamwork. The colors, the standards and the martial music of the ceremonies - all - inspire the
police personnel to take part in the ceremony with pride in themselves and their organization. This pride
finds expression in perfect responses to commands.
e. Finally, all get a certain amount of pleasure from doing anything well in a joint effort with
others. A police ceremony provides the same reaction. After every successful ceremony, every police-
participant can proudly claim ”I was there” – actively as an officer and personnel in ranks.
1.3. DRILL TERMS – To help understand the meaning of drill terms, the following definitions are
included:
Alignment – is a straight line upon which several elements or teams are formed or the dressing of
several elements upon a straight line. A unit is aligned when it is dressed.
Base - is the element on which a movement is regulated. For instance, in executing right front into
the leading squad is the base.
Cadence - is the uniform rhythm by which a movement is executed or the number of steps or counts per
minute of which a movement is executed. Drill movements are normally executed at the cadence of
quick time or double time.
Center - is the middle point or element of a command. In a platoon of three (3) squads in the line, the
second squad from the right is the center. With four
(4) squads in the platoon the second squad from the right is the center squad (platoon).
Column - is a formation in which the elements are placed one behind another.
Depth - is the space from front to rear of any formation or a position including the front and rear
elements. The depth of a man is assumed to be 12 inches.
Distance - is the space between elements when the elements are on behind the other. Between units, it
varies with the size of the formation; between individuals, it is an arm’s length to the front plus six (6)
inches or about forty (40) inches, measured to be twelve {12} inches.
Double Time - Cadence at a rate of 180 steps per minute.
Echelon: One of a series of elements formed one behind another. Also a modification of line formation
in which adjacent elements are disposed one in rear of the other.
Element: An individual, squad, platoon, company or larger body, forming part of a larger body.
File: Two men, the front-rank man and the corresponding man of the rear rank. The front-rank man
is the file leader. A file which has no rear –rank man is “blank file”. The term file applies to a single man
in a single rank formation. It is also a single column of men one behind the other.
Flank: The right or left extremity of a unit, either in line or column. The element on the extreme right
or left of the line. A direction at a right angle to the direction, on an element or a formation is facing.
Formation: Arrangement of the elements of a unit in line, in column or any other prescribed manner.
Front: The direction in which a command faces.

Frontage: The space occupied by an element measured from one flank to the opposite flank. The
frontage of a man is assumed to be twenty-two (22) inches, measured from the right to the left elbow
and therefore does not include twelve (12) inches between all men in line. The frontage of a squad
however includes the intervals between men.
Guide: The man whom the command or element thereof regulates its march. This is often the case in
battle or on practice marches. In a squad drill, a policeman (number one (1) front rank) is often the
guide.
Head: The leading element of a column. To understand this definition one must remember that an
element is a file, squad, platoon, company or larger body forming part of a still another larger body.
Interval: The lateral space between elements on the same line. An interval is measured between
individuals from shoulder to shoulder; and between formations, this is done from flank to flank. Unit
commanders and those with them are not considered in measuring interval between elements of the
unit with which it is posted. Considered interval between individuals is one (1) arm’s length. Close
interval is the horizontal distance between shoulder and elbow when the left hand is placed on the left
hip.
Left: The left extremity or element of a body.
Line: A formation in which the different elements are “abreast of each other” means on the same
line. The other vital part of this definition centers on the word “element”. A section may be an element,
therefore if the leading elements of several sections are on the same line, it becomes a line formation.
Loose Pieces: Rifles and automatic rifles not used in making stacks.
Oblique: An angle between zero (0) degree and forty-five (45) degrees.
Right /Left Oblique, March is forty-five (45) degrees.
Order, close: The formation in which the units, in double rank, are separated by intervals greater than
that in close order.
Pace: Thirty (30) inches, the length of the full step in quick time. The pace at double time is thirty-six
(36) inches.
Piece: The term “piece” as used in this text means the rifle or automatic rifle.
Point of the Rest: The point at which a formation begins; specifically, the points toward which units are
aligned in successive movements. For example, in executing “On right into line,” the point of rest is the
place where the leading squad halts.
Quick Time: Cadence at a rate of one hundred twenty (120) steps per minute.
Rank: A line of men placed side by side. There are two ranks: the front and rear rank.
Right: The right extremity or element of a body of troops.
Slow Time: Cadence at sixty (60) steps per minute.
Step: The distance measured from heel to heel between the feet of a man walking. A step may be any
prescribed number of inches. The half step and back step are fifteen (15) inches. The right step and the
left step are twelve (12) inches. The steps in quick and double time are thirty (30) and thirty-six (36)
inches, respectively.
Successive Movements: A maneuver in which the various elements of a command execute a certain
movement one after another as distinguished from a simultaneous movement.
To revoke a command: To cancel a command that has not been carried out, or to start a movement
improperly begun from a halt the command, MANUMBALIK, is given. On this command, the movement
stops and the men resume their former position.
Partial changes of direction: To change the direction of a column by forty—five (45) degrees to the left
or right, the command is LIKO HATING-KANAN (KALIWA), KAD. To execute a slight change of direction,
the command PAGAWING KANAN (KALIWA), is given. The guide or guiding elements move in the
indicated direction, and the rest of the unit follows.
Numbering units: For drill purposes, platoons within each company are numbered from right to left
when the company is in line and from front to rear when the company is in column. Squads within each
platoon are numbered from right to left when the platoon is in line and from front to rear when the
platoon is in column.
Post: Post means the correct place for an officer or police non- commissioned officer to stand. This
can be in front, behind or by the side of a unit. When changes of formation involve changes of posts, the
new post is taken by the most direct route and as soon practicable after the command of execution.
Officers and non-commissioned officers who have prescribed duties in connection with the movement
take their posts when the duties are completed. In executing a movement or facing and when moving
from one post to another, officers and police non-commissioned officers maintain a police bearing and
move with smartness and precision.
a. In movements after the first formation, guidon bearers and special units maintain their positions
with respect to the flank or the end of the unit to which they were originally posted.
b. In formation and movements, a Police Non-Commissioned Officer (PNCO) commanding an

element takes the same post as that prescribed for an officer. When giving commands, making or
receiving reports (except squad leaders in ranks), or drilling a unit, a Police non-commissioned officer
armed with a rifle carries it at the right shoulder.
c. When acting as an instructor, the Police Officer goes wherever his presence is needed to correct
mistakes and supervise the performance of the men in ranks.
Counting Cadence
a. Except at the beginning of basic training, the commander or instructor does not count cadence
to acquaint the men with cadence rhythm. When a man gets out of step, he is corrected by the
commander who halts the unit and then moves everybody off in the step. Counting cadence by the
group helps to teach
group coordination, cadence and rhythm. To help a man keep in step, the commander encourages him
to keep his head up and watch the head and shoulders of the man in front of him. The command is
BILANG HAKBANG, NA. The command of execution is given as the left foot strikes the ground. The next
time the left foot strikes the ground, the group calls the cadence for eight steps in a firm and vigorous
manner as follows: ISA, DALAWA, TATLO, APAT. However, do not execute this command in a rowdy
manner. A good instructor holds his counting to a minimum.
b. As policeman begins to master the art of drill, the instructor should try to create a spirit of
competition among individual and between units. Repetition is necessary when teaching drill exercises
in order to ensure skillful execution.
c. Mass commands are used to develop confidence and promote enthusiasm because
they are effective in developing a good command of voice.
SECTION II
COMMANDS AND THE COMMAND VOICE COMMANDS
2.1. GENERAL
a. A drill command is an oral order of a leader. The precise movement is affected by the manner in
which the command is given.
b. The following rules shall govern for a commander in giving a command to participating troops:
1) When at halt, the commander faces the troops when giving a command. In a command that set
the unit in motion (marching from one point to another), the commander shall move simultaneously
with the unit to maintain proper position within the formation.
2) When marching, the commander turn his head in the direction of the troops upon giving a
command.
3) Exceptions to these rules occur during ceremonies.
c. The commander gives command MANUMBALIK (AS YOU WERE) to revoke a preparatory
command that he has given. The command MANUMBALIK must be given prior to the command of
execution. The commander cannot cancel the command of execution with MANUMBALIK. If an
improper command is not revoked, the personnel execute the movement in the best manner possible.
2.2. TWO-PART COMMANDS
a. Most drill commands have two parts, the preparatory command and the command of
execution. Neither is a command itself, but the parts are termed command to simplify instruction. The
command HANDA (READY), SIPAT (AIM), PUTOK (FIRE) are considered to be two-part commands even
though they contain two pre-commands.
1) The preparatory command states the movement to be carried out and mentally prepares the
troop for its execution. In the command PASULONG, KAD, the preparatory command is PASULONG.
2) The command of execution tells when the movement is to be carried out. In PASULONG, KAD,
the command of execution is KAD.
b. To change direction of a unit when marching, the preparatory command and command of
execution for each movement are given so they begin and end on the foot in the direction of the turn:
KANANG PANIG, NA (RIGHT FLANK) is given
as the right foot strikes the marching surface and KALIWANG PANIG, (LEFT FLANK) as the left foot strikes
the marching surface. The interval between the preparatory command and the command of execution is
normally one step or count.
2.3. ENGLISH VERSION TO FILIPINO VERSION
a. The PNP commands were derived from the AFP English version and subsequently translated to
Filipino version. This attempt to localize the English version has brought about varied interpretations as
to the preciseness of the “term” being used. In the command of execution for example, the words RAP,
NA, KAD, TA and others are sometimes misused/interchanged as the commander may opt to what he
thinks is appropriate.
b. To provide for uniformity, simplicity and preciseness and to suit the Filipino commands in terms
of voice control, distinctiveness, inflections and cadence the following guidelines are set forth as a rule:
1) In general, the word NA is used to signal the command of execution except the following:
a) TA – (Abbreviated SANDATA) manual of arms for rifles and pistol, except for KALIS and
TALIBONG, which fall under the general rule.
b) KAD – (Abbreviated LAKAD) from at rest to motion. Example: PASULONG, KAD. For other
commands given while in motion , the general rule will apply. Example: LIKO SA KANAN, NA.
c) TO – (Abbreviated HINTO) from motion to rest.
d) RAP – (Abbreviated HARAP) in HANDA HARAP as literal translation of READY FRONT.
e) DA – (Abbreviated HUMANDA) for attention.
f) NGA – ( Abbreviated PAHINGA) in “TIKAS PAHINGA” or PARADE
REST.
g) Combined Commands
h) Supplementary Commands
i) Mass Commands
j) Directives
2.4. COMBINED COMMANDS
In some commands, the preparatory command and the command of execution are combined; for
example, HUMANAY (FALL IN), PALUWAG (AT EASE), LUMANSAG (DISMISS). These commands are given
without inflection and
at a uniformly high pitch and loudness comparable to that for a normal command of execution.
2.5. SUPPLEMENTARY COMMANDS
a. Supplementary commands are oral orders given by a subordinate
leader to reinforce and complement a commander’s order. They ensure proper understanding and
execution of a movement. They extend to the lowest subordinate exercising control over an element by
the command as a separate element within the same formation.
b. A supplementary command may be a preparatory command, a portion of a pre-command or a

two-part command. It is normally given between the pre- command and the command of execution.
However, when a command requires element of a unit to execute a movement different from other
elements within the same formation, or the same movement at a different time, subordinate leaders
give their supplementary commands at the time prescribed by the procedure covering that particular
movement. Example: the platoon is in column formation, and the platoon leader commands
DALAWANG TUDLING SUNUDSUNURAN MULA SA KALIWA (pause) KAD, the first and second TUDLING
leaders command PASULONG; the third and fourth TUDLING leaders command MANATILI (Stand fast).
On the command of the execution KAD, the first and second squad march forward. At the appropriate
time, the squad leader (third squad) nearest the moving element commands LIKO HATING KALIWA, KAD
(for both remaining squads). As the third and fourth squad leaders reach the line of march, they
automatically execute a LIKO HATING KANAN and obtain normal distance behind the first and second
squads.
c. A subordinate leader gives all supplementary commands over his right shoulder except when his
command is based on the actions of an element on his left or when the sub-element is to execute a LIKO
SA KALIWA, LIKO HATING KALIWA and KALIWANG PANIG. Giving commands over the left shoulder
occurs when changing configuration or a formation, such as forming a file or a column of fours and
reforming.
NOTE: When in formation at present arms and the preparatory command of order of arms is given, the
subordinate leaders terminate their salute before giving supplementary commands.
d. Supplementary commands are not given by a sub-leader for the combined commands
HUMANAY, PALUWAG, TIWALAG, or for a mass drill when his element forms part of a massed
formation. However, supplementary commands are given when forming a mass or when forming a
column from a mass.
e. Except for commands while in mass formation, platoon leaders give supplementary commands
following all preparatory commands of the commander. When the preparatory command is BALANGAY,
the platoon leaders immediately come to attention and command PULUTONG. The company
commander allows for all supplementary commands before giving the command of execution.
f. When no direction is given, the response is understood to be forward, when no rate of march is
given, the response is SIGLANG HAKBANG (QUICK TIME). Normally when a direction or rate of march is
included in the pre-command, only the direction or rate of march is given as a supplementary command.
2.6. MASS COMMANDS
a. Mass commands may be used to develop confidence and promote enthusiasm. (They are
definitely effective in developing a command voice when instructing a leadership course).
b. When the instructor wants the unit to use mass commands, he commands SA IYONG PAG-UTOS
(AT YOUR COMMAND). The instructor gives a preparatory command describing the movement to be
performed; for example, face the platoon to the right. The command of execution is NA (COMMAND).
When the instructor says NA (COMMAND), all personnel in the unit give the command HARAP SA
KANAN (RIGHT FACE), in unison and simultaneously executes the movement.
c. To give mass commands while marching, the instructor gives the preparatory command for the
movement and substitutes NA (COMMAND) for the command of execution NA (MARCH); for example,
LIKO SA KANAN, NA (COLUMN RIGHT, COMMAND); PABALIK, NA (REAR, COMMAND).
d. Mass commands for the execution of the manual of arms are given in the same manner as
described in subparagraph a-c.
e. When the instructor wants to stop mass commands, he commands SA AKING PAG-UTOS (AT MY
COMMAND), the normal method of drilling is then resumed.
2.7. DIRECTIVES
a. Directives are oral orders given by the commander that direct or cause a subordinate leader to
take action.
b. The commander gives directives rather than commands when it is more appropriate for
subordinate elements to execute a movement or perform a task as independent elements of the same
formation.
c. Directives are given in sentence form and are normally prefixed by the terms”IBUKA ANG
TALUDTOD AT ITUNGKO ANG SANDATA”. Example: “ITANGHAL ANG SANDATA”.
d. “PAMUNUAN ANG INYONG PANGKAT O TILAP, PULUTONG, BALANGAY” are the only directive
on which commander relinquishes his command and on which salutes are exchanged.
e. A subordinate Commander upon receiving a directive will resort to the normal two-part
command.
THE COMMAND VOICE
2.8. GENERAL
A correctly delivered command will be understood by everyone in the unit. Correct commands have a
tone, cadence and a snap that demand willing, correct and immediate response.
2.9. VOICE CONTROL

a. The loudness of a command is adjusted to the number of policemen in the unit. Normally, the
commander is to the front and center of the unit and speaks facing the unit so that his voice reaches
everyone.
b. It is necessary for the voice to have carrying power, but excessive exertion is unnecessary and
harmful. A typical result of trying too hard is the almost unconscious tightening of the neck muscle to
force sound out. This produces strain, hoarseness, sore throat and worst of all instinct and jumbled
sounds instead of clear commands. Ease is achieved through good posture, proper breathing and correct
adjustment of throat and mouth muscles and confidence.
c. The best posture for giving commands is the position of attention. Policemen in formation
notice the posture of their leader. If his posture is improper (relaxed, slouched, stiff or uneasy) the
subordinates will imitate it.
d. The most important muscle used in breathing is the diaphragm – the large muscle that
separates the chest cavity from the abdominal cavity. The diaphragm automatically controls normal
breathing and used to control the breath in giving commands.
e. The throat, mouth and nose act as amplifiers and help to give fullness (resonance) and
projection to the voice.
2.10. DISTINCTIVENESS
a. Distinctiveness depends on the correct use of the tongue, lips and teeth which form the
separate sounds of a word and group the sounds into syllables. Distinct commands are effective;
indistinct commands cause confusion. All commands can be pronounced correctly without loss of effect.
Emphasize correct enunciation (distinctiveness). To enunciate clearly, make full use of the lips, tongue
and lower jaw.
b. To develop the ability to give clear, distinct commands, practice giving commands slowly and
carefully, prolonging the syllables. Then, gradually increase the rate of delivery to develop proper
cadence, still enunciating each syllable distinctly.
2.11. INFLECTION
Inflection is the rise and fall in pitch and the tone changes of voice.
a. The preparatory command is the command that indicates movement. Pronounce each
preparatory command with a rising inflection. The most desirable pitch, when beginning a preparatory
command, is near the level of the natural speaking voice. A common fault with beginners is to start the
preparatory command in a pitch so high that, after employing a rising inflection for the preparatory
command it is impossible to give the command execution with clarity or without strain. A good rule to
remember is to begin a command near the natural pitch of the voice.
b. The command of execution is the command that indicates when a movement is to be executed.
Give it in a sharper tone and in a slightly higher pitch than the last syllable of the preparatory command.
It must be given with plenty of snap. The best way to develop a command voice is to practice.
c. In combined commands, such as HUMANAY (FALL IN) and TIWALAG (FALL OUT), the preparatory
command and command of execution are combined. Give these commands without inflection and with
the uniform high pitch and loudness of a normal command of execution.
2.12. CADENCE
a. Cadence, in commands, means a uniform and rhythmic flow of words. The interval between
commands is uniform in length for any given troop unit. This is necessary so that everyone in the unit
will be able to understand the preparatory command and will know when to expect the command of
execution. For the squad or platoon in march, except when the supplementary commands need to be
given, the interval of time is that which allows one step (or count) between the preparatory command
and the command of execution. The same interval is used for commands given at the halt. Longer
commands, such as KANANG PANIG NA (RIGHT FLANK MARCH) must be started so that the preparatory
command will end on the proper foot and leave a full count between the preparatory command and
command of execution.
b. When the supplementary commands are necessary, the commander should allow for one count
between the preparatory command and the subordinate leader’s supplementary command and an
additional count after the subordinate command but before the command of execution.
SECTION III
INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENTS WITHOUT ARMS MOVEMENTS WHILE AT HALT
3.1. GENERAL
a. This chapter contains most of the individual positions and stationary movements required in
drill. This position and the correct execution of the movement, in every detail, should be learned
before proceeding to other drill movements.
b. Movements are initiated from the position of attention. However, some rest movements may be
executed from other rest positions.
3.2. POSITION OF ATTENTION
a. In coming to attention, bring your heels together smartly on the same line. Hold them as near
each other as the conformation of your body permits.
b. Turn you feet out equally, forming an angle of 45 degrees.
c. Keep your knees straight without stiffness.
d. Hold your hips level, your body erect, your chest lifted and arched, your shoulders square and
even.
e. Let your arms hang straight down without stiffness, thumbs along the seams of your trousers.
Hold the back of your hands out, with the fingers held naturally so that the thumbs rest along the tip of
the forefingers.
f. Keep your head erect and squarely to the front, your chin drawn in so that the axis of your head
and neck is vertical. Look straight to the front (about 30 yards ahead.
g. Rest the weight of your body equally on the heels and the balls of your
feet.
h. Remain silent and do not move unless otherwise directed.
3.3. REST POSITION AT THE HALT
a. Parade Rest – at the command PAHINGA, or TIKAS, PAHINGA, move your left foot smartly 12
inches to the left of the right foot. Keep your legs straight so that the weight of your body rests on both
feet. At the same time, your arms hanging naturally clasp your hands behind your back, just below the
belt line, palms flattened to the rear, thumb and fingers of your left hands clasping the right hand
without stiffness. Remain silent and do not move. This command is executed from the
position of attention only. Tindig Paluwag, Paluwag and Pahinga may be executed from this position.
b. Stand At Ease – the command for this movement is TINDIG PALUWAG. On the command of
execution PALUWAG, execute parade rest, but turn the head and eyes directly toward the person in
charge of the formation. At ease or rest may be executed from this position.
c. At Ease – The command for this movement is PALUWAG. On the command PALUWAG, the
policeman must remain standing and silent with his right foot in place; he can turn his head left or right
and bring his hand forward. PAHINGA may be executed from this position.
d. Rest – The command for this movement is PAHINGA. On the command PAHINGA, the policeman
may move or talk, unless otherwise directed, with his right foot in place. At Ease may be executed from
this position.
e. Fall Out
1) At the command TIWALAG, you can leave the ranks but you are required to remain in the
immediate area. You resume your former place at attention in ranks at the command HUMANAY.
2) Being at any of the rests except TIWALAG, to resume the position of attention, the commands
are TILAP, HUMANDA. At the command TILAP, take the position of parade rest; at the command
HUMANDA, take the position of attention.
3.4. EYES RIGHT
a. Used as a courtesy to reviewing officers and dignitaries during parades and ceremonies. It is a
one-count movement and the command is given while halted at attention or marching at quick time.
The command is HANDA KANAN TINGIN (KALIWA), NA; HANDA, HARAP.
b. Assume you are halted at attention. Upon the approach of the reviewing officer, the unit leader
will command, TINGIN SA KANAN. On the command of execution, NA, and for the account of one, all
members of the formation will smartly turn their heads 45 degrees to the right. The shoulders remain
square to the front. There is no command to terminate this movement. When the reviewing officer
comes into your line of vision, you will follow his movements with your head and eyes until they are
straight to the front. At this time the movement is terminated, and you will remain at the position of
attention until given another command.
3.5. FACING AT THE HALT
a. Facing to the flank is a two-count movement. The command is HARAP SA KANAN, NA. On the
command of execution NA, slightly raise the left heel and right toe, and turn 90 degrees to the right
heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the ball of the right foot. Keep the right leg straight without
stiffness and allow the left leg to bend naturally. On the second count, place the left foot beside the right
foot, resuming the position of attention. Arms remain at the sides, as in the position of
attention, throughout this movement. When the command is HARAP SA KALIWA, NA, the reverse
movement shall apply.
b. Facing to the rear is a two-count movement. The command is TUMALIKOD, NA. On the
command of execution NA, move the toe of the right foot to a point touching the marching surface
about half the length of the foot to the rear and slightly to the left of the left heel. Rest most of the
weight of the heel of the left foot and allow the right knee to bend naturally. On the second count, turn
to the right 180 degrees on the left heel and ball of the right foot, resuming the position the position of
attention. Arms remain at the sides, as in the position of attention, throughout this movement.
3.6. HAND SALUTE

a. The hand salute is a one-count movement. The command is PUGAY KAMAY, NA. When wearing
headgear with visor (with or without glasses), on the command of execution NA, raise the right hand
sharply, fingers and thumb extended and joined, palm facing down, and place the tip of the right
forefinger on the rim of the visor slightly to the right of the right eye. The outer edge of the hand is
barely canted downward so that neither the back of the hand nor the palm is clearly visible from the
front. The hand and wrist are straight, the elbow inclined slightly forward, and the upper arm is
horizontal to the ground with your forearm inclined at 45 degrees.
This position and stationary movement required in drills should be executed properly and should be
learned before proceeding to other drill movements.
SALUTING (Unarmed)
b. When hearing headgear without visor (or uncovered) and not wearing glasses, execute the hand
salute in the same manner as previously described in sub-paragraph a, except touch the tip of the right
forefinger to the forehead near and slightly t the right of the right eyebrow.
c. When wearing headgear without visor (or uncovered) and wearing glasses, execute the hand
salute in the same manner as described in sub paragraph a, except touch the tip of the right forefinger
to that point on the glasses where the temple piece of the frame meets the right edge of the right brow.
d. Order arms from the hand salute is a one-count movement. The command is BABA, NA. On the
command of execution NA, return the hand sharply to the side, resuming the position of attention.
3.7. REMOVE/RETURN HEADGEAR
a. The remove headgear is a two-count movement. The command is ALIS KUPYA, NA. On the last
note of the preparatory command ALIS KUPYA, hold your visor with your right hand (with your left hand
if under arms), include the chin strap if making use of it. And at the command of execution NA remove
the headgear from your head and bring the cap to your side as illustrated in page 8.
b. In returning the headgear, the command is BALIK KUPYA, NA. On the last note of the
preparatory command BALIK KUPYA, replace the headgear (if making use of a chin strap, fix the strap in
your chin and hold your visor again) holding your visor; at the command of execution NA bring down
your hand smartly to the position of order arms/attention.
STEPS AND MARCHING
3.8. GENERAL
a. This section contains all the steps in marching of the individual police. These steps should be
learned thoroughly before proceeding to unit drill.
b. All marching movements executed from the halt are initiated from the position of attention.
c. Except for route step march and ease march, all marching movements are executed while
marching at attention. Marching at attention is the combination of the position of attention and the
procedures of attention and the procedures for the prescribed step executed simultaneously.
d. When executed from the halt, all steps right step begin with the left foot.
e. For short-distance marching movements, the commander may designate the number of steps
forward, backward, or sideward by giving the appropriate command: ISANG HAKBANG PAKANAN, KAD
or, DALAWANG HAKBANG PASULONG (PAURONG), KAD. On the command of execution KAD, step off
with the appropriate foot, and halt automatically after completing the number of steps
designated. Unless otherwise specified, when directed to execute steps forward, the steps will be 30-
inch steps.
f. All marching movements are executed in the cadence of quick time (120 steps per minute),
except the 30-inch step, which may be executed in the cadence of 180 steps per minute on the
command SIGLANG HAKBANG, NA.
g. A step is the prescribed distance from one heel to the other heel of a marching police.
h. All 15-inch steps are executed for a short distance only.
i. Both the preparatory command and the command of execution are given as the foot in the
direction of the turn strikes the ground. Normally, for units no larger than a squad or platoon the
preparatory command is given as your left (or right) foot strikes the ground. For units larger than a
platoon, time is allowed for the unit leaders to repeat the preparatory command.
3.9. THE 30-INCH STEP (QUICK TIME)
a. To march with a 30-inch step from the halt, the command is PASULONG, KAD. On the
preparatory command PASULONG, shift weight of the body to the right foot without noticeable
movement. On the command of execution KAD, step forward 30 inches with the left foot and continue
marching with 30-inch steps, keeping the head and eyes fixed to the front. The arms swing in a natural
motion, without exaggeration and without bending at the elbows, approximately nine
(9) inches straight to the front as in the position of attention so that the fingers just clear the trousers.
b. To halt while marching, the command TILAP (PULUTONG), HINTO is given. The preparatory
command TILAP (PULUTONG) is given as either foot strikes the marching surface as long as the
command of execution TO is given the next time that foot strikes the marching surface. The halt is
executed in two counts. After HINTO is commanded, execute the additional step required after the
command of execution and then bring the trail foot alongside the lead foot, assuming the position of
attention and terminating the movement.
c. Quick time from Double Time. Assume you are marching forward at double time and you receive
the command, SIGLANG HAKBANG, NA. The command of execution may be given as either foot strikes
the deck. The command will be given as the left foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution,
NA, your next step will be a 30-inch step to the front with your right foot (Step). Thirty inches are
measured from the rear of your left heel to the rear of your right heel. At the same time you will
decrease the cadence to 120 steps per minute, and lower your arms to the quick to the quick time
position. You will continue to march, taking 120, 30-inch steps per minute, swinging your arms six inches
to the front and three inches to the rear of your legs, until given another command.
3.11 TO MARCH AT REST
a. AT EASE MARCH. The command PALUWAG, KAD is given as either foot stikes the marching
surface. On the command of execution KAD, the police is no longer required to retain cadence; however,
silence and approximate interval and distance are maintained. SIGLANG HAKBANG, KAD and LAYANG
HAKBANG, KAD are the only commands that can be given while marching at ease.
b. ROUTE STEP MARCH. Assume you are marching forward at quick time and you receive the
command LAYANG HAKBANG, NA, the command of execution may be given as either foot strikes the
deck. On the command of execution, NA, you are no longer required to march at the position of
attention in cadence, but you must keep your alignment, cover, interval and distance. You may talk in a
low conversational tone. You will continue to march until given another command. The only command
you may receive while marching at route step is TILAP (PULUTONG) or (BALANGAY), HUMANDA. On the
command of execution, HUMANDA, you will pick up the step as soon as possible. The Drill Instructor will
count cadence until troops are in step.
3.12. HALF STEP MARCH (15-inch Step)
a. To march with a 15-inch step from the halt, the command is HATING HAKBANG, NA. On the
preparatory command HATING HAKBANG; shift the weight of the body to the right foot without
noticeable movement. On the command of execution NA, step forward 15 inches with the left foot and
continue marching within 15-inch steps. The arms swing as in marching with a 30-inch step.
b. To alter the march to a 15-inch step while marching with a 30-inch step, the command is
HATING HAKBANG, NA. This command may be given as either foot strikes the marching surface. On the
command may be given as either foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution NA,
take one more 30- inch step and then begin marching with a 15-inch step. The arms swing as in
marching with a 30-inch step.
c. To resume marching with a 30-inch step, the command PASULONG, NA is given as either foot
strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution NA, take one more 15-inch step and then
begin marching with a 30-inch step.
d. The halt while marching at the half step is executed in two counts, the same as the halt from the
30-inch step.
e. While marching at the half step, the only commands that may be given are: PATAKDA, NA;
PASULONG, NA; and HINTO.
3.13. MARCHING IN PLACE
a. To march in place, the command PATAKDA, NA, is given as either foot strikes the marching
surface and only while marching with a 30-inch or 15-inch step forward. On the command of execution
NA, take one more step, bring the trailing foot alongside the leading foot, and begin to march in place.
Raise each foot
(alternately) 10 inches off the marching surface; keep the arms at the sides as in the position of
attention.
b. To resume marching with a 30-inch step the command PASULONG, NA is given as either foot
strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution NA, take one more step in place and then
step off with a 30-inch step.
c. Mark Time from double Time in Place. Assume you are double timing in place and you receive
the command, PATAKDA, NA. The command of execution maybe given as either foot strikes the deck.
The command will be as the left foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution NA, your next step
will be one more six-inch vertical step in place with your right foot (step). Your next step will be a two-
inch vertical step in place with your left foot to the deck. The heel is four inches from the deck. At the
same time, reduce to 120 steps per minute and lower the arms to the quick time position. You will
continue marching in place, taking 120, two-inch vertical alternation steps per time.
d. The halt from mark time is executed in two counts, basically the same as the halt from the 30-
inch step.
3.14 SIDE STEP (RIGHT/LEFT)
a. To march with a 15-inch step right (left), the command is HAKBANG PAKANAN (PAKALIWA), NA.
The command is given only while at the halt. On the preparatory command of HAKBANG PAKANAN
(PAKALIWA), shift the weight of the body without noticeable movement onto the left (right) foot. On the
command of execution NA, bend the right knee slightly and raise the right foot only high enough to
allow freedom of movement. Place the right foot 15 inches to the right of the left foot, and then move
the left foot (keeping the left leg straight) alongside the right foot as in the position of attention.
Continue this movement, keeping the arms at the sides as in the position of attention.
b. To halt when executing right or left step, the command is TILAP (PULUTONG), TO. This
movement is executed in two counts. The preparatory command is given when the heels are together;
the command of execution TO is given the next time the heels are together. On the command of
execution TO, take one more step with the lead foot and then place the trailing foot alongside the lead
foot, resuming the position of attention.
3.15. BACK STEP
a. To march with a 15-inch step backward, the command is PAURONG, NA. The command is given
only while at the halt. On the preparatory command PAURONG, shift the weight of the body without a
noticeable movement onto the right foot. On the command of execution NA, take a 15 inch step
backward with the left foot and continue marching backward with 15-inch steps. The arms should be
clipped on the sides.
b. The halt from backward march is executed in two counts, basically the same as the halt from the
30-inch step.
3.16. DOUBLE TIME MARCH
a. To march in the cadence of 180 steps per minute with a 30-inch step, the
command is TAKBONG HAKBANG, NA. It maybe commanded while at the halt or while marching at quick
time with a 30-inch step.
b. When at the halt and the preparatory command TAKBONG HAKBANG is given, shift the weight
of the body to the right foot without noticeable movement. On the command of execution NA, raise the
forearms to a horizontal position, with the fingers and thumb closed, knuckles out and simultaneously
step off with the left foot. Continue to march with 30-inch steps at the cadence of double time. The arms
swing naturally to the front and rear with the forearms kept horizontal. (When armed, policemen will
come to port arms on receiving the preparatory command of TAKBONG HAKBANG). Guides, when at
sling arms, will double time with their weapons at sling arms upon receiving the directive Guide On Line.
c. When marching with a 30-inch step in the cadence of quick time, the command TAKBONG
HAKBANG, NA is given as either foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution NA,
take one more 30-inch step at quick time and step off with the trailing foot, double timing as previously
described.
d. To resume marching with a 30-inch step at quick time, the command SIGLANG HAKBANG, NA is
given as either foot strikes the marching surface. On the command sides and resume marching with a
30-inch step at quick time.
e. When you are marking time and you receive the command, TAKBONG HAKBANG, NA. The
command of execution maybe given as either foot strikes the deck. To demonstrate, the command is
given as the left foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution, NA, your next step will be one
more two-inch vertical step in place with your right foot (Step). Your next step will be a 36-inch step to
the front with your left foot (Step). Thirty-six inches are measured from the rear of your left heel to the
rear of your right heel. At the same time, increase the cadence to
180 steps per minute and raise the forearms to a horizontal position along the waistline, fingers closed,
knuckles out. You will continue to march, taking 180, 36- inch steps per minute, swinging your arms in
their natural arc across the front of your body, until given another command.
f. When you are double timing in place and you receive the command, TAKBONG HAKBANG, NA.
The command of execution maybe given as either foot strikes the deck. For the purpose of
demonstration, the command will be given as the left foot strikes the deck. On the command of
execution, NA, your next step will be one more six-inch vertical step in place with your right foot (Step).
Your next step will be a 36 inch step to the place with your left foot (Step). Thirty-six inches are
measured from the rear of your left heel to the rear of your left heel to the rear of your right heel. You
will continue to march, taking 180, 36-inch steps per minute, swinging your arms in their natural arc
across the front of your body, until given another command.
3.17. TO FACE IN MARCHING
a. Face to the Right as in Marching - Assume you are halted at attention and you receive the
command, LIKO SA KANAN, NA. On the preparatory command, LIKO SA KANAN, shift the weight of your
body to the left leg without noticeable movement. On the command of execution, NA, face 90 degrees
to the right by pivoting on the ball of the left foot, at the same time taking a 30-inch step in the new
direction with the right foot, swinging your arms in their natural arc, six inches to the front and three
inches to the rear of your legs, but do not allow them to swing away from the body (Step). You will
continue to march, taking 120, 30-inch steps per minute, swinging your arms six inches to the front and
three inches to the rear of your legs, until given another command.
b. Face to the Left as in Marching – Assume you are halted at attention and you receive the
command, LIKO SA KALIWA, NA. On the preparatory command, shift the weight of your body to the right
leg without noticeable movement. On the command of execution, NA, face 90 degrees to the left by
pivoting on the ball of the right foot, at the same time taking a 30-inch step in the new direction with the
left foot, swinging your arms in their natural arc, six inches to the front and three inches to the rear of
your legs, but do not allow them to swing away from the body (Step). You will continue to march,
taking 120, 30-inch steps per minute, swinging your arms six inches to the front and three inches to the
rear of your legs, until given another command.
3.18. TO MARCH BY THE FLANK
Being in march, the commands are KANANG (KALIWANG) PANIG, NA. At the command NA, given as the
right (or left) foot strikes the ground, advance and plant your left (or right foot; then face to the right (or
left) in marching and step off in the new direction on your right (or left) foot.
3.19. TO MARCH TO THE REAR
a. While marching Forward at Quick Time – Assume you are marching forward at quick time and
you receive the command, PABALIK, NA. The command of execution will be given as the right foot
strikes the deck, as this involves a movement to the right. On the command of execution, NA, your next
step will be to place your left foot approximately 30 inches and directly in front of your right foot (Step).
Your next step will be to face 180 degrees to the right about by pivoting on the balls of both feet (Step).
The legs remain straight without stiffness and the arms should be clipped to the sides until the 1st step
is made. After which the arm continue to naturally swing, but not allowed to swing wide from the body.
Your next step, without loss of cadence will be a 30-inch step in the new direction (Step). You will
continue to march at quick time, until given another command.
b. While marching Forward at Double Time – Assume you are marching forward at double time
and you receive the command, PABALIK, NA. The command of execution will be given as the right foot
strikes the deck, as this involves a movement to the right. On the command of execution, NA, your next
step
will be two more 36-inch steps to the front (Step, Step). Your next step will be four six-inches vertical
alternating steps in place, at the same time turning 180 degrees to the right about (Step, Step, Step,
Step). The arms will continue their natural swing, but will not be allowed to swing away from the body.
Your next step, without loss of cadence will be a 36-inch step in the new direction with your left foot
(Step). You will continue to march at double time cadence until given another command.
3.20. EYES RIGHT/LEFT WHILE MARCHING
a. While marching at quick time, the unit leader will command HANDA TINGIN SA KANAN, NA,
when he is twelve (12) paces from the reviewing officer. The command of execution will be given as the
right foot strikes the deck, as this is a movement to the right. On the command of execution NA, and for
the count of one, your next step will be a 30-inch step to the front with your left foot. At the same
time, all files, except the right file, will smartly turn their head and eyes 45 degrees to the right (Step).
The shoulders remain square to the front. The members of the right file will keep their head and eyes
to the front. You will continue to march until given the next command. The command to terminate this
movement is HANDA, HARAP. The command of execution is given when the last rank is six paces
beyond the reviewing officer and it is given as the left foot strikes the deck, as this involves a movement
to the left. On the command of execution HARAP, your next step is a 30-inch to the front with your right
foot. At the same time, all men who have executed eyes right will turn their head and eyes to the front
(Step). You will continue to march until given another command.
Eyes Left: The movement of eyes left may only be executed while marching and is normally done during
street parades, when the reviewing stand is on the left. While marching at quick time, the unit leader
will give the command when he is twelve (12) paces from the reviewing officer. The command of
execution is given as the left foot strikes the deck, as this involves a movement to the left. On the
command of execution, NA and for the count of one, your next step will be a 30- inch step to the front
with your right foot. At the same time, all files, except the left file, will smartly turn their head and eyes
45 degrees to the left (step). The shoulders remain square to the front. The members of the left file will
keep their head and eyes to the front. You will continue to march until given the next command. The
command to terminate this movement is: HANDA, HARAP. The command of execution is given when the
last rank is six paces beyond the reviewing officer, and is given as the right foot strikes the deck, as this
involves a movement to the right. On the command of execution, HARAP, your next step is a 30-inch
step to the front with your left foot. At the same time, all files who have executed eyes left will smartly
turn their head and eyes to the front (Step). You will continue to march until given another command.
3.21. STAFF BEHIND ME
To make a staff move to the rear of a commander, the command is KALUPUNAN SUMALIKOD KO, NA.
The movement is executed in 9 counts for 2 or 3 men staff, 11 for a 4 men staff, 13 for a 5 men staff and
15 for a six men. At the command NA, all members of the staff execute right face, and then the first man
faces to the left and marches 4 steps, column left and halts on the prescribed last
count. All other members march forward and follow the first man turning at the same pivot made by the
first man.
All members halt in the designated count and faces left altogether automatically now facing the new
direction.
SECTION IV
INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENT WITH ARMS
Manual of Arms
4.1. GENERAL
a. This section contains procedures for executing the manual of arms with police shoulder rifle in
conjunction with individual and unit drill movements.
b. At the halt, all movements are initiated from order arms or sling arms, which are the positions of
attention with the rifle.
c. All precision movements are executed in quick-line cadence.
d. For drill purposes, the modified magazine is carried in the rifle. When performing duty requiring
the use of magazine, the rifle is carried at sling arms
e. The command AGAP, TA or ISAKBAT, TA must be given prior to the command for double time.
f. Execute HUMANAY with your rifle at Port Arms.
g. Movements for short distances are executed at the trail by introducing the preparatory
command with the command BITBIT SANDATA, or BITBIT SANDATA, PASULONG KAD. Take the trail
position at the command KAD and resume the order on halting.
h. With your rifle at order arms, bring it to the trail while in motion when executing the facing,
alignments, opening and closing of ranks, side step, back step or extending and closing. In each case take
the position of trail arms at the command of execution. Push and pull your rifle smartly and resume
order arms position and adjust hands slowly.
i. Facing movements are executed from order arms or sling arms. When a facing is necessary to
establish the direction of march, the facing movement is executed before the command for the manual
of arms. After a marching movement has been completed, BABA, TA or ISAKBAT, TA is commanded prior
to the command for the facing movement.
j. To salute when you are not in ranks and at sling arm, give the hand
salute.
k. In all movements except those mentioned above, the rifle is carried Right Shoulder Arms in
cadence. Execute right shoulder arms, simultaneously with the stepping off for any movement in
cadence.
l. In halting, the rifle will be brought to order arms in cadence after halt has been completed as in
policeman without arms. Unless the command is preceded in place in which case, the rifle remains at
right shoulder arms.
m. Port Arms is the key position assumed in most manual of arms movement from one position to
another except right shoulder arms from order arms and order arms from right shoulder arms.
n. Manual of arms movements are a combination of the position of attention and the procedures
for the prescribed movement. Most manual of arms movements are executed with the head, eyes and
body as in the position of attention.
POSTURE (armed)
• stand-up straight
• chin in
• pull shoulder back and down
• clip arms
• stomach in (SUCK GUTS)
• left hand hold banana, wrist facing inward
• hand behind the sim
• knees together (CLOSE BOOK)
• rifle is resting in front of right hand (open palm)
• rifle butt aligned with the tip of the right
shoe (BUTT TOE)
• 45 degree angle foot stand
4.2. RULES GOVERNING EXECUTION OF MANUAL OF ARMS
a. Unless indicated in this manual, these rules apply:

b. The term ”at the balance “ refers to a point on the rifle just forward of the trigger housing.
c. Whenever a position is described as “diagonally across the body”, the rifle barrel is up, the butt
is in front of your right hip and the rifle barrel bisects the junction of your neck and left shoulder. The
rifle and sling are grasped at the balance with your left hand. Hold the palm of your hand toward your
body with the wrist straight. The space between the barrel and the gas cylinder is approximately aligned
with your left ear. Small finger of the left hand is tangent to the operating rod handle. Maintain the rifle
one fist away from your body.
d. The cadence for the rifle movement is quick time. In the early stages of your training give your
whole attention to the details of the motions. You acquire
the cadence gradually as you become accustomed to handling your rifle. Sometimes the instructor may
require you to count aloud in cadence with motions.
e. The manual of arms is taught at a halt. However, to add interest to the drill or to prevent fatigue
in long marches right shoulder to left shoulder (or left shoulder to right shoulder) or port arms maybe
given when marching.
f. Any position of manual of arms can be ordered from a previous position by giving the suitable
commands. However, when at the inspection arms, the command AGAP, TA is given and executed
before moving to any other position of the manual of arms.
g. When executing movements with the rifle, the movements are executed SMARTLY and with
SNAP. Movements with the rifle will be executed in the most direct manner and exaggeration of
movements will not be taught. With the exception of the head and limbs, when required to perform a
function while executing the manual, the body will remain at the position of attention.
4.3. ORDER ARMS
a. Assume order arms on the command HUMANAY or from parade rest on the command of
execution HUMANDA .
b. At order arms, maintain the position of attention with the rifle. Place the butt of the rifle on the
marching surface, with sights to the rear. The toe of the butt touches the foot and on line. Secure the
rifle with the right hand in a “U”formed by the fingers (extended and joined) and thumb. Hold the rifle
on the upper hand guard with the right thumb and forefinger pointed downward and online with the flat
surface of the hand guard. Keep the right hand and arm behind the rifle so that the thumb is straight
along the seam of the trouser leg.
4.4. REST POSITION
The rifle rest positions are commanded and executed the same as individual drill without arms with the
following additions:
a. Parade Rest – on the command of execution PAHINGA or TIKAS, PAHINGA, thrust the muzzle
forward simultaneously changing the grip of the right hand to grasp the stock just below the gas cylinder
lock screw keeping the toe of the butt of the rifle on line with your toe and on the marching surface and
the right arms straightened directly to the front. Silence and immobility are required – if at sling arms,
the rifles will remain slung.
b. Stand at Ease - Execute stand at ease in the same manner as parade rest with the rifle except
turn the head and eyes toward the commander.
c. Rest – On the command PALUWAG or PAHINGA keep the butt of the rifle in place as in parade
rest and bring the rifle diagonally in front of you with your right hand and simultaneously grasp with
your left hand clasping your right hand. At this position the policeman may move, however, he must
remain standing and silent with the rifle and right foot in place.
d. Rifle Position at Route Steps – at the command of LAYANG HAKBANG, KAD, rest the flat side of
the stock on your shoulder, with your right arm clipped to your sides, and your forearm forming a 45
degree angle to the sides.
4.5. PORT ARMS
a. Port arms from order arms is a two-count movement. The command is AGAP, TA. On the
command of execution TA, grasp the rifle with the right hand and raise the rifle diagonally across the
body, keeping the right elbow down (without strain). With the left hand, simultaneously grasp the
balance of the rifle so that the rifle is about 4 inches from the waist. On the second count, re grasp the
rifle at the small of the stock with the right hand. Hold the rifle diagonally across the body about 4
inches from the waist and parallel to the body, the right forearm horizontal and the elbows close to the
sides.
b. Order arms from port arms is executed in three counts. The command is BABA, TA. On the
command of execution TA, move the right hand up and across the body to the upper hand guard
without strain. On the second count, remove the left hand from the balance and lower the rifle to the
right side until it is about three inches from the marching surface. Guide the rifle to the side
simultaneously by placing the forefinger of the left hand at the flash suppressor, fingers and thumb
extended and joined, palm to the rear. On the third count, move the left hand sharply to the left side,
lower the rifle gently to the marching surface and resume position of order arms.
PORTARMS TO ORDER ARMS (BABATA)
1. PORT ARMS
1. CLIP FINGERS
2. LEFT HAND HOLDING THE ABOVE THE CHARGING HANDLE
3. LEFT ARM CLIPPED ON THE FLOATING RIBS
4. RIGHT HAND ON THE UPPER HAND GUARD
5. LEFT EYE COVERED BY UPPER HAND GUARD
6. RIFLE BUTT MUST NOT PROTRUDE

1. CLIP FINGERS
2. LEFT HAND CLIP FINGERS RESTING ABOVE THE BAYONET STUD READY FOR CUTTINGS
3. RIGHT HAND RESTING AT THE BACK OF THE RIFLE SUPPORTING IT
4. RIFLE BUTT ALIGNED WITH THE RIGHT SHOE
1. STANDING POSITION
4.6. PRESENT ARMS
a. At order arms, the command is TANGHAL, TA. At the command TA, which is the count of one in
this movement, raise the rifle in front of the center of your body with your right hand. The barrel is to
rear and vertical. Then grasp the rifle with your left hand at the balance, the forearm horizontal resting
against your body and fingers joined. At the count of two, place your right hand to the small of the
stock. Holding the small of the stock in a “U” formed by the fingers (extended and joined) and thumb.
b. The distance of the rifle from the body is about a fist away and the front sight at the level of the
eyes.
c. Order arms from the present arms is executed in three counts with the command BABA, TA. On
the command, TA, which is the count of one in this movement, move your right hand from its grasp of
the stock and re grasp the piece on the hand guard. On the second count, release the grasp of your left
hand, lower the rifle to the right so that the butt is three inches from the ground, barrel to the rear.
Steady and guide to the side by placing the forefinger of the left hand at the flash suppressor, fingers
and thumb extended and joined palm to the rear. On the third count, move the left hand sharply to the
left side, lower the rifle gently to the marching surface and resume the position of order arms.
RIFLE SALUTE (TANGHAL SANDATA)
1. CLIP FINGERS
2. LEFT HAND RESTING ABOVE THE CHAMBER
3. CLIP RIGHT ARM AT THE SMALL STOCK
4. RIFLE MUST DISSECT THE BODY
5. LEFT HAND IN FRONT OF THE STOMACH
6. RIFLE SHOULD BE ONE KNUCKLE AWAY FROM THE BODY
7. CLIP LEFT ARM PARALLEL TO THE GROUND
4.7. RIGHT SHOULDER ARMS
1. CLIP FINGERS
2. LEFT HAND RESTING ABOVE THE CHAMBER
3. BAYONET STUD ALIGNED WITH THE EYES
4. RIFLE MUST DISSECT THE BODY
5. LEFT HAND IN FRONT OF THE STOMACH
6. RIFLE SHOULD BE ONE KNUCKLE AWAY FROM THE BODY
7. CLIP LEFT ARM PARALLEL TO THE GROUND
8. RIGHT ARM STRETCHED TO THE RIFLE BUTT.
a. When executed from order arms, right shoulder arms is a five count movement. The command
is KANANG BALIKAT. On the command TA, (One) raise and carry the rifle diagonally across the body with
the right hand, at the same time grasping it at the balance with your left hand. (Two) re grasp the butt
with your right hand, the heel of the butt between the first two fingers, thumb and fingers closed the
stock. (Three) Twist. (Four) Without changing the grasp of your right hand, place the rifle on your right
shoulder, barrel up and inclined at an angle of about 90 degrees from the horizontal. Hold your right
elbow against your side with the forearm horizontal. The trigger guard should be in the hollow of your
right shoulder. At the same time with your left hand at the small of stock, thumb and fingers extended
and joined, guide the rifle to your right shoulder. The first joint of the forefinger touches the rear end of
the receiver. Hold your wrist straight and your elbow down. (Five) Cut away your left hand smartly to
the side.
RIGHT SHOULDER ARMS (KANANG BALIKAT)
1. STANDING POSITION
1 .CLIP FINGERS
2RIFLE BUTT SHOULD NOT PROTRUDE
3. CLIP ARMS
4. LEFT EYE IS COVERED BY THE UPPER HAND GUARD
5. LEFT HAND CLIP FINGERS RESTING ON
6. CHARGING HANDLE ONE KNUCKLE AWAY
7. LEFT ARM PARALLEL TO THE GROUND
1. CLIP FINGERS
2. RIGHT HAND HOLDING THE RIFLE BUTT READY TO TWIST THE RIFFLE.
3. LEFT HAND IS PARALLEL TO THE GROUND.
4. LEFT WHILE CLIPPED IS REST ON THE CHARGING HANDLE
5. LEFT EYE IS COVERED BY THE HAND GUARD..
1. CLIP FINGERS
2. RIFLE TWELVE O’CLOCK POSITION.
3. RIGHT HAND HOLDING THE RIFLE BUTT READY TO LIFT
4. CLIPPED ARMS
5. RIGHT ARMS STRETCHED AND LOCKED ELBOW..
1 .CLIP FINGERS
2. RIGHT HAND HOLDING THE RIFLE BUTT
3. RIGHT ARM CLIPPED ON THE FLOATING RIBS
4. RIGHT HAND HOLDS THE BUTT WITH THREE FINGERS ALIGNED WITH THE FLOATING RIBS
5. LEFT HAND CLIP FINGERS SUPPORTING THE RIFLE READY FOR CUTTINGS
1 .CLIP FINGERS
2. RIGHT HAND HOLDING THE RIFLE BUTT
3. RIGHT ARM CLIPPED ON THE FLOATING RIBS
4. RIGHT HAND HOLDS THE BUTT WITH THREE FINGERS ALIGNED WITH THE FLOATING RIBS
5. LEFT HAND AFTER SWIFT CUTTINGS SLOWLY CLOSED.

Note: The rifle should be angled at 30 degrees by 60 degrees.
b. The return to order arms is a four-count movement. On the command BABA, TA, press the rifle
butt down quickly and move the rifle diagonally across your body, turning the butt so as to keep the
barrel up. Grasp the rifle at the balance with your left hand, retaining the grasp of your right hand on the
butt (count one). On the second count, move your right hand up and across your body and grasp the
front hand guard. The third and fourth counts are executed in the same manner as the second and third
counts in executing order arms from port arms.
c. Right shoulder arms from port arms is a four-count movement. On the first count, re grasp the
rifle at the butt with right hand as you would in coming to right shoulder from order arms. The last three
counts are the same as the last two counts in moving from order to right shoulder arms.
d. Port arms from right shoulder arms is a two-count movement. The first count is the same as the
first count from right shoulder to order arms. On the second count, re grasp the rifle with your right
hand at the small of the stock in the position of port arms.
4.8. STACK AND TAKE ARMS
a. Stack arms is executed from order arms only. It may be executed while at normal interval in a
line (squad) or a column formation. Stack arms is not a precise movement, however, it is executed in
appropriate manner.
b. The leader designates the stack men by numbers (3-6-9-12) when in a line formation, or by a
squad (second or third) when in a column formation. After the stack men have been designated, he then
commands AYUSIN ANG SAKBAT.
c. On the command SAKBAT, each stack man places the butt of his rifle on his right hip and cradles
it in the crook of his right arm. He then adjusts the sling keeper to form a 2 inch loop next to the upper
sling swivel. As soon as he has prepared the loop, he returns to order arms.
d. When all stack men have returned to order arms, the leader commands ITUNGKOD, TA. On the
command TA, each stack man places his rifle directly in front and centered on his body with the sling
facing to the front. The heel of the rifle butt is on the marching surface on line with the toes of his shoes.
He grasps the rifle by the hand guard with the left hand. The first two finger of the left hand hold the
inner part of the loop against the rifle. He reaches across the front of the rifle with the right hand, grasps
the outer part of the loop, and holds it open for the insertion of the other rifles. He holds the rifle
vertical at all times.
e. On the command TA, the men to the left and right of the stack man perform the following
movements simultaneously:
1) The man on the stack man’s left raises and centers his rifle in front of his
body so that his right is shoulder high and the rifle is about four inches from his chest, with the sling to
the front. He then grasps the rifle with his left hand at the small of the stock and lowers both arms,
holding the weapon in a horizontal position.
c. The man on the stack man’s right raises and centers his rifle, wrist shoulder high, with the sling facing
the front. He then grasps the rifle with the left hand directly below his right hand, and in the most
convenient manner, grasps the rifle with the right hand at the small of stock. He then lowers both arms,
holding the rifle in a horizontal position.
d. As soon as both men have completed these movements, each moves the foot nearest the stack man
18 inches half left or right) toward the stack man. In a continuing motion, the man on the stack man’s
left inserts the muzzle of his rifle into the loop held by the stack man until the bayonet stud pro tudes
past the far end of the loop. He holds his rifle in that position until the man on the stack man’s right
inserts the muzzle of his rifle through the loop in the same manner and above the muzzle of the rifle of
the left man.
f. When both rifles have been inserted into the loop, the men on each side of the stack man swing
the butts of their rifles out and down to the marching surface until the stack is tight with the (two) rifle
butts on line and about two feet from the baseline.
g. After necessary adjustments have been made, the three men come to attention.
h. Extra rifles are passed to the nearest tack on the right. As each rifle passed, it is grasp at the
upper part of the hand guard with the right hand. Then, with the rifle held vertical, it is passed with
fully extended arm to the right front. The man on the right grasps the rifle at the balance with his left
hand, brings the rifle to the center of his body, and re grasps it at the upper part of the hand guard with
his
right hand. This action continues until the stack man receives the rifle and places it on the stack with his
right hand nearly vertical as possible. He places the rifles on the stack with the slings away from the
stack (if the second squads is the stack squads, extra rifles are passed to the left).
i. To take arms, the leader commands DAMPOT, TA.
1. On the command TA, the stack man passes each extra rifle toward its bearer. The rifles are
handled in the manner described for passing them to the stack (left hand at the balance, right hand at
the upper part of the hand guard). As the men receive their rifles, they come to order arms.
2. After all extra rifles have been returned, the stack man grasps the base rifles, holding the loop
open as in stack arms.
The men to the right and left of the stack man take one step to their left and right fronts, respectively.
They reach down, grasp their rifles, and bring the rifles to a horizontal position. The man to the right of
the stack man frees his rifle from the stack first. Each man returns to order arms after un sling arms and
retrieves his rifle. He does this by guiding and steadying the rifle with his left hand (as in the next to the
last count of order arms).
4.9. REST WITH THE LEFT SHOULDER ARMS
a. From port arms, the command is: KALIWANG BALIKAT, TA.
b. At the command TA, release the grip of your left hand on the rifle and with your right hand still
grasping the small of the stock, place the rifle on your left shoulder, barrel up. At the same time grasp
the butt with your left hand, heel of the butt between the first and second fingers, thumb and fingers
closed on the stock, left forearm horizontal, left elbow against your side. (Two) Drop your right hand
quickly to the side.
c. Left shoulder arms also maybe ordered when rifles are at the order, right shoulder or present.
On the command TA, execute port arms and continue in cadence to the left shoulder.
LEFT SHOULDER ARMS TO PORT ARMS (AGAPTA)
1 .LEFT SHOULDER ARMS
1. CLIP FINGERS
2. LEFT HAND HOLDING THE RIFLE BUTT
4. LEFT HAND HOLDS THE BUTT WITH THREE FINGERS ALIGNED WITH THE FLOATING RIBS
5. RIGHT HAND HOLDING THE STOCKWELD READY TO FLIP THE RIFLE
1 .CLIP FINGERS
5. RIGHT HAND HOLDING THE STOCK WELD READY TO FLIP THE RIFLE
e. Left shoulder arms from right shoulder arms is a four-count movement. The command is
SA KALIWANG BALIKAT, TA. On the command of execution TA, execute the first count the same thing as
executing order arms. On count two, remove the right hand from the butt of the rifle and re grasp the
small of the stock (port arms). Counts three and four are the same movements from port arms. When
marching, the command is given as the left foot strikes the marching surface.
RIGHT TO LEFT SHOULDER ARMS (KALIWANG BALIKAT)
1. RIGHT SHOULDER ARMS.

1. CLIP FINGERS
2. RIFLE ONE FIST AWAY THE BODY.
5. LEFT EYE IS COVERED BY THE HAND GUARD.
6. RIGHT THUMB ON THE WINDAGE KNOB READY FOR
1. CLIP FINGERS
2. RIGHT HAND HOLDING THE RIFLE BUTT READY TO TWIST THE RIFFLE.
5. LEFT EYE IS COVERED BY THE HAND GUARD.

1. CLIPPED FINGERS
2. FINGERS REST AT THE REAR SIGHT READY FOR CUTTINGS
3. CLIPPED ARMS
1. CLIP FINGERS
5. RIGHT HAND AFTER SWIFT CUTTINGS SLOWLY CLOSED.

4.10. TRAIL ARMS
a. From other arms, the command is - BITBIT, SANDATA. On the command TA, raise your rifle
approximately 2 inches of the ground and incline the muzzle forward so that the barrel makes an angle
of about 15 degrees with the vertical. Hold your right arm slightly bent. Hold your rifle in the upper hand
guard. Assume you are at trail arms and you receive the command BABA, TA. On the command of
execution, TA, gently and quietly lower the butt of the rifle to the deck and assume the position of order
arms.
b. To March with the Rifle at Trail Arms-Facing movements, alignments and short distance
marching movements are executed from order arms. Side steps, back step, open and close ranks, and
close and extend are short distance movements. Forward march may be given from order arms to march
units forward for a short distance. When these movements are commanded while at order arms, it is
necessary to come automatically to trail arms on the command of execution for the movement and the
position of order arms is automatically assumed, without command after halting.
4.11. SLING ARMS
a. From order arms with sling(s) loose, the command for sling arms is ISAKBAT, TA. On the
command of execution TA, grasp the barrel with the right hand and raised it vertically. Grasp the sling
near the upper sling swivel with the left, and release right hand. Place the right hand and arm between
the sling and rifle and place the sling over the right shoulder. Re grasp the sling with the right hand so
that the wrist is straight, the right forearm is horizontal, the elbow is tight against the side,
and the rifle is vertical. Release the grasp of the left hand and move it sharply to the left side as in the
position of attention.
b. From order arms with sling(s) tight, the command is ISAKBAT, TA. On the command of execution
TA, grasp the rifle barrel with the right hand and raise the rifle vertically. With the left hand, place the
rifle butt on the right hip, cradle the rifle in the crook of the right arm and use both hands to adjust the
sling. Grasp the sling with the left hand near the upper sling swivel and execute sling arms.
c. To return the rifle to order arms with the sling tight, the command is AYUSIN ANG SAKBAT. On
the command AYUSIN ANG SAKBAT, to remove the rifle barrel with the right hand and raised it
vertically. With the left hand, place the butt of the rifle on the right hip and cradle it in the crook of the
right arm. Use both hands to tighten the sling on the ejection port side. Grasp the rifle barrel with the
right hand and guide the rifle to the order arms position.
d. To return the rifle to order arms with the sling loose, the command is LIHIS, SANDATA. On the
command of execution TA, reach across the body with the left hand and grasp the sling at the right
shoulder. Release the right hand grasp of the sling and remove the rifle from the shoulder. Grasp the
rifle barrel with the right hand, release the left hand grasp of the sling, and guide the rifle to the order
arms position.
e. Port Arms from Sling Arms. The command for this movement is AGAP, TA. On the command of
execution TA, reach across the body with the left hand and grasp the sling at the shoulder. Lift the
weapon (by the sling) swings it to the front of the body and grasps the small of the stock with the right
hand. Release the sling (left hand) and re grasp the weapon at the balance. Ensure that the rifle is four
inches from the belt and held diagonally across the body. Keep the elbows in at the sides and the right
forearm horizontal. To resume sling arms, the command is ISAKBAT, TA. On the command of execution
TA, grasp the sling near the upper sling swivel with the left hand. Release the right hand and swing the
rifle back onto the shoulder by placing the right arm between the sling and rifle, immediately resume
the position of sling arms.
f. Inspection Arms from Sling Arms. The command for this movement is SIYASAT, TA. On the
command of execution arms execute port arms and then execute counts of three through seven in the
same manner as for inspection arms from order arms. AGAP, TA is executed in the same manner as
explained in the manual of arms. To resume sling arms, the procedures are the same as from port arms.
g. Salute at Sling Arms. To salute while at sling arms, the command is ITANGHAL, TA. On the
command of execution TA, reach across the body with the left hand and grasp the sling just above the
right hand. Release the right hand and execute the hand salute.
To terminate the hand salute, the command is IBABA, TA. On the command of execution TA, lower the
right hand sharply to the side as in the position of attention and then re grasp the sling at the original
position. After
grasping the sling with the right hand, release the left hand and return it sharply to the left side as in the
Manual of Arms – SIDE ARMS
4.12. GENERAL
a. This section contains the procedures for executing the manual of arms with side arms.
b. All individual drill movements are executed as prescribed with the weapon secure in the holster.
c. The only manual of arms movements that maybe executed are present arms (hand salute) and
inspection arms. As a general rule, the command is Present Arm. During other manual of arms
movements, remain at attention.
d. The position of raised side arm represents the position of port arms when challenging as a
sentinel on guard duty.
4.13. PRESENT ARMS
The hand salute is executed in the same manner as prescribed in individual
drill.
4.14. RAISED SIDEARMS

a. For instructional purposes, the command ITAAS, TA is used to teach individuals the procedures
for challenging.
b. On the command of execution TA, unbutton the flap of the holster with the right hand and grasp
the sidearm. Withdraw the sidearm from the holster, raising the right forearm to the front until the
hand is about six inches in front of the right shoulder, and the right elbow is against the right side. Hold
the pistol grip, grip in a “U” formed by the thumb and last three fingers. Extend the forefinger outside
and along side the trigger guard. Point the muzzle outward and up at about 30- degree angle.
c. On the command, IBALIK, TA, return the weapon in the most convenient manner to the holster,
fasten the flap, and come to attention.
4.15. INSPECTION ARMS
a. The command for this movement is SIYASAT, TA. On the command of execution TA, execute
raised sidearm and then, without lowering the right hand reach across the body and grasp the slide with
the left thumb and first two fingers so that the thumb is on the left side of the slide. Shift the grip of the
right hand so that the right thumb engages the slide stop. Push the slide fully to the rear and engage
the stop in its notch with the right thumb. Return the left hand to the left side and remain at raised
sidearm. In the case of a revolver, just open the cylinder drum with the left hand, following the same
procedure.
b. AGAP, TA is the only command that maybe given from inspection arms. On the command AGAP,
place the right thumb on the slide stop. On the command AGAP, press down the slide stop, allowing the
slide to go forward and then place the forefinger on the trigger. On the command TA, pull the trigger
and return the weapon to the holster, fasten the flap and come to attention.
c. To execute inspection arms with the magazine in the weapon execute raised sidearm and then
remove the magazine and place it between the belt and clothing before locking the slide to the rear.
After pulling the trigger and before returning the sidearm to the holster, return the magazine to the
weapon.
d. If the sidearm is inspected in ranks and the inspecting officer takes the weapon, lower the right
hand smartly to the right side. When the inspecting officer is ready to return the sidearm, raised the
right hand back to the raised position and accept the weapon. After the weapon is returned, allow the
slide to go forward, pull the trigger, return the sidearm to the holster, and come to attention.
Manual of Arms – Sword
4.16. GENERAL
The sword can be worn by Officers when prescribed while participating in ceremonies with troops under
arms, or as directed. It is carried on the left side of the body attached to a sword strap. The sword strap
is secured by a Sam Browne belt.
4.17. GENERAL RULES:
a. The sword will be drawn wherever with armed troops or in command of
unit.
b. Carry sword is assumed when;
quick time
1) Giving commands
2) Changing Position in formation at quick time
3) Addressing or being addressed by a senior
4) The preparatory command for, and when marching at
5) Any manual of arms movement has been ordered, except
parade rest, at ease, rest, present arms, or eyes right (left)
c. Present sword is assumed when;
1) Saluting with the sword
2) The unit is presented to the colors or to any person, or when the National Anthem, To the color
or retreat is played
3) Executing eyes right (left) when marching past a reviewing officer or stand. In the interior of a
formation, remain at carry.
d. While marching with the sword at the carry, the arms should swing naturally. Do not hold the
scabbard or sling.
e. While marching at double time, hold the sword diagonally across with your first two inches away
from the chest.
f. The sword will always be worn correctly attached to a Sam Browne belt.
4.18. DRAW SWORD
a. On the preparatory command, ANTABAY BUNOT, grasp the scabbard and rotate clockwise 180
degrees with the scabbard still parallel with your foot. At the same time, grasp the grip of the sword
with right hand and pull sword about 10 inches from the scabbard. The right forearm should now be
roughly parallel to the ground with the left hand still holding the \scabbard against the side.
b. On the command of execution KALIS, draw the sword smartly out of the scabbard and raise the
right arm to its full extent, directly to the front, blade at an angle of 45 degrees, sword in a straight line
with arm, verify the tip of the sword, pause for two counts then bring the blade of the sword against the
shoulder seam, blade vertical and at last count release the left hand from the scabbard.
4.19. CARRY SWORD
At the position of carry sword, the sword is held in the right hand, the blade vertical, the right arm
nearly extended, the thumb and forefinger embracing the lower part of the grip, thumb along the
trouser the fingers are joined holding the grip. The front of the blade rests inside the point of the
shoulder and not along the arm.
4.20. PRESENT SWORD FROM ORDER SWORD/CARRY SWORD
a. Executed only when halted at order or carry sword.
b. On the preparatory command, TANGHAL, raise the right hand smartly to the level of your neck
about a fist away from your chin, keep the thumb on the left side of the grip, wrist straight, elbow
against the body and the blade of the sword inclined at 30 angle.
c. On the command of execution, TA, vertically lower the sword seeing to it that the blade is
parallel to your body until your waist then lower the point down smartly to a position about three inches
above the ground. Straighten the right arm the thumb remaining on the left side of the grip. The tip of
the sword should be held directly forward.
4.21. ORDER SWORD FROM PRESENT SWORD
a. The command is BABA, TA. This is one count movement.

b. On the command of execution, TA, turn the true edge down. In this position,
the right arm hangs naturally, thumb along the trouser seam. The blade is inclined down and forward,
with the tip three inches above the ground.
4.22. CARRY SWORD FROM ORDER SWORD
a. The command is HANDA DALA, KALIS.
b. On the preparatory command HANDA, DALA, twist the sword counter clockwise letting the flat
side of the sword face front.
c. At the command of execution KALIS, bring up the sword to the position of carry sword using the
action of your fingers only.
SECTION V SQUAD DRILLS
FORMATIONS AND MOVEMENTS
5.1. GENERAL
a. Individual drill movements and the manual of arms are executed (as previously prescribed)
while performing as a squad member.
b. The squad has two prescribed formations line and column. However, the squad may be formed
into a column of twos from a column formation.
c. When the squad is in line, squad members are numbered from right to left when in column,
from front to rear.
d. The squad normally marches in column, but for short distances it may march in line.
e. When the squad drills as a separate unit, the squad leader carries his weapon at sling arms.
When the squad is in a line formation, the squad leader assumes a post three steps in front and
centered on the squad.
f. When the squad drills as part of a larger unit, the squad leader occupies the number one (base)
position of the squad. He carries his weapon in the same manner as prescribed for other riflemen in the
squad.
5.2. FORMING THE SQUAD
a. The squad normally forms in a line formation: however, it may re-form in column when each
member can identify his exact position (equipment grounded) in the formation.
1) To form at normal interval, the squad leader comes to the position of attention and command
TILAP HUMANAY. On the command HUMANAY, the following actions occur simultaneously:
a) Each member double times to his position in the formation.
b) The right flank man positions himself so that when the squad is formed it is three steps in front
and centered on the squad leader
c) The right flank man comes to the position of attention and raises his left arm laterally at
shoulder level, elbow locked, fingers and thumb extended and joined and palm facing down. He ensures
that the left arm is in line with the body.
d) The man to the immediate left of the right flank man comes to the position of attention, turns
his head and eyes to the right and raises his left arm in the same manner as the right flank man. He
obtains proper alignment by taking short steps forward or backward until he is on line with the right
flank. He then obtain exact interval by taking short steps left or right until his shoulder touches the
extended fingertips of the right flank. As soon as the man to the left has obtained normal interval, each
man individually lowers his arm to his side, sharply turns his head and eyes to the front and assumes the
e) The right flank man then sharply returns to the position of
attention.
f) All other members of the squad form in the same manner except that the left flank man does
not raise his left arm.
NOTE: The right flank man raises his arm and looks straight to the front unless the squad is to align on
an element to its right.
2) To form at close interval, the formation is completed in the manner prescribed for normal
interval, except that the command is PASINSING PAGITAN, HUMANAY. Squad members obtain close
interval by placing the heel of the left hands on the left hip even with the waist, fingers and thumb
joined and extended downward, with the elbow in line with the body and touching the arm of the man
to the left.
3) To form in column, the squad leader faces the proposed flank of the column and command
SUNURAN, HUMANAY. On the command of execution HUMANAY, squad members double time to their
original position (grounded equipment) in formation and cover on the man to their front.
b. When armed, members fall in at order arms or sling arms. For safety, the command SIYASAT,
TA; AGAP, TA; and IBABA (ISAKBAT), TA are commanded at the initial formation of the day or when the
last command is LUMANSAG.
5.3. COUNTING OFF
a. The squad may count off in line or column formation. The command is
ISAHANG BILANG, NA.
b. When the squad is in a line formation, the counting is executed from right to left. On the
command of execution NA, each member, except the right flank man turns his head and eyes to the
right and the right flank man count off “ISA”. After the man on the right counts off his number and
simultaneously turns his head and eyes to the front. All the other members execute count off in the
same manner until the entire squad has counted off.
c. When the squad is in column formation, the counting is executed from front to rear. On the
command of execution NA, the policeman at the head of the column turns his head and eyes to the right
and counts over his shoulder, “ISA”. After counting off his number, he immediately comes to the
position of attention. All
other members count their numbers in sequence in the same manner as the number one man; the last
man in the file does not turn his head and eyes to the right.
5.4. CHANGING INTERVAL WHILE IN LINE
NOTE: To ensure that each member understands the number of steps to take, the squad leader should
command that may cause the squad to change interval. Members do not raise their arms when changing
interval.
a. To obtain close interval from normal interval, the command is MASINSIN PAGITAN, KAD. On the
command of execution KAD, the right flank man (number one man) stand fast. All men to the left of the
number one man execute right step march, take one step less than their number one man execute right
step march, take one step less than their number (for example, number five man takes four steps).
NOTE: The squad leader takes the correct number of steps to maintain his position of three steps in
front of and centered on the squad.
b. To obtain normal interval from close interval, the command is TUNTON KANAN, KAD. On the
command of execution KAD, the right flank man stands fast. All men to the left of number one man
execute left step march, take one step less than their number (for example, number nine man takes
eight steps), and halt.
c. To obtain double interval from normal interval, the command is IBAYONG DALANG, KAD. On the
command of execution KAD, the right flank man stand fast. All men to the left of number one man face
to the left as in marching, take one 30-inch step less than their number (for example, number seven man
takes six steps), halt and execute right face.
d. To obtain normal interval from double interval, the command is TUNTON KANAN, KAD. On the
command of execution KAD, the right flank man stand fast. All men to the left of the number one man
face to the right as in marching, take one 30-inch step less than their number (for example, number
three man takes two steps), halt and execute left face.
5.5. ALIGNING THE SQUAD
NOTE: The squad leader commands the squad to the appropriate interval prior to giving the command
for alignment.
a. To align the squad at normal interval, the command are TUNTON SA KANAN, NA and HANDA
RAP. These commands are given only when armed policemen are at order arms or sling arms. On the
command of execution NA, the right flank man, turns his head and eyes to the right and aligns himself
with the man on his right. Each member, except the left flank man, extends his left hand laterally at
shoulder level, elbow locked, fingers and thumb extended and joined, palm facing down. He ensures his
left arm is in line with his body and positions himself by short steps right or left until his right shoulder
touches the finger tips of the man on his right. On the command of execution RAP, each member turns
sharply to the position of attention.
NOTE: If the squad leader wants exact alignment, on the command of execution NA, he faces to the half
left in marching and marches by the most direct route to a position on line with the squad, halts one
step from the right flank man and faces down the line. From his position, he verifies the alignment of the
squad directing the men to move forward or backward, as necessary, calling them by name or number:
“PO1 Cruz, Forward two inches; Number Eight, Backward four inches” The squad leader remains at
attention, taking short steps to the right or left as necessary to see down the squad. Having aligned the
squad, he centers himself on the right flank man by taking short steps left or right. He then faces to the
half right in marching, returns to his position (center of the squad), halts perpendicular to the formation,
faces to the left and commands Handa, RAP. These procedures also apply when aligning the squad at
close or double interval.
b. To align the squad at close interval, the commands are MASINSIN PAGITAN, TUNTON SA KANAN,
HANDA, RAP. The movement is executed in the same manner prescribed for alignment at normal
interval except that the squad members obtain close interval.
c. To align the squad at double interval, the commands are IBAYONG DALANG, TUNTON SA
KANAN, NA and HANDA, RAP. These commands are given only when the troops are unarmed or at sling
arms. On the command of execution NA, each member (except the right flank man) turns his head and
eyes to the right and aligns himself on his right. At the same time, each member (except the right and
left flank men) extends both arms and position himself by short steps right or left until his fingertips are
touching the fingertips of the members on his right and left. (The right flank man raises his left arm; the
left flank man raises his right arm.)
d. To align the squad in column, the commands are TUNTON-HARAP. On the command TUNTON-
HARAP, each member (except the number one man) raises his left arm to a horizontal position, elbow
locked, fingers and thumb extended and joined, palm is facing down and obtains an arm’s length plus
about six inches (from the finger tips) to the back of the man to his front. At the same time, each man
aligns himself directly behind the man to his front. To resume the position of attention, the command
RECOVER is given. On this command, each member sharply returns to the position of attention.
5.6. MARCHING THE SQUAD
a. For short distances only, the squad may be marched forward while in a line formation.
b. When marching long distances, the squad is marched in column.
c. To form a column formation from a line formation, the command is
HARAP SA KANAN, NA.
d. When a column formation is originated from a line formation at close interval, the squad may be
march for short distances at the half step with less than correct distance. To obtain correct distance
while marching with less than correct, the command is PADALANG, KAD. On the command of execution
KAD, the
number one man takes one more 15-inch step and then steps off with a 30-inch step. Each squad
member begins marching with a 30-inch step at the approximate point where the number one man
stepped off, or as soon as correct distance has been obtained.
5.7. CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF A COLUMN
a. From the halt, the command to start the squad in motion and simultaneously change the
direction of march 90 or 45 degrees is LIKO SA KANAN (KALIWA), KAD or LIKO HATING KANAN (KALIWA),
KAD. On the command of execution KAD, the lead man faces in the commanded direction and steps off,
as in marching. All other members march forward and pivot on the ball of the lead foot in the
commanded direction and step off with the trailing foot. As the members approach the pivot point, they
shorten or lengthen their steps as necessary to pivot at the approximate point that the lead man
pivoted.
b. To change the direction of march 90 or 45 degrees when marching, the preparatory command
LIKO SA KANAN (KALIWA) or LIKO HATING KANAN (HATING KALIWA) is given as the foot in the desired
direction strikes the marching surface. The command of execution KAD is given the next time the foot in
the desired direction strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution KAD, the lead man
takes one additional step, pivots in the commanded direction as the pivot foot strikes the marching
surface and continues to march in the new direction. Other members continue to march forward and
execute the pivot as prescribed from the halt.
c. To march in the opposite direction, the command is PABALIK, KAD. The preparatory command
PABALIK is given as the right foot strikes the marching surface. The command of execution KAD is given
the next time the right foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution, all members
take one more step with their left foot, pivot on the balls of both feet, turn 180 degrees to the right, and
step off in the new direction. The arms are not allowed to swing outward while turning.
d. To avoid an obstacle in the line of march, the squad leader directs, PAGAWING KALIWA
(KANAN)”. The lead man inclines around the obstacle and resumes the original direction. All other
members follow the lead man.
5.8. MARCHING TO THE FLANK
a. The squad may be marched to the flank (for short distances only) when marching in column.
b. The command for this movement is KANANG (KALIWANG) PANIG, KAD. The preparatory
command is given as the foot in the desired direction strikes the marching surface, the command of
execution is given the next time the foot in the desired direction strikes the marching surface. On the
command of execution KAD, all members take one more step, pivot 90 degrees in the commanded
direction
on the ball of the lead foot and step off in the new direction with the trailing foot. As the members begin
to march in the new direction, they glance out of the right eye and dress to the right.
5.9. FORMING A COLUMN OF TWOS AND RE-FORMING
a. Forming a column of twos from a file is executed only from the halt. The command is
DALAWANG TUDLING PAKANAN (PAKALIWA), KAD. On the preparatory command, the lead team leader
commands MANATILI/WALANG KILOS. The trailing team leader commands LIKO HATING KANAN
(KALIWA). On the command of execution KAD, the trailing team leader executes a LIKO HATING KANAN
(KALIWA), inclines to the left or right when the correct interval is obtained and commands PATAKDA,
KAD and PANGKAT, “TO” so as to halt abreast of the lead team leader.
b. Forming a file from a column of twos is executed only from the halt. The command is SUNURAN
MULA SA KALIWA (KANAN), KAD. On the preparatory command, the lead team leader commands
PASULONG. The trailing team leader commands Stand fast. On the command of execution KAD, the lead
team marches forward. The trailing team leader command LIKO HATING PAKALIWA (PAKANAN) when
the second man from the rear of the lead team is abreast. He gives the command KAD when the last
man of the lead team is abreast of him and his right foot strikes the marching surface. He then inclines
right or left to follow the lead team at the correct distance.
5.10. RESTING THE SQUAD
a. The squad members in formation execute the rest position.
b. When the situation warrants a greater degree of relaxation than the rest position, the squad
leader may command TIWALAG. Squad members may leave their position in formation, but they remain
in the immediate area. The command TIWALAG will not be used to terminate the formation.
5.11. DISMISSING THE SQUAD
a. The squad is dismissed with the members at attention.
b. With armed troops, the commands are SIYASAT ‘TA, AGAP “TA; IBABA (ISAKBAT) TA and
LUMANSAG.
c. With unarmed troops, the command is LUMANSAG.
d. Unless otherwise stated (by the person in charge in his instructions prior to the command
LUMANSAG), the command LUMANSAG terminates only the formation, not the duty day.
STACK AND TAKE ARMS
5.12. GENERAL
a. The squad members execute ITUNGKOD SANDATA from their positions in line formation (at
normal interval) from order arms.
NOTE: When the squad is part of a larger unit, stack arms may be executed in a column formation (when
the formation consists of three or more files and the squads are not normal interval). Second or third
squad is designated as the stack squad.
b. When in line formation, the squad leader commands ISAHANG BILANG, NA and then designates
the stack men by numbers.
5.13. PREPARE SLINGS
After the stack men are designated, the squad leader then commands HANDA and SAKBAT. On the
command of execution SAKBAT, each stack man (or stack squad) grasps the barrel of his rifle with the
right hand and raises the rifle vertically. With his left hand, places the rifle butt on his right hip and
cradles the rifles in the crook of his right arm. Using both hands, he adjusts the sling keeper so that there
is a 2-inch loop formed from the sling keeper to the upper sing swivel. As soon as the loop is prepared,
he returns to order arms.
5.14. STACK ARMS

a. When all stack men have returned to order arms, the squad leader commands ITUNGKOD, TA.
On the command of execution TA, each stack man grasps the barrel of his rifle with his right hand and
places his rifle directly in front and centered on his body with the sights to rear. The rifle butt is placed
on the marching surface so that the heel of the rifle butt is on line with the toes of his foot gear. The
stack man bends slightly forward at the waist and grasps his rifle with his left hand at the upper portion
of the hand guard (keeping the rifle vertical at all times). The first two fingers of the left hand hold the
inner part of the loop against the rifle. The stack man reaches across the front of the rifle with the right
hand, grasps the outer part of the loop, and holds it open for the insertion of the other rifles.
b. On the command of execution TA, the men to the right and left of the stack man perform the
following movements simultaneously:
1) The man on the stack man’s right grasps the barrel of his rifle with his right hand and raises and
centers his rifle with the magazine well facing to the front, wrist held shoulder high, elbow locked. With
his left hand, he then grasps the hand guard (midway), releases his right hand, and re grasps the rifle at
the small of the stock. He lowers both arms, with elbow locked (holding the rifle in a horizontal position
with the muzzle to the left and the magazine well to the front)
2) The man on the stack man’s left grasps the barrel of his rifle with his right hand and raises and
centers his rifle with the magazine well facing to the front, wrist held shoulder high, elbow locked. Using
his left hand, he then grasps the
rifle at the small of the stock releases his right hand, and re grasps the hand guard (midway). He then
lowers both arms, with elbow locked (holding the rifle in a horizontal position with the muzzle to the
right t and the magazine well to the front)
c. As soon as stack man has placed his rifle in position both men move to the foot nearest the
inches (half right or half left) toward the stack man. The man on the stack man’s left insert the muzzle of
his rifle in a similar manner and above the other rifle muzzle.
d. Without moving the feet, both rifle men swing the butt of their rifles out and then down to the
marching surface, making the stack tight with the rifle butts on line and about two feet from the base
line. When the stack has been completed, all three men resume the position of attention.
e. Additional rifles are passed to the nearest stack on the right (right or left if stacked in column).
The men with additional rifle grasp the rifle barrel with the right hand and raise the rifle vertically with
the magazine well to the front, wrist held shoulder high, elbow locked and right arm extended to the
right front. Throughout the pass, the rifle is held vertical with magazine well to the front. The man to the
left of the stack man then grasps the rifle midway at the hand guard with his left hand. The man passing
the additional rifle then releases the rifle sharply returns to the right until it is centered on his body, and
he grasps the rifle barrel with his right hand wrist held shoulder high and elbow locked. He then releases
the left hand and sharply returns his left hand to the left side as in position of attention. He then moves
the rifle to his right front. The stack man receives the rifle and center it in the same manner as
previously described. The man to the left of the stack man sharply returns to the position of attention
after he releases the rifle. Once the stack man has centered the rifle and grasped the barrel with the
right, he bends forward at the waist and places the rifle in the stack so that it is secure (without
damaging the front sight assembly). If there are two additional rifles, the second rifle is passed in the
same manner as the first.
5.15. TAKE ARMS
a. To take arms, the command is DAMPOT, TA. On the command of execution TA, the men return
the additional rifle in the same manner as the rifles were received. The stack man secures the stack and
holds the loop in the same manner as for stacking rifles.
b. The men on the left and right step toward the stack man in the same manner as when stacking
arms. Each man reaches down and re grasps his rifle (one hand at the small of the stock and one hand
midway of the hand guard) and brings it to the horizontal position. The man on the right faces his rifle
first and resumes order arms. The man on the left frees his rifle and resumes order arms.
c. The stack man cradles his rifle and adjusts the sling and sling keeper to its original position and
then resumes order arms.
SECTION VI PLATOON DRILL
Formations
6.1. GENERAL
a. Individual drill movements and the manual of arms are executed while performing as a squad
member during the conduct of platoon drill.
b. Platoon drill, for the most part, merely provides the procedures for executing drill movements in
conjunction with other squads formed in the same formation.
c. The platoon has two prescribed formations – line and column. However, the platoon may be
formed into a file or a column of twos from a column formation.
d. When in a line formation, the elements (squads) of a platoon are numbered from front to rear,
in a column formation, from left to right.
e. During all drill and ceremonies, the platoon leader And platoon sergeant carry their rifle at sling
arms. When the platoon drills as part of a large unit, the platoon leader and the platoon sergeant remain
at sling arms during all manual of arms movements except when executing the hand salute while at sling
arms.
f. When the platoon drills as a separate unit, in line formation, the post for the platoon leader is
six steps in front of and centered on the platoon; when in a column formation, the platoon leader is six
steps on the left flank and centered on the platoon.
g. When the platoon leader commands PABUKANG TALUDTOD;PAURONG;HAKBANG

PAKALIWA (PAKANAN), KAD; PASULONG, KAD or causes the platoon to change interval, he moves at the
same time (with the appropriate step) so as to maintain proper position.
h. When the platoon drills as part of a large unit, in a line formation, the post for the platoon
leader is six steps in front of and centered on the platoon; in a column formation, the platoon leader is
at correct distance (one arm’s length plus 6 inches) in front of the squad leader of the 1st squad while
the platoon sergeant (guide) will move in front of the squad leader of the last squad. When assuming his
post in column from a line formation, the platoon leader faces to the right in marching (on the command
of execution RAP) and marches in the most direct route to his post, halts and faces left. When assuming
his post in line from a column formation, the platoon leader faces to the left in marching (on the
command of execution RAP) and marches in the most direct route to his post, halts perpendicular to the
formation, and faces to the right, when column formation (company) and the command DALAWANG
TUDLING PAKANAN is given , the platoon leader faces to the right in marching, repositions himself in
front of and centered between the squad leaders of the third and fourth squads, halts and faces to the
left. When the unit re-
forms into a column of fours, he faces to the left marching and resumes his original position in the
column.
i. When the platoon drills as a separate unit, in a line formation, the post for the platoon sergeant
is to the right of the 1st squad leader in normal distance. On the command PABUKANG TALUDTOD,
KAD;PAURONG;KAD; HAKBANG PAKANAN, (PAKALIWA) KAD; PASULONG KAD and on commands that
cause the platoon to change interval in line, he moves at the same time (with the appropriate step) so as
to maintain proper position. If a file or column of two is formed, he moves to the leading squad in front
of the leading leader at a normal distance. When reforming into a column of fours, the platoon sergeant
resumes his post in the column when the element has halted.
j. When the platoon drills as part of a larger formation, in a line formation, the platoon sergeant’s
post is one step to the right of the first squad leader in a column formation, the platoon sergeant is one
step in front of the last squad leader. When assuming his post in column from a line formation, the
platoon sergeant faces to the right (on the command of execution RAP) and moves in front of the last
squad leader, and faces left. When the platoon is in the column formation (company) and the command
of column of twos from the left is given, the platoon sergeant faces to the left in m arching, prepositions
himself in front of the leading squad leader, halts and faces to the right.
k. The leader of the first squad serves as the base when the platoon is in line formation. The leader
of the fourth squad serves as the base when the platoon is in a column formation.
6.2. FORMING THE PLATOON
a. The platoon normally forms in a line formation, however, it may reform in a column when each
man can identify his exact position (equipment grounded) in the formation.
b. The platoon forms basically the same as a squad. The platoon sergeant assumes the position of
attention and commands HUMANAY (At PASINSING PAGITAN, HUMANAY or in SUNURAN, HUMANAY).
On the command HUMANAY (At MASINSIN, HUMANAY), the squad leader and the first squad (when
formed) is three steps in front of and centered on the platoon sergeant. Other squad leaders cover on
the first squad leader at the correct distance, which is obtained by estimation. The members of the first
squad fall in on their squad leader as prescribed for squad drill. Members of the other squads fall in on
their squad leader assume the position of attention and turn their heads and eyes to the right, they
obtain correct distance by taking short steps forward or backward and align themselves on the man to
their right. They then sharply turn their heads and eyes to the front as in the position of attention and
obtain proper interval by taking short steps left and right to cover on the man to the front. Members of
all squads, other than the first squad, will not raise their left arms unless the man to their immediate left
has no one to his front in formation on which to cover.
c. When armed, members fall in at order arms or sling arms for safety, the commands SIYASAT TA;
AGAP TA; IBABA (ISAKBAT) TA are given at the initial formation of the day and just before the last
command, LUMANSAG.
d. When a report is appropriate, the platoon sergeant commands MAG ULAT. The squad leaders, in
succession from front to rear, turn their heads and eyes toward the platoon sergeant and salute (holding
the salute until returned) and report for example:
1) Situation 1. When all squad members are in formation, the report is “NARITO PO LAHAT”.
2) Situation 2. When squad members are absent, the policemen and reasons for absence are
reported:
Policeman Depacaquibo – CQ runner Policeman Orivillo - Sick call
Policeman Osorio - AWOL
e. After receiving the reports from the squad leaders, the platoon sergeant faces about and awaits
the arrival of the platoon leader. When the platoon leader has halted at his post, the platoon sergeant
salutes and reports, “Ginoo, narito pong lahat”, or Ginoo, napag alaman pong lahat”, or “Ginoo, ang
wala”. The platoon leader returns the salute, after which the platoon sergeant faces about and march
directly his post, and faces about.
f. If the platoon leader is not present for the formation, the platoon sergeant steps forward three
steps (after receiving the squad leader’s report) and assumes the duties of the platoon leader.
g. When appropriate, the platoon may be formed by the platoon leader rather than by the platoon
sergeant. The procedures are the same as previously described except that the first squad forms six
steps in front of and centered on the platoon leader, and the platoon sergeant forms at his post.
6.3. BREAKING RANKS

a. When the situation requires one or more individuals to leave the formation or to receive specific
instructions from the platoon leader, the platoon leader directs:” Policeman Bautista (pause), Policeman
Santos.”
b. When the individual’s name is called, he assumes the position of attention and replies “NARITO
PO”. He then takes one (15-inch) step backward, halts, faces to the right (left) in marching, and exits the
formation by marching to the nearest flank. Once the individual has cleared the formation, he begins to
double time and halts two steps from and centered on the platoon leader.
6.4. COUNTING OFF
a. The platoon counts off in the same manner as the squad.
b. When in a line formation, the squads count in unison from right to left, each squad leader
sounds off, “ISA”.
c. When in a column formation, the men abreast of each other count in unison from front to rear,
each squad leader sounds off, “ISA”.
6.5. CHANGING INTERVAL
a. The platoon changes interval in a line formation in the same manner as the squad.
b. To change interval when the platoon in a column at the halt, the right file stands fast and serves
at the base. All other members (abreast of each other) execute the movement as previously prescribed.
To obtain close interval from normal interval, the third squad takes one right step, the second squad
takes two right steps, and the first squad takes three right steps. To obtain normal interval, the
procedures are the same except that the squads execute the same number of left steps.
c. To change the interval when the platoon is marching in a column, the preparatory command
MASINSIN PAGITAN is given as the right foot strikes the marching surface, and the command of
execution KAD is given the next time the right foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of
execution KAD, the base squad (right file) takes one 13-inch step and then executes the half step. All
other men take one more step, simultaneously execute a column half right, and march until close
interval is obtained. They execute a column half left and assume the half step when abreast of the
corresponding man of the base squad. On the command PASULONG, KAD, all men resume marching
with 30-inch step. The commands PATAKDA, KAD and PULUTONG, TO may also be given.
d. To resume marching to normal interval, the preparatory command NORMAL INTERVAL

(TAMANG PAGITAN) left foot strikes the marching surface and the command of execution KAD, is given
the next time the left foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution KAD, the platoon
members obtain normal interval in the same manner prescribed for close interval except that they each
execute column half left and then column half right.
e. To obtain double interval from normal interval, the procedures are the same as form close
interval to normal interval.
f. To obtain normal interval from double interval (closing the formation in column from open
ranks), the procedures are the same as obtaining close interval from normal interval.
6.6. ALIGNING THE PLATOON
a. The platoon is aligned similar to the squad.
b. On the command of execution NA, the first squad leader stands fast and serves as the base.
Other squad leaders obtain correct distance by estimation. The members of the first squad execute in
the same manner as in squad drill to
obtain exact interval. All other squads execute as the first squad, except that each squad members raise
the left arm only for unity, actually covering (glancing out the corner of the left eye) on the man to the
front.
c. If the platoon leader wants exact alignment, he faces to the half left (half right) in marching and
marches (on the command of execution NA) by the most direct route to a position on line with the first
squad, halts one step from the squad leader or left flank man, and faces down the line. From this
position he verifies the alignment of the first squad, directing the men to move forward or backward as
necessary calling them by name or number “ Estoesta, Forward two inches; Number eight, Backward
four inches”. The platoon leader remains at attention, taking short steps to the right or left’s necessary,
to see down the squad. Having aligned the first squad, the platoon leader after centering himself on the
first squad, faces to the left (right) in marching taking 2 (3 if at open ranks) short steps to the next squad,
halts faces down the line and aligns the squad in the same manner. After the last squad is aligned the
platoon leader centers himself on the squad leader by taking short steps left or right, faces to the right
(left) in marching, returns to his position (centered on the platoon), halts perpendicular to the
formation, faces to the left(right) and commands HANDA, RAP.
d. To align the platoon in column, the commands are COVER and RECOVER. On the command
COVER, the fourth squad leader stands fast and serves as base. The squad leaders with the exception of
the left flank squad leader, raise their arms laterally and turn their heads and eyes to the right, the
members of the fourth squad raise their left arms horizontally (as in squad drill) to the front and cover
the man to their front and at the same time, glance out of the corner of their right eyes aligning on the
man to their right. To resume the position of attention, the command is RECOVER, on this command,
each sharply returns to the position of attention.
6.7. OPENING AND CLOSING RANK
a. PABUKANG TALUDTUD, KAD is executed from a line formation while at the halt. It maybe
executed while at any of the prescribed intervals. The commands for these movements are PABUKANG
TALUDTOD, KAD and PASINSING TALUDTOD, KAD.
b. On the command of execution KAD, the front rank takes two steps forward, the second rank
takes one step forward, the third rank stands fast, and the fourth rank takes two steps backward. If
additional ranks are present, the fifth rank takes four steps backward and the sixth rank takes six steps
backward.
c. To close ranks, the command is PASINSIN TALUDTUD, KAD. On the command of execution KAD,
the first rank takes four steps backward, the second rank takes two steps backward, the third rank
stands fast, and the fourth rank takes one step forward.
d. On the command of execution KAD, the platoon leader and the platoon sergeant take the
appropriate number of steps to maintain their posts.
6.8. RESTING THE PLATOON

The platoon rests in the same manner prescribed for the squad.
6.9. DISMISSING THE PLATOON
a. The procedures for dismissing the platoon are basically as prescribed for the squad.
b. The platoon leader commands TANDIS NG PULUTONG. The platoon sergeant moves, using the
shortest route in front of the platoon leader, halts three steps away and center on the platoon and
salutes, the platoon leader then commands TAKE CHARGE OF THE PLATOON, and salutes are exchanged.
The platoon leader exits. Then the platoon sergeant takes three steps forward halts, faces about and
carries out the platoon leader’s instructions.
c. If the platoon sergeant so desires, the squads maybe released to the control of the squad
leaders. The platoon sergeant commands PAMUNUAN ANG INYONG MGA TILAP and salutes are
exchanged. The platoon sergeant is no longer part of the formation.
NOTE: Without leaving their position, the squad leaders then command TIWALAG, move to a position in
the immediate area, and command HUMANAY. Then, they carry out the previous instructions and/or
give any instructions for actions before the next duty formation.
MOVEMENTS
6.10. GENERAL
a. The platoon marches in the same manner prescribed for the squad.
b. When the platoon is marching in a line, the first squad serves as the guide and when the platoon
is marching in column, the fourth squad leader serves as the guide.
c. When marching in line, each member of each squad (glancing out of the corner of his right eye)
maintains alignment on the man to his right. When marching in column, each member of the first,
second, and third squads maintains alignment on the man to his right.
6.11. EYES RIGHT
a. The platoon renders courtesy during ceremonies or when marching past Colors by executing
eyes right. The command for this is movement are KANAN TINGIN and HANDA, RAP.
b. At the halt, all men (on the command of execution, KANAN), while keeping their shoulders
parallel to the front, turn their heads and eyes to the right at
a 45-degree angle. They focus on and follow the person passing to the front until they are again looking
forward, at which time their heads and eyes remain fixed to the front. Only the platoon leader renders
the hand salute.
c. When marching, the preparatory command HANDA KANAN is given as the right foot strikes the
marching surface and the command of execution TINGIN all men except the right file, turn their heads
and eyes to the right and align themselves on the right file while continuing to march. Men in the right
file do not turn their heads and eyes but continue looking straight to the front and maintain correct
distance. Only the platoon leader salutes. To terminate the courtesy, the preparatory command HANDA
is given in the next time the left foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution RAP,
the men turn their heads and eyes sharply to the front and the platoon leader terminates the hand
salute.
6.12. CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF A COLUMN
a. The platoon changes the direction of the marching basically the same as the squad.
b. During a column a movement, the base element is the squad on the flank in the direction of the
turn.
c. To change the direction 90 degrees, the command is LIKO SA KANAN (KALIWA), KAD. On the
command of execution KAD, the base squad executes the movement as in squad drill except that the
squad leader takes one 30_inch step and then takes up half step. The squad leader continues marching
with the half step until the other squad leaders come abreast. The other squad leaders, while
maintaining a correct (offset) interval, execute a 45- degree pivot and continue marching in an arc. As
they come on line (abreast) with the base squad leader, they take up the air step, when all the squad
leaders are abreast, they step off with a 30-inch step without command. All other platoon members
march forward on the command of execution and execute the column movement at approximately the
same location as their squad leaders and in the same manner.
NOTE: When the platoon leader and platoon sergeant are marching at their post in column as part of a
larger formation, they execute a column half right (left) rather than a 90-degree column movement.
After executing the LIKO HATING KANAN (HATING KALIWA), they continue marching in an arc, incline as
necessary and resume their correct positions. After sensing that the squad leaders are abreast of each
other, the platoon leader resumes the 30-inch step. At times, the platoon leader may find it necessary to
shorten or lengthen his step in order to maintain correct distance from the unit to his front.
d. To change the direction 45 degrees, the command is LIKO HATING KANAN (HATING KALIWA),
KAD. On the command of execution KAD, the platoon executes the movement in the same manner as a
90-degreeturn except that the base squad leader as well as the other squad leaders execute a column
half right (left).
NOTE: When executing a column movement at double time, elements adjust the length of their steps so
that interval and distance are maintained through and beyond the pivot point.
e. The platoon marches in the opposite direction (PABALIK, KAD) in the same manner of the squad.
f. The platoon inclines in the same manner as the squad. The squad nearest the direction of the
turn serves as the base. To avoid obstacle in the path of the march, the platoon leader directs
PAGAWING KALIWA (KANAN).
g. When space is limited and the platoon leader wants to march his unit in the opposite direction
(reverse), with the squad leaders at the head of their squads, he commands PABALIK SUNUDSUNURAN,
KAD. On the command of execution KAD (at the halt), the first squad marches forward three steps,
execute a column beyond the fourth squad. The second squad steps forward one step, executes column
right, marches forward, and executes another column right between the third and fourth squad. The
thirds squad executes two short column lefts from the halt and marches between the remainder of the
third squad and second squad. The fourth squad marches forward two steps, executes a column left
between the first and the second squads.
NOTE: When there are only three squads, the first squad takes two steps before executing column
right.
h. As the third squad leader marches past the last man in the third squad, he and his squad begin
to march at the half step. After marching past the last man in each file, all other squads incline to the
right and left as necessary, obtain normal interval on the third squad, and begin to march with the half
step. When all squads are abreast of each other, they begin marching with a 30-inch step without
command.
i. During the m movement, the platoon leader marches along side the first squad and the platoon
sergeant marches one step to the rear and centered between the second and the third squads.
j. When marching, the preparatory command COUNTER COLUMN is given as the left foot strikes
the marching surface and the command of execution KAD is given the next time the left foot strikes the
marching surface. On the command of execution KAD, the platoon executes the movement basically the
same as from the halt, .except that the squad takes one additional step to ensure that the pivot foot is in
the correct position to execute the movement.
NOTE: When the platoon leader and platoon sergeant are marching at heir post as part of a larger
formation, the platoon leader takes three steps forward and executes a column right, marches across
the front of the platoon, executes another column right (just beyond fourth squad), marches to his post
in the most direct manner, takes up the halt step, and then steps off with a 30-inch step when the squad
leaders come on line. The platoon sergeant inclines to the right, follows the third squad until the
movement its completed and then resumes his post.
6.13. MARCHING TO THE FLANKS
The platoon marches to the flank in the same manner as the squad.
6.14. FORMING FILE AND REFORMING

a. The platoon forms a single file, from the right, left or as designated only when in column at the
halt. The commands are SUNUDSUNURAN MULA SA KALIWA (KANAN), KAD or File in sequence three-
two-four-one, MARCH.
b. On the preparatory command, the squad leader of the designated squad gives the
supplementary command PASULONG the other squad leaders command MANATILI. On the command of
execution KAD, the lead squad marches forward. The squad leader next to the lead element ( or as
designated) looks over the shoulder nearest the moving element and commands column half left (right)
when the second from the last man is on line with him. The squad leader gives the command of
execution KAD as the right foot of the last man strikes the marching surface when abreast of him. On the
command of execution, the squad leader executes the column half left (right), then marches without
command to the right (left), and follows the last man of the preceding squad at correct distance. Other
members of the squad march forward and execute the same movements as the squad leader. The
remaining squads form the file in the same manner as the squad immediately behind the lead element.
c. The platoon may form a file and execute a column movement simultaneously from a column
formation. The command for this movement is SUNUDSUNURAN MULA SA KALIWA (KANAN), LIKO SA
KALIWA (KANAN), KAD. Following the platoon leader’s preparatory command, the squad leader of the
lead element commands LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN) instead of the leader of the lead element commands
LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN) instead of leader. The other squad leaders command MANATILI. On the
platoon leader’s command of execution KAD, the lead squad executes the column left (right). The other
squad leaders command LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN) at the appropriate time as stated in subparagraph b.
They give the command of execution KAD as the right foot of the last man strikes the marching surface
at the pivot (column left), or the first time the last man’s right foot strikes the marching surface after the
pivot (column right).
d. The platoon re-forms to the original column formation only from the halt. The command is
APATANG TUDLING PAKANAN (KALIWA), KAD.
On the preparatory command, the squad leader of the base squad command MANATILI. All other squad
leaders command LIKO HATING KANAN (KALIWA). On the platoon leader’s command of execution KAD,
the base squad stands fast; all other squads execute the column half right (left) simultaneously. As each
of the moving squad leaders reach a point (l;ine) that ensures correct interval on the element to their
left (right), they automatically incline to the left (right) and command PATAKDA, KAD and TILAP, HINTO
so that their squad is abreast of the base (other) squad where halted.
6.15 FORMING A COLUMN OF TWOS AND RE-FORMING

a. The platoon forms a column of twos from the right or left when a column of fours at the halt.
The command is DALAWANG TUDLING MULA SA KALIWA (KANAN).
b. On the preparatory command, the squad leaders of the two lead squads command PASULONG.
The other two squad leaders command MANATILI. On the platoon leader’s command of execution KAD,
the two lead squads march forward. The squad leader (second or third) next to the lead elements gives
command to start both of the remaining squads in motion. Looking over the shoulder nearest the
moving elements, the squad leader gives the preparatory command liko hating kaliwa (kanan) (when the
second from the last man is abreast of him) and then gives the command of execution KAD as the right
foot of the last man strikes the marching surface abreast of him. On the platoon leader’s command of
execution, both squad leaders execute the column half left (right), incline to the right (left) without
command, and follow the last men of the preceding squads at correct distance (do not close the space if
the files of the two leading squads are not even). Other members of the remaining squads march
forward and execute the same movements as their squad leaders.
c. The platoon may form a column of twos and execute a column movement simultaneously from
a column formation. The command for this movement is DALAWANG TUDLING MULA SA KALIWA
(KANAN), LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN), KAD. The squad leaders of the lead squads command LIKO SA
KALIWA (KANAN) instead of forward. The squad leader of the second (third) squad gives the command
LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN); however, he executes the column half left (right). The remaining two squad
leaders command MANATILI. On the Platoon leader’s command of execution KAD, the lead squads
execute the column left (right). The squad leader (second or third) next to the lead elements gives the
command to start both squads in motion. Looking over the shoulder nearest the moving elements, the
squad leader gives the preparatory command LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN) when the second from the last
man is abreast of him; he gives the command of execution KAD as the right foot of the last man strikes
the marching surface at the pivot (left) or the first time the last man’s right foot strikes the marching
surface after the pivot (column right). Although the command is LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN), the outside
squads (fourth or first) execute column half right (left).
d. The platoon re-forms to the original column formation only from the halt. The command is
APATANG TUDLING SA KANAN (KALIWA), KAD. On the preparatory command, the squad leaders of the
base squads commands TULUYANG LAKAD. The trailing squad leaders command LIKO HATING KANAN
(KALIWA). On the platoon leader’s command of execution KAD, the base squads strands fast. The trailing
squad leaders execute slightly more than the column half right (left) simultaneously. As the trailing
squad leaders reach a point (line) that will ensure correct interval on the element to their left (right),
they automatically incline to the left (right). The squad leader nearest the stationary squads (second and
third) commands PATAKDA, KAD and TILAP, TO.
SECTION VII COMPANY DRILLS
Procedures and Personnel
7.1. GENERAL
a. Individual drill movements, manual of arms and squad and platoon drills are executed (as
previously described) while conducting company drill.
b. For the most part, company drill provides the procedures for executing platoon drill in
conducting with other platoon in the same formation.
c. For drill purposes, a company consists of a company headquarters and two (2) or more platoons.
The company headquarters personnel are attached to the platoons to equalize platoon strength without
interfering with the permanent squad organization; however, the commander may form the
headquarters personnel into a separate platoon at either flank of the company. When headquarters
personnel form a separate element, the ranking PNCO serves as the platoon sergeant and the company
executive officer serves as the platoon leader.
d. When in line or a mass formation, the right platoon serves as the base; when in a column
formation, the lead platoon serves as the base.
e. The first sergeant assumes the position of company commander, if there are no officers present.
f. When the company commander directs that the company open or close ranks, align, stack or
take arms, extend march, close on the leading platoon, or prepare fro inspection, the movement are
executed on the command of the platoon leaders command the movement is sequence beginning with
the position.
g. During all drills and ceremonies, the first sergeant and executive officer carry their weapons at
sling arms. They remain at sling arms during all manual of arms movements except that they execute the
hand salute while at sling arms.
h. The members of a company break ranks in the same manner as in platoon drill except that the
individuals called from the formation form on the commander rather that on the platoon leader.
i. The company marches, rests, executes eyes right in the same manner as the platoon.
j. The company has for prescribed formations: company in line with platoons in line, company in
column with platoons in column, company in column with platoons in line (used primarily for
ceremonies), and company mass formation. However, the company may be formed into a column of
twos in the same manner as the platoon.
7.2. POSTS FOR KEY PERSONNEL
a. Company Commander. When the company is in line formation or in a column with the platoons
in line, the post for the company commander is 12 steps (from the front rank troops) to the front and
centered on the company. As part of a larger unit, when the company is in column with platoons in
column and when in a mass formation, his post is six steps from the front rank of troops to the front and
centered on the company. As a separate unit, when the company is in column with platoons in column,
his post is 12 steps from and centered on the left flank.
b. Guidon Bearer. The guidon bearer’s post is two 15-inch steps to the rear and two 15-inch steps
to the left of the company commander.
NOTE: The company commander should inconspicuously direct the guidon bearer to remain in position
and move with the commander when the company is to faced to the right and marched for only a short
distance.
c. Executive Officer. The executive officer’s post is two 15-inch steps to the rear and two 15 15-
inch steps to the right of the company commander.
d. First Sergeant. When the company is in line formation, the first sergeant’s post is three steps to
the rear of the last and centered on the company; in a column or a mass formation, he is three steps to
the rear of the last rank and off center (one 15-inch step to the left) of the company.
FORMATION AND MOVEMENTS
7.3. GENERAL
a. The company normally forms in a line formation; however, it may reform in column when each
man can identify his exact position (equipment grounded) in the formation.
b. The company forms basically as the platoon. On the command HUMANAY (At close interval), the
platoons from in line, centered on and facing the person forming the unit, with five-step intervals
between platoons.
c. When armed, members fall in at IBABA (ISAKBAT) TA. For safety, the person forming the unit
commands SIYASAT, TA; AGAP, TA; IBABA (ISAKBAT) TA. At the initial formation of the day, or when the
last command is LUMANSAG.
d. The company may be formed by the first sergeant (platoon sergeants) or by the company
commander (platoon leaders). When possible, the platoons assemble near the formation site before the
arrival of the first sergeant or company commander. If the company is formed by the Police non-
commissioned officers the platoon leaders normally observe the procedures from a position to the rear
of their platoons.
1) Forming with Police non-commissioned officers.
a) When the company is formed by the non-commissioned officers, the first sergeant posts himself
nine steps in front of (center) and facing the line where the front rank of each platoon is to form.
b) On the command of execution, the platoons form in the same manner prescribed in platoon
drill. Each platoon sergeant faces his platoon while the platoons are forming and directs his platoon to
adjust (if necessary) and align on the platoon to its right at the correct interval. Once the platoon is
formed, the platoon sergeants face about.
NOTE: If the command MASINSING PAGITAN, HUMANAY, is given, the members of the platoon form at
close interval, however, the five-step interval between platoons is maintained.
c) When all of the platoon sergeants are facing to the front, the first sergeant commands (if
appropriate) SIYASAT TA; AGAP TA; IBABA (ISAKBAT), TA. He then directs (if appropriate) TANGGAPIN
AND ULAT. The platoon sergeants face about and command MAG-ULAT, the squad leaders report as
previously described in Section 6 paragraph 6.2.d. After receiving report, the platoon sergeants face
about. When all platoon sergeants are facing to the front, the first sergeant commands MAG-ULAT. The
platoon sergeants salute and report in succession from right to left, the first sergeant returns each
salute individually. Having received the report from the platoon sergeants, the first sergeant faces about
and awaits the arrival of the company commander.
NOTE: If the company commander is not scheduled to receive the company, the first sergeant
commands SUMALUNAN. On this command, the platoon sergeant and guidon bearer forward three
steps. Simultaneously, the first sergeant faces about, steps forward three steps, and occupies the
position of the commander.
d) When the company commander halted at his post, the first sergeant salutes And report, “Ginoo,
narito pong lahat, “ or “Ginoo, napag-alaman pong lahat”, or salutes and commands SUMALUNAN. The
first sergeant faces about and marches forward three steps. The platoon sergeants face to the right in
marching and assume their posts beside the first squad leader (if the platoon leader is not present, they
step forward three steps). The platoon leaders march around the left flank of their platoons and
assume their posts by inclining and halting, already facing to the front.
2) Forming with officers. When the company is formed by the company commander, the
procedures are the same as forming with the non commissioned officers except that the platoon leaders
from their platoons and the first sergeant, platoon sergeants, and guidon bearer fall in at their posts.
The command SUMALUNAN is not necessary.
7.4. CHANGING INTERVAL
a. The company changes interval in the same manner as prescribed for the platoon.
b. When the company commander wants the company to obtain close interval in a line formation
while maintaining a five-step interval, he directs “LAPIT SA UNANG PULUTONG MASINSINANG
PAGITAN.” The platoon leaders face about and command ISAHANG BILANG, NA. After the platoons have
counted off, the platoon leaders command HARAP SA KANAN, NA, and in succession command HATING
HAKBANFG, KAD. They halt at the five-step interval and face the platoon left, march (half step) forward
until the five-step interval is obtained, and then halt and face their platoons to the right.
NOTE: When the company is at close interval (line formation), the commander may march the company
(in column with less that correct distance) at the half step for short distances. If he wants to march with
a 30-inch step while marching with less than correct distance, he directs “IDALANG AND INYONG
PULUTONG”. The first platoon leader commands PADALANG, KAD. The remaining platoons execute the
directive in the same manner as the second platoon.
c. When the company commander wants the company to obtain normal interval from close
interval in a line formation while maintaining a five-step interval, he directs “PADALANG SA UNANG
PULUTONG GAWING PAGITAN”. The platoon leaders face about and march (half step) their platoons to
a position that ensures the five-step interval between platoons to the left, the platoon leaders command
ISAHANG BILANG, NA. The platoon leaders then command GAWING PAGITAN, KAD.
7.5. ALIGNING THE COMPANY
a. To align the company in a line formation, the company commander directs “TUNTON SA
KANAN”. On the directive, all platoon leaders face about. The right flank platoon leader commands
TUNTON KANAN, NA. He then faces to the half left in marching, moves to a position on line with and one
step to the right of the first man of the first squad and faces (right face) down the line. After aligning the
first rank, the platoon leader centers himself on the first rank and command MANATILI then faces to the
left, takes two short steps, halts, executes right face, and aligns the second rank, then commands
MANATILI. The third and fourth ranks are aligned in the same manner as the second rank. After aligning
the fourth rank, the platoon leader faces to the left and takes one step then face about and move
straight one step forward of the platoon, then commands HANDA, RAP, and proceeds to his post six
paces front and center of his platoon. All platoon leaders to the left of the first take the same actions as
the first leader.
NOTE: If necessary, the platoon leaders to the left of the base platoon command AYUSIN AND PAGITAN
before commanding TUNTON KANAN, NA. On the command AYUSIN AND PAGITAN, the base (squad)
leader of the first squad) faces to the right in marching and moves to the left flank member (first squad)
of the platoon to the right, halts, faces about, steps forward five steps, halts, faces to the right, and
aligns himself on the element to his right.
b. To align the company in column, the company commander directs “TUNTON HARAP”. On this
directive, the first platoon leader faces about and commands COVER. The other platoon leaders
command MANATILI. The first
platoon covers as in platoon drill, the other platoon then execute the movement in succession as soon
as the platoon to their front has completed the movement.
7.6. OPENING AND CLOSING RANKS
a. To open ranks, the company commander directs “IBUKANG TALUDTUD ANG INYONG MGA
PULUTONG”. On the directive, all platoon leaders face about. The right flank platoons leaders
commands PABUKANG TALUDTUD, KAD. And then aligns his platoon. All platoon leaders to the left of
the first platoon take the same actions as the first platoon leader.
NOTE: When clearing grounded equipment, the company may march in column (right faces) from open
ranks (double interval) for short distances. Having cleared the equipment, the commander commands
GAWING PAGITAN, KAD. When returning to the equipment while marching at normal interval, the
command DALAWANG PAGITAN, KAD is given. If the company is marching in reverse order, the
commands TIWALAG and HUMANAY should be given.
b. To close ranks, the commander directs “IPASINSING TALUDTUD ANG INYONG MGA PULUTONG”.
On the directive, all platoon leaders face about and in sequence from the right to the left command
PASINSING PAGITAN, KAD. The platoons execute the movement the same as in platoon drill. The
platoons have completed the movement, platoon leaders face about.
7.7. CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF MARCH OF A COLUMN
a. The company changes the direction of march basically the same as the squad and platoon. The
commands are LIKO SA KANAN (KALIWA), LIKO HATING KANAN (KALIWA), NA.
b. The base element during a column movement is the lead platoon and the squad on the flank, in
the direction of turn.
c. When at the halt, the leading platoon leader repeats the company commander’s preparatory
command. Succeeding platoon leaders give the supplementary command PASULONG. On the command
execution NA, the leading platoon executes the movement as prescribed in platoon drill: succeeding
platoons execute the movement on their platoon leader’s command at approximately the same
location.
d. While marching, the movement is executed as described from the halt except that the
succeeding platoon leaders gives the supplementary command TULOY ANG LAKAD rather than
PASULONG.
f. When executing counter column march from the halt, the leading platoon leader repeats the
preparatory command: succeeding platoon leaders give the supplementary command PASULONG. On
the command of execution KAD, the leading platoon executes the movements as described in platoon
drill and marches through the other platoons. Succeeding platoons execute the movement on the
platoon leader’s command at approximately the same location. When the
movement is executed while marching, the command of execution is given as the left foot strikes the
marching surface. The movement is executed basically the same as from the halt except that the
succeeding platoon leaders give the supplementary command to continue to march rather than
forward. The guidon bearer faces to the left in marching from the halt or executes a column left in
marching, marches by the most direct route outside of the formation and repositions himself in front of
the lead platoon as it clears the rear of the company. If the company commander gives the command
from his post in a separate unit, he moves in the most convenient manner to his new position at the left
flank of the unit/. If he gives the command while at the head of the company, he moves in the same
direction as the guidon bearer.
7.8. CORRECTING DISTANCE BETWEEN PLATOONS
a. To obtain correct distance when the company is marching in column or is in column at the halt,
the company commander directs “LAPIT SA UNANG PULUTIONG”.
b. When at the halt, on the directive “LAPIT SA UNANG PULUTONG”, the platoon leader of the
leading platoon commands (over the right shoulder) MANATILI. The succeeding platoon leaders
command (over the right shoulder) PASULONG, KAD and then command PATAKDA, NA and PULUTONG,
TO when correct distance is obtained.
c. While marching, on the directive “LAPIT SA UNANG PULUTONG”, the platoon leader of the
leading platoon commands (over the right shoulder) HATING HAKBANG, NA. The succeeding platoon
leaders command (over his right shoulder) TULOY ANG LAKAD, and then command HATING HAKBANG,
NA as soon as the correct distance is obtained.
d. The company commander commands PASULONG, KAD; (TO) as soon as all platoons have
obtained the correct distance and are marching at the half step.
7.9. FORMING A COLUMN OF TWOS AND RE-FORMING
a. The company forms a column of twos basically the same as the platoon. The company
commander must allow sufficient time for the platoon leaders, and the squad leaders of the lead
platoon, to give their supplementary commands before giving the command of execution. The
command for this movement is DALAWANG TUDLING MULA SA KANAN (KALIWA), KAD. The leading
platoon leader repeats the preparatory command. Other platoon leaders give the supplementary
command. On the company commander’s command of execution KAD, the leading platoon executes the
movement as in platoon drill. Other platoons execute the movement on their platoon leader’s
command. Succeeding platoon leaders give their commands so as to follow with the prescribed five-step
distance between platoons.
7.10. FORMING A COMPANY MASS
a. The company may form in mass from a company in column (platoons in column) when halted or
while marching. The company must be at close interval (close interval, march) before the command
Company mass left, MARCH is given.
b. On the preparatory command Company mass left, given at the halt, the leading platoon leader
commands MANATILI. The platoon leaders of the succeeding platoons command LIKO HATING-KALIWA.
On the command of execution KAD, the leading platoons stand fast. The other platoons execute the
column half left and then execute a column half right on the command of the platoon leaders to a point
(line) that ensures the platoons will be at close interval along side the platoon to their right when halted.
As the platoons come abreast, the platoon leaders command PATAKDA, KAD. While the platoon is
marking time, the members adjust their positions to ensure alignment on the man to their right. The
platoon leaders allow their platoons to mark time for about eight counts and then command
PULUTONG, TO.
NOTE: On the command of execution KAD, the company commander and guidon bearer face to the right
(left) in marching and reposition themselves centered on the company.
c. On the preparatory command Company mass left while marching, given as the left foot strikes
the marching surface, the leading platoon leader gives the supplementary command PATAKDA. The
succeeding platoon leaders command LIKO HATING-KALIWA. On the command of execution KAD, the
leading platoon begins to march in place. After marking time for about eight counts, the lead platoon
leader commands PULUTONG, TO. The other platoons form in the same manner as from the halt.
NOTE: On the command of execution KAD, the company commander and guidon bearer halt and
immediately face to the right (left) in marching and reposition themselves centered on the company.
7.11. ALIGNING A COMPANY MASS
a. As soon as the company has formed in mass, the company commander gives the command
IBABA, TA (if appropriate) and then commands MASINSIN PAGITAN, TUNTOIN KANAN, NA.
b. On the command of execution NA, the platoon leader of the right platoon marches by the most
direct route to the right flank and verifies the alignment of as many ranks as necessary to ensure proper
alignment in the same manner as aligning the platoon. When he has finished the verification, the
platoon leader returns to a position one step in front of centered on the third squad, halts, and faces to
the right. When the platoon leader has returned to his position, the company commander commands
HANDA, RAP.
NOTE: On the command of execution NA, the platoon leaders and platoon sergeants position
themselves in line with the third squad of their platoon by executing one 15-inch step to the right.
7.12 CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF MARCH OF A MASS FORMATION
a. The company changes the direction of march in mass basically the same as a position column
movement. When executed from the halt, the commander has the unit execute KANAN, BALIKAT, TA (if
appropriate), then faces in the desired
direction of march, turns his head toward the formation, and commands PIHIT SA KANAN (KALIWA),
KAD. On the command of execution NA, the platoon leaders face to the HATING KANAN (KALIWA) in
marching and continue to march in an arc until parallel to the new direction of march. Then they begin
marching with the half step, dressing on the right (left flank platoon leader until the command
PASULONG, KAD is given. The right (left) guide (the base squad leader in the direction of turn) faces to
the right (left) in marching and immediately takes up the half step. All other squad leaders (front rank)
face to the half right (left) in marching and continue to march in an arc until they come on line with the
guide. At this time, they begin marching with the half step and dress (glancing out of the corner of the
eye) in the direction of the turn until the command PASULONG, KAD is given. On that command, the
dress is automatically to the right. All other members march forward and execute the movement in the
same manner as their squad leaders.
b. When executed while marching, the movement is in the same manner as from the halt except
that the company commander faces about (marching backward) to give the command LIKO SA KANAN
(KALIWA), NA. He then faces about and completes the turning movement himself. After the company
has completed the turn, he faces about, commands PASULONG, KAD and again faces about.
7.13 FORMING A COLUMN FROM A COMPANY MASS
a. To form a company in column from a company mass at the halt, the command is SUNURAN NG
MGA PULUTONG, KANAN PULUTONG, LIKO SA KANAN (LIKO HATING KANAN), KAD. The right platoon
leader gives the supplementary command of PASULONG (LIKO SA KANAN or LIKO HATING KANAN) and
the other platoon leaders command MANATILI. On the command of execution NA, the right platoon
marches in the direction indicated. All other platoons follow (in sequence) in column, executing column
half right and column half left on the commands of the platoon leaders.
b. To execute the movement when marching, the company commander commands AGAP, TA
(unless at sling arms), and then commands SUNURAN NG MGA PULUTONG, KANAN PULUTONG,
TAKBONG HAKBANG, NA. On the preparatory command, the right platoon leader gives the
supplementary command TAKBONG HAKBANG, and the other platoon leader gives the supplementary
command TULOY ANG LAKAD. On the command of execution NA, the right platoon marches in double
time. Other platoon leaders (in sequence) command LIKO HATING KANAN, TAKBONG HAKBANG NA and
LIKO HATING KALIWA, NA to bring the succeeding platoons in column with the leading platoon.
c. The platoon leader and the platoon sergeant reposition themselves after the supplementary
command but before the command of execution.
7.14. FORMING A COMPANY IN COLUMN WITH A PLATOONS IN LINE AND REFORMING
a. To form a company in column with platoons in line from a column formation at the halt, the
command is HANAY NG MGA PULUTONG, KAD. The platoon leader of the leading platoon commands
MANATILI. The second platoon
leader commands LIKO SA KANAN. All other platoon leaders command PASULONG. On the command of
execution KAD, the leading platoon stand fast, and the second platoon executes LIKO SA KANAN,
marches 12 steps fast the right file of the first platoon, and executes LIKO SA KALIWA. As they come on
line with the base platoon, the platoon leader commands PATAKDA, NA. After the platoon has marched
in placed for eight counts, the platoon leader commands PULUTONG, TO. The succeeding platoons
execute a LIKO SA KANAN at approximately the same location as the platoon to their front and execute a
LIKO SA KALIWA and then halt in the same manner as the second platoon. When the platoons have
halted in position, the company commander commands HARAP SA KALIWA, NA. On the command, the
platoon leaders and platoon sergeants face in marching and assume their posts.
b. When executed while marching, the movements are basically the same as from the halt except
that the commander gives the command of execution as the right foot strikes the marching surface. The
leading platoon leader commands PATAKDA, NA. On the preparatory command, the second platoon
leader commands LIKO SA KANAN, and the succeeding platoon leaders command TULOY ANG LAKAD.
On the command of execution NA, the leading platoon executes mark time and marches in place
(approximately eight counts) until the platoon leader commands PULUTONG, HINTO. The other platoons
execute the movement in the same manner as from the halt.
c. To re-form in column with platoons in column, the company commander commands HARAP SA
KANAN, NA; SUNURAN NG MGA PULUTONG, KALIWANG PULUTONG KAD. On the command HARAP SA
KALIWA, NA, the platoon leaders and platoon sergeants face in marching and resume their posts in
column. On the preparatory command SUNURAN NG MGA PULUTONG, KALIWANG PULUTONG, the left
platoon leader commands PASULONG, LIKO SA KALIWA (HATING KALIWA). All other platoon leaders
command LIKO HATING KALIWA. On the command of execution KAD, the left platoon executes
movement. The other platoon leaders give the appropriate commands so as to follow the lead platoon
at correct distance.
NOTE: If necessary, the platoon following the second platoon automatically adjust the length of their
step to ensure correct distance from the platoon to their front.
7.15. DISMISSING THE COMPANY
a. The company is dismissed while at attention. It may be dismissed by the first sergeant.
b. When the company is dismissed by the first sergeant, the company commander commands
TANDIS NG BALANGAY. The first sergeant marches by the most direct route to a position three steps
from and directly in front of the company commander. After the first sergeant is halted, the company
commander commands LANSAGIN ANG BALANGAY. Salutes are exchanged. Upon termination of the
salutes, the platoon leaders and executive officer leave the formation. The platoon sergeants face to the
right in marching and take their posts (platoon leader’s position) six steps in front of and centered on
the platoon by
marching around the right flank of the platoon, inclining and halting already facing to the front. The first
sergeant steps forward three steps and faces about. When all platoon sergeants are at their post, the
sergeant commands LANSAGIN ANG INYONG PULUTONG. The platoon sergeants salute. The first
sergeant returns all salutes with one salute. After salutes are exchanged, the first sergeant and guidon
bearer leave the formation. The platoon sergeants then dismiss their platoons as in platoon drill.
c. When the company is dismissed by the company commander, he commands LANSAGIN ANG
INYONG PULUTONG. The platoon leaders salute. The company commander returns all salute with one
salute. After the salutes are exchanged, the company commander, guidon bearer, first sergeant and
executive officer leave the formation. The platoon leader(s) faces about and commands SARHENTO NG
PULUTONG. The platoon sergeant faces to the right in marching and marches (inclines) around the
squad leader (s), halts three steps in front of and centered on the platoon leader, and faces to the right.
Each platoon leader then directs “LANSAGIN ANG PULUTONG”. Salutes are exchanged. The platoon
leaders leave the formation. The platoon sergeants step forward three steps, face s about and dismiss
the platoons as in platoon drills.
INSPECTIONS
7.16. GENERAL
a. The company has one prescribed formation for inspecting personnel and equipment in ranks –
company in line with platoons in line. While inspecting crew served weapons and vehicles, the personnel
are normally positioned to the rear of the formation with the operator (gunner) standing by his vehicle
(weapon).
b. The commander may conduct an in-quarters (barracks) inspection to include personal

appearance, individual weapons, field equipment, displays, maintenance, and sanitary conditions.
c. When field equipment is to be inspected, it should be displayed. Additional equipment not
shown or different models of the equipment should be arranged in a uniform manner established by the
local commander.
7.17. IN RANKS INSPECTION (LINE FORMATIONS)
a. When the company is in line formation, the company commander directs ‘HUMANDA SA
PAGSISIYASAT’. On that directive, the platoon leaders face about open ranks, and align the company.
The platoon leaders take their position one step in front of the ist squad leader.
b. The company commander begins the inspection by stepping forward and inspecting the guidon
bearer. He then faces to the half left in marching and proceeds to the right of the line . When the
company commander has halted directly in front of him, he salutes and reports, ‘GINOO,
unang/ikalawang pulutong. Tinyente dela Cruz ang namumuno, handa nap o sa pagsisiyasat.” The
company
commander then directs the platoon leader to lead him through the inspection, faces to the half left in
marching, the platoon leader faces to the right in marching, inclines and halts directly in front of the
second man in the first squad and on line and at normal interval (close interval) to the right of the
company commander.
NOTE; As soon as the platoon leader and company commander have halted in front of the first two men,
the squad leaders command TIKAS PAHINGA. When the moving from man to man during the inspection,
the company commander and platoon leader(executive officer and first sergeant) simultaneously face to
the right in marching, take two short steps (one step if the company is at close interval) halt and face to
the left. After the company commander has inspected the last man in the front rank, the platoon leader
hesitates momentarily and allows last in the front rank, the platoon leader hesitates momentarily and
allows the company commander to precede him as he inspect the rear of each rank, the next squad
leader commands his squad to HUMANDA. As they begin to inspect the next rank, the squad leader of
the 1st rank inspected commands TIKAS PAHINGA. Normally when inspecting the rear of each rank the
company commander inspects the rear of the last man in each rank, he turns and halts and halts directly
in front of the second man. The executive officer and first sergeant march past (behind) the company
commander and assume their position to his left.
c. As the company commander halts and is directly in front of and facing the individual being
inspected, the individual executes inspection arms. If the company commander wants to inspect the
individual’s weapon, he will inspect the weapon first, then the individual’s uniform and appearance. As
soon as the company commander grasps the weapon, the individual releases the weapon and resumes
the position of attention. When the company commander has finished inspecting the weapon he returns
it in the same manner as it was received. The individual receives the weapon by grasping the center of
the hand guard just forward of the slip ring with the left hand and the small of the stock with right hand.
He then executes read, port arms, and order arms.
NOTE: In the event the company commander does not want to inspect the weapon, the individual
remains at inspection arms until the company commander has halted in front of and is facing the next
man. The individual then executes AGAP TA and BABA TA. As the company commander moves to the
rear of the rank being inspected, each man, as the commander approaches, unfasten the snap of his
scabbard, grasps the point of the scabbard with the left hand, moves the point slightly forward. The
scabbard is held in position until the bayonet has been replaced or, if the bayonet is not inspected, until
the company commander has moved to the next man. At that time, the securing straps are fastened and
the position of attention is resumed.
d. The correct method of manipulating a rifle for inspection is as follows.
1) When receiving the rifle from the inspected individual, reach forward and grasp the rifle at the
upper portion of the hand guard with the right hand. Lower the rifle diagonally to the left, twist the rifle
slightly, insert the tip of the little finger of the left hand into the ejection port (do not twist the rifle but
insert the thumb into the
receiver of the M16 series rifle), and look into the barrel. The fingers reflect sufficient light for the
inspection of the barrel.
2) Grasp the small of the stock with the left hand and raise the rifle to a horizontal position (sights
up) with the muzzle to the right. The rifle is centered on the body with the forearms horizontal and the
palms up. Move the rifle horizontally to the left and inspect the upper portion of the rifle beginning
with the flash suppressor. Move the rifle slowly to the right inspecting the butt. Return the rifle to the
center of the body.
3) Keeping the rifle horizontal, rotate it 180 degrees sights toward the body) so that the sights
point toward the marching surface. Move the rifle horizontally to the left and inspect the muzzle. Move
the rifle slowly to the right and inspect the butt. When moving the rifle across the body twists the rifle as
necessary and inspects the movable parts on the sides of the receiver. Having completed the inspection
of the lower parts of the rifle, return it to the center of the body.
4) Keeping the rifle horizontal, rotate the rifle 180 degrees (sights away from the body) so that the
sights are up. Release the left hand and return the rifle in the same manner as received.
5) When inspecting a weapon other than a rifle, the inspecting officer receives the weapon with his
right hand and inspects it in the most convenient manner. Having completed the inspection, the weapon
is returned with the right hand in the same manner as received.
e. When the company commander has completed the inspection of the platoon leader commands
the platoon to HUMANDA and overtakes the company commander enroute back to the front of the
platoon. The platoon leader halts facing to the front (six steps in front and centered on his platoon) and
exchanges salutes with the company commander. The company commander (executive officer and first
sergeant) faces to the right in marching and moves to the next platoon. As soon as the company
commander has cleared the first platoon, the platoon leader faces about, commands PASINSIN
PAGITAN, KAD and PALUWAG and then faces about and executes at ease. When the company
commander has completed (exchange salutes with the platoon leader) the inspection of the last
platoon, he returns to his post at the center of the company and commands the company to HUMANDA.
He then dismisses the company, as previously described.
f. When the company is inspected by an officer of a higher command, on the approach of the
inspecting officer, the company commander commands BALANGAY, HUMANDA. He then faces about
salutes, and reports, “Ginoo, “A” Balangay, Kapitan Dela Cruz namumuno, handa na po sa pagsisiyasat”.
The inspection is conducted as previously described except that the company commander takes a
position immediately to the left of the inspecting officer. The inspection is terminated by the company
commander in the same manner prescribed for a platoon leader.
7.18. IN-QUARTERS INSPECTION (STAND BY)
a. When the company commander wants to conduct an in-quarters inspection, the members are
positioned on line with their equipment or as near it as possible. The platoon leader positions himself in
the path of the inspecting officer at a point near his area of responsibility. At the approach of the
inspecting officer, the platoon leader commands PULUTONG, HUMANDA, salutes, and reports, “Ginoo,
unang pulutong Tenyente Dela Cruz namumuno, handa napo sa pagsisiyasat.
NOTE: When the situation dictates, the platoon leader may report to the inspecting officer outside of
the quarters. A designated individual commands the members to HUMANDA as the inspecting officer
enters the quarters (bay).
b. The platoon leader then guides the inspecting officer along a route dictated by the physical
arrangement of the personnel and equipment. Upon entering the quarters (bay), the inspecting officer
commands PALUWAG. As the inspecting officer approaches each individual or his equipment, the
individual automatically assumes the position of attention. When the inspecting officer has moved to the
next man, the last inspected resumes the position of at ease. As the inspecting officer begins to exit the
quarters (bay), after completing the inspection, HUMANDA is commanded. The platoon leader and
inspecting officer exchange salutes.
NOTE: When inspecting policeman’s rooms, attention is not commanded. The individuals automatically
assume the position of attention as the inspector enters the room. The inspector then commands
PALUWAG. As the inspector approaches each policeman, the policeman assumes the position of
attention and resumes at ease after he has been inspected.
SECTION VIII
BATALLION AND BRIGADE FORMATION
Battalion Formations
8.1. GENERAL
a. For the most part, battalion and brigade drill merely provides the procedures for executing
company or battalion drill in conjunction with other companies or battalions in the same formation.
b. For drill purposes, a battalion or brigade consists of a headquarters (staff), colors, and two or
more companies or battalions. The right flank unit serves as base when in a line formation; the leading
element is the base when in column.
c. To facilitate the forming of a larger unit, the commander normally alerts the component units as
to the desired formation, time, place, route, uniform, and the sequence in which the units will form.
Unless the right guide’s position at the formation site has been previously marked, the guides report to
the site and receive instructions prior to the arrival of the troops.
d. The officer staff forms in one rank, at normal interval and centered on the commander. Staff
members are normally arranged in their numerical order from right to left. When police non-
commissioned officers form as part of the officer staff, they form two steps to the rear of their
respective staff officer. The Command Executive senior police officer forms one step to the rear of the
officer staff and centered on the commander or one step to the rear and centered on the Colors when
they are carried to the rear (battalion mass) of the staff.
8.2. FORMATIONS
a. The battalion has two basic formations – a line and a column. There are several variations as to
how the separate elements are arranged within either formations the battalion may be formed in line
with the companies in line with platoons in line or battalion in line with companies in column with
platoon in line. From those formations, the battalion may be positioned in a battalion in column with
companies in column, or companies in mass, or companies in column with platoons in line.
b. When the battalion participates as a separate element of a larger formation, or when space is
limited, it is normally formed in a mass formation in the manner as forming a company mass.
8.3. FORMING AND DISMISSING THE BATTALION
a. The adjutant is responsible for the formation of troops. He takes a position at the right flank of
the line on which the units are to form and faces down the line. He remains facing down the line until all
units are formed and then marches to his post midway between the line of troops and the proposed
position of the commander.
NOTE: If guides are used, the adjutant takes his post as soon as the guides have been aligned.
As the commander and his staff approach, the adjutant commands (directs) the units to HUMANDA,
faces the commander, salutes, and reports, “GINOO, HANDA NA PO AND TALUPAD.
b. The commander returns the salute ands commands SUMALUNAN. The adjutant marches
forward, passes to the commander’s right, and takes his post as the right flank staff officer. The
commander then commands or directs such actions as he desires.
c. Normally, the Colors are positioned at the center of the battalion when formed in line or
column, and four steps to the rear of the staff when formed in mass.
d. To dismiss the battalion, the commander directs “LANSAGIN ANG INYONG PANGKAT”. The
company commanders and battalion commander exchange salutes. The battalion commander returns all
salutes with one salute. He then dismisses his staff.
NOTE: In a battalion mass formation, the platoon leaders form as the first rank of troops: the right flank
platoon leader serves as the guide.
8.4. INSPECTING THE BATTALLION
a. When the battalion is to be inspected, the adjutant forms the battalion in line with companies in
line and platoons in line.
b. The adjutant forms the troops, reports, and takes his position with the staff. When the adjutant
has joined the staff, the battalion commander directs “HUMANDA SA PAGSISIYASAT”. Unit
commanders face about and give the same directive. The platoon leaders prepare their platoons for
inspection ion the same manner as in company drill. When all of the platoons in each company have
completed open ranks and dress right, the company commander faces the battalion commander.
NOTE: Besides of the time involved in inspecting a battalion, the commander normally directs his staff to
inspect the companies while he inspects the Colors and makes a general inspection of the battalion. The
Color guards do not execute inspection arms.
c. As the battalion commander (or his designated staff officer) approaches the company, the
company commander salutes and reports, “Ginoo, Balangay, HANDA NA PO SA PAGSISIYASAT”.
The inspecting officer then proceeds to the first platoon to be inspected. The company commander
takes a position to the left of the inspecting officer. The platoons are inspected in the same manner as
explained in company drill. In the event a platoon has already been inspected by a staff officer, or is
waiting to be inspected by a staff officer, and the battalion commander approaches, the battalion
commander is invited to inspect the platoon.
d. When the battalion commander has returned to the front of the formation and all staff officers
have completed their inspection, the battalion commander commands TALUPAD, HUMANDA and
dismissed the battalion.
e. If the battalion is being inspected by a higher commander and his staff, the battalion
commander reports to the inspecting officer in the same manner as the company commanders. The
battalion commander’s staff takes a position to the left of the higher inspecting staff and escorts them to
the unit. The battalion commander escorts the higher commander.
8.5. GENERAL
a. The brigade, like the battalion, has two basic formations – a line and a column. There are several
variations as to how the battalions are arranged within their formations: the brigade may be formed
with battalions in mass, or battalions in line with companies in mass. From those formations, the brigade
may be positioned in column with battalions in mass, companies in mass, or battalions in column with
companies in column.
b. The formation selected is normally dictated by the space available and the desires of the
commander.
8.6. FORMING AND DISMISSING THE BRIGADE
a. The brigade is formed and dismissed in the same manner as the battalion.
b. Normally, the brigade color is positioned at the center of the brigade. Subordinate color-bearing
organizations position their colors to the center of their formation when in a line or column formation,
or four steps to the rear of their staff when in a mass formation.
SECTION IX MOUNTED DRILL
9.1. GENERAL
a. This contains the procedure for the orderly formation and movement of vehicles during drill and
ceremonies for motorized and mechanized units. When necessary, the procedures may be modified to
conform to local conditions.
b. Motorized and mechanized units, when dismounted, conduct drill and ceremonies in the same
manner as prescribed fro ground units.
c. When mounted in vehicles, visible troops sit at attention. Those armed with a rifle place at the
butt of the weapon alongside the right foot in the same manner as order arms, with the weapon vertical
and parallel to the calf of the leg. Grasp the weapon with the right hand so that the right forearm is
horizontal. Visible troops not armed with a rifle, fold their arms (right over left) and raise the elbows so
that the upper arms are horizontal.
d. When marching units and motorized and/or mechanized units take part in the same ceremony,
the units from dismounted (in a formation corresponding to the marching units) with their vehicles to
the rear. On the directive “PASA MASID”, the commander faces about and directs “SA INYONG
SASAKYAN, HUMANAY” or “SAKAY”. Subordinate commanders and leaders, in sequence from right to
left, relay the command and all vehicle members double time to their vehicles. On the signal to mount,
they mount their vehicles. Drivers observe their commander or leader for the signal to start engines
(lead vehicle as a cue).
9.2. FORMATIONS
a. The formations for motorized and mechanized units are basically the same as for ground units.
The interval between vehicles is about five steps. The distance is about 10 steps between vehicles one
behind the other.
1) Column. In this formation, the vehicles are placed one behind the other, and the right
edges of the vehicles are alighted.
2) Line. In this formation, vehicles are abreast, and the two edges of the vehicles are aligned.
3) Mass. A unit formed with two or more columns abreast constitutes a mass. Masses may be
grouped as follows:
a) LINE OF MASSES. Masses abreast with ten-step intervals (Figured D-1).

b) COLUMN OF MASSES. Masses, placed one-behind another with ten-step intervals between
companies (Figure D-2).
c) LINE OF BATALLIONS IN LINE OF MASSES. Battalions in line of masses abreast with 20-step
intervals between battalions.
d) LINE OF BATALLIONS IN COLUMN OF MASSES. Battalions in column of masses abreast with 20-
step intervals between battalions.
e) COLUMNS OF BATTALIONS IN LINE OF MASSES. Battalions in line of masses, placed one behind
another, with 20-step intervals between battalions.
f) COLUMNS OF BATTALION IN COLUMS OF MASSES. Battalions in column of masses, placed one

behind another, with 20-step intervals between battalions.
b. Mass formations may be used for ceremonies or instruction by companies or larger units.
9.3. FORMATION AT VEHICLES
a. To form at the vehicles from any position, the command is SA INYONG SASAKYAN, HUMANAY.
At the Command HUMANAY, the men move (double time) to their assigned vehicles and formed as
shown in Figured D-3. When there are more than five men, they form two or three ranks with normal
distance. When there are more than 15 men, the number of men per rank may be increased.
b. To load, the command is SAKAY.On the command of execution NA,
each man quickly mounts his vehicle.
9.4. MOVEMENT OF VEHICLES
a. To move forward, the commander gives warning PASULONG, and his vehicles moves out. The
other vehicles move forward at the designated distance. They are aligned on the base vehicle (right)
b. To halt, the commander signals HINTO. The driver then slows down and halts the commander’s
vehicle. The other vehicles close to the prescribed distance and halt.
c. To change direction of travel of mass formation, the commander gives appropriate signal (hand
and/or whistle as pre arranged by the commander). On the commander’s signal, the base vehicle turns
90-degrees and slows. Other vehicles turn about 45-degrees and continue traveling in an arc at normal
speed until on line; the base vehicle accelerates as necessary to maintain correct distance on the
commander.
d. To change a line formation to a column formation, the commander signals for a column. The
base vehicle and those directly behind it, move forward. Other vehicles move at a 45 –degree angle until
in a line with the lead vehicle and then execute a 45-degree turn.
e. To change a column formation to a line formation, the commander signals a line formation. The
base (right flank vehicle ) and all other vehicles turn at a 45
degree angle, turn again at a 45-degree angle when the prescribed intervals is obtained and then halt
when on line with the base vehicle.
9.5. MOUNTED REVIEWS
a. Motorized and mechanized units conduct ceremonies as possible to the procedures prescribed
for other units. They may participate (exactly as prescribed for marching units) as dismounted unit and
on the directive “PASA MASID” mount on their vehicles and pass in review mounter.
b. When desired, motorized and mechanized units may position their vehicles in a prescribed
formation and remain mounted throughout the ceremony.
CHAPTER II CEREMONIES
SECTION I REVIEWS
1.1. DEFINITION
A review is an inspection of troops by a high officer or honored guests as a way of showing unit strength,
state of discipline and preparedness.
1.2. HISTORICAL BACKGROUND
Reviews in the Philippine National Police were patterned after the United States Arm’s Procedures.
This is due to the fact that the Americans greatly influenced the Philippine Government,
educational system and the military during their occupation of the country right after the Spanish
regime.
U.S. Military reviews were outlined in the regulations for the Order and discipline of the troops of the
United States commonly known as the Blue Book written in 1779 by Baron Friedrich von Steuben, a
former Prussian Officer under Frederick the Great. He was commissioned by General George
Washington to develop the revolutionary forces into a well-organized and highly disciplined army.
The origin of the Military reviews through may be traced back to as early as the Middle Ages when rulers
were likely to have military ceremonies as a way of showing strength.
At the turn of the Century, armies all over the world begun adopting the regimental system. Regiments
were assigned a specific color (flag) party marched at the front and center of its unit as a point for the
unit to dress on. Since victories in those days were expressed in terms of the number of enemy colors
captured, the color party was the logical priority target and thus suffered heavy casualties.
In the U.S. Army, the colors historically have been placed in the center of the formation and considered
to be part of the company on the immediate right of the colors. This company is still called the color
unit.
Musical elements (usually drums and fifes and sometimes a band) were used during actual battle and
marched 12 to 15 paces to the rear of the formation. By 1862. U.S. infantry drill regulation posted bands
and field music on the right of the formation or at the head of the formation when it moved in column.
Today, the presence of the colors at the center of the formation represents their presence in the old
days at the forefront of the unit during the heat of battle. On the other hand, the presence of the band
represents the significant role that the
drum, fife and other musical instruments have played throughout military history for signaling camp or
on the battlefield.
1.3. PURPOSE
Reviews are often mistaken to be the same as parades. While some features are similar, these are two
distinct ceremonies although the combination of the two is normally practice. A review is a military
ceremony used to.
a. Honor a visiting high ranking commander, officials or dignitary, and or permit them to observe
the state of training of a unit.
b. Present decoration and awards.
c. Honor or recognize unit or individual achievements.
d. Commemorate events; and retirement honors.
It is more fitting therefore to entire a program “ A Review in honor of
” or A Review in Commemoration of
” instead of calling it a parade and review when actually what would be done is only a review.
1.4. GENERAL
Normally, a review is conducted with a battalion-size or larger troop unit.

However, a composite or representative element consisting of two or more platoons may serve the
same purpose. A review consists of the following steps in sequence.
a. Formation of Troops
b. Presentation of command and honors.
c. Inspection
d. Honors to the nation
e. Remarks
f. Pass in Review
g. Conclusion
NOTE: The inspection stage may be omitted for decorations, awards or individual recognition
ceremonies.
Other ceremonial activities, or combinations thereof, that maybe incorporated within the frame work of
a review are:
a. Review with decorations, awards, and individual recognition ceremonies.
b. Review with change of command, activation or de activation of units.
c. Review with retreat.
d. Review with retreat and retirement, decorations and awards.
e. Review with retreat and change of command, activation or de activation of
units.
f. Review and parade with all of the above combinations.

To enable himself to review his own command with a visiting reviewing officer a commander normally
designates an officer of his command as commander of troops. The troop Commander (TC) is
responsible for the preparation of the troops for the review.
Any of the formations described for the battalion or brigade maybe used.
However, the three recommended formations for conducting a review are;
a. Battalion in line with companies in line. (Figure 1)
b. Brigade in Line with battalions in line (Figure 2)
c. Brigade in Line with battalions in mass. (Figure 3)
The formation selected is determined by space available and other desires of the commander.
Commanders may alter the formation or prescribed distances to meet local situations. Each unit should
be sized uniformly with the tallest men at the rear and on the left. Commanders should not cause the
leaders to change position because of their size. Officers and other key police non-commissioned
officers, including squad leaders and other equivalent by virtue of their rank and time in service, should
participate in their deserved positions of dignity.
If possible, the reviewing officer should arrive at his post (figure 4) after staff of the TC has reversed and
the TC has faced the reviewing stand. Upon arrival, the reviewing officer should immediately take his
post and refrain from greeting distinguished spectators until after the review has terminated.
The reviewing officer, host or host commander, and distinguished persons invited to attend the review
(but not themselves receiving the review), take position facing the troops (Figure 4).
When ceremony is conducted for an individual junior in rank to the host or host commander, the junior
takes a position to the left of the host or host commander unless the commander yields the post of
honor to him. Normally, the honor position is the position on the right and is the reviewing officer’s
post. The host or host commander gives the appropriate directive,”IHANDOG
ANG PAMUNUAN” during the conduct of the review. (This arrangement will not hold true if the
guests and hosts are seated at a grandstand. The protocol on sitting arrangement shall be followed).
When a civilian or foreign dignitary receives the review, he takes the honor position to the right of the
host. The host or host commander returns all salutes when, in his judgment, it would be more
appropriate. As a courtesy, the host or host commander should cue the dignitary and inconspicuously
explain the procedures during the conduct of ceremony. The position in which the flags are displayed at
the
rear of the reviewing party corresponds to the position taken by the individual in the front rank of the
reviewing party.
When a ceremony is conducted honoring a foreign official or dignitary entitled to honors, equivalent
honors (salutes) are rendered.
NOTE: If the honors of the dignitary include his or her nation’s anthem, the honors are played in the
following order: four ruffles and flourishes the foreign anthem an approximate three-second drum rolls
and Philippine National Anthem.
When the ceremony includes decorations awards or retirements the host or host commander should be
junior in rank or position to the highest ranking individual being honored. Parallel rank will suffice if no
available junior.
An officer from local staff is designated to escort and brief members of the reviewing party and to show
them their positions.
Since all situations and eventualities relative to various service or units (police academy, Escort and
Honor Guard, regular PNP units, reserve components, or units equivalent to CMT and training
commands/centers) cannot be foreseen, commanders may take minor changes to stated procedures.
However, with a review towards preserving PNP tradition and maintaining consistency, “THEY SHOULD
NOT ALTER OR MODIFY SEQUENCE OF EVENTS OTHER THAN STATED.”
1.5. SEQUENCE OF EVENTS AND INDIVIDUAL ACTIONS
a. REVIEW (STANDARD)
1) Formation of troops
a) As soon as the troops are ready, the troop
Adjutant (from his position near the band) directs ‘IHUDYAT ANG PAGHANDA’.
The band immediately sounds attention call to signal start the ceremony.
b) Upon hearing attention, all Battalion Commanders (BC) face about, bring their units to attention
and right shoulder arms, then face front.
c) The Troop adjutant directs again “IHUDYAT ANG TAWAG AYUDANTE “, the band sounds the
adjutants‘s call, immediately followed by a march music.
d) The BCs give PASULONG, KAD; the troops follow the route in
figure 5.
e) When the companies are already perpendicular with their markers the battalion commanders
command KALIWANG PANIG, NA, the platoon guides go to port arms and move double time for their pre
designated markers. When the platoons are already in their markers BC commands TALUPAD TO.
{Note: Entrance of troops is optional. The review may start with the troops already in position in front of
the reviewing officer. In which case, attention
call shall be sounded to signal the start of the ceremony. The troop adjutant commands MGA GABAY
SUMAHANAY NA, then follow the sequence starting from f. This command MGA GABAY SUMAHANAY
may not be given when the guides are already on the line as pre arranged).
f) The troop adjutant designates Alpha Company as the base company”A”Balangay then positions
himself midway between the line of troops and the TC. At the last note of “A” Balangay, The BCs order
TUNTUN SA KANAN simultaneously this means that all companies will be aligned with the base
company. The company commanders face about then order TUNTUN SA KANAN.
The platoon leader faces about and command TUNTON SA KANAN, NA. When the troops have been
disposed and aligned, they command HANDA, RAP.
g) The troop adjutant now directs “MGA GABAY SUMALUNAN”. The Bn Cmdr commands ‘MGA
GABAY SUMALUNAN, NA then faces front. TA reports to TC “ Ginoo, handa nap o ang talupad”. The TC
acknowledges the salute and say SUMALUNAN KA.
h) As the troop adjutant is posted, the TC faces his staff and commands MGA KALUPUNAN
SUMALIKOD KO, NA.
2) Presentation of Command and Honors
a) When the reviewing officer has halted at his post, the TC faces about and directs “TANGHAL
SANDATA”. The BCs face about command TANGHAL TA; face to the front and salute together with their
respective staffs. When the units have completed this movement, the TC faces about and commands his
staff and himself TANGHAL TA.
b) Upon completion of the presentation and/or honors, the TC commands his staff to BABA TA;
faces about and directs “BABA, SANDATA”.
c) The BCs terminate their salute, face about & command BABA, TA. They then face to the front.
d) The TC faces about.
3) Inspection
a) When the TC has faced the reviewing stand the reviewing officer and the host commander move
forward and halt three steps in front of the TC. Staffs, aides-de-camp and orderlies do not normally
accompany the inspecting party.
b) The TC salutes “ Ginoo, handa nap o ang maga talupad upang libutin”. The band begins to play
march music on the salute of the TC and continues to play until; the reviewing officer has returned to his
post.
c) The TC guides the reviewing party to the right flank of the hand. File and the host or host
commander march to the right of the reviewing officer.
When riding and the troops are in mass formation the reviewing party passes between the line and
battalion commanders and company commanders. When marching the inspecting party passes between
the front rank of troops and the platoon leaders when companies are in line formation.
d) When the inspection is made by motor vehicle the reviewing party enters the vehicle in front of
the reviewing stand. The reviewing officer enters first and occupies the left rear portion. The vehicle
approaching from the left of the TC proceeds to the post of the TC and stops. The TC salutes and enters
the vehicle, occupying the right front position.
e) Upon the departure of the reviewing party, the senior staff officer commands the staff TIKAS
PAHINGA. After the inspection has been completed, the senior staff officer commands HUMANDA
before the return of the TC.
f) As the reviewing party approaches the colors the TC inconspicuously commands GINOO, ANG
MGA WATAWAT, PUGAY KAMAY, NA (six steps from the colors and BABA KAMAY, NA (six steps beyond
the colors)
g) Upon reaching the last elements of the troops, the honoree host and TC return to their
respective positions using the most direct route (Figure 6)
4) Honors to the Nation
a) When the reviewing party members have returned to their posts, the TC faces about and directs
“TANGHAL SANDATA”. The BCs face about and commands TANGHAL SANDATA for himself and his staff.
On the execution of the hand salute by the TCs, the band begins to play the National Anthem.
b) The reviewing party and all military spectators salute while the National Anthem is being played.
c) Upon completion of the National Anthem the TC and staff terminate their salutes on his
command. He then faces about and directs “BABA SANDATA”.
d) The BCs terminate their salute, face about, command BABA, TA

then face about.
5) Pass-in- Review
a) The TC brings his staff behind him, KALUPUNAN, SUMALIKOD KO NA. When the staff has
reversed its position, the TC directs “PASA MASID”. The band moves to march position.
b) The honoree moves forward to acknowledge the salute of the troops passing before the
grandstand.
c) When the colors pass before the reviewing stand, the band interrupts the music and plays four
ruffles and flourishes while spectators execute hand salute or the equivalent salute for the civilians can
bring down after the play.
d) The band continuously plays until the last parade elements leave the parade ground.
e) When all the parading troops and floats have cleared the parade ground, the TC and staff move
forward facing the grandstand and halt ten steps in front of the honoree. The TC salutes and the
honoree acknowledges the salute. He may or may not thank or congratulate the TC and staff.
b) OTHER TYPES OF REVIEW
1) REVIEW WITH DECORATIONS, AWARDS AND INDIVIDUAL RETIREMENT
a) If the inspection is omitted, the TC (following order arms after the presentation and/or honor)
shall command. MGA TAONG PARARANGALAN AT MGA WATAWAT PUMAGITNA, KAD. The ceremony
then continues as outlined in paragraph 3 to 14 below.
b) The procedures mentioned below provide latitude for recognition of one or a group of retirees
of various ranks. However, the local commanders should consider it appropriate to cause the review to
be conducted in the retiree’s honor when only one distinguished individual is retiring and allow that
individual to participate as the reviewing officer. When the colors are marched forward the reviewing
officer (retiree) would position himself in front and center of the colors. After remarks by the host, the
retiree returns to the reviewing officer’s post.
1) The procedures for the formation of troops, presentation and honors, and inspection remain the
same as previously mentioned.
2) When the reviewing officer has completed the inspection and has returned to his
post, the TC faces about and directs ‘MGA TAONG PARARANGALAN AT
MGA WATAWAT PUMAGITNA , KAD.”
3) The persons to be decorated and retirees are formed initially at the ready line at normal
distance behind the last rank of the Color unit. (An alternate position for these personnel may be six
steps to the left and on line with the reviewing officer. They then join the detachment after the colors
are brought forward). They line up from left to right according to the rank of the decoration to be
received. Those persons receiving decorations of the same rank will take positions according to their
police rank. On the command PUMAGITNA, persons to be decorated execute a right face. On the
command KAD, they march forward to clear the right rear of the unit they are behind. They then
execute a column left halt, in a position centered on the colors and execute a right face. The commands
halt and right face are given by the last man in the file.
4) When unit colors or guidon are to be decorated, they are accompanied by their commander and
positioned in a single rank five steps in front of the persons to be decorated according to the rank of the
decorations to be bestowed the highest ranking decoration on the right. The senior staff officer
(battalion) or a platoon leader (company) assumes command in the absence of the
commander. On the command KAD, the colors march forward (seven steps) and halt one step in front of
the line company commanders.
5) The staff of the TC on the command KAD, the staff marches forward for enough to provide
clearance for the colors and persons to be honored. The staff then halts and executes left face on
command of the rear staff officer.
6) The TC marches forward and takes his post five steps in front of and centered on the leading
element. He faces about and commands PAULONG KAD. On the command KAD, the band begins to play
march music and continues to play until the detachment is halted in front of the reviewing officer. The
TC, persons to be honored , and colors march forward . The TC commands DESTAKAMENTO, TO when he
is approximately six steps from the reviewing officer. He then salutes and reports, Ginoo ang mga taong
pararangalanat mga watawat narito napo”. The reviewing officer returns the salute. The host (local
commander ) directs “IHANDOG ANG PAMUNUAN”.
7) The TC faces to the right in marching, passes around the right flank of the persons being
honored , and centered on his staff. He then directs,” ITANGHAL SANDATA”. Unit commander face
about and command TANGHAL TA. They then faces about and execute the hand salute. The TC then
faces about and command TANGAHL TA; he and his staff come to present arms with the
detachment.
8) Honors to the nation shall be rendered at this time. AT the last note of the National Anthem, the
TC commands (for himself, his staff and detachment), BABA TA. He then faces about and directs, BABA,
SANDATA Unit commanders terminate their salutes , face about and command BABA,TA. The TC again
directs “TIKAS PAHINGA”. In turn unit commanders command TIKAS, NGA. They then face to the front
and so with the TC.
9) The reviewing officer, accompanied by the police host advances by the most direct route to the
right front of the line of persons to be honored. The (command ) CPNCO (carrying the awards or
certificates ) position himself one step to the rear and one 15-inch step to the left of the host. After
citation is read, the CPNCO immediately steps forward and gives the award to the police host who in
turn gives it to the reviewing officer . After the award has been secured the CPNCO returns to his original
position to the rear of the host. The CPNCO moves down the line with the reviewing officer as he moves
down the line of awardees . As soon as the reviewing party has halted in front of the first awardee
a narrator reads the citation . The narrator pauses between citations to permit the reviewing
officer time to pin the medal on the person being decorated and move to the next man or to fasten the
streamer on the staff of the guidon or colors. As the reviewing officer approaches the guidon to be
decorated , the bearer executes present guidon so the reviewing officer may fasten the streamer.
Color bearers lower the color to be decorated far enough for the reviewing officer to fasten the
streamer the color bearer gathers the color around the staff so it cannot touch the ground. He resumes
the carry position after the streamer has been attached.
10) When the last award has been presented, the reviewing officer and his party return to their post
. The TC commands his staff to attention faces about and directs “TALUPAD HUMANDA”.Unit
commanders face about and
command BALANGAY, DA and then face about again. The TC faces about and commands (loud enough
for the band to hear). MGA WATAWAT SUMALUNAN, KAD. On the command SUMALUNAN, the persons
being honored execute a right face. On the command KAD, they march forward executing two column
lefts halt on line six steps to the left of the reviewing officer and execute a left face. The commands halt
and left face are given by the last man in the file. In some cases, the awardees may be given seats at the
grandstand. Also on the command SUMALUNAN, the colors execute reverse march. On the command
KAD they return to their original post.
11) On the command KAD, the band plays marching drum beats until the colors are back in position.
12) Remarks are made at his time. The TC maybe requested to give “TIKAS PAHINGA””.
13) After the remarks, the host (local commander) directs “PASA
MASID”.
14) The procedures from this point on are the same as previously
described.
2) REVIEW WITH CHANGE OF COMMAND (See Section VI: Change of Command)
3) REVIEW WITH RETREAT
a) The formation of troops, presentation and honors are the same
as previously described.
b) At the completion of the presentation of honors to the reviewing officer, the TC commands his
staff to order arms , faces about and directs “BABA SANDATA”. After its execution he directs
“TIKAS PAHINGA”. Unit Commanders face about and command TIKAS PAHINGA. They then face
about and assume the parade rest position. The TC then directs “IHUDYAT ANG PASULONG”, faces
about and command his staff to parade rest after which the band sounds retreat. At the conclusion of
the retreat the TC commands his staff to attention faces the troops and directs “MGA TALUPAD
HUMANDA”. When the troops are at attention the TC directs “ITANGHAL SANDATA”. When the units
have completed this movement he then faces the reviewing officer and commands his staff TANGHAL
TA. This is the signal for the band to play To the Colors.
c) When the ceremony is held on a police post the canon is fired (When applicable and /or
appropriate) on the last note of retreat and To the Colors is played while the flag is lowered.
d) The reviewing officer, his staff and police spectators stand at the position of attention during the
sounding of retreat. On the first note of To the Colors, they salute and hold their salute until the last
note is played.
e) On the last note of music, the TC commands BABA, TA for himself and his staff, faces about and
directs “BABA, SANDATA’. As soon as the troops have executed order arms, the TC directs “TIKAS
PAHINGA”. When the units have completed these movements, he then faces the reviewing officer.
f) The review then proceeds with the inspection and so on as
on normal view.
SECTION II PARADES
21. DEFINITION
A parade is a police ceremony wherein a body of troops are formed before its Commanding Officer or
other high officer for the display of its condition, members, equipments and proficiency. It includes
exercise in the manual of arms, the report on the members of the various units present or accounted
for, the publication of orders, etc., and ends with a pass in reviews.
2.2. DISTINCTIVE FEATURES
The preparation and organization of troops for a parade are similar to that for a review. However, in a
parade, since the commander is also the reviewing officer, the distance between the troops and the
commander is greater than that for a review. Other features are; the band conduct sound off the
inspection is omitted, reports are rendered orders are published and officers and guidons are marched
forward and centered on the commander. If retreat is scheduled, honors to the nation are conducted
concurrently with retreat.
2.3. TYPES OF PARADES AND THEIR SEQUENCE
a. CEREMONIAL BATALLION PARADE 1.) Formulation of Troops
a) Units are moved to their positions on the ready line in the most convenient manner. The
Commander prescribes the assembly area, the routes sequence, and time of arrival on the line. He and
his staff take their post prior to adjutant’s call.
b) The procedure for moving from the ready line to the final line is the same as for a review.
2) Sound Off
a) After the battalion has been formed, aligned and given parade rest on the final line, the adjutant
directs “IHUDYAT” and assumes the position of parade rest. He remains facing the formation.
b) At the directive IHUDYAT”, the band plays three sound off chords, at the conclusion of the third
chord, the band moves forward playing a march in quick time. The band executes a left turn to march
across the front of the troops. At the left of the line of troops, the band countermarches and returns
over the same ground to the right of the line. After passing beyond the right of the troops, the band
executes a right turn, countermarches again, and halts in the original position. When the band has
halted, it will cease playing in the next convenient place in the music and will again play the three sound
off chords. (Trooping the line by the band may be eliminated when ceremonies are conducted indoors
during inclement weather and when space is limited.).
NOTE: Retreat, when scheduled, is integrated at this point. Upon completion of the IHUDYAT chords, the
band pauses briefly and then plays retreat (by the trumpet section) without a command from the
adjutant. Upon completion of retreat, the adjutant comes to attention and directs, “MGA BALANGAY
HUMANDA.” Then “TANGHAL SANDATA.” The adjutant faces about and salutes. At the conclusion of To
the Color or National AThhem, the adjutant comes to order and faces about and directs “BABA,
SANDATA”. After the last units comes to order arms, the adjutant faces about. The commander and his
staff assume PARADE REST, ATTENTION, PRESENT ARMS, and ORDER
ARMS with the adjutant. The adjutant’s salute is the signal for the band to play To the Color or the
National Anthem.
3) Honors to the Nation

a) If retreat is not conducted, the adjutant (after the band has completed sount off) assumes the
position of attention and directs “MGA BALANGAY HUMANDA at TANGHAL SANDATA”.
b) Unit commanders assume the position of attention, face about and command BALANGAY, DA
then TANGHAL, TA. They face about and salute.
c) When all units are at TANGHAL, TA, the adjutant faces about and salutes. This is the signal for
the band to play the National Anthem.
d) The battalion commander and his staff execute TANGHAL, TA
on his command on the first note of the music.
e) Police expectators rise and execute hand salute and its equivalent for the civilians.
4) Presentation
a) Upon completion of the National Anthem, the battalion commander and his staff execute BABA,
TA on his command. The adjutant terminates his salute, faces about, and direct “IBABA AND SANDATA.”
b) Unit commanders terminate their salute, face about, command
BABA, TA, and then face (back) to the front.
c) When all units are at order arms, the adjutant faces about, salutes, and reports “Ginoo, handa
na po ang patikas”.
d) The battalion commander returns the salute and commands SUMALUNAN KA. The adjutant trots
forward, passes by the battalion commander’s right, and takes his post at the right flank member of the
staff,
5) Manual of Arms
a) After the adjutant has joined the staff, the battalion commander commands such movements in
the manual of arms as he may desire.
b) The commander directs “PAGSASANAY SA PAGHAWAK NG SANDATA’. He then in sequence

commands SA KANANG BALIKAT, TA; KALIWANG BALIKAT, TA’ AGAP, TA; BABA TA; SIYASAT, TA; AGAP,
TA; and BABA, TA.
6) Report
a) When the manual of arms has been completed, the battalion commander the directs
“TANGGAPIN ANG ULAT”.
b) The adjutant trots forward, halts to his position at the center of the command and command
MAG-ULAT. Unit commanders in succession, from right to left, salute and report “Ginoo , Balangay,
narito po lahat o napag-alaman”. The adjutant returns each commander’s salute.
c) After receiving the repots, the adjutant faces about, salutes and repots “Ginoo, narito po lahat o
napag-alaman”.
7) Publishing of Oders
a) The battalion commander returns the salute and directs
“IPAHAYAG ANG KAUTUSAN”.
b) The adjutant faces about and gives the orders “ Makinig sa kautusan. Ang mga makatalag
ngayon, punong panlarangan (Name of Officer), punong tagapangalaga (Name of Officer), sa utos ni
(Name of Officer) MGA PINUNO, PUMAGITA, KAD”.
8) Officers Center March

a) All officers from the company commanders to platoon leaders including guidon bearers, at the
last note of PUMAGITNA, execute center face. Then when the command of execution of KAD is given,
the officers and guidon bearers march off to the center and mark time upon reaching their designated
position. The first company commander then commands MGA PINUNO, TO. The
command of execution TO, the officer’s halt and face front and shove off at the command KAD.
b) When they are approximately 12 paces in front of the battalion commander, the senior
company commander commands MGA PINUNO, TO. At TO, they count silently. At the count of four,
they execute the salute and bring their hands down at seven (guidon bearers start to execute the
equivalent salute at the count of three and return same starting at the count of six). The troop
commander acknowledges the salute, then command MGA PINUNO, PABALIK, KAD.
c) The group of officers executes about face and shove off towards the center of the troops. As
they approach the line of their respective positions, the senior company commander commands MGA
PINUNO, TO. At the command TO, they halt, then automatically face their respective position and shove
off to their designated markers and automatically halt. At the last note of the band, they automatically
face front at the same time.
9) Pass in Review
a) When all officers have returned to their posts and the band has stopped playing, the battalion
commander directs “PASA MASID”.
b) The battalion passes in review in the same manner as prescribed for a review except the units
render honors when six steps to the left of the troop commander and staff; and terminate honors when
the unit is six steps to the right of the commander of troops and staff. The commander of troops and
staff then assume the role of the reviewing party at their location on the field.
c) When the last element of troops has passed the reviewing stand and executed ready front, the
band stops playing.
d) Expectators may rise, stand and applause after the parade is

completed.
b. CEREMONIAL BRIDGADE PARADE
1) The brigade ordinarily is formed in line with battalions in mass formations. The parade is the
same as the ceremonial battalions parade with the following exceptions;
a) The brigade commander is substituted for battalion commander, and brigade for battalion, in
the description.
b) In moving across the front of the brigade, the band passes in front of the line of battalion
commanders during the sound off.
2) The battalions execute present arms, order arms, parade rest, and come to attention on the
command of execution of their respective commanders. Reports are made by the battalion commanders
instead of company commanders.
3) At the command of execution KAD, of MGA PINUNO, PUMAGITNA, KAD, the battalion
commanders, their staffs, and colors close on the line of battalion commanders and staffs. The company
commanders face to the half right or half left in marching and close on a line four steps to the rear of the
battalion color. The guidon bearers face half right or half left in marching and close on a line four steps
back of the company commanders. The other officers face the guidon bearers.
4) When the officers, guidon bearers and colors have closed and faced to the front, the senior
battalion commander commands PASULONG, KAD. The center officer of the leading rank is the guide. On
the command of the senior battalion commander, the officers, guidon bearers, and colors are halted
with the leading ranks six steps from the brigade commander. The commands TANGHAL, TA and
HANDA, RAP are given by the senior battalion commander.
5) The brigade commander commands MGA PINUNO, SUMALUNAN (pause), KAD. On the
command SUMALUNAN, the Colors execute reverse march. All other execute about face. On the
command of execution KAD, the officers, colors and guidon bearers march forward. The senior battalion
commander commands MGA PINUUNO, TO so that the rank of battalion commanders is on line with its
original position. The senior battalion commander then commands SUMALUNAN (pause), KAD. On the
command SUMALUNAN, the battalion commanders and staffs face outward, the battalion color guard
executes wheeling movements, and on the command of execution KAD the color guard marches back to
its original position. The company commanders, guidon bearers, and other officers face to the half right
or half left in marching and move back to their original position.
c) STREET PARADE
1) For street parade, troops are formed and marched in the most convenient manner. Street
parade may include police vehicles. Towed or transported weapons add to the drama of a street parade.
Cargo vehicles are included only when it is desired to increase the size of the display.
2) Practical formations for street parades are:
a) Columns of threes and fours.
b) Two or more columns of threes and fours abreast.
c) Mass Formation
3) The vehicles move in a single column or column of twos, threes, or fours abreast, as the width of
the street permits.
4) In order to keep police units in the same cadence, units should not march between two bands.
d. EVENING PARADE
1) Organization
The ceremonial elements shall be composed of the following:
a) One brigade of two battalions (two companies of two platoons each).
b) Band of not less than 30 members with a band conductor.

c) Two color bearers for the National and unit colors and two color
guards.
2) Procedures
a) The band sounds the attention call, Battalion commanders command TALUPAD, HUMANDA. The
brigade Commander cautions his staff “KALUPUNAN HUMANDA”.
b) At the sound of the Adjutant’s call, the 1st battalion commander commands his unit SA KANANG
BALIKAT, TA and PASULONG, KAD to its position. At the ready line at the same time, the Brigade
Commander commands PASULONG, KAD and march with his staff to the front of the grandstand facing
the projected position of the parading troops. Once the brigade staff is halted, the Brigade Commander
cautions the Brigade Adjutant, “SUMALUNAN”. The Adjutant proceeds to his position near the band by
taking the most direct route. The 2nd battalion commander counts 24 beats after the 1st battalion
commander had shoved off. After the 24th count, he commands his battalion PASULONG, KAD at the
ready line and marches his unit to its proper position. As soon as column movement has reached
halfway of designated position, the battalion commander orders “MGA GABAY SUMAHANAY”. Guides
move out at a double time (at port arms) to the line marked with flogs, halt and come to order arms
facing the Adjutant.
c) Once the battalions are halted on their designated positions, the Brigade Adjutant shouts
BALANGAY. He then proceeds to his position approximately 24 paces in front of and facing the Brigade
Commander.
d) This becomes the cue for the battalion commanders to face about and command TUNTON,
KANAN. Company commanders, at the last note of KANAN, execute face and caution their platoon
leaders “TUNTON, KANAN”. The platoon leaders face about and command TUNTON, KANAN, NA and
proceed to dress the platoons. To make the dressing uniform, all platoon leaders take their cue from the
last platoon leader and base their movement on him.
e) When the troops are dreesed, the Adjutant faces about, salutes and reports’ Handa na po ang
patikas” to the Troop Commander.
f) The Troop Commander.

1) Acknowledges Adjutant’s salute and cautions him “SUMALUNAN
KA”.
2) Faces about and cautions his staff “KALUPUNAN, SUMALIKOD KO,
KAD”.
3) Faces about and cautions the battalion commanders “TANGHAL SANDATA”. Battalion
commanders command TANGHAL, TA successively and salute together with their respective staff after
the troops execute present arms.
4) Faces about and salutes together with his staff. The band plays appropriate ruffles and flourishes
and appropriate music depending on honoree’s rank and title. (Presentation of Troops). Guns shall be
fired at this portion depending on the honoree’s rank/ title.
5) Order Arms with his staff, faces about and cautions “BABA SANDATA”. Battalion commanders
command BABA, TA successively.
g) The troop Commander faces about, salutes the honoree and reports” Handa nap o and patikas
upang libutin”.
h) Trooping the line takes place
i) After the tropping the line, the awarding ceremony shall follow. The Troop Commander
commands MGA TAONG PARARANGALAN AT MGA WATAWAT, PUMAGITNA, KAD. His staff shall execute
right face and move to the left. Colors and persons to be decorated shall form in the center, halt and
face towards the grandstand. The Troop Commander commands PASULONG, KAD. The detail is moved
close to the grandstand. The Troop Commander faces about and report “Nandito na po ang mga taong
pararangalan at mga watawat”.He returns to join his staff at the back of the colors and cautions the
battalion commanders “TANGHAL, SANDATA”. With the troops a at present arms, the Troop
Commander faces about and commands present arms to his staff and awardees. The National Anthem is
played. After the last note of the music, he commands BABA, TA to his staff and the awardees. The
Troop Commander faces about to face the grandstand.
j) The Personnel Officer reads the citations, and awards are presented. The Honoree returns to the
grandstand and the awardees march to their designated places while colors return to their position in
line of troops.
k) Speech of the Guest of Honor
l) Parade Proper- The Troop Commander orders the Adjutants “IHUDYAT.” The Adjutant goes in
front of the Troop Commander and cautions the band “IHUDYAT.” The band plays and moves at the
same time across the parade ground. Upon the band’s return to its former position, The Adjutant goes
to attention and cautions the band “IHUDYAT AND PAGSILONG” then automatically goes to parade rest.
m) After the lat note of “IHUDYAT ANG PAGSILONG”, The Troop Adjutant goes to attention and
commands the troops MGA TALUPAD, DA followed by TANGHAL, TA. When the troops are already at
present arms, Troop Adjutant executes hand salute. The Brigade Commander and his staff also execute
hand salute.
n) As soon as the Brigade Commander and his staff have executed the hand salute, the band plays
To the Colors. (Gun fires one salvo for the retreat.). Flag details lower the flag at the first note of the
music.
o) At the last note of to the colors, the Adjutant executes under arms, faces about and salutes of
the Adjutant at the same time cautioning him to “SUMALUNAN KA.”
p) When the Adjutant has occupied his position in the staff, the Brigade Commander commands
BABA TA. This is followed by the following commands:
q) HUMANDA SA PAGSASANAY SA PAGHAWAK NG SANDATA, SA KANANG BALIKAT, TA; SA

KALIWANG BALIKAT, TA; AGAP, TA; BABA, TA; SIYASAT, TA; BABA, TA. After the manual of arms, the
Brigade Commander cautions the Adjutant “TANGGAPIN ANG ULAT.”
r) After these commands, the Adjutant proceeds to his position in front of the Brigade Commander
staff and asks for the report by saying”MAG ULAT.”
s) Battalion commanders report to the adjutant one after the other with ” NARITO PO LAHAT o
NAPAG-ALAMAN” The adjutant acknowledges the report of the battalion commanders. He executes
about face and salutes the Brigade Commander with a report “NARITO PO LAHAT o NAPAG_ALAMAN.”
t) The Brigade Commander acknowledges the salute of the Adjutant and instructs “IPAHAYAG ANG
KAUTUSAN”.
u) The adjutant faces about and orders” MAKINIG SA KAUTUSAN. ANG MGA NAKATALAGA
NGAYON-OPISYAL NA NAMUMUNO, KAPITAN (name of officer). OPISYAL PANLANLARANGAN, MEDYOR
(name of officer). “SA UTOS NI (name of commander). “MGA PINUNO PUMAPAGITNA, KAD.”
v. All officers from the battalion commanders to platoon leader including company guidons at the last
note of PUMAGITNA execute center face including company of execution KAD is given, the officers
concerned march off to the center where they halt individually upon reaching their respective markers.
The 1st battalion Commander the commands MGA PINUNO PUMAGITNA, KAD. At the last note of
PUMAGITNA, the officers face the grandstand and shove off at command of execution KAD. When the
officers face t are approximately 12 paces in front of the TC, the 1st BN commander commands “MGA
PINUNO, TO”. At the command execution TO, they all salute including colors. Then responded by the TC,
then Commands MGA PINUNO PABALIK, KAD. At the command PABALIK, they execute about face and
move at the command of execution KAD. Upon reaching to the line of their original position, the 1st Bn
commander commands “MGA PINUNO, TO”, then the officers shove off to their respective positions. At
the last note of the band, they automatically face front.
w.) The Brigade Commander then commands PASA-MASID. The battalion commanders, at the last note
of PASA-MASID, execute about face. The band leader commands HARAP SA KANAN, KAD, PASULONG,
NA and BANDA, TO.
When the band has halted, the 1st battalion commander commands, HARAP SA KANAN, RAP, SA
KANANG P BALIKAT, TA; PASULONG, KAD. The colors
execute right turn at the command of execution KAD.
The 2nd battalion commander counts 24 beats before he commands
PASULONG KAD.
The company commanders and platoon leaders give appropriate commands to bring units company in
column with platoons in line as they pass the grandstand.
SECTION III POLICE HONORS
3.1 GENERAL
a. In the Continental Army, honor guards were used as a protective measure and
as a means of showing the improvement in discipline in the newly formed army. They were probably
selected specifically for their size and strength and maybe their proven prowess in combat. Today, the
honor guard formation is a special courtesy to visiting dignitaries.
b. Members of the guard are selected for their soldiery appearance and superior
discipline. An honor consists of a band, Colors, salute battery (when available and appropriate) and a
formation of troops. Honor guards render personal honor to person of high military/ police or civilian
rank position upon arrival or departure from
a military/police command. Honor guards are not a substitute for those ceremonies appropriate in
review or parade.
c. An Honor Guard should not be so large as to compromise the exceptional
standards required of honor guards. The minimum size of the company honor guard should be two (2)
platoons and the battalion honor guard should be two companies. Uniform will be those prescribed by
the commander of the receiving unit.
d. There shall be a designated host who take part in the ceremony. He briefs the
honoree of the sequence of events and advises him of action that will take place during the conduct of
honors.
e. Prior to the arrival of the person(s) to be honored, the honor guard commander
position the band, the troops, and salute battery from right to left in that order. The troops are formed
in line of companies or platoons with the colors centered. When condition dictates, the salute battery
may be located separately but its control and purpose must not be impaired.
3.2 DEFINITION OF TERMS
a. Cordon Honor- type of honor rendered to a guest in lieu or in additional to
full honors. This may be in the form of foyer, ramp, concourse and sidebuoys honor.
b. Dais- an elevated platform where the honoree and police host stand to give distinction and
prominence.
c. Honoree - A high ranking local/foreign officer or civilian to whom honors are accorded.
d. Honor Guard- consist of a band, colors salute battery (when available and appropriate) and a
formation of troops tasked to render personal honors to person entitled upon arrival/departure from a
police camp saluting base/station
e. Honors- ceremonies rendered to local/foreign military/police officers and
civilian dignitaries as a gesture of courtesy and a tribute to his rank and/ or position.
f. Inspection- The close examination or observance of honor guard by the
honoree.
g. Police Host- an officer designated ti escort and receive the honoree and advises him of action
that will take place during the conduct of honor.
h. Ruffle and Flourish- a ruffling drumbeat and fanfare played in honor of high official at a
ceremonial reception.
i. Saluting Station- camps, post, station, national shrines and other places where firing of gun
ceremonial reception.
3.2 POLICIES
a. Personal Honors
1) Department and Bureau Heads
a) DILG Secretary,
Undersecretary, Assistant Secretary
b) NAPOLCOM Commissioners
c) Heads of bureaus under DILG
2) PNP Officers
a) All Commissioners officers from C/Supt to Director General.

b) All retired star rank officers who are still alive.
c) Other officers entitled personnel honors
3) Civilian dignitaries making official visits shall be accorded appropriate honor

during arrival at departure from police installation/station
4) When two or more person entitled to honors arrive at or depart from police installation/station
at the same time, only the senior will receive the honors. If they arrive successively each in turn shall be
honored. However, in cases when the most senior guest has been accorded honors, no honors shall be
accorded to newly arrived junior guest.
5) Should a person entitled to honors arrive at a police installation/station at the time when the
honor have already begun. The ceremony shall continue but the senior shall receive departure honors.
6) If the honoree has personal flag with him, the flag bearer shall be positioned three steps behind
the honoree and shall follow the honoree during the inspection of troops and return his original position
thereafter.
7) If the honoree is the President, Chief Magistrate of Sovereign or Foreign Country. Or Members
of Reigning Royal Family, the dais of the honoree must be positioned at least six inches right forward of
the host dais.
8) No honors shall be rendered by troops in trenches.
9) Honors shall not be rendered by troops directly engaged in war campaigns, during exercises and
disaster relief operation.
10) During personal honors at the same place and in compliments to the same person, whether civil
or military, guns shall never be fired more often that once in a calendar year, except for a President or
when international protocol requires.
11) In all cases, the national flag must be at full staff when honors are being accosted.
b. Unit Honors
1) Local deployment
a) A ceremony shall be conducted to welcome/send off units arriving/departing for deployment

outside unit AOR for a period of not less six months.
b) The commander or his representative (at least two-levels up) shall be responsible in
welcoming/sending off units under his jurisdiction.
2) Foreign Deployment
a) A ceremony shall be conducted in honor of units arriving departing from/for overseas

deployment
b) A welcome/send off arrival honors will be conducted to
departing units
c) Spouse/parents of deployed personnel shall be invited to send off or present leis to the officers
and men of the departing/arriving unit.
c) Gun Salute
1) Gun salute shall be fired under the direction of a police commission
officer
2) The National flag shall always be at full staff at the time the salute is
rendered
3) Gun salute shall only be fired during the conduct of arrival/departure honors at the following
saluting/bases
a) Police Camps/Bases
1) Camp Crame- NHQ, PNP
2) Fort Andres Bonifacio Philippine Public Safety College
3) Camp Gen Papa- Bicutan, Taguig, M.M
4) Camp Brig Gen Oscar M Florendo San Fernando, La Union-Recom 1
5) Camp Adurru, Tuguegarao, Cagayan- Recom 2
6) Camp Olivas, San Fernando, Pampanga, Recom 3
7) Camp Vicete Lim, Calamba, Lugana-Recom 4
8) Camp Gen Simon A Ola, legaspi City-Recom 5
9) Camp Martin Delgado, Iloilo City-Recom 6
10) Camp Sergio Osmenia, Osmenia Blvd, Cebu City
11) Camp Secretary Ruperto Kangleon, PC Hills, Palo Leyte- Recom 8
12) Justice R T Lim, Zamboanga Blvd, Zamboanga City Recom 9
13) Camp Alagar, Cagayan de Oro City, Recom 10

14) Camp Catitipan, Davao City- Recom 11
15) Camp Dumlao, Isulan, Sultan Kudarat, Recom 12
16) Camp Brig Gen Salipada Pendatum, Makling, Parang, Maguindanao- ARMM
17) Camp Bado Dangwa, Trinidad, Benguet CRECOM
18) Camp Casteneda, Silang, Cavite-PNPA
19) All NCR District, Provincial and City Commands
20) National Shrines
- Rizal Park
- Libingan ng mga Bayani
- Aguinaldo shrine
- Corregidor National
- Dambana ng Kagitingan
- Capas National Shrine
- Pinaglabanan Shrine
- Barasoin Shrine 21)Other Places
- Malacanyang Palace
- Philippine International Airport as directed
by C,PNP
4) The National salute is 21 gun fired successively. This salute is rendered in honor of: the National
flag; the president; and Members of a reining Royal Family. During National Heroes Day, the National
flag shall be displayed at half from reveille to midday at all post, camps, bases and stations. Prior to the
rendering of honors the band shall play field music.
d) How Honors are rendered
1) The President
a) The President shall be received at the salute base or at the building where he is being
entertained.
b) A 21-gun salute shall be fire during the arrival/
departure honors
2) To certain dignitaries- The president of a foreign republic, foreign sovereign or a member of a

reigning royal family shall be rendered the honors pre scribed in paragraph (a) above except that the
national anthem of his country shall be played first to be followed by the Philippine National Anthem.
3. To Ex-President and Vice-President _ the Ex President and Vice President of the Philippines shall be
rendered the honors prescribed for the President, except that the Flourishes shall be followed by a
march in lieu of the National Anthem and the Vice-President shall be receive a salute of 19 guns. If no
band is present the bugler shall sound to the colors after the ruffles and flourishes.
e) Civilian and military dignitaries hereunder shall be rendered salutes and honors with music
which is considered an inseparable part of the salute and which immediately follow the ruffle and
flourishes without pause:
1) Civilian Dignitaries
RANK GUN SALUTE RFLRS &FLRS MUSIC SIZE ARRIVAL/DEPARTURE
President 21 21 4 Natl Anthem Bn

Pres-elect 21 21 4 Natl; Anthem Bn
Ex-Pres 19 19 4 March Bn
Chf Magistrate Of a sovereign or a foreign country head of state
21
21
Natl Anthem
Bn
Members of Reigning royal Family
21
21
Natl Anthem
Bn
Head of Govt 19 19 4 March Bn
Vice Pres 19 19 4 March Bn
Senate Pres
19
19
March
Bn
Speaker of The House
19
19
March
Bn
The Chief Justice
19
19
March
Bn
Secretary of Interior and Loc Govt
19
19
4
March
Bn
Dept of Secs 19 19 4 March Bn
Foreign Ambassadors
19
19
Natl Anthem
Bn
Undersecretaries Of Interior and Loc Govt
19
19
March
Coy
ForeignEnvoys& Ministries accredited To the Phil
15
-
March
Coy
Foreign Ministers Res accredited to The Phil
13
March
Coy
Consul Generals 11 - - March Coy
Vice Consuls or Consular agents Accredited to The Phils
-
5
March
Coy
2) Police Officer
C, PNP 19 19 4 Gen March Bn
Dir Gen 17 17 4 Gen March Bn
Dep Dir Gen 15 15 4 Gen March Coy
Director 15 15 3 Gen March Coy
Reg Dir 13 - 2 Gen March Coy
Chief Supt 11 - 1 Gen March Coy
NOTE:
Provincial governor/major hosting police camps may be given arrival/departure honors on his visit on his
visit (during his incumbency to the camp/base by the unit)
3.4. PROCEDURES
a. Arrival and departures Honors (Individual)
1) Full Police Honors
Initially, honor guard shall be at parade rest. The Honor Guard Commander (HGC) brings the unit to
attention as soon as the honoree arrives. The honoree is met by the police host, who escorts him in
front of the honor guard battalion and leads him to the area (dais).
When the honoree has taken his position (dais), the HGC faces about and commands TANGHAL TA, then
faces about and presents sword together with his staff, while the honoree and police host execute hand
salute.
Appropriate number of ruffles and flourishes shall be played by the band followed by appropriate music,
General March or National Anthem as the case maybe. Gun
Salute, if any shall commence until the last note of the music.
After the last note of the music, the HGC carries sword with the staff then faces about and commands
BABA TA. He faces about and salutes the honoree saying”Handa napo ang tanod pndangal upang
libutin”.
The honoree acknowledges the salute and steps down with the host and the HGC carries his sword and
escorts him and the host taking position at the right side of the honoree for the inspection of the honor
guards. Upon approaching the band, the host switches his position to the right of the HGC. As they
approach the colors six paces before it the HGC commands TANGHAL TA. The HGC shall present the
sword while honoree and host shall execute hand salute for the national colors. Three steps after the
colors, The HGC commands BABA TA. The HGC executes carry sword while the honoree and host drop
their hand salute. They continues marching with the honoree and host up to the point where he peels
off from the two personages and proceeds to his position in front of his staff. The host switches his
position to the left of the honoree and they march directly to their original position at the dais.
At this point the HGC executes about face and salutes the honoree saying “Tapos na po ang parangal”,
the honoree acknowledges the salute and says “MANGYARING LUMAPIT KA”. The HGC executes carry
and return sword, then steps forward he halts two steps in front of the honoree and salutes. The
honoree acknowledges the salute and both drop their hands the honoree then extends his hand to
shake hands with HGC who takes one step forward to acknowledge the gesture. After handshake, the
HGC salutes the honoree, faces about and returns to his position. Again, he executes about face and
draws sword.
The honoree and host face other and the latter salutes the former. They then shake hands.
2) Cordon Honors
In addition to a scheduled honor guard ceremony, the honor cordon ceremonies may be used when
welcoming or bidding farewell to distinguished visitors. The ceremony consists of a select group of
policemen with the characteristics associated with honor guards, designated to honor and provide
security at the immediate arrival and departure site.
The honor cordon normally consists of two squads a cordon commander and a host the size of the squad
is equal to the number of gun salute the honoree is entitled to. When deemed appropriate the
commander may elect to use a band colors and distinguishing flags.
a) Arrival
Upon arrival of the craft or vehicle, the cordon is marched to a position near the exit (ramp) in two
columns, centered to the exit, faced to the center and dressed with about three steps distance between
the ranks. As the honored guest and greeting party depart the immediate vicinity of the exit, and
approach within three steps of the host the cordon commander commands TANGHAL TA and the entire
cordon salutes simultaneously. After the honored guest and all greeting party members have cleared the
formation the cordon commander commands BABA TA and the cordon member come to order arms
simultaneously.
b) Departure
The formation for the honor cordon upon departure is basically the same as that described upon arrival.
At the approach (about three steps) of the honored guest and host, the cordon commander
commands TANGHAL TA and the cordon simultaneously executes present arms. When the honored
guest has entered the conveyance the cordon commander commands BABA TA and remains in place
until the conveyance has departed. If it is an aircraft, the honor cordon exits as soon as the honoree has
boarded the aircraft.
When a band and color are part of the arrival or departure they are positioned as shown in Fig 1 and the
band plays appropriate music during the ceremony. He organizational color is dipped in salute when the
honored guests approaches to within six steps after he passes it is returned to the carry position. As
soon as the guest has entered the conveyance during departure ceremony, the colors and distinguishing
flags depart the area with the honor cordon.
b) Presentation and Honors
Initially the unit is formed in mass in front of the grandstand, when the guest of Honor/speaker (GOH) or
his designated representative arrives at the grandstand; the unit commander (UC) brings his troops to
attention. When the GOH has taken his seat, the UC brings his troops to present arms and present his
troops to the GOH. The GOH acknowledges the presentation. At this point, the band plays appropriate
march music, (everybody in the grandstand should likewise stand). After the last note of the march
music, the UC brings back his troops to attention, the chaplain proceeds to the lectern to lead the
invocation, after which he returns to his former position (everybody takes his seat after invocation)
1) Awarding
The emcee formally announces the start of the awarding. The UC and unit colors move forward a t a
predetermined point and halt while the GOH goes down the grandstand assisted by the host to present
the award. The adjutant reads the citation of the award before it is presented to the UC. The GOH and
the host return to the grandstand after presentation of award. The UC and unit color proceed back to
their former positions.
2) Speeches
The GOH introduced by the host before he proceeds to the lectern to deliver a welcome address. If
previously ordered to bring his troop to parade rest the UC brings his unit to attention after the address
of the GOH.
3) Recessional
The UC with his troops sing PILIPINAS KONG MAHAL. Appropriate music is played by the band thereafter
for the recessional.
At this juncture, the spouses /parents proceed towards the
troops to
present leis to the officers and enlisted men of the unit. Parents/spouses join their respective relatives
for the dismissal.
Note: Procedures for the send off ceremony of unit departing for overseas deployment/duty shall be the
same as the welcome ceremony except that the awarding and presentation of leis is omitted in the
program. Likewise, the National Anthem is played by the band instead of march music during the
presentation of troops.
SECTION IV COLORS
4.1 DEFINITIONS
a. Colors – The term colors means the National and positional or organizational colors.
b. Color – When used singularly the term color refers to the National Color (National Flag).
4.2. THE COLORS AND COLOR
a. Only the national color is entitled to a salute by individuals or units.

b. In garrison, the colors are normally at the office or headquarters of the commanding officer.
They are escorted to and from the headquarters or office by the color guard. In the field the colors are
normally displayed from reveille to retreat in front of the commanding officer’s tent or command post.
During inclement weather, they are cased and placed in the commanding officer’s office
headquarters or tent.
c. Individuals or units render honors when passing or being passed by uncased colors. When not
part of a formation individuals salute at six steps distance from the Colors and hold the salute until they
have passed six steps beyond the colors. The individual in charge of a formation calls the formation to
HUMANDA and TANGHAL TA.
d. The colors maybe carried in any formation in which to or more companies honor guards or
representative elements of a command that participates.
e. Traditionally, the command Executive Senior Police Officer is responsible for the safeguarding
care and display of the organizational color. He is also responsible for the selection training and
performance of the color bearers and color guards.
f. The regulation for individual flags and distinguishing flags for general officers and other
dignitaries is the same as that for organizational colors.
g. During a review, parade or honor guard ceremony only one National color should be present the
national color is given the honor position and is carried on the marching right of positional and
organizational colors. The organizational color of the senior headquarters sponsoring the ceremony is
carried to the left of the major services flag. The colors belonging to the headquarters conducting the
ceremonies are positioned in line with and centered on the command subordinate color bearing
organizations ordinarily carry only their organizational colors (four steps to the rear of their staff).
h. When the formation of the colors is en masse the National color is placed in front and at the
center of the two color guards. The organizational colors are placed immediately behind the national
color and arranged according to the seniority of the units participating in the ceremony.
4.3. SALUTES
a. The national color renders no salute (dip).
b. The organizational color salutes (dips) in all police ceremonies while the National Anthem, To
the Color or a foreign national anthem is being played and when rendering honors to the organizational
commander an individual of higher grade including foreign dignitaries of higher grade, and in no other
case.
c. When marching organizational colors salute six steps before the person entitled to a salute.
They are returned to the carry position six steps after the person.
4.4. COLOR GUARD
a. The color guard consists of two SPO1 and two PO1. To be selected a member of the Color Guard
is an Honor. The senior (color) sergeant carries the National Color and commands the color guard. He
gives the necessary commands for the movement and for the rendering honors.
b. When battalions or brigades carry their organizational colors in a ceremony part of a larger
command, the battalion or brigade color is carried four steps to the rear of the staff. A sergeant act as
color bearer and two experienced PO1, selected by the battalion or brigade command senior executive
police officer act as members of the color guard.
c. The color guard is formed and marched in one rank at close interval, the bearer in the center.
They do not execute rear march or about face. The color guard marches at right shoulder arms and
executes facing movements is IKOT SA KANAN NA (KALIWA), NA. To execute a wheeling movement, the
guard nearest the direction of turn serves as the pivot point of executes the movement by marching in a
place and simultaneously turning in a new direction. Other members shorten their steps and turn in an
arc keeping abreast of each other to maintain alignment in place until the command TILAP, TO or
PASULONG, KAD is given.
d. When passing in review the color guard executes eyes right at the prescribed saluting distance
on the command of the color sergeant. The commands are TINGIN SA KANAN, NA and HANDA, RAP. The
organizational color salutes at on the right flank of the color guard does not execute eyes right.
e. During the ceremonies the color guards remain at the right shoulder arms except when
presenting arms
f. When not participating in a ceremony and a situation occurs that warrants a salute by
organizational color the color sergeant commands PUGAY WATAWAT. The return to carry is made at the
command HANDA DALA WATAWAT.
g. When in formation with the color company and not during a ceremony, the color bearers
executes at ease and rest, keeping the staffs of the colors vertical. The color guard executes right
shoulder, order arms and present arms with the color company. During ceremonies when the colors
are not forward and remarks are to be made the color guards and the color bearers are at parade rest.
h. The uniform for color guards should be the same as that prescribed for participating troops.
4.5. RECIEVING OR DISMISSING THE COLORS BY THE COLOR GUARD.
a. When receiving uncased Colors on display in the commander’s office, the color sergeant
commands TANGHAL TA and HANDA RAP. On completion of order of arms, the color bearers (without
command) secure the colors. The color guard files outside (guard, National color, guard and reforms in a
line formation. The Color guards execute right shoulder arms and the color bearers assumes the carry
position
b. To dismiss the colors, the procedures are basically the same except that the colors are placed
back in their hands before executing present arms.
SECTION V GUARD MOUNTING
Informal
5.1. SEQUENCE OF ACTIVITIES

a. The Sergeant of the guard forms the guard by commanding HUMANAY. The relief commander
falls in so that the guard is three steps in front and centered on the sergeant of the guard. Each relief
forms at normal interval to the left of its respective commander, sentinels form in the order of their
assigned post (one, two, three, etc), the sergeant of the guard orders inspection of arms by the
commands SIYASAT TA, AGAP TA, BABA TA (Figure 2).
b. If an officer has been detailed as commander of the guard, the sergeant of the guard faces
about the reports NARITO NA PONG LAHAT. Salutes are exchanged. After completing the report, the
sergeant of the guard faces about, faces half right in marching and marches by the most direct route to a
position directly behind the commander of the third relief at normal distance. (Figure 2).
c. If an officer has not been detailed as commander of the guard, the sergeant of the guard takes
three steps forward and assumes the position of the commander of the guard. (Figure 2).
d. When the officer of the day arrives, the commander of the guard reports NARITO NA PONG
LAHAT. They exchange salutes
e. Marching to Center.
The officer of the day commands PINUNO AT MGA KAWAL PUMAGITNA, KAD. On the command of
PUMAGITNA the Police Non- Commissioned Officer farthest to the rear commands the other PNCOs SA
KANANG BALIKAT, TA. On the command KAD the commander of the guard marches forward and halts
three steps in front of the officer of the day. The PNCOs march forward and execute column left without
command when on a line three steps to the rear of the commander of the guard. The PNCO in the rear
commands the other PNCOs to halt and face to the right (at right shoulder arms) when they are
centered on the commander of the guard. (Figure 3)
f. After the commander of the guard and the PNCOs halt and are in position, the officer of the day
marches forward, halts at normal distance in front of the commander of the guard and designates
PINUNO NG TANOD. He then faces half right in marching and marches around and to the rear of the
commander of the guard. He halts at normal distance in front of the right flank PNCO and designates
SARHENTO NG TANOD. He then faces half right in marching and marches around and to the rear of the
commander of the guard. He faces to the right in marching takes two steps, halts, executes a left and
designates. PINUNO PANGALAWANG PAMALIT and PINUNO UNANG PAMALIT. He then faces about
marches by the
most direct route to his post halts and faces about again (Figure 4). If an officer is not present as
commander of the guard the officer of the day designates the right flank PNCO. PINUNO NG TANOD.
g. Return to Post
The officer of the day commands SUMALUNAN. At this command, the commander of the guard and
PNCO face about, march to their designated post, and halt without command. The sergeant of the guard
commands the relief commander to BABA TA and HARAP SA LIKOD, NA. If an officer has not been
detailed as commander of the guard, the first relief commander gives these commands (Figure 5).
h. Inspecting the Guard
1) The officer of the day commands HUMANDA SA PAGSISIYASAT. At the command, the
commander of the guard, without saluting, faces about and commands PABUKANG TALUDTOD, NA.
Ranks are opened and dressed. When the commander of the guard has taken his post, the officer of the
day inspects the guard.
2) The officer of the day orders sentinels who are not presentable for guard to fall out and return
to quarters, supernumeraries, if any, replace the men who have fallen out.
3) After inspecting the guard, the officer of the day resumes his original position and commands
DALHIN ANG MGA TANOD SA BAHAY TANURAN. Salutes are exchanged. The commander of the guard
faces to the left and commands LAPIT TALUDTOD, NA. He then moves to his position six steps in front of
and centered on the guard, faces the guard and commands HARAP SA KANAN, NA; KANANG BALIKAT,
TA. He positions himself at the head of the left file at normal distance and marches the guard to the
guard house.
i. Relieving the Old Guard
Before the new guard arrives, at the guard house, the old guard is formed in a line formation with two
or more relief. The commander of the old guard positions himself six steps in front of and centered on
the guard, when the new guard is six steps from the left flank of the old guard, the commander of the
new guard commands KANAN, TINGIN, NA. He faces back to the front and renders the proper salutes.
When the new guard has cleared the right flank of the old guard, the commander of the new guard
commands HANDA, RAP. The commander of the old guard faces about, commands BABA, TA and faces
back to the front.
j. Formation of the Old Guard and New Guard at the Guardhouse
After the new guard executes HANDA, RAP, commander of the guard commands HARAP SA KANAN, RAP
then PASULONG, KAD. At the command KAD he positions himself six steps to the rear of [ ] and centered
on his guard. He halts the new guard when it is on line with and six steps to the right of the old guard.
Then he commands BABA, TA; HARAP SA LIKOD, NA. The left flank man, first relief, verifies six steps
interval; dress left dress. He aligns his guard (Figure 6).
k. Presenting New and Old Guard
When the new guard is in position, the commanders of both guards face about and command TANGHAL,
TA. Then they face each other and exchange salutes, face toward their respective guards, command
BABA, TA and face back to the front.
l. Presenting the Guards to the Officer of the Day
1) After the new guard has been presented to the old guard, the new guard and old officers of the
day take their positions 18 steps in front of and centered on their respective guards. Commanders of
both guards face about, command “ITANGHAL, TA, “ face back to the front, and salute their respective
officer of the day.
2) After salutes have been exchanged, both commanders face about, command”BABA, TA,” and
face back to the front. When both have face back to the front, and salute their respective officer of the
day.
m. Disposition of the new and old guards
1) After both officers of the day have faced their guards, the new officer of the day
commands”POST THE FIRST RELIEF’. The new commander salutes the new officer of the day, faces
about, and commands “TIWALAG.” The guard reports to the guardhouse and commander of the first
relief reports to the commander of the guard for instructions on posting his relief.
2) The old officer of the day commands” LUMANSAG”. The old commander salutes the old officer
of the day, faces about and command”TIKAS PAHINGA.” He then contacts the new commander and
conveys any instructions and orders.
a) If the old guard was furnished from one company, the commander of the old guard marches the
guard to the company area and dismisses it by commanding “AGAP, TA;LUMANSAG.”
b) If the guard was furnished from more than one company the old commander instructs the
senior member of each company to march the guard detail to the company area and dismiss it, in
accordance with (1) above.
c) After the third relief of the old guard has been relieved, the commander of the relief reports to
the commander of the new guard. The commander of the new guard inspects the relief and orders the
relief commander to march the relief to the company area and dismiss it. Salutes are exchanged. The
relief is dismissed in accordance with (1) above.
5.2. POSTING RELIEFS
a. General
1) Before a relief goes on post, the commander of the relief assembles the sentinels and checks
their appearances, fitness for duty and the condition of their arms, if carried. He issues ammunition,
supervises loading the if required and makes sure that the sentinels understand their instructions. When
the relief is large it may be more convenient to form the relief call the roll and inspect the sentinel in
ranks.
2) The relief commander writes down the names of the sentinels, the number of their posts, the
time he directed them to their posts, and the time they report back to the guard house after being
relieved. The commander of the guard keeps this record on file.
b. Posting Sentinels
1) The commander of the new relief forms it by commanding “HUMANAY”. At that command the
relief forms in two ranks, three steps in front of and centered on the relief commander. Sentinels
assigned to even numbered posts (2, 4,6,8) form in the front rank. Sentinels assigned to odd numbered
posts (1, 3, 5, 7) form in the rear rank. The commander of the old relief falls in to the rear of the sentinel
for post No 1 (Fig. 7).
a) The commander of the new relief commands, “SIYASAT, TA” (if arms are to be loaded, he gives
the necessary commands at this time and makes certain that safety procedures are carefully
observed);”AGAP, TA” “BABA, TA.
b) He commands “TULUYANG BILANG, NA.” The sentinels call off the number of their assigned
posts, rear to front and from right to left.
c) He reports to the commander of the guard, “Sir, the
relief is present and ready to be posted,” or “Sir, absent.” Salutes are exchanged.
(If the commander of the guard is a non commissioned officer, the commander of the new relief reports,
“Sergeant, the relief is present and ready to be posted, “or “Sergeant, absent.”
d) After the commander of the guard commands POST YOUR RELIEF,” salutes are exchanged. The
commander of the new relief takes charge of his relief and commands” HARAP SA KANAN, RAP; SA
KANANG BALIKAT, TA” (If appropriate), and PASULONG KAD.” He marches to the left of the rear rank at
normal interval while the commander of the old relief marches on the right of the leading rank.
2) During daylight hours, the commander of the new relief halts his relief six steps from the old
sentinel and commands “NUMBER ONE” (TWO, THREE, ETC). The new sentinel called marches forward
and halts three steps in front of the old sentinel. If armed with the rifle carbine, he executes port arms.
Both
relief commanders advance and halt so that they are centered between the two sentinels. Then they
execute a left (right) face each other (Fig. 8a).
a) The commander of the new relief commands “TRANSMIT YOUR ORDERS,” and the old sentinel
transmits any changes in orders occurring during his tour or states, “Post and orders remain the same.”
The relief commander then questions the new sentinels, “Do you understand your orders? If the new
sentinel understands his orders he replies, ‘Yes, I do. “If not the new relief commander clarifies the
orders.
b) The commander of the new relief commands “SENTINEL, POST.” On that command, both
sentinels resume right shoulder or sling arms if appropriate, face the new commander, and march
backward until they are online with the commander of the old relief.
3) The commander of the new relief commands his relief “FORWARD MARCH.” The commander
of the old relief takes one step backward to clear the old sentinel (Fig. 8b). The relief advances and the
relief commanders take their original positions as it passes them.
a) The old sentinel takes his place at the rear of the relief as
it passes him.
b) The new sentinel stands fast until the relief has passed six steps beyond him and then he walks
his post.
4) The commander of the old relief takes command when his last sentinel has been relieved.
a) The commander of the new relief commands “RELIEF COMMANDER POST” and both
commanders exchange positions by passing each other right shoulder to right shoulder, halt, and face
about, both sentinels stand fast (Fig. 8 c).
b) After the relief commanders face about , the commander of old relief commands” SENTINELS,
POST.” On that command, both sentinels resume right shoulder or sling arms if appropriate, face the
commander of the old relief, and march backward until they are online with the commander of the new
relief.
1) The commander of the old relief commands his relief “PASULONG, KAD.”
2) The commander of the new relief takes one step backward to clear the old sentinel. The relief
takes one step backward to clear the old sentinel. The relief advances, the relief commanders take
their new position, and the old sentinel takes his place at the rear of the relief as it passes him.
5) When the old relief returns to the guard house, the commander of the old relief commands
“HINTO” and the commander of the new relief and the commander of the new relief falls out.
a) The commander of the old relief commands “SIYASAT, TA”,. (if weapons are loaded, they are
unloaded at the time and safety procedures are carefully observed);”AGAP, TA; LUMANSAG.” He
reports to the commander of the guard that his relief has been relieved and is present in the guard
house.
b) If the old relief was the third relief of the old guard, the relief commander dismisses his relief in
accordance with paragraph .
6) During the hours of challenging, the commander of the new relief halts the relief when the
sentinel challenges “HINTO”! “Who is there?” The commander answers, “Relief.” The sentinel
commands “MANGYARI LUMAPIT PO UPANG MAKILALA” and the relief commander advances until the
sentinel commands “HINTO.” The commander marches the relief forward and halts it six steps from the
old sentinel. The procedure for relieving the old sentinel is the same as in b above, except that when a
new sentinel is armed with a pistol he comes to “raise pistol “ after halting and when posted returns his
pistol.
7) If transportation is utilized to post the relief, the sentinels are posted and relieved using the
procedure described in f—above. The old and new relief commanders and the sentinel to be posted are
the only members of the relief who dismount.
c. Posting Other Relief
1) To post a relief when there is no sentinel on the post, the commander forms his relief as
prescribed in paragraph b 1(a), (b), and (c).
a) He halts the relief six steps from the limits of the post concerned and commands “NUMBER
ONE” (TWO, THREE, ETC). The sentinel called takes three steps forward; halts execute port arms if
armed with the rifle or carbine, and faces to the left. The commander advances three steps in front of
the relief, halts, and faces to the right, facing the sentinel. The sentinel if armed with a pistol executes
“raise pistol” after facing to the left.
b) The relief commander asks, “Do you understand your orders?” If he understands the orders, the
new sentinel replies, “Yes, I do.” If not, the commander explains any points necessary.
c) The relief commander commands “POST”. The sentinel execute right shoulder or sling arms or
return pistol as appropriate, takes four steps backward to clear the relief and walks his post when the
relief is six steps beyond him.
d) The commander resumes his original position as the relief
passes him.
2) If post are numerous or widespread, the officer of the day can authorize the relief to be divided
into small groups, placing each group under a non commissioned officer for posting; have sentinels
posted individually; or use a combination of these two methods.
a) If sentinels are posted individually, the relief commander orders, “Sentinel, take your post.”
b) If sentinels are posted as a group, the relief commander orders “Take your posts.” Each sentinel
then proceeds directly to his post. Sentinels relieve each other at a specified point and transmit changes
in orders.
c) A sentinel relieved individually proceeds directly to the guardhouse and reports to the
commander of the old relief. The last sentinel guarding a post from which he will not be relieved by
another sentinel proceeds directly to the guard house at a designated time.
5.3. FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING
a. General
1) Uniforms, arms and equipment for formal guard mounts are prescribed by the commanding
officer.
2) Formal guard mounting requires a band and is held on the parade ground of the organization
from which the guard is detailed.
b. Assembly of Band
The band takes its place on the parade ground at a point where its left flank is 12 steps to the right of
where the right flank of the guard will be (fig. 9). The adjutant makes sure that the guard is ready to
march onto the parade ground and then signals the band to sound Adjutant’s Call.
c. Assembly and Forming the Guard
1) The Guard Details are formed as prescribed in paragraph 5.1.b of informal guard mounting.
When assembly sounds, each guard detail is marched to the point of assembly of the parade ground and
is reported to the Sergeant of the Guard.
2) The guard Details are assembled and formed into a platoon. If there are more than 14 men per
rank the guard is divided into two platoons.
3) The assistant sergeant of the guard takes his post three steps in front and centered on the
second. The remaining PNCOs if any form on the left flank to equalize the number of men in each rank.
After the platoons are formed, the sergeant of the guard to the right.
d. Marching the Guard to the Parade Ground
1) Upon the Adjutant’s call, the band plays march music. The Adjutant, with the CPNCO on his left,
marches forward on the first note of the music.
2) The Sergeant of the Guard takes his post three steps to the left of the left file and centered on
the guard. He commands KANANG BALIKAT, TA at
the first note of the adjutant’s Call and marches the guard in column onto the parade ground. He
approaches the parade ground from a direction near to the final line which the guard will form. He halts
the guard when the head of the column is 12 steps from the left flank of the band and centered on the
CPNCO. At this time, the band stops playing. The Sergeant of the Guard faces to the right and, if
appropriate commands BABA, TA: HARAP SA KALIWA, NA.
e. Dressing the Guard
The Sergeant of the Guard and the assistant sergeant of the guard, if there are two platoons, dress the
guard.
f. Sergeant of the Guard
1) When the Sergeant of the guard commands HANDA, HARAP, the commander of the Guards
takes position six steps in the rear of the right flank man of the rear flank, (if there are two platoons, the
assistant commander of the guard takes his post behind the second platoon in the same position as
prescribed for the commander of the guard) The Sergeant of the guard faces about and reports to the
CPNCO, “NARITO PO LAHAT “or “ ANG WALA”. Salutes are exchanged and the CPNCO commands
SUMALUNAN, The sergeant of the guard faces about, faces half right in marching, and marches to his
post. He halts at normal distance directly behind the commander of the third relief.
2) If an assistant sergeant of the guard is present, he executes the movements cited above at the
command SUMALUNAN, and post himself directly behind the commander of the third relief. The
Sergeant of the Guard positions himself behind the assistant sergeant of the guard at a normal distance
(figure10).
g. CPNCO’s Report
1) After commanding SUMALUNAN, the CPNCO faces about and reports to the Adjutant. “NARITO
PO LAHAT” or “ ANG WALA.” They exchange salutes. The CPNCO faces about, marches to his post and
halts at normal interval to the left flank men of the first rank of the second platoon.
2} When the CPNCO has finished his report and has faced about the commander of the guard
marches from his position in the rear of the guard around its right flank to his post six steps in front of
and centered on the guard. If there are two platoons the assistant commander of the guard, if present,
takes his post in front of the second platoon (Figure 10).
h. Marching to Center
1) The adjutant commands PINUNO (or MGA PINUNO) AT PINUNONG HINDI HIRANG, NA. The
procedures for marching to center is the same as in paragraph 5.1e of Informal Guard Mounting except
that when there are two commanders of the guard, the senior is designated “Punong Tanod” and the
junior “Pangalawang Punong Tanod.”
2) If there are two Sergeants of the Guard, the senior is designated “Tandes ng Tanod” and the
junior “Pangalawang Tandes ng TANOD> “The post of the assistant sergeant of the guard is the position
of guide for the second platoon.
i. Return to Post
After returning to his post, the Adjutant commands SUMALUNAN. post are taken as directed in
paragraph 5.1g of Informal Guard Mounting (Figure11
(a) and (b).
j. Inspecting the Guard
1) During formal guard mounting, the adjutant instead of the Officer of the Day inspects the guard.
2) After the Officer(s) and PNCOs have taken their posts, the Adjutant commands HUMANDA SA
PAGSISIYASAT.
3) During the inspection, he selects the orderlies and color sentinels and orders men who are not
prepared for guard to fall out and return to their organization Substitutes for men who have fallen out
report to the commander of the guard of the guard house.
3) The band plays during the inspection.
k. Closing Ranks
1) After the inspection, the commander of the guard orders the guard to close ranks and returns to
his original post. If there is an assistant commander of the guard, he orders the second platoon to close
ranks after it has been inspected. Then he returns to his post in front of the second platoon.
2) The adjutant takes his post 35 steps in front of, centered on, and facing the guard.
3) The New Officer of the Day posts himself 36 steps to the rear of
the Adjutant.
4) The old officer of the Day posts himself three steps to the right of the New Officer of the Day.
l. Sound Off
1) The adjutant commands TANOD, HANDA; TIKAS PAHINGA; IHUDYAT. Then he executes Tikas
Pahinga. (The commander of the guard and assistant commander of the guard shall not repeat any
preparatory commands given by the adjutant at this time).
2) At the command IHUDYAT the band plays the sound off, then moves forward playing. I t passes
to the left of the line between the commanders of the guard and the adjutant and then back to its post
on the right where it halts and plays the sound off again (Figure 12 (a) and (b).
3) While the band is sounding off, the officers of the Day stands at
attention.
m. Adjutant’s Report
The Adjutant commands TANGHAL, TA, faces about toward the New Officer of the Day, and reports “Ang
Tanod ay Nakahanay Na Po”.
n. March in Review
1) The New Officer of the Day returns the salute and directs the Adjutant PASA , MASID. The
adjutant faces about and commands BABA TA; HARAP SA KANAN. At the command NA the guard
executes the movement. The band front of the leading platoon, and faces to the right, marches to a
point where its rank is approximately 24 steps in front of the leading platoon, and faces to the leader of
the first platoon who is the commander of the guard. The CPNCO maintains his position behind in the
left file when there is one platoon (Figure 13) and behind the rear men left file of the second platoon
when there are two platoons (Figure 14).
2) The adjutant commands KANANG BALIKAT, TA; PASULONG, NA.
3) When the playing band and the guard march past the officer of the day (Figure 14), the guide of
the first platoon halts 24 steps behind the band during the march in review.
4) When the adjutant is six steps from the officer of the day, he commands HANDA, KANAN,
TINGIN.
a) When there is only one platoon, the Officer of the Guard, the Adjutant and the CPNCO executes
the hand salute on the command TINGIN and hold it until the CPNCO commands HANDA, RAP.
b) When there are two platoons (Figure 14), the Adjutant commands HANDA, KANAN, TINGIN, for
the first platoon. He commands HANDA, RAP for the first platoon when the last rank is six steps beyond
the officer of the day. The assistant commander of the guards commands HANDA KANAN TINGIN, for
the second platoon. He commands HANDA RAP, when the last rank of the platoon is six steps beyond
the officer of the day. The adjutant and the commander of the guard salute with the first platoon, the
assistant commander of the guard and the CPNCO salute with the second platoon.
5) While the guard is marching in review the officer of the day stands attention.
a) The new Officer of the day returns the salute of the Adjutant and the Commander of the Guard.
He salutes only once because the adjutant and the commander of the guard salute together.
b) When there are two platoons, the officer of the day does not return the salute of the assistant
commander of the guard.
6) After the band passes the officer of the day it returns column left and positions itself in front and
facing the officer of the day it turns column left and positions itself in front of and facing the officer of
the day 18 steps from where the left flank of the guard passes. It continues to play until the guard leaves
the parade ground.
7) The adjutant steps out of column and halts when he is 25 steps beyond the officer of the day.
The CPNCO steps out of column and halt abreast of the adjutant and three steps to the left. The
Adjutant and CPNCO then face each other salute and leave.
8) The commander of the guard marches the guard to the guard house without changing his
position in the formation.
9) If the guard consists of two platoons the commander of the guard halts it and forms it into one
platoon. The assistant commander of the guard marches behind the last man in the rear of the right file.
10) The officers of the day face each other and salute. The old officer of the day gives his orders to
the new officer of the day.
o. Formation of the New and Old Guard at the Guard house
1) The old guard is formed at the guard house (Figure (14) (a)).
If the field music has been authorized , it forms three steps to the right of the old guard the field music
of the new guard forms three steps to the right of the new guard (Figure 14 (b)).
2) Relieving the old guard At the guard house is in accordance with paragraph 5.1 to m of informal
Guard Mounting
SECTION VII CHANGE OF COMMAND
6.1. GENERAL INFORMATION
A change of command is a ceremony for the relinquishment and assumption of a command.
For a change of a command of a major PNP unit/command either the Chairman of NAPOLCOM/
Secretary of the Interior and Local Government or the Chief PNP shall be invited as the witnessing
/presiding officer. However in their absence any senior police officer duly designated to act in their
behalf.
The change of command in the lower units is normally attended by the immediate Senior Commander or
his duly designated representative as Guest of Honor (GOH). On the other hand that of a subordinate
unit is attended by the commander or representative of the next higher unit.
Invited personalities entitled to arrival/departure honors shall receive appropriate honors.
6.2. SEQUENCE OF ACTIVITIES

a. Change of Command (Indoor)
1) Processional
2) Entrance of Colors
3) National Anthem
4) Invocation
5) Reading of Relief/Designation Order by Personnel Officer
6) Remarks and Relinquishment of Command (Outgoing) _ _ _ Reading and Signing of

Relinquishment Order
7) Presentation of Award to the Outgoing
8) Assumption of Command _ _ _ Reading and Signing of Assumption Order
9) Turn-over of Command Symbol
10) Remarks of the New Commander
11) Remarks and Introduction of the Guest of Honor by the New Commander
12) Inspirational Talk
13) Exit of Colors (optional)
14) Recessional
b. Change of Command in a Review
1) Entrance and formation of Troops
2) Presentation and Honors
3) Inspection (Trooping of the Line)
4) Reading of Relief/Designation Order
5) Remarks /Relinquishment of Command (outgoing)
6) Presentation of Award
7) Retirement of Personal Flag (For flag officers only and for retiring comdrs)
8) Assumption of Command
9) Turn-over of Command Symbol
10) Raising of the Personal Flag of the Incoming (for flag officer and when the ceremony is for
retiring cmdr)
12) Inspirational Talk
13) March in Review
c. Change of Command with a Review
1) Entrance and formation of Troops
2) Presentation and Honors
3) Inspection (Trooping of the Line)
4) Marc-in-Review
5) Mass formation (in front of the grandstand)
6) Reading of Relief/Designation Orders
7) Remarks/Relinquishment of Command (outgoing)
8) Retirement of Personal Flag (for Flag Officer only and for the Retiring comdr)
9) Presentation of Awards
10) Assumption of Command
11) Turn-over command of symbol
12) Raising of the Personal Flag of the Incoming (for flag officer and when the ceremony is for
retiring cmdr)
14) Inspirational Talk (Guest of Honor)
6.3. CHANGE OF COMMAND PROPER

a. The EMCEE announces “We now begin the change of command ceremony”
b. The adjutant proceeds to the left podium and reads the relief and designation orders.
c. The outgoing commander proceeds to the right podium to make his remarks. He gives the
troops TIKAS PAHINGA after the troop commander (TC) faces about.
d. At the end of his remarks, the outgoing commander shall say “I
will now read my relinquishment orders. “Then pauses for a few seconds. (At this point, the TC and his
staff go to attention ). The TC faces the troop and commands MGA TALUPAD DA as soon as the troops
are attention. The outgoing commander reads his relinquishment orders and signs, and then says
“Commander, I am ready to be relieved.” He stays where he is. At this juncture, the personal flag of the
outgoing is brought down by the CPNCO and hand it over, cased, with the star conspicuously displayed
to the former.
e. The incoming Commander proceeds to the left podium and reads the orders for his assumption
of office and signs. He pauses for a few seconds, and then says Commander, I relieve you, Sir.” At this
juncture, the personal flag of the incoming is hoisted by the CPNCO in place of the personal flag of the
outgoing.
f. The outgoing commander and the incoming commander face each other. The incoming
commander salutes the outgoing commander and the latter acknowledges the salute. Both
Commanders proceed to the center of the grandstand, halt and face the Guest of Honor /Presiding
Office. The guest of Honor (GOH) stands and takes the center position in front of two commanders.
g. The outgoing commander salutes the GOH saying, “Sir, I have relinquished the command of
effective this date.
h. The GOH acknowledges the salute, then congratulate him, saying “Congratulations, and well
done.”
i. The incoming commander salutes and says “Sir I have assumed the command of
effective this date.
j. The GOH acknowledges the salute, and then congratulate him, saying “Congratulations, make
your post”.
k. At this point, the CPNCO moves forward with the office command symbol and hands it over to
the outgoing Commander. After handling over the command symbol, The CPNCO moves to the other
side near the Incoming Commander.
l. The outgoing commander passes on the command symbol to the
GOH.
m. The GOH receives the command symbol and passes it on to the Incoming Commander.
n. The Incoming Commander receives it and gives it back to the CPNCO.
o. The PNCO, moves forward, takes hold of the command symbol then
exits.
p. The new commander and the former commander face each other. The New Commander salutes
the former commander. The latter acknowledges the salute. (At this point, the audience may give a
round of applause).
q. The GOH and the former commander take their seats, with the former commander taking the
seat of the New Commander. The New Commander goes to the right podium and delivers his speech.
(He may direct the troops to TIKAS PAHINGA). The New Commander ends his speech with the statement
“….. all orders and instructions shall remain undisturbed until they are rescinded or amended “. He
pauses. (The troop commander commands HUMANDA).
Note: If the GOH is the President of RP, all speakers other than the GOH shall use the left podium
reserving the right podium for the GOH.
r. The commander introduces the GOH.

s. The GOH delivers his remarks. (He may order the troops to TIKAS PAHINGA).
t. After the remarks, the band plays recessional pieces. The ceremony
end.
6.4. TURN-OVER OF OFFICE CEREMONIES
a. Turn-over of offices maybe done jointly or severally when there are more than one (1) office
affected. This is normally done indoor (without troop parade and review).
b. Sequence :
1. The officiating Officer /Guest of Honor (GOH) is Seated.
2. Entry of colors
3. Pambansang Awit
4. Invocation
5. Outgoings’ Valedictory Remarks
6. Outgoing will read his Relief Order
7. Pinning of his award (s)
8. Turn-over of Saber through the GOH and then the latter turn-over the Saber to the Incoming.
(Note: At this portion, the outgoing and incoming stand one (1)
step in front of the GOH and one (1) step away from the center respectively. In turning-over the saber,
the handle should be at the right hand of the outgoing; then the GOH will see to it that in turning –over
the Saber to the Incoming , the handle will be at the right arm. When the outgoing receives the Saber,
he immediately transfer the handle portion to his right arm. After the turn over the two officers salute
to the GOH then execute about face to their respective seats. However, at this time they change their
position- the outgoing exchanges position with the Incoming. In case of joint turn over the higher or
highest office should be the nearest to the GOH.
9. The Incoming reads his Assumption Order followed by his short Remarks.
10. Introduction of the GOH
11. Inspirational Talk of GOH.
Note : In case of joint turn-over, the awarding of the outgoings should be simultaneous.
Wives if around are called to assist during awarding.
Two (2) podiums (speaker’s stand) are advisable – one (1) at the right and one (1) at the left, each
outgoing and incoming takes the nearest podium. This system will afford no unnecessary traveling or
crisscrossing before the GOH.
Remarks: Cocktails follows after the ceremony, where mementos and other awards are presented in
an appropriate place. Officers and their ladies (optional) attending the cocktails shall not leave the
promises until the departure of the honoree.
During the cocktails, the honoree, if retiree shall be formally turned over to the Police Retirees
Association as a new member. Hence, the presence of the President of Retirees, Association is
necessary. After the departure Honors, the officers and their ladies shall form for the send-off line where
the honoree retiree is accorded the farewell handshake. His car waits at the end of the line.
SECTION VIII
FLAG HOISTING/LOWERING AND REVEILLE CEREMONIES
7.1 FLAG RAISING
Flag hoisting is a ceremony in which the unit honors the Philippine flag when it is used every Monday
morning. The ceremony is conducted at the direction of the unit commander. The commander sets
the time for the flag hoisting. All members of the unit shall be present during the conduct of the
ceremony.
7.2. SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
a. Formation of troops
1) Thirty minutes before the scheduled flag hoisting time, the units are formed in line formation
facing the flag pole.
2) Fifteen minutes before the appointed time, the siren shall be sounded for 30 seconds to signal
the start of the ceremony. This shall be followed by the announcement of “Humanda sa pagpupugay sa
Watawat” by the command duty officer.
b. Start of Ceremony
Attention.
1) The band plays ATTENTION CALL.
2) Subordinate unit commanders bring respective elements to
3) The band plays “drum rolls”.
4) Color details with flag march forward followed by the TC and
Staff. (Color detail towards the flagpole and the TC to his designated position facing the flagpole).
5) The band stops playing as soon as the National flag is hooked into the riser of the flagpole.
6) The TC faces about and directs his staff to move behind him.
7) He then directs his adjutant to receive the report.
8) The adjutant trots to a point between the TC and sub unit commanders and receives the reports
of the subordinate unit commanders.
9) He faces about and renders reports to the TC.
10) The TC receives the report and directs his adjutant to take his
post.
11) He then faces about and directs his staff to move behind him.
12) He then faces about and commands TANGHAL TA. After the
troops have executed present arms, he faces about and commands present arms to his staff.
13) The band plays to the colors after the TC and his staff have executed present arms (hand salute)
the National Flag is hoisted simultaneously
with the mass singing of the National Anthem led by a designated member of the unit.
the Colors”.
faces about.
14) The TC and his staff execute order arms after the playing of “To
15) The TC faces the troops and commands BABA, TA. He then
16) The Chaplain proceeds to the microphone for the invocation.
17) After the invocation, the CPNCO proceeds to the microphone.
TC faces the troops and commands “TAAS KANAN KAMAY, NA” then faces about then executes “TAAS
KANAN KAMAY” with his staff. CPNCO leads the troops in the “Panunumpa sa watawat”. Any
announcement speeches shall be done after the Panunumpa.
18) After the Panunumpa, TC brings his staff to attention, faces about then commands HANDA RAP
and faces front.
19) A designated member of the unit leads the mass singing of Pilipinas Kong Mahal and everyone
sings the song with accompaniment of the band or a lead singer.
c. Pass-in-Review
1) The GOH/reviewing officer moves forward and directs the TC to Pass-in-Review
2) TC faces about and directs his staff to “KALUPUNAN, SUMALIKOD KO” then commands “PASA
MASID”.
3) After the last element has passed the GOH/reviewing officer, the TC with his staff marches back
in front of the GOH/reviewing officer and reports for conclusion of the review/ceremony says ”GINOO,
TAPOS NA PO ANG PARANGAL SA WATAWAT.”
7.3. FLAG LOWERING (RETREAT)
a. General
1) The term “Retreat” is taken from the French word “Retraite”
and refers to evening ceremony. The bugle sounded at retreat was used in the French army and dates
back to crusades. Retreat is sounded at sunset to notify sentries to start challenging until sunrise, and to
tell the rank and file to go to their quarters.
2) To the Color is being used as music honoring the flag as it is lowered in the evening.
b. Meaning
Retreat is a ceremony in which the unit honors the flag when it is lowered in the evening.
c. Procedure
1) The unit is formed facing the flag at least five (5) minutes before the time of retreat.
Commanders normally prescribes the time for the retreat.
2) As soon as the unit is formed, the designated commander takes his position facing the line of
troops and commands TALUPAD, HUMANDA and then TIKAS PAHINGA. Retreat is sounded at this time.
3) After the retreat the designated commander executes attention with his staff, faces about and
commands TALUPAD, HUMANDA then TANGHAL SANDATA. The TC then faces about and executes
present arms with his staff. The band begins playing To the Color.
4) After the last note of To the Colors, TC brings his staff to attention faces about, commands
BABA, TA and faces front. This terminates the retreat formation.
7.4. REVEILLE
a. General
Reveille was not originally intended as honors to the flag. In 1812, it was a drum call to signify that
soldiers should rise for the day and sentries should leave off night challenging. As time passed, reveille
came to connote the hoisting of the flag in the morning and the honors paid to it.
b. Meaning
Reveille is a ceremony in which a unit honors the national flag as it is being hoisted in the morning.
c. Procedure
1) At the sound of the reveille, the unit is formed facing the flag.
2) As soon as the troops are formed, the designated TC takes his position centered on the line of
troops and commands the unit HUMANDA then MAGULAT.
3) All sub-units report in succession from right to left, “Ginoo balangay narito pong lahat napag
alaman”. The sub-unit should also report the absentees in this manner”Ginoo balangay ang
wala hindi napag alaman.” Salutes ae exchanged with each report.
4) The TC commands TIKAS PAHINGA and faces about then assumes parade rest himself. If a band
is present, about 30 seconds before the time of reveille the designated commander commands
TALUPAD HUMANDA. When the troops are in attention, TC commands TANGAHAL , TA and then faces
about and executes hand salute with his staff. The commander’s salute is the signal for the band to
sound to the color.
5) After the last note of To the Color; the TC with his staff terminates their salute. TC faces about,
commands BABA, SANDATA and then directs ‘PAMUNUAN ANG INYONG MGA BALANGAY”. The sub-unit
commanders salute simultaneously and the TC salutes in return. This ends the ceremony.
Note: Participation of the Troops is optional. In such case, the reveille shall be conducted by
designated guard details only.
SECTION VIII
WELCOME CEREMONY FOR UNITS ARRIVING FROM OVERSEAS DUTY (UNIT HONORS)
8.1. FORMATION
Initially, the unit is formed en masse in front of the grandstand. When the senior unit commander or his
designated representative arrives at the grandstand, the unit commander (UC) brings his troops to
attention. When the senior unit commander or his representative has taken his seat, the UC brings his
troops to present arms and presents his troops to the senior unit commander. The latter acknowledges
the presentation and immediately the band plays appropriate marc music. (Everybody takes seat after
the invocation).
8.2. AWARDING
a. The UC commands MGA WATAWAT AT MGA TAONG PARARANGALAN, PUMAGITNA KAD. The
unit staff executes right face and at the last note of the command of execution KAD, marches forward
and halts after a considerable distance, allowing space for the colors and awardees when they come
forward. The senior unit commander and the unit commander standard join the colors; the most senior
unit staff member commands HARAP SA KALIWA then PASULONG to position themselves behind the
colors. When the colors and awardees are already in their proper postion, the UC salutes and reports
ato the major service commander. “Nandito nap o ang mga watawat at ang mga taong pararangalan.”
After being acknowledged, he executes order arms faces about then joins his staff at the back of the
colors taking the most direct route. There after, he commands TANGHAL, TA for his staff, color,
awardees. The band then plays the National Anthem, after which the UC commands BABA TA. If the UC
is an awardee he takes his proper position in line with the other awardees.
b. The Guest of Honor (GOH) and the major service commander go down the grandstand for the
awarding ceremony. The citations of the awards are read before they are presented to the awardees.
After the presentation of awards, the GOH goes back to the grandstand while the colors and awardees
return to their former positions.
c. At this point, the spouses/parents proceed toward the troops to present leis to the officers and
policemen of the unit. They return to their respective seats after presenting the leis.
8.3. SPEECHES
a. The unit commander concerned introduced the GOH for the welcome remarks.
b. If previously ordered to bring his unit to parade rest, the UC bring the unit to attention after the
address of the GOH. Recessional follows.
Note: As a doctrine the EMCEE will always shake hands with the Speaker(s) before and after his
speech.
SECTION IX
ACTIVATION/DE-ACTIVATION OF UNITS ACTIVATION

9.1 SEQUENCE OF ACTIVITIES
The following are the procedures/sequences in the activation of units.
a. Arrival of the Guest of Honor/Speaker (GOH)
1) The elements of the units to be activated are formed en masse in front of the grandstand or
ceremonial venue and are initially at parade rest. The band ( if available) is likewise prepositioned at the
vicinity of the ceremonial venue,
2) As soon as the party of the guest of Honor/Speaker arrives, the designated troop comman4er
(TC) calls the troop to attention. He commands, TALUPAD, HUMANDA or as appropriate.
b. Singing of National Anthem
1) When all the guests are seated. The designated emcee announces,
''PLEASE RISE FOR THE PHILIPPINE NATIONAL ANTHEM")
2) The TC directs the troops to execute present arms. He commands.
TANGHAL TA. The band then plays the National Anthem.
3) After the band finishes playing of the National Anthem, the TC. commands the troops to execute
order arms. He commands, BABA,TA.
4) The emcee then announces, "Please remain standing for the invocation”.
c. Invocation
The chaplain approaches the rostrum and delivers the invocation.
When the invocation is finished, the chaplain exits and proceeds to his seat.
d. Reading of the unit Activation Order
1) After everybody is seated, the emcee announces, "The activation order of (Name of unit) will
now be read by the Director for Personnel and Record Management (any designated person). "
2) The Adjutant proceeds to the rostrum and reads the unit activation order. After reading the
order, the Director for Personnel and Record Management returns to his seat.
e. Unfurling of the Unit Color
1) After reading of orders the emcee announces, "We will now witness the unfurling of the unit
color by the GOH to be assisted by the host. "
2) The GOH and the Host stand, while a color bearer escorted by the designated Command Police
Non-Commissioned Officer (CPNCO) of the activated unit approaches them with the cased unit color.
The color bearer then lowers the color in front of the GOH and Host. The GOH and Host untie and
remove the case of the color. Upon removal of the case, the color bearer slowly unfurls the color. At this
point, the band plays appropriate background music or the unit hymn_(No part of the color should be
allowed to touch the ground). The CPNCO then hands over the unfurled color to the Host who in turn
gives it to the GOH
3) The Adjutant proceeds to the rostrum and reads the appointment order of the Incoming
Commander of the activated unit. After reading the appointment orders, the adjutant exits and the
emcee announces, "The incoming commander of (Name of unit) will now receive the color."
4) The incoming unit Commander proceeds in front of the GOH and salutes. The GOH hands over
the unit color to the Incoming Commander who then gives it to the Executive and color bearer to be
placed in a prepositioned flag stand. The GOH and Host then proceed to their respective seats.
f. Assumption of Command
1) As soon as the GOH and Host are seated, the emcee announces "The incoming commander of
will now read his assumption of command”.
2) The Commander proceed to the rostrum and reads the order. He says
“Pursuant to General Orders Number . Headquarters
I hereby activated (Name of Unit) effective this date. I sign in your presence.
Dated
After signing the document, the newly designated commander delivers his remarks. Then, he introduces
the GOH.
g. Speech of the GOH
The Guest of honor/speaker delivers his-speech after the introduction.
h. Conclusion
1) .After the speech of the GOH, the emcee announces “Ladies and Gentlemen, that concludes our
activities. Thank you very much.”
2) The TC then marches off the troops and dismisses them in a designated area.
Note: As a doctrine, the EMCEE regardless of rank shall always shake hands, with the Speaker before
and after the speech.
De-Activation of Units
9.2 SEQUENCE OF ACTIVITIES
The following procedures/sequences in the de-activation of units:
a. Arrival of the Guest of Honor/Speaker (GOR)
1) The elements of the units to be de-activated are formed en mass~ in front of the grandstand or
ceremonial venue and are initially at parade rest. The band (if available) is likewise prepositioned at the
vicinity of the ceremonial venue.
2) As soon as the party of the Guest of Honor/Speaker arrives,. the designated Troop Commander
(TC) calls the troops to attention. He commands, TALUPAD, DA or as appropriate.
b. Singing of National anthem
1) When everybody has settled down or is already seated. the designated emcee announces,
"PLEASE RISE FOR THE PHILIPPINE NATIONAL ANTHEM".
2) The TC directs the troops to execute present arms. He commands
TANGHAL, TA. The band then plays the National anthem.

3) When the band finishes playing the National anthem, the TC commands the troops to .execute
order arms. He commands, BABA, TA.
4) The emcee then announces, "Please remain standing for the
invocation.”
c. Invocation
The Chaplain approaches the rostrum and delivers the invocation. When the invocation is finished the
chaplain exits and proceeds to his seat. The emcee announces. “Thank you”.
d. Reading of the Unit De-activation Order
1) After everybody is seated. The emcee announces “The de- activation order of (Name of Unit}
will now be read by the “designated person”.
2) The Director for Personnel and Records Management proceeds to the rostrum an reads the
order. He says “Pursuant to General Order Number Headquarters Dated , (Name of Unit) is
hereby deactivated effective this date”.After reading the de-activation order, the Director for
Personnel return to his seat.
e. Hauling down/Encasing of the Unit Color
1) The emcee announces, "We will now witness the hauling down and encasing of the{Unit}color
by the GOH to be assisted by the host.
2. The GOH and the host stands. A color bearer escorted by II designated CPNCO of the de-
activated unit approaches them with the unburied Unit color. The color bearer then lowers the color
and slowly furls it in front of the GOH and Host (while the band plays Auld Lang Syne or appropriate
music) 'The GOH covers/encases color is handed by the CPNCO to the host who then gives it to the GOH.
3. The incumbent Commander then approaches the rostrum and delivers his remarks then
introduces the GOH.
f. Speech of the GOH
The Guest of Honor/speaker delivers his speech.
g. Conclusion
1) After the speech of the GOH, the emcee announces "Ladies and gentlemen, that concludes our
activities. “Thank you very much.”
2) The TC then marches off the troops and dismisses them in a designated area.
NOTE: If former commander of the tie-activated unit are present the ceremony, the cased unit color
should be passed on to them in succession then returned to the incumbent commander before it is
given to the GOH. Normally, the GOH is the commander of the unit that issues the de-activation order.
SECTION X
FUNERA.L HONORS AND SERVICES
10.0 GENERAL
The practice of giving final tribute and honors to a dearly departed has evolved over the years from a
simple ceremony to elaborate and colorful rites to make the occasion more meaningful in perpetuation
of the memory of the dead.
The funeral rites of policemen more than any other ceremony have followed an old pattern as the living
honor to the brave dead.
10.2 PERSONS ENTITLED TO FUNERAL HONORS AND SERVICES
a. Police Personnel in the Active Service
b. Retired Police Personnel
c. Honorably Separated Police Personnel
d. Government Officials and VIPs as directed by the SILG and the President.
f. Reserved Officers in the inactive status and Veterans.
10.3 TYPES OF FUNERALS

a. Police funerals are divided into two classes
1) Chapel service, followed by a movement to the grave or place of local disposition with the
prescribed escort.
2) With graveside honors only.
b. A full police funeral normally consists of the following elements:
1) Band
2) Escort appropriate to the deceased, including a firing party and
bugler.
3) Colors
4) Clergy
5) Hearse (caisson) and active pallbearers
6) Honorary pallbearers
7) Personal color (if appropriate)
c. Upon .request, chaplains may conduct or arrange for appropriate burial services for interment
of members of the police service, active and retired, and for members of their families. The family of the
deceased (or their representative) My however, request some other clergyman to officiate in lieu of a
police chaplain A civilian clergyman can conduct all religious elements of a police funeral interment.
Although the desires of the family are to be given the fullest consideration possible in the selection of
elements involved. The funeral, however, should be conducted as prescribed in the manual.
d. The commanding officer of the deceased or his representative, in coordination with the
cemetery superintendent and the funeral director, makes the funeral arrangement and supervises the
conduct of the funeral.
e. When honorary pallbearers are desired, they are selected by the family of the deceased or their
representative, or when they so desired, by the commanding officer. As a rule, no more than twelve (12)
honorary pallbearers should be selected
f. At a police funeral, persons in police uniform attending in their individual capacity, must first
face the casket and execute the hand salute at the following times.
1) When honors, if any, are surrounded.
2) At any time when the casket is being moved (the exception being when they themselves are
moving);
3) During cannon salutes, if sounded
4) During the firing of volleys; and
5) While Taps is being played.
g. During the religious graveside service, all personnel bow their heads at the words "Let us pray".
All mourners at graveside except the active pallbearers
follow the example of the officiating chaplain. If he uncovers, they uncover; if he remains covered they
remain covered. But when the officiating chaplain ~ears a biretta (clerical headpiece) during the
graveside service, all personnel, as indicated above, must uncover.
h, The remains of a member of the Police Forces, who die while on active duty may be consigned
directly to a national cemetery from a police installation. In such cases, the cemetery superintendent
wilt, regardless of the time of arrival (if not otherwise provided for) engaged a funeral director to receive
the remains at the common carrier terminal, hold the remains at his establishment until the date of the
funeral, if necessary and deliver the remains to the cemetery. The superintendent is not authorized to
allow the funeral director to render any other service incident to the interment.
i. The word chapel is interpreted to mean church, home or any other place where services are held,
other than the service at me grave.
j. The word casket is interpreted to include a receptacle containing the remains of the deceased.
a. Funeral Services - include escort, band, colors, clergy, caisson and/or funeral pallbearers, and
chapel services.
b. Graveside Services - include the clergy, pallbearers, firing party and buglers.
c. Vigil Guards - the sentries posted to keep watch on the bier when remains of a deceased are
lying in state.
d. Interment Flag – The interment flag is used to cover the casket of the deceased. The white part
with the sun and stars shall cover the head of the casket. the blue portion is to the right and the red part
to the left of the deceased with both colors lowered in the grave. No wreath of flowers should be placed
on top of the flag shrouded casket. Nonetheless, a small cross of flowers may be placed over the flag as
a symbol of “God above the country”. Issue of one interment flag to heirs of deceased police veterans is
authorized
e. Escort and Transportation - This shall be provided by unit commanders upon request of heirs or
nearest relatives of the deceased.
f Burial Expenses - Reimbursement of burial expenses is authorized pursuant to Sec 699 of the RAC.
(Note: To be referred to BPAO, DP or further research),
g. Interment at Libingan ng Mga Bayani - For those who may be entitled to Interment at Libingan
ng mga Bayani.
h. Lie-in-state at PNP Chapel - Before the actual funeral, a deceased may lie-in-state at a PNP
Chapel provided such service does not interfere with regularly scheduled church services of said chapel.
However, it shall be the PNP Chaplain directly in charge of the chapel who shall make the necessary
arrangement for the deceased personnel authorized to lie-in-state in PNP Chapel.
10.5 FUNERAL WITH CHAPEL SERVICE
a. Before the beginning of the service, the funeral escort is formed in line facing the chapel. The
band forms on the flank toward which it is to march.
b. Members of the immediate family, relatives, and friends of the deceased are requested to enter
the chapel and be seated before the casket is taken in. Members of the immediate family and relatives
occupy pews (seats) to the right (front) of the chapel.
c. The hearse bearing the remains to the chapel should arrive in front of the chapel few moments
before the time set for the service. As the hearse approaches, the escort commander commands MGA
GABAY, DA and he salutes until the hearse stops in front of the chapel. When the casket is ready to be
moved into the chapel, the commander of the escort brings the escort to TANG HAL TA. As the escort
commander present arms, the band renders the honors, and if appropriate, followed by a hymn. At the
first note of the' hymn, the casket is moved from the hearse by the active pallbearers and carried
between the ranks of honorary pallbearers, if any, into the chapel, the remains are handled in a
dignified, and reverent manner, ensuring that the casket is carried level and feet first at all times. As
soon as the casket enters the , chapel, the band ceases to play, and the escort commander brings the
escort to BABA, TA and PALUWAG. .
d. When honorary pallbearers are present, they are formed in two ranks, teach one facing the
other, in order of seniority, with the most senior being the closest to the hearse, thus forming an aisle
from the hearse to the entrance of the chapel. As the first note of the music and while the casket is
being borne between the ranks of honorary pallbearers, they uncover or salute. They then follow the
casket in column 'of twos and occupy pews (seats) to the left front of the chapel.
e. When the casket has been placed on the church truck, two active pallbearers push the truck to
the front of the church while the other active pallbearers move to the vestibule and await the
termination of the church service. If there is no such truck, the active pallbearers carry the casket to the
front of the church as in. structed by the chaplain before the service. When no honorary pallbearers are
used, and if the active pallbearers are selected friends" of the family, they may, if desired by' the family,
occupy the pews (seats) to the left front of the chapel.
f After the chapel service, the honorary pallbearers (if present) precede the casket in column of twos
as the two active pallbearers push the church truck to the entrance of the chapel. The honorary
pallbearers again form an aisle from the
entrance of the chapel to the hearse with the most senior closest to the chapel. They uncover or salute
as prescribed. When the casket has been placed in the hearse, the honorary pallbearers enter their
vehicles. When marching, the honorary pallbearers form columns on each side of the hearse, the leading
member of each column opposite site the front wheels of the hearse.
g. The casket, followed by the family group, is moved to the entrance immediately behind the
honorary pallbearers. As soon as the honorary pallbearers have taken their position, the active
pallbearers carry the casket to the hearse and form a column of twos behind it (if the honorary
pallbearers march). If the honorary pallbearers do not march, the active pallbearers form files on each
side of the hearse, the leading members of each column opposite the front wheels of the hearse. The
family group remains at the chapel entrance until the honorary pallbearers have broken ranks to enter
their vehicles or have taken their positions for marching. The members of the family group then are
guided to their vehicles.
h. When the casket appears at the entrance of the chapel at the conclusion of the service, the
funeral escort and band repeat the procedure as prescribed for .entering the chapel. When the casket
has been secured into the hearse, the band
ceases playing and the escort is brought to the order.
i. The procession is then formed in the following order:

1) Escort commander.
2) Band.
3) Escort, including colors, firing party, and bugler.
4) Honorary pallbearers, if riding in cars.
5) Clergy.
6) Caisson or hearse, and honorary pallbearers, if walking.
7) Active pallbearers.
8) Personal color (if appropriate)
9) Family
10) Friends and patriotic or fraternal organization
j. When the procession has been formed, the escort commander command, PASULONG, KAD to
the band and escort. The elements in the rear conform. The procession marches slowly to solemn music
(cadence of 100 beats per minute). When there is considerable distance from the chapel to t)'le grave,
the escort, after leaving the vicinity of the chapel, may march in quick time. The band plays appropriate
music throughout the march. Care must be exercised to avoid disturbing other funeral processions of
service that may be passed on the route of the march. When the escort is in the vicinity of the grave, it
resumes a slow cadence to solemn music. Customary music is used.
k. As the procession approaches the grave, the marching elements move directly to their
predesignated positions. The band and police escort are formed in line in view of the next of kin. The
other marching elements are halted as near as practicable to the grave. The firing party is positioned so
that it fires over the grave, and so that it is in view of the next of kin.
l. Before the hearse is halted, the honorary pallbearers are formed in two ranks, the most senior
closest to the hearse, forming an aisle extending from the hearse toward the grave. When the grave is
near to the road to permit this formation, they take their position at the grave before the casket is
removed from the hearse.
m. When the casket is ready to be moved from the hearse, the escort commander commands
TANGHAL, TA. At the command of execution TA, the escort execute present arms and the band renders
honors, if appropriate, followed by a hymn. At the first note of the hymn, the active pallbearers remove
the casket from the hearse.
NOTE: If a police chaplain is not present, the officer in charge or police non cimmisioned officer in
charge presents the flag to the next of kin.
10.6. GRAVESIDE SERVICE
For a funeral without chapel service, all elements of a police funeral must be present. However, if troops
are not conveniently available, or if the family desires to eliminate other elements, the following must
be used.
a. Clergy
b. Officer in charge or police noncommissioned officer in charge, appropriate to the grave of the
deceased.
c. Active pallbearers.
d. Firing party.
e. Bugler.
f. Personal color bearer (if appropriate).
These elements are in position at the graveside before the arrival of the remains.
10.7. CREMATED REMAINS
a. When the remains are cremated and the ashes interred with police honors, necessary
modifications, will govern.
b. For all phases of the funeral, where the cremated remains are carried by hand, one man is
detailed to carry the receptacle (casket) containing the ashes and another is detailed to carry the flag,
folded into the shape of a cocked hat. The pallbearers carrying the flag is always positioned to the right
of the remain. When the receptacle is carried from the hearse into the chapel and from the chapel to
the hearse, these two men are the only participant in the ceremony. During the procession to the
gravesite, the receptacle and flag are carried by the two pallbearers followed by four (4) additional
pallbearers. When the receptacle has been placed on the gravesite, all six pallbearers unfold the flag and
hold it over the grave.
c. When the receptacle and flag are placed before the chancy of the chapel are transported to
gravesite by vehicle, the receptacle and folded flag are placed side by side. If the pallbearers walk to the
gravesite, the two bearers who carried the receptacle and the flag join the other four pallbearers
already prepositioned on either side of the hearse.
d. When no hears is used, suitable transportations provided for the receptacle and flag bearers and
the other pallbearers
e. When the remains are removed to a ceremony and the ashes are to be interfered with police
honors at a later time, the ceremony consists only of the escort to the crematory. All personnel salute as
the remains are carried into the crematory. The firing of volleys and the sounding of Taps are omitted.
When the funeral ceremony is to be held at the crematory, and when no further honors are anticipated,
the volleys are fired and Taps is sounded at the discretion of the commanding officer.
10.8. CEREMONY IN TRANSFERRING REMAINS
a. If the remains of a flag officer are brought ashore in the vicinity of a police post, the flag will be
displayed at half-staff and gun salute will be fired as the procession moves. The number of guns will be
that to which the officer was entitled as a salute.
b. When the remains of a deceased police are moved to a railway station or any other point for
shipment to another place for interment or final disposition, funeral services are modified as necessary.
When no further police honors are anticipated at the place of the interment or final disposition, the
volleys are fired and Taps sounded at the discretion of the commanding officer. When police honors are
anticipated at the place of final disposition, the volleys and Taps are omitted.
10.9. GUN SALUTE
a. When the funeral of a general officer on the active or retired list, who was entitled to a gun
salute, takes place: at or near a police installations, guns equal to the number to which the officer Was
entitled, may be fired at noon on the day of the funeral. The police installation mentioned in general
orders fires the prescribed salutes.
b. Immediately preceding the benediction, a gun salute corresponding to the grade of the
deceased is fired at five-second intervals. Following the benediction, three volleys are fired.
10.10. FUNERAL OFF POST
a. The commander, upon request, provides a funeral detail for deceased active duty or retired
armed forces personnel when the burial is to take
place in a civilian or national cemetery off the installation. The detail is normally composed as follows
1) Officer in charge or noncommissioned police officer in charge.
2) Six active pallbearers.
3) Firing Party.
4) Bugler.
NOTE: When police pallbearers are not available, the firing party folds the flag.
b. The arrangements for the funeral are supervised by the survivor officer. The officer in charge or
noncommissioned police officer in charge of the funeral detail coordinates all aspects of the ceremonies
with this officer.
c. Upon arrival at the destination where the funeral is to be conducted, the officer in charge or
noncommissioned police officer in charge meets the survivor assistance officer and ascertains the
sequence of the ceremony. The normal sequence of events is as follows:
1) At the funeral home, on the order of the funeral director, the pallbearers move the casket to the
hearse. The pallbearers should be certain to carry the casket feet first and level at all times.
2) At the church:
a) The active pallbearers carry the casket from the hearse into the
chapel.
b) When the casket has been placed on the church, two pallbearers push the truck to the front of
the church while the other pallbearers move to the vestibule and await the termination of the church
service. If there is no church truck, the pallbearers carry the-casket to the front of the church as
instructed by the funeral director or minister concerned. It desired by the family, the active pallbearers
may occupy the pews (seats) to the left front of the church.
c) After the church service, the pallbearers, under the direction of the funeral director, move the
casket to the hearse. When the casket has been placed in the hearse, the pallbearers enter their vehicle.
3) At the Cemetery
a) The officer in charge or a designated individual commands the prepositioned firing party and
bugler to TILAP, DA and TANGHAL, TA as soon as the casket is moved from the hearse. The command
BABA, TA is given when the casket reaches the grave.
b) The pallbearers carry the casket, feet first and level, to the grave. On reaching the grave, the
casket is placed on the lowering device. The pallbearers raise the flag from the casket and hold it in a
horizontal position, waists high, until the conclusion of Taps.
10.11. PARTICIPATION OF AVIATION
When aviation participates in a police funeral, it is timed so that the aircraft appears over the
procession. .
10.12. PARTICIPATION OF FRATERNAL OR PATRIOTIC ORGANIZATION
The family or representative of the deceased may request fraternal or patriotic organizations, of which
the deceased was a member, to take part in the funeral service. With immediate family’s approval,
fraternal or patriotic organizations may conduct graveside sevice, at the conclusion of police portion of
the ceremony, signified by the flag presentation to the next kin and escort departure from the cemetery.
10.13. DUTIES OF THE CHAPLAIN
The chaplain takes his position in front of the chapel before the arrival of the remains. He precedes the
casket, when it is carried from the hearse into the chapel II" from L ~ chapel to the hearse. While the
remains are being placed in the hearse, he stands at the rear and to the side facing the hearse. When he
is wearing vestments, he may, at his discretion, proceed from the chancel to the sacristy (vestry) at the
inclusion of the chapel service and divest, joining the procession before it moves from the chapel. He
then precedes the hearse to the graveside and precedes the casket to the grave.
10.14 PRELIMINARY ARRANGEMENTS

The officer incharge of a police funeral, the commander of the escort, the funeral director, and the
superintendent of the cemetery of his representative visit the places involve and make carefull
arrangement before the time set for the funeral. They determine the positions at the grave for the
various elements of the funeral and make arrangements for traffic control.
10.15. FLORAL TRIBUTES
a. In the absence of the chaplain, the chaplain's assistant helps the funeral director in arranging all
floral tributes in the chapel. The commanding officer or his representatives coordinates with the funeral
director for necessary transportation for
prompt transfer of floral tributes from the chapel to the gravesite. The vehicle bearing the floral tributes
is loaded promptly at the conclusion of the chapel service. It precedes the funeral procession, moving as
rapidly as practicable to the site of the graves. The funeral procession does not move from the chapel
until the vehicle carrying the floral tributes has cleared the escort.
b. The funeral director or the cemetery representative is responsible for removing cards and
making a record that gives a brief description of the flora piece pertaining to each card. After completion
of the funeral services, the cards and records are turned over to a member of the family of the
deceased.
10.16. RULES FOR CEREMONIAL FIRING
a. For a ceremonial firing, the firing party consist of not more than seven
(7) gentlemen but not less than five (5) with one police non-commissioned officer in- charge.
b. The firing party is normally pre-positioned at the grave site and facing in the direction that
allows it to fire directly over the grave. However, care should be taken to ensure the rifles are fired at 45
– degree angle from the horizontal.
1) To Load
a) Magazine or clips are loaded with three rounds and blank adapters are attached before forming
the firing party.
b) The conclusion of the religious services or on the escort commander’s command, the Command
Police Non-Commissioned Officer in charge directs the loading of blank ammunitions. At the command
each rifleman executes port arms, faces to the half right, and move his right foot ten (10) inches to the
right to a position that gives him a firm, steady stance. He then chambers around, places the weapon in
the position, and resume port arms.
2) To fire by volley
a) When the riflemen have completed the movements and weapons are locked, the commands are
HANDA, SIPAT, PUTOK. At the command HANDA, each rifleman moves the safety to the fire position. On
the command SIPAT, the rifle is shouldered with both hands to the muzzle to the frontof an angle of 45
degrees from the horizon. On the command of execution PUTOK, the trigger is squeezed quickly and
the weapon is immediately returned to port arms.
b) To continue the firing with weapons that function automatically (blank adapter), the commands
SIPAT and PUTOK are given and executed as previously prescribed. To continue the firing with weapon
that must be manually operated to chamber another round (with blank adapters), the command,
HANDA, SIPAT, PUTOK are again given. On the command HANDA, each rifleman manually chambers the
next round. The commands SIPAT and PUTOK are given and executed as previously prescribed.
c) When the third round has been fired and the rifleman have resumed port arms. The riflemen
immediately place the weapons on safe assume the position of attention (at port arms), and face to halt.
From this position, the firing party is commanded to TANGHAL before the playing of Taps or Tawag
Paghimlay. After they commanded to order arms, the Command Police Non- Commissioned Officerr in
charge executes a right (left) face and remains at attention until the flag has been folded and saluted by
the officer in charge or noncommissioned officer in charge 01 the funeral detail. At this time, the firing
party noncommissioned officer in charge executes (left) face commands HARAP SA KNAN (KALIWA),
RAP; AGAP,TA and PASULONG, KAD. The weapons are unloaded and cleared as soon as possible living
the gravesite
10.17. NOTICE OF DEATH
a. President/Ex-President
On the day after receipt of an official notice of death of the President or an Ex-President of the
Philippines. The Commanding Officer at all installations/ stations equipped with necessary personnel
and material shall cause the performance of the following.
1) Eight guns to be fired at reveille and a gun fired every half hour, begins one hour after reveille,
and ending at retreat after which the salute of one gun representing each province shall again be fired.
2) All troops at all police stations or bases and the cadets of the PNPA shall be paraded at I 000
hours and the official announcing the death shall be read:
3) On the day of the funeral, while the remains are being borne to the place of interment, after the
funeral service at the house, building or church, 21 gun' salute be fired at intervals of one every minute
(minute guns) at all police installations/stations equipped with necessary personnel and material.
4) Posts distant from the place at which the funeral is held shall fire the salute directed in (a) above
at a reasonable time after the hour set for the funeral.
5) If the remains are removed from the immediate vicinity of the place of death, all troops along
the route of the funeral train shall be aligned along the. funeral route to render appropriate honors.
6) Police mourning shall be observed for a period of one (1) month after the date of the order
announcing the death.
b. Vice-President
On the day after receipt of the official notice of death of the Vice- President of the Philippines, unless
this day falls on a Sunday or holiday, in which case the honors shall be rendered on the day after Sunday
or Holiday, the Commanding Officer at all police installations/stations will cause 8 guns to be fired every
half hour until retreat is sounded and immediately after which a salute of one gun for each province
shall be fired.
c. Secretary of Interior and Local Government/Chairman, NAPOLCOM
In the event of the death of the Secretary of Interior and Local Government/Chairman, NAPOLCOM, the
same honor shall be rendered as prescribed in case of the death of the Vice-President of the Philippines,
omitting the guns to bt' fired at reveille.
d. Undersecretary of DILG for Peace and Order
In the event of death of the Undersecretary of DILG for Peace and Order, the minute guns to be fired on
the day of the funeral and the gun salute to be fired immediately after retreat shall be limited to the
number of guns to which that official is entitled.
e. PNP General
1) Orders announcing the death of a PNP general on the active or retired list will specify the police
installation/station at which gun salute shall be fired. One hour after reveille following the date of
receipt of the order, gun shall fired at half hour interval until retreat.
2) When the funeral of an officer on the active or retired list entitled to a salute takes place at or
near a police installation/station, minute guns shall be fired while the remains are being borne to the
place of the interment.
10.18. FUNERAL ESCORTS

a. Funeral and Graveside services - Funeral services within the context of this manual shall include
escort, band, colors, clergy, caisson and/or funeral car, caparisoned horse, pallbearers, and chapel
services, graveside services including clergy pallbearers, firing party and buglers.
The funeral party normally consists of the following elements'
1) Band
2) Escort
3) Color
4) Clergy
5) Caisson and active pallbearers Caparisoned horse or Funeral car
6) Honorary pallbearers
7) Firing part
b. Funeral Escorts - The following guidelines will govern the composition of funeral escorts,
however, local commanders may vary the composition as maybe appropriate to suit local situations:
1) One Squad - PNCO from PO1 to SPO1
2) One Section - PNCO from SPO2 to SPO4
3) One Platoon - Inspector’s Grade Officer
4) One Company of - Chief Inspector’s Grade 3 or 4 Platoons
5) One Company of - PNP C,Supt & Directors/ 3 or 4 Platoons Dep Dir Gen/Dir Gen, and
Civilian entitled to a gun Salute from 13 to 19 guns
6) Bde Size of3 Bns - President, Ex - President or as prescribed by - Chariman,

Napolcom, CPNP Napolcom Speaker of House Reps
and Supreme Court Justices

c. Composite Escort Units :
1) Normally, the funeral escort will be composed of personnel from the Recoms/NSUs responsible
for providing the funeral services. However, the funeral escort may be composed of a composite/PNP
unit for persons that maybe prescribed in appropriate regulations.
2) Commanders of Composite Units and the band will be provided by the Recoms/NSUs
responsible for providing funeral services.
3) All elements of the funeral party except the caisson and caparisoned horse are present during
the graveside services. However if troops are not conveniently available or fit into the family so desires,
the following are used instead.
a) Clergy c) Firing Speed
b) Active pallbearers d) Bugler
d. Pallbearers
1) Six active pallbearers shall be selected at the request of the family of the deceased, if present,
otherwise, the office/unit Supervisor/Director
2) The decision selecting honorary pallbearers rests with the, if present, relatives of the deceased
otherwise, the office/unit Supervisor/Director
10.19. POLICE MOURNING

a. When a police personnel dies, the Commander of the camp where the deceased was last
assigned shall declare police mourning within the police camp post or station concerned unless
mourning is inappropriate due to the circumstances of the death. The badge of police mourning shall be
prescribed, The badge of police mourning is a straight band or plain black cloth or black crepe four
inches wide, worn around the sleeve and above the elbow of the service uniform. It shall be worn during
periods prescribed or when specifically ordered by proper authority, and by all police personnel in
uniform attending a police funeral in their individual capacity.
b. National Flag at half-staff – the Camp Base/Director of the camp/base where the deceased lies
in state shall be responsible for placing the National Flag at half staff. The national and regimental colors
and standards will draped into streams of black crepe (7 inches long and about 12 inches wide) attached
to the ferrule below, will be used.
1. Death of an Officer – for Officer who died at a police post, the National Flag will be displayed at
half staff.
2. Funeral of a PNCO – during a funeral of a PNCO at a police post, the National Flag will be
displayed at half staff. It will be then be hoisted to the top after the final volley or gun is fired, or after
the remains are taken from the post.
3. The Funeral Honors Services and other last courtesies mentioned in paras (1.) and (2) above are
also given to retired police personnel when their remain are brought to the chapel.
4. DP shall be responsible for coordinating with relevant offices or units for the availability of
funeral services and other last courtesies for deceased PNP veterans, and PNP retirees.
5. Unless directed otherwise CPNP or higher authority, Recoms/NSU’s Director are responsible in
arranging and conducting the funeral services according to the following guidelines:
a) For PNP personnel who dies on active service-By the Recoms/NSU’s to which deceased was
assigned at the time of death.
b) For PNP personnel on Retired status, and for civilian
when so directed:
1) By the recoms/NSU’s to which deceased was last assigned at time of separation from the PNP.
2) GSC, will provide funeral services fpr all others and falling under the foregoing classification,
when so authorize and directed by proper authority.
c) Funeral services in localities where the responsible for Recoms/NSU’s has no mean or facilities
to conduct said services, the same will be assigned to the Recoms/NSU’s which is the most convenient
positions to provide the same. DP in coordination with DO shall designate the particular Recoms/NSUs
which shall rendered the services referred to above.
d) CPNP or higher authority, may direct, in specific case, the funeral services that will be rendered
to include funeral escorts and honors. In such cases, GSC will be responsible for planning, and
coordinating the funeral services and arrangements, unless otherwise directed.
10.20. COMMANDER OF FUNERAL ESCORT
The Commander of a Funeral Escort will be as follows
a. Of the President or an ex-President: as directed by the Secretary, DILG.
b. Of the Secretary of DILG/Chairman, NAPOLCOM as directed by Vice-Chairman, NAPOLCOM.
c. Of the Undersecretary of DILG for Peace and Order as directed by the Secretary of
DILG/Chairman, NAPOLCOM
d. Of the CPNP or a former Chief PNP: as directed by the Secretary of DILG
e. Of an officer: an officer of the ,same grade; if non such be present, as directed by the unit/office
Director/Supervisor.
f. Of a cadet: a cadet of the same class.
g. Of a police non-commissioned officer of one of the first three grades: by a police non-
commissioned officer of the highest grade available
10.21. POLICE ATTENDANCE AT A FUNERAL
a. 1) The funeral of a person in the police service is attended by such personnel as directed by the
Director/Supervisor of unit/office"
2) All persons in the police service not in information attending police funerals will follow the
mourners in order of rank, seniors in front. All persons in the police service in uniform attending in their
individual capacity will face the casket and execute the hand salute at any time when the casket is being
lowered into the grave, during the firing of the volley, and while Taps is being sounded. During the
prayer or blessing of the remains at the graveside, police personnel in uniform remain covered and vow
their heads. Honorary pallbearers in uniform will conform to those instructions when not in motion.
3) Police personnel in civilian clothes in the above case will stand at attention uncovered, and hold
the headdress over the left breast.
4) The chaplain will remain uncovered except in inclement weather o if religious rites prescribed
head covering.
5) During a police funeral, the drum shall be muffled and covered with black crepe or thin' black
serge.
6) The regimental colors shall not be placed in mourning or draped except when ordered by the
Secretary of Interior/Chairman, NAPOLCOM. When so ordered, two (2) streams of black crepe 7 feet
long and about 12 inches \-vide. attached to the ferrule below the spearhead shall be used.
7) Uniform - Uniform during the Funeral is as prescribed.
b. When in formation under arms. - Execute as prescribed in drills under
arms.
10.22. OFFICER AND OTHER GRADES OUT OF RANKS
a. At a police funeral all persons in the police service in uniform or civilian clothes attending in
their individual capacity or as honorary pallbearers will stand at attention uncovered, and hold the
headdress over the left breast while the casket is being carried from the caisson to and lowered into the
grave during the firing of the volley while Taps is being sounded, and during the services at the grave. .
During the prayer, they also bow their heads. In cold or inclement weather, they will remain covered
and will remain executing the hand salute as the casket is carried past them. to grave or until it is carried
beyond saluting distance. They~ will a1.so execute the hand salute during the firing of the volleys and
while Taps is being sounded. This will also apply to the chaplain except during the reading of the service.
b. While the casket is being carried from the house to the caisson to the church, or from the
church to the caisson, they will stand at attention uncovered and place the headdress over the left
breast In cold or inclement weather however, they will remain covered and will execute the hand salute
c. They will salute the casket as it passes in any police funeral at any time or place, by facing the
casket, assuming the position of attention uncovering placing the headdress over the left breast. In cold
or inclement weather they will remain covered and will execute the hand salute.
d. The active pallbearers while carrying the casket will remain covered; at other times they will
conform to the above prescription.
10.23. WHERE REMAINS OF THOSE ACTIVE SERVICE ARE TURNED OVER TO THE RELATIVES
The Camp Director of any post, camp, depot, or other station will furnish a firing squad of not to extend
eight (8) men and a bugler, preferably from the branch of the deceased, to attend the funeral of a
person who has died in active police service and whose remains have been turned over to the relatives
or friend of the deceased, and provided that such a firing squad can be furnished without interfering
with duties of the man composing it, and without expense to them or the Government, except in the
use of available transportation.
10.24. WHERE THE FUNERAL OF THOSE ON RETIRED LIST Nor HELD AT POLICE POST
a. Where the funeral of an officer or PNCO on the retired list occurs other than at a police post,
base, camp or station, but near one, a funeral escort maybe ordered by the commander of the post,
base, camp, or station which is nearest to the place where the funeral is to be held. Such escort will not
exceed the number prescribed in paragraph 10.18 for the rank of the deceased officer or PNCO
b. Where the funeral occurs other than at a police post, base, camp or station and too remote
there from to justify the sending of the eight (8) men and a bugler preferably from the branch of the
deceased, a funeral escort may be ordered. by the proper commander under provisions of paragraph 18.
SECTION XI WREATHLAYING CEREMONIES
11.1 GENERAL
Wreathlaying is a historical function that immortalizes great men, events and places. This activity is
usually being given by visiting dignitaries ,ranking government and police officials to pay tribute, homage
and respect to a particular place or person or significant occasions and dates that are of great
importance to a history of a person .This ceremony is usually done to the following places:
a. Rizal Monument
b. Libingan ng mga Bayani
c. Bonifcacio Monument d Aguinaldo Shrine
e. Corregidor Shrine
f. Tejeros Convention Market
g. Dambana ng Kagitingan
h. Other national shrine and sites.
II.2 ORGANIZATION
The ceremonial elements is composed of the following:
a. Escort of Honor of thirty six (36) men (or as the space area warrants) with one (I) Sr Inspector or
Inspector as Escort Comdr and one (1) guidon bearer.
b. Two (2) wreath bearers or more (in even numbers) depending on the number of wreaths to be
laid with Sr Inspector/Inspector as Wreath Commander.
c. Firing Party of twenty one (21) men (3x 7) with Firing Party Comdr.
d. Band of not less than twenty five (25) members with a conductor. A drummer and three (3)
buglers will be made as part of the band.
e. Two (2) color bearers for the National and Unit colors with two (2) color guards.
11.3 FORMATION OF TROOPS
a. The members of the Escort of Honor form at both sides of the path where the Guest of Honor
and Host will walk in going towards Point 4 (where the wreath is to be laid facing each other and
maintaining proper interval between each other. The Escort Commander and the guidon bearer behind
him position
themselves approximately six paces to the front of the marker (Point 2)) where the Guest of Honor and
the Host will stand for the ceremony.
b. The National and Unit color bearers and guards are prepositioned at both sides of the tomb,
monument or shrine with the National Color at the right sides.
c. The firing Party are formed approximately ten (10) paces to the right of monument, tomb or
shrine.
d. The wreath detail position themselves at a point and ready to assist the GOH in bringing the
wreath to Point.
e. The band is formed at vicinity right area dictates.
11.4 PROCEDURE
a. The GOH alights from his car at Point 1 where he will be met by the host (If the host is riding in a
car with the guest of honor (s), both will alight at the same point ).At this time, the ceremonial troops
are brought to attention by the Escort Commander.
b. The host escorts the GOH to Point 2. In accordance with protocol requirement. The Host stays at
the left side of the GOH. Other guest stay behind them.
c. As soon as the GOH and the host have occupied their respective position at Point 2, the Escort
commander faces the troops and command . TANGHAL TA. He assumes his original position. Then he
and the guidon bearer execute the appropriate salute.
d. Band plays the National Anthem of the GOH (if he is the head of state or ambassador) and then
followed by the playing of the Philippine National Anthem. The GOH is not a head of a state or
ambassador, only the Philippine National Anthem will be played.
e. After the National Anthem has been played, Escort commander together with the guidon bearer
executes the order arms. He faces the troops and commands: ABA, TA He faces about , salutes and says,
"Ginoo, handa na po ang pag-aalay. "The escort commands together with the guidon bearer goes to the
side giving way to the GOH and Host.
Note: In cases where there are more than one wreathlayers, the most junior will lay the wreath first.
f. Band plays the Pilipinas kong Mahal
g. At the first note of the music, the Host invites the GOH to move forward.
h. As the GOH and the Host approach the wreath the wreath commanders command DAMPOT
BULAKLAK NA and simultaneously signals them to proceed toward Point 4 followed by the GOH and
Host. Other guest remain in their position at Point 2. this instance, the drummer and three (3) buglers
who were initially with the band position themselves near the monument.
i. When the honoree and host reaches Point 3 the Host stops. The GOH and wreath Details
continue walking until they reach Point 4 (Note: the movement from Point 2 to Point 4 should be
completed to coincide with the last note of the music Pilipinas Kong Mahal)
j. At Point 4, the Wreath Commander immediately positioned himself at the site of the monument
facing the front. The GOH by the wreath bearers, lays the wreath then step back to Point 4. Wreath
bearers salute the monument then face about and occupied their respective position at both sides of
the monument.
k. At this instance, Escort, Commndr Commands TANGHAL TA. Then together with the guidon
bearers they execute present arms.
l. Drummers sounds four (4) ruffled drums. Everybody in the area renders appropriate
respect/salute.
m. After the ruffled drums had been sounded, the firing party fires three
(3) volleys while the bugler sounds the Taps.
n. At the last note of Taps, Escort Comdr and the guidon bearer execute order arms. He commands
the troops BABA TA
o. The band plays Sampaguita while the GOH is moving to Point 4 to Point 3 where he will join the
Host.
p. From Point 3 the GOH and Host proceed back to Point 2.
q. The band ceases playing music as soon as the GOH and Host have occupied their original
position at Point 2.
r. Escort Comdr and with the guidon bearer move to their original position at Point 2. Escort
Comdr execute about face and commands TANGHAL TA. He again executes about face and together
with the guidon bearer their execute present arms. After the honoree has acknowledge the salute, the
Escort Comdr and the guidon bearer execute order arms. The Escort Comdr and faces about and
commands BABA TA. Again he faces about and executes hand salute to the GOH and says “TAPOS NA PO
ANG PAGAALAY or “SIR, THAT ENDS THE CEREMONY”.
s. the GOH acknowledges the salute and may motion the Escort Cmdr to come forward of the GOH
and executes hand salute.
t. Escort Comdr moves forward, halts two (2) faces in front of the GOH and executes hand salute.
u. The GOH acknowledges he salute and shake hands with him.
v. Thereafter, Escort Cmdr one (1) step backward and again salute the GOH who intern
acknowledges the salute. Escort Cmdr goes back to his original position facing the front.
w. The GOH and Host faces each other. THE Host will render appropriate respect/salute and
exchange pleasantries with the GOH.
II.5 DIAGRAMS
Attached are diagrams depicting the formation of troops during wreathlaying ceremonies in the
following places:
a. Diagram 1-2- Rizal Monument,Luneta
b. Diagram 3 - Libingan Ng Mga Bayani
c. Diagram 4 - Dambana Ng Kagitingan
d. Diagram 5 - Bonifacio Monument, Caloocan
e. Diagram 6 - Aguinaldo Shrine
f. Diagram 7 - Tejeros Convention
g. Diagram 8 - Corregidor Shrine
h. Diagram 9 - Police Heroes Monument
SECTION XII
THE POLICE WEDDING

12.1 GENERAL
The police wedding is like any other weddings except for the following differences: members of the PNP
in the bridal party are in uniform and the bride and groom usually leave' the chapel or church under the
traditional arch of swords. Another difference that during the reception, the groom's sword will be used
by the bride to cut the piece of cake. The uniform worn is in accordance with the kind of wedding which
was planned by the concerned parties. Members of the PNP, however, usually wear dress white/white
duck
and gala uniform during such occasion.
The arch of swords takes place immediately following the ceremony when the couple leaves the chapel
or church. Prior to the conduct of this, however, approval/permission from the officiating chaplain or
clergyman must be sought especially when it is being done inside the chapel or church considering that
said place is a sanctuary.
12.2 PLANNING THE WEDDING
The date and time of the wedding are decided by the couple, their parents and some close relatives.
Likewise, they decide on where the wedding ceremony and the reception have to take place. In planning
the wedding, the following are to be considered:
a. Religious Ceremonies
b. Parents
c. Best man for the Groom
d. Maid of Honor for the bride
e. Bouquet or corsage for the Bride
f. Rings for the Bride and Groom
g. Wedding Gown for the Bride h Reception
i. Wedding trip
12.3 PREPARATION FOR THE WEDDING
a. The chapel
The chapel is reserved on a first come, first served basis. Permission for its use shall be obtained as soon
as possible, in order to ensure the desired date
and hour for the wedding. Reservation for the chapel should be done by the couple with the chapel
authority at least one month prior to the scheduled date.
b. The chaplain
As in the case of all weddings, it is important that engaged couple consult their chaplain (clergyman) at
least one month before the schedule of the wedding. The chaplain will advise the couple concerning
such requirements as medical tests, obtaining the marriage license and other requirements. Although
most chaplains prefer to officiate at ceremonies held in the chapel to which they are assigned, a
clergyman from the coup!.::'.; home church may assist the ceremony if this is acceptable to the chaplain
and is arranged beforehand. The official chaplain (clergyman) will be in accordance with the religious
preference of the couple.
c. The Music
In conformity with the religious aspect of wedding ceremonies, the organist will play traditional wedding
music and selections from the library of sacred music available in the chapel or church.
d. Flowers and Decorations

Flowers and decorations may be done by church authorities. It may also be done by the concerned
parties. However, decorations which require alterations to the chapel or church or which are to be
fastened to the pews, walls or items of furniture should have prior clearance and approval by the
chaplain (clergymen).
12.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR THE WEDDING
The following are to be secured a month or so prior to the schedule of the wedding:
a. Birth Certificates for both groom and bride.
b. Baptismal Certificates also for groom and bride.
c. Background information of the bride in case the groom is a police officer and vice versa
d. Request permission to marry Subject to Letter form thru Channel, addressed to the Regional
Director/Director of NSUs or Directorate for Personnel.
e. Certification that the prospective groom and bride have undergone series of seminars on family
planning from Population Commission Centers or from Rural Health centers.
f. Certification that the couple has undergone pre-marriage counselling at NHQ PNP chapel, Camp
Crame, or the Recoms Chapel or any of the local church.
g. Certification that the marriage has been announced several times in churches/church residence
of the bride and groom.
12.5 WEDDING ENTOURAGE

a. The entourage is normally composed of the following: 1.) Sword Sponsor 7.) Coin Bearer
2.) Groom with parents 8.) Flower Girl/s
3.) Ushers 9.) Secondary Sponsors
4) Bestman 10.) Bridesmaid/s
5.) Principal Sponsors 11.) Bride with Parents
6) Ring Bearer 12.) Maid of Honor
b. The bride and groom may have one attendant each, these would be the bestman and maid of
honor. The bride will ask a sister or close relative, or an intimate friend to be her maid of honor. The
bride can also have bridesmaids. They are close friend of the bride and usually include a sister
or .relative or relative of the groom . Other members of the bridal attendants are the following: flower
girls with the age of 4-7 years old, coin bearer and ring bearer (4-5 years old).
c. Best Man
The groom chooses his ,best man and ushers from among his closest friends or relatives. His best man
may be a brother or intimate friend. The best man is the groom’s aide. It is his duty to insure the smooth
administration of the rites. Before the ceremony, the best man checks on the groom’s uniform, marriage
license, wedding ring and swords. He checks what has to be signed, and that everything is in order. He
notifies the ushers to be at the chapel or church at least twenty minutes before the ceremony and he
will arrive with the groom to be sure that the latter is not late and he is properly dressed. Following the
couple’s vows, the best man joins in the recessional in which he is customarily escorts the maid of
honor. Afterwards, he may hurry on to the place of the reception and check details. He does not stand in
the receiving line at the reception, but is near the groom to be further help.
d. The Ushers
The ushers represent not only the groom but the families of the bride and the groom as well. They act as
unofficial hosts, greeting the guest in a pleasant manner, and are escorts in the chapel, church and in the
place of reception When ushering, the ushers should not wear the swords. They may however, leave
their swords at a place convenient for the arch of sword (sabers) ceremony.
e. Secondary Sponsors
Secondary sponsors are selected by the couple from their close relatives and friends. Usually the
secondary sponsors are composed of three pairs and their duties are the following:
the candles.
1.) Candle - The first pair is usually designated as the pair to light
couple
2.) Veil - The second Pair is designated to pin the veil on the
3) Chord - The third group will put on the chord to the couple.
f. Principal Sponsors
The principal sponsors are selected persons usually of higher age bracket than that of the couple and
coming from relatives, family friends and senior officers of the PNP chosen by the couple. The main duty
of the principal sponsors is to act as secondary parents to the couple.
g. Sword Sponsors
Sword sponsors are selected officers of the PNP usually composed of classmates of the groom to
perform the arch of swords. The sword sponsors is composed of a minimum of four (4) pairs and a
maximum of eight (8) pairs, depending upon the size of the chapel or church.
12.6 WEDDING CEREMONY
a. The Processional
Normally, the bridal entourage is arranged in the order stated below
,during the processional, however, varies depending upon the couple and church authorities.
1.) Sword sponsor
2.) Groom with parents 3.) Ushers
4.) Bestman
5.) Principal Sponsor
6.) RingBearer
7.) Coin Bearer
8.) Flower Girl
9.) Secondary sponsor
10.) Bridesmaid/s
11.) Bridesmaids with parents 12.) Maid of honor
b. Procedure
As soon as the bridal entourage has been formed at a designated or appropriate area in the vestibule as
in (Figure I), the Sword sponsors march in column of two's towards the altar with the most senior or
designated commander, giving the commands. When the first two .elements have reached the point
which is in line with the first pew, the Commander commands, TILAP, TO, As soon as they are hnltl1d.
the Sword Sponsors automatically execute center face. They maintain said formation until the last
element of the bridal entourage has passed and everyone has reached their respective positions on the
altar as in (Fig.' 2) the sword sponsor commander then commands PALABAS RAP and then marches
towards the entrance of the chapel or church. The groom who had been prepositioned near the altar
waits for the bride, When the bride reaches the point between the groom and the maid of honor, she
pauses about three paces from the groom. Then the groom advances tomeet her where her father
pauses for the bride to take the groom's left arm. The father of the bride then gives his daughter in
marriage and goes to his seat The couple proceeds to their designated seats. The chaplain then gives the
signal for the guests to take seats. The ceremony follows.
c. The Recessional
1) The Bride and Groom are the first to leave the chapel, with the bride on the right side of the
groom. The Maid of honor and the Best Man walk out together, followed by the Bridesmaids and ushers
in pairs. The Recessional will be conducted in the order in (Fig. 3).
2) Arch of Swords (Sabers) Ceremony - Before the end of the ceremony, the sword Sponsors again
form at the vicinity of the entrance of the chapel. They march towards a designated area where the
bridal entourage will form for the recessional with the designated commander, giving commands. Upon
reaching the designated point, the Sword commander commands, TILAP, TO: the Sword Commander
halts and automatically execute center face. As soon as the Bride and groom and other members of the
bridal entourage are formed and ready for the recessional, the Sword Sponsor Commander then
commands, PALABAS, RAP first and then PASULONG KAD. The sword sponsor marches towards a
designated area outside of the chapel or church where the arch of swords has to be conducted. upon
reaching the area, the sword Sponsor Commander then commands, TILAP, TO. The Sword commander
halt and automatically execute center face. As soon as the Bride and Groom are approximately 6 paces
before the first elements of the Sword Sponsor, the Sword
Commander commands, ANTABAY, BUNOT, KALIS. The Sword sponsor execute the command wherein
each sword/saber bearer raises his right arm with the sword/saber, rotating in a clockwise direction, so
that the cutting edge of the sword/saber will be on top, thus forming a true arch with his opposite
across the isle. As the groom and bridge pass by a pair of swords sponsors, the swords of that particular
pair will be rotated with the snap and hitting each other’s swords thereby producing a sound. After
which the pair automatically executes carry sword. This series of sword ceremonies is done up to the
last pair of swords sponsor.
12.7 WEDDING RECEPTIONS
a. The type of reception as well as the number of guests to be invited, depends upon the choice of
the couple. A reception may be held at home, in an officers' club, at a hotel or other similar places which
the-couple may select
b. A receiving line may also be formed at the entrance of the place of reception. An example of a
receiving line is indicated in (Fig. 4). To greet the bridal party, one offers like the following "Best Wishes
to the Bride and Congratulations to the Bridegroom.
c. Seating Arrangements - A presidential table is always prepared in the reception area. Usually,
the Groom and Bride, Principal sponsors, chaplain or clergy-man the parents are seated at the
presidential table. The seating arrangements at the presidential table will be determined by authorities
from the place of reception.
.12.8 WEDDING PRESENTS
The giving of gifts to newly-wed couples is a custom among people
every-where that is bound too by rules to which guests should observe. These are as follows:
a When a friend or relative is so close to either bride. or groom, he/she shall send a present/s to
the couple. However, one is not required to sent a present to everyone who sends a wedding invitation
or announcement.
b. A person who accepts an invitation to a wedding reception may send or bring along a gift. (If
he/she regrets the invitation, he/she is not obliged to send a gift)
c. Gift-givers need not send more than they can afford (but rather must always remember that
quality is superior to quantity).
d. When invited to many wedding receptions, a person gives presents only to his or her classmates
or close friends, whether he/she attends the ceremony or not.
e. When the invitation is limited to the wedding ceremony (which means there is reception, which
happens out very seldom), the invited person may give a present depending upon his/her friendship
with the couple.
f. When there are no invitations or announcements, a person may give or send a present to the
couple according to one's friendship with them. Every young couple enjoy a wedding present and will
always treasure such.
12.9 WEDDING FINANCES
Customarily, financial expenditures for the wedding are shouldered by the groom. However, there are
instances when the bride contributes a sum in order to reduce the financial burden of the groom.
12.10 WEDDING INVITATIONS
a. It is a must that wedding invitations should be received by the
invited
persons at least one (1) week prior to the ceremony.
b. Normally, the following are printed in the wedding invitation: 1.) Names of the members
of the wedding entourage.
2) The date and time of the wedding.

3) Place of the wedding ceremony.
4) Place of reception.
5) The suggested attire.
SECTION XIII OATH TAKING
13.1 GENERAL
Oath taking may be a separate and distinct ceremony or integrated as a part of a formal ceremony such
as flag raising.
13.2 OATH TAKING ( INDOOR PART OF A PROGRAM)
a. As soon as the emcee announces that an oath taking ceremony will take marcher of the group
comes in front, faces the audience and says: MGA TAONG MANUNUMP , PUMAGITNA, KAD. The
persons who will take their oath rise seats and orderly form a line in front of the marcher facing the
b. The marcher faces about, salutes the person who will administer the oath reports: "Ginoo, ang
mga taong manunumpa nandito na po lahat. "
c. The person who will administer the oath rises, acknowledges the salute, proceeds to the
rostrum and says: "Mangyaring itaas ang kamay at sumunod sa akin”. He then administers the oath.
d After the oath taking, the person who administered the oath shakes hands with the oath takers, after
which, the marcher again says: MGA TAONG NANUMPA, SUMALUNAN NA, The oath takers go back to
their seats and sit down on signal from the marcher.
e. The next number of the program follows.
11.3 OATH TAKING (OUTDOOR)
a. The oath takers are initially positioned opposite the troop commander nnd staff.
b. As soon as the emcee announces the oath taking, the marcher commands: MGA TAONG
MANUNUMPA,PASULONG NA. They march forward and stop approximately six paces away from the
troop commander.
c. The marcher salutes and reports to the troop commander: "Ginoo,
ang
mga taong manunumpa narito po lahat. "
d. The troop commander acknowledges the salute and directs his staff to march at the side. The
person who will administer the oath goes to the rostrum and says: "Mangyaring itaas and kanang kamay
at sumunod sa akin. " He then administers the oath.
e. After the oath taking, the VIPs shake hands with the oath takers. The marcher then commands
the oath takers to occupy their positions which may be:
1) Designated seats in the grandstand, or
2) A single line to the right of the troop commander and staff facing the troops to witness the pass-
in-review if there is any.
SECTION XIV
OPENING AND GRADUATION CEREMONIES
14.1 GENERAL
This section provides the standard procedures and sequences to be adopted for the Course Opening and
Closing Ceremonies in the conduct of any unit training.
a. Course- includes all courses, seminars and training conducted by units.
b. Party- includes the host, guest/s, and distinguished personalities who are supposed to have
seats or places at the stage or similar places.
14.3 SEQUENCES
a. Opening Ceremony (Indoor) 1.) Processional
2) Entry of Colors (Indoor only)
3) National Anthem (Mass singing)
4) Invocation
5) Presentation of Students
6) Declaration of Opening of the Course
7) Introduction of the guest speaker
8) Speech
9) Presentation of Plaque to the Guest (if any)
10) Exit of Colors (Indoor only - optional)
11) Mass Singing of Pilipinas Kong Mahal
12) Recessional
b. Closing Ceremony (Indoor)
1) Processional
2) Entry of Colors (Indoor only)
:3) National Anthem (Mass Singing:)
4) Invocation
5) Opening Remarks
6) Presentation of Candidates for Graduation

7) Declaration of Graduates
8) Distribution of Certificates of Awards
9) Introduction of the Guest Speaker
10) Speech
11) Presentation of Plaque to the Guest Speaker (optional)
12) Mass Singing of Pilipinas kong Mahal
13) Exit of colors (Indoor only -optional)
14) Recessional
14.4 PROCEDURES
a. Opening Ceremony (Indoor)
1) Processional- This part of the program marks the entrance of the party. Here, the students arise
and stand at attention. To make simultaneous movements, a command may be necessary or any form of
signal that f!1ay serve as cue. The party members, on other hand, position themselves right in front of
their respective designated seats and remain standing facing the students.
2) Entry of Colors - Colors to be used are the national color and . unit
color
and (training unit)

3) Singing of National Anthem - The cue when to start the singing of National Anthem may be given
by the one designated to lead and shall position himself/herself at the middle before the students. After
the singing, everybody remains standing for the invocation.
4) Invocation - The minister or the designated person who will lead the invocation proceeds to the
podiums/rostrum after singing will take their seats. Again, a pre-arranged signal shall be made as a cue
for everybody to sit at the same time.
5) Presentation of Students- Students shall be presented to the commander to his to his

representative who has the authority to declare the opening of the course by the school commandant or
by his authorized representative. The statement during the presentation shall include the number of
students, title of the course and the recommended date of opening. The students rise upon
presentation at a pre-arranged cue.
6) Declaration of Course Opening - At this portion the Commander. Or his representative declares
the course open. The moment the commander leaves the rostrum/podium, the students in coordinated
movement sit down.
7) Introduction of the Guest Speaker - Everybody remains seated while the guest speaker is being
introduced. The moment the guest speaker is presented, everybody rises.
8) Speech of the Guest Speaker - Everybody remains standing unless told by the guest speaker to
sit down. At the end of his speech, everybody rise will a round of applause.
9) Presentation of Plaque of Appreciation to the guest (if any). This portion is optional.
10) Exit of Colors. (optional)
11) Mass Singing of Pilipinas kong Mahal
12) Recessional- Exit of the party and the program ends.

Note: Headgears shall be taken off upon entry to the hall.
b. Opening Ceremony (Outdoor)
Basically, the sequences and procedures are the same except that there will be no entry and exit of
colors. Colors will be in place at the ceremonial area before the start of the ceremonies.
c. Graduation Ceremony (Indoor)
1) Processional - This is the first part of the program which mark.,; the entrance of the party. Here,
the students rise and sta:1d at attention. The party members, upon reaching ~he stage, will position
themselves right in front of their respective designated seats and remain standing.
2) Entry of Colors.
3) National Anthem- The clue when to start the singing of National Anthem shall be given by the
one designated to lead. after the singing, everybody remains standing for the invocation.
4) Invocation- The minister or the designated person who will lead the invocation approaches the
podium/rostrum after the singing and proceeds with the invocation. After the invocation, everybody
takes their respective seats. A prearranged signal will be made as a cue so that everybody will sit down
at the same time.
5) Opening Remarks - This is an address by a Class Valedictorian. In courses where there is no class
standing, the most senior or the class president in that order, will render the opening remarks. Here, he
will proceed directly to the podium to deliver his speech. The class need not stand up. At the end of the
speech, the class will rise with a round of applause. As he steps down and leaves the stage, the class
sits down.
6) Presentation of Candidates for Graduation - the candidates for graduation shall be presented by
the school commandant or by the training director! s for the in-service Unit Training. The presentation
statements shall include the number of candidates, and the course title among others. In this part, the
candidates rise as soon as they are presented. Pre- arranged signal is needed in order to achieve a
coordinated and simultaneous movement.
7) Declaration of Graduates - the Commander or his authorized representative by virtue of his

authority, declares the candidates for graduation as graduates. Right after the declaration of graduates,
the graduating class gives a round of applause and then sits down.
8) Distribution of Certificates and Awards - the Adjutant or the administrative officer reads the
orders for those who will graduate, followed by the giving of certificates and awards in that order for
outstanding students. This distribution of certificates maybe given in bunch or individually and the
sequence shall be at the option school or unit concerned. The awards, however, shall be given and be
given and received individually.
9) Introduction of the Guest Speaker - Everybody will be seated while the guest speaker is being
introduced. The moment the guest speaker is presented, everybody rises.
10) Speech - Everybody remains standing unless told by the guest speaker to sit down. At the end of
his speech, everybody rises with a round of applause.
11) Presentation of Plaque of appreciation if any, to the Guest
speaker,
12) Mass Singing of "Pilipinas kong Mahal" followed by unit or School hymn, if any - the one
designated to lead positions himself at the 'center in front of the class. After the singing, he goes back to
his place.
13) Exit of colors.
14) Recessional- End of the program.
d. Graduation Ceremony (Outdoor)

Basically, the sequences and procedures are the same except that there are no entry and exit of colors.
Colors are in place at the ceremonial area before the start of the ceremonies.
14.5 OTHER DETAILS
a. A Master of Ceremonies in this particular program is optional.
b. Parade and Review
Parade and review shall only be tendered during graduation in honor of the graduating class and also for
the guest of honor. The parade sequences and procedures are similar with that of giving honors to
awardees. The program proper is conducted in such manner. However, there are modifications in the
processional, the playing of National Anthem and the recessional. The processional is substituted with
the marching of graduating class with the colors towards the grandstand being led by the troop
commander. In the recessional, the graduating class exits in the manner and sequence at the option of
the School or unit concerned. When the band plays the National Anthem, everybody renders hand
salute.
c. Appropriate authorized Representative of the Commander:
Appropriate persons to act as authorized representatives of the commander or person to act in his
behalf to declare the opening of the course or to declare the graduates are the Deputy City Director, the
Executive Director and any Senior Staff in Training or their equivalent, in that order.
d. Cue and Signal
Cue or any form of signal must be established to achieve a coordinated simultaneous execution by the
graduates.
GRADUATION CEREMONIES (INDOOR)

Entry of Guests Entry of Color
Singing of the National Anthem - To be led by the Band
Declaration of Graduates – By the highest Comdr/Head/Supervisor of the said training.
Introduction of the Guest of Honor – By Director of School or Training
Center
Remarks/Speech of the Guest of Honor – ( No other speech/ remarks after the Guest of Honor
Presentation of Plaque of Appreciation – Exit of Color (optional)
Recessional
ENTRY AND EXIT OF COLOR
1. General Provisions
a. Entry and Exit of colors are normally conducted as part of indoor ceremonies, especially, during
the following:
1) Awarding Ceremony
2) Opening and Graduation Ceremonies
b. To be used are the national and host unit colors. In case there is a designated color commander,
he commands the color bearers and guards. If there is no designated color Commander, the color bearer
of the national color will be the one to give the Command.
2. Procedure
a. Color bearer and guards are positioned outside the front doors and door facing the. stage
before the start of the ceremony. However, if the hall is quite big and will take time for movement,
colors and bearers could be positioned immediately behind last row of audience. Color guards are at
right shoulder arms while the bearers at carry colors
b. When all the guests including the GOH have already arrived and sitted, the emcee announces “
Everybody is requested to rise for the entry of Colors.”
c. The Color Commander (or National Color Bearer) commands PASULONG KAD. At about 2-3
paces from the stage. Color commander commands TILAP, TA. Color bearers and guards halt and
without the orders
execute color turn, Drum rolls are conducted while color bearers and guards are marching.
d. Mass Singing of National Anthem follows . Color guards are present arms during the mass
singing and return to right shoulder arms commander then commands SUMALUNAN, NA. As the
command of execution, in the stage, National color with bearer and guard move to the right of the
stage, while the color bearer to the left crossing each other's path on the process.
e. After placing the colors in their respective stand, color bearers and guards return in front of the
stage facing outward. Color commander PASULONG, KAD and proceeds to a rest area outside of the
ceremonial area.
3. Exit of Colors
a) Before the end of the speech of the GOH color bearer and guards assembled at the starting
point (near the door). After the Speech of the Guest of Honor and some amenities at the stage, the
emcee announces “Everybody is requested to remain standing”, (or stand stand at the case may be)
“For the exit of colors”.
b) Color commander commands PASULONG, KAD, Color guards are at right shoulder arms while
marching. Upon reaching about 2-3 pawces from the stage, out command proceed to pick-up respective
colors
c) After the colors are carried, color guards bearers (who are at right shoulder arms) face about
and on cue return to respective position in front of the stage.
d) Color commander commands PASULONG, KAD, then marches out. Drum rolls are conducted
while color bearers and guards are marching.
(Note: EMCEE should always shake hand with the speakers before and after his speech
CHAPTER III
PROTOCOL AND USAGE SECTION I
GENERAL COURTESY AND SIMPLE AMENITY
Education and training are normal standards for commission in the police service. A commission carries
the obligation to observe the customs and traditions is the police service. Among these traditions is the
acceptance of an officer as a gentleman. The officer must live up to this expectation.
A gentleman conducts himself with dignity and grace. It should appear that an officer is tailor-made to
become a gentleman. However, this does not follow automatically. There are certain efforts to be done,
largely in the field of social relations.
An officer shows breeding, and is therefore considered a gentleman by his conduct in all dealings. He
knows that:
1. Being late for any engagement is the height of bad manners.
2. A police Officer is expected to behave and conduct himself with dignity and restraint. Under the
present taste, smoking is a form of discourtesy.
3. It is bad taste to address a woman by her first name or nickname unless she has indicated
otherwise.
4. A Police Officer always ask himself to be permitted to smoke in the presence of a woman
especially in a room or in an automobile.
5. If a Police Officer invites a friend to his club, he should be out of sight only when necessary.
6. A Police Officer stands when introduced to a woman, a clergyman, an official or an old man.
7. It is not polite to compliment a person in a company because the others might feel slighted.
INTRODUCTIONS
Introduction is the act of formally making persons known to each other or the art of presenting one
person to another. It follows either of the two types; self introduction (or introducing one self), and the
introduction by a third person.
When to Introduce
1. It is the duty of the host or hostess to introduce all his or her guests
to
the guest of honor.

2. At formal dinners, every gentleman is introduced to the lady he is paired with, except when the
introduction would be impractical.
3. Strangers when seated next to each other at a table should introduce themselves to each other.
4. When taking a house guest not known in your neighborhood, he
should
be introduced to all close acquaintances at a party.
When not to Introduce
1. A guest who have just arrived is not introduced to another who is just leaving.
2. An animated conversation should not be interrupted to introduce another person.
Whom to Introduce
1. The younger person is always introduced to the older.
2. A Police Officer is always introduced to a lady regardless of his
rank.
3. A woman is never presented to any Police Officer regardless of his rank or to any man, except to
the President, a royal personage or a church dignitary
How to Introduce
In introduction, the words "introduce:' and "present" are equally proper.
However, the latter is more formal.
1. "Director Cruz, may 1 present (introduce) Supt Reyes. "
2. "Mr. President, I have the honor to present Mrs. Cruz. "
General Introduction
“Director Cruz, Supt Reyes.”
(The first name is spoken with a slightly rising inflection; the second is said as a mere statement of fact)
What to Say when Introduced
Under all possible circumstances, persons introduced to each other should say, “How do you do?”
1. A member of the reigning family is addressed, "Your Royal Highness."
2. A foreign ambassador is addressed, "Your Excellency.”
3. A judge, doctor, or bishop is addressed, "Judge ", "Doctor," or “Bishop” respectively.
4. A senator is addressed, "Senator" even if he is no longer in office.

5. An ex-president is introduced as "Mr. President" not as "Ex- President.”
6. Repetitions such as Director Cruz, Supt Reyes; Supt Reyes, Director Cruz” should be avoided.
Handshakes in Introduction
1. Gentlemen always shake hands with each other when introduced.
2. It is very rude not to look into the countenance of the person whose hand one takes. A smile
rendered during the handshake is a very polite act.
3. The general rule is; a woman has the privilege of offering to shake hands with a gentleman.
However, she should not embarrass a man who has offered his hand.
GREETINGS
A greeting is nothing more than a brief expression of thought or salutation at a meeting.
How to Express Greetings
1. A "how are you?" greeting is correctly answered by "All right, thank
you."
2. "Good morning" and "good evening" are acknowledged by the same greetings.
3. Other greetings may be acknowledged by a bow:

a. Formal Bow - This is done by joining the heels together with a graceful bend over from the waist
to the neck.
b. Ordinary Bow - An ordinary bow is similarly executed as the formal bow but more with ease.
c. Lady's Bow - This is done by slightly inclining the head and with a smile as if to say "/ am glad to
see you. "
4. In a public place, when a man greets' a woman, he gestures by half rising and bowing gracefully.
5. Greetings are also acknowledged by lifting or tipping the hat
SECTION II
CUSTOM OF THE SERVICE
Customs of the service are the long established practices or usages in the Philippine National Police that
have, by reason of constant and repeated observance, acquire the character of unwritten norms of
conduct.
Most of the customs and traditions in the PNP are embodied in regulations while others are simply
adopted to supplement the pleasantries of police life.
Despite the possible changes in customs to suits the needs of modern living, these established
precedents remains as the minimum accepted practices in the police service.
THE OFFICERS’ CODE

Official Statements
A Police Officer’s official statement, whether written or unwritten, is accepted without reservation.
Making false official statements knowingly is not only
Contrary police ethics but is also punishable under existing penal laws.
Responsibilities
It is a Police Officers' duty to prepare himself professionally for higher responsibilities, The rank of a
Police Officer carries with it commensurate responsibilities
When an officer accepts his commissionship, it is also his duty to prepare himself for higher
responsibilities.
Tact and Foresight
A Police Officer must not only be discreet in the exercise of his duties but must be prepared to perform
his task skillfully under all circumstances.
Personal appearances
A Police Commissioned Officer must at all times appear neat and clean. Nothing destroys the respect
and confidence of subordinates than the shadiness of their superiors.
Police Commissioned Officer - PNCO Relationship

He must be able to exercise good leadership. The common familiar saying, "familiarity breeds contempt"
is particularly true in a Police Officer – PNCO relationship.
Familiarity as referred to here may not be the same as in other countries. In some police forces, non-
commissioned officers address their superiors by their first names or nicknames, but the manner of
conversation is not one that breeds familiarity or facile relations. In the Philippines, custom does not
allow such.
Welfare of the Police Personnel
The welfare of the Police Personnel should be the paramount concern of a Police Officer.
THE PRIVILEGES OF AN OFFICER
1. Police personnel are required to extend unfailing obedience and loyalty to senior commissioned
and Police non-commissioned officers. Obedience should be shown with respect and courtesy.
2. A senior Police Commissioned Officer is normally addressed by the use of the word, "Sir" by
PNCO's and NUP's.
For example: "Sir, a messenger wants to see you, " "Sir, do you wish to attend the conference
tomorrow?" "Yes, sir “
In Continental Europe, the address by rank is the accepted practice. In France, Switzerland, Belgium, and
Spain, for example, a senior officer is addressed “ Mi Colonel," "Mi Coronel, " "Mon Capitane," "Mi
Captain, " and "Yes. my Colonel. " In the Philippines, custom does not allow such.
“ Monsieur” the equivalent of "Sir" is never used. In the Israel Defense Force, junior officers and enlisted
men can address their superiors by their nicknames but always in a respectful manner.
3. A senior Police Officer is accorded the place of honor. In walking or riding, junior sit, walks, or
rides at the left or behind the senior officer.
4. Courtesy demands that an officer use polite words in a well modulated tone to convey an order.
The use of phrases, "I wish" or "desire" partakes of the full force of a direct order.
5. A Police Officer enjoys the reputation of being a good creditor. He is expected to settle all
account promptly.
CALLS NEW YEAR'S DAY
One of the beautiful traditions of the PNP is the New Year's call rendered by Officers on their
Commanding Officer. The Commanding Officer usually prescribes the time of this call.
WELCOME FOR NEWLY ARRIVED OFFICER
A new arrival, after making the prescribed call on the Commanding Officer, should be presented to the
members of the Police Post at its social gathering.
GROUP ACTIVITIES
An Officer actively participates in an athletic, social, civic, and cultural activity of his unit.
SICKNESS AND DEATH
1. Police Officers of a command visit another who is confined in the hospital or sick at his quarters.
2. When a Police Officer's wife is sick, flowers are normally sent to her in the name of the officers
and ladies of the unit to which her husband belongs.
3. A Police Officer belonging to the same unit as the deceased, is assigned as liaison officer
between the command and the bereaved family. A similar courtesy may be extended if a member of an
officer's family dies. Flowers or wreaths are also sent in the name of the officers and ladies of the unit.
MISCELLANEOUS CUSTOMS POLICE OFFICER'S DEPORTMENT
1. The Police Officer's uniform should reflect the dignity of his organization. Under no
circumstances must his uniform be dishonored. A policeman in uniform should behave with the dignity
expected of him.
2. Leaning or sitting on desks is taboo. It is always proper to stand
erect
and sit only when invited to do so
COURTESY TO THE NATIONAL FLAG AND
THE NATIONAL ANTHEM
THE NATIONAL FLAG
a. The National Flag shall be displayed in all public office buildings, official residences,. and public
squares, and shall be hoisted at sunrise and lowered at sundown. It should be on the mast at the beak of
day, should remain flying throughout the day, but shall not stay flying after the sun has actually set,
except when specifically prescribed. The flag-staff must be straight, tapering slightly and gently at the
end.
b. The flag should never be used to return the salute of any individual or organization. It should
never be dipped by way of compliment or salute to or for any person.
c. The only flag that float above the National Flag is a church pennant symbolize “ God ab0ve the
country”
d. The Flag, if flown from a flagpole should have its blue field on top in time of peace and the red
field on top in time of war.
e. In hoisting the Flag, it should be hoisted clear to the top end of the flagpole which if planted on
the ground, should be at a prominent place and higher than the roof of the principal building in the
compound, or of such height as would give the flag a commanding position within the compound . If the
pole is attached to a building , it should be on top of its roof, and if placed at a window, it must project
at an angle pointing upward.
f. When the National Flag is used together with the flag of the PNP or civil organization or with
that of another nation, it must always be above or on the right of the other flag. When the National Flag
is displayed in a parade with those of foreign nations it shall always be in front of the center of the line
of the other flags.
g. When the Flag is passing in a parade or in review, the people, if walking, should halt stand at
attention, uncover and salute.
h. The Flag shall be displayed on Independence Day (June twelfth), on National Heroes Day
(November thirtieth), on Rizal Day (December thirtieth) of each year on such other historic or special
occasions as the President may designated not only in squares, and institution of learning, but,
whenever practicable, also in all private buildings and homes from sunrise to sunset.
i. On national holidays of his country and other historic or special occasions any alien whose
country is at peace with the Philippines may display the flag of his nation on any building or property
owned or rented by him without simultaneously displaying the f1ag of the Philippines. However, if the
alien is located in a building or other building or other property owned or rented by the Philippine
Government, the flag of the Philippines shall always be displayed
when that of his country is displayed. When so displayed, the f1ag of the alien's country should at least
be the same as the Flag of the Philippines which shall be placed on the right of the former (left of the
observer facing the flags.)
j. When hoisting or lowering the Flag, no part thereof should touch the ground, while the National
Anthem is being played, the people salute. Moving vehicles should stop, but passengers should remain
inside and keep silent until the National Anthem is finished.
k. The flag may be hoisted at half-mast in sign of mourning. To display the flag .at half-mast, it
must first be hoisted to full mast, allowing it to fly there for a moment before bringing it to half-mast.
From this position it may be hoisted but not lowered. To lower the Flag at sunset or at any other time
when ordered, it must again be hoisted to full-mast before bringing it down.
l. The Flag shall never be festooned, and shall always hang with nothing to cover its surface. It
shall always occupy the highest place of honor and shall not be placed under any picture, or below a
person.
m. The Flag shall never be used as a staff or whip, covering for tables nor for curtain of doorways.
However, the Flag may be used by the PNP to cover the casket of their honored dead, including
deceased civilians who rendered services in the police service or civil office of great responsibility. The
white triangle of the sun and stars will cover the head end of the casket, the blue stripe to the right, the
red to the left end of the deceased, with both colors should not be lowered to the grave nor allowed to
touch the ground. Wreaths of f1owers should not be placed 0:1 top of a flag-shrouded casket. A small
cross of flowers may be placed over the Flag as. a symbol for "God above country"
n. No imprint shall be made on the Flag nor shall it be marred by advertisement, or in any manner
desecrated. It shall not used as a pennant in the hood or any part of a motor vehicle except in
celebration of the Independence Day, 12th of June, or on such other patriotic occasions as the President
may designate.
o. It is inappropriate to use the Flag in a dancing pavilion or in any place where hilarity is prevailing.
its use inside or outside a cockpit, club or other places where gambling or other vices are held is
prohibited.
p. When the flag is used for unveiling ceremonies, it should not be allowed to touch to the ground
but should be carried aloft to wave out, forming a distinctive feature of the ceremony. The Flag shall
never be used as a covering for the statue.
q. A National Flag worn out through fair wear and tear, should not be thrown on a garbage heap or
used as rag. It should be reverently burned to avoid misuse or desecration.
THE NATIONAL. ANTHEM

a. The National Anthem should not be played except on public acts of official or semi-official in
formal civil ceremonies, People in the immediate vicinity, if outdoor, should face the band, uncover,
stand at attention, and salute.
b. Whenever band is present during the lowering of the Flag, the National Anthem should played
by the band, The Flag should be lowered slowly in such a manner that termination of the lowering
coincides with the last note of the flag, stand at attention and salute, If the National Anthem played
indoors, everyone should stand at attention and face the band.
c. National Anthem should not be played or sung for mere recreation, amusement or
entertainment purposes in social gathering purely private in nature or at political or partisan meeting or
places of hilarious or vicious amusement. It should however , be sung in schools so that the children may
know it by heart.
MANNER OF SALUTING
a. Members of the PNP and those belonging to military and semi- military organization in uniform
should adopt the military police salute provided in their regulations.
b. Civilian, if outdoors, should stand at attention place their right hands over their hearts and if
wearing hats, should uncover and hold the hats over their hearts. Complete silence should be observed
and no person should be allowed to walk around while the ceremony is going on.
SECTION III
CALLS AND CALLING CARDS
Officers are expected to be familiar with the etiquette on calling and leaving calling cards. It is best to
remember that necessary calls should always be made by officers if time and circumstances permit.
Although the practice of paying calls declined during the war because of profound changes in the modes
of living around the world, it is still maintained in police and diplomatic circles to show deference and to
establish working relationships.
In gene ral, calls are made in order to pay one's respect to officials of higher rank or to establish official
and social contacts with the public officials, individual and social groups. In the latter case, rank need not
necessarily be considered. A PNP Officer who arrives in a new station makes the calls first here or
abroad. The reverse is true in ordinary civilian life in that the new arrivals must wait for old residents of
a community to recognize them first. In the police, an officer reporting for duty at a new post must
ascertain immediately the current practices regarding calls on the commanding officer or commanding
general and other officers of the post.
SPECIAL RULES ON CALLS AND CARDS
1. Calls must be brief, usually not extending fifteen minutes. The time is spent on light
conversation which must be limited unless there are reasons for the caller to stay longer. Normally,
unless the hosts invite the callers to stay longer, they should take leave after the call.
2. Gentlemen, single or married, call or leave cards with both men and women in a household,
including sons and daughters over 18 years of age. Ladies call on ladies only. It is not proper for a lady to
make a social call on or leave cards with. any gentleman, regardless of the rank or position of the latter.
3. The initial call at the quarters of the commanding Officer should be made within two days after
arrival in the station. Necessary calls on other officers must be made soon after that. Calls of more or
less personal nature may be made later.
4. The initiative in making appropriate arrangements is on the callers. In the police, these may be
made with the Adjutant General, or with the Aide-de- Camp to the commanding General. In civilian life,
arrangements may be made with the secretary or with an assistant of the official one wishes to call
upon.
5. Callers arrive at the appointed time-not before or after. It is always safe to allow more than
usual for the distance to be covered. Extra time just before the appointed hour may be spent driving in
the immediate vicinity, but not in front of the place where there be made. A few minutes allowance
should be made for parking. Arrival at the front steps or main entrance at the exact time could be
assured only if will pay close attention to all details of time and distance.
The party called upon must likewise be ready to receive the call at the appointed hour.
6. A PNP officer making a call leaves two of his cards-one for the man called upon and the other for
his wife. The officer's wife leaves one personal card of her own for the wife of man called upon. It is
customary for the male caller to leave additional for single men and women members of a family who
are over 18 years of age in the household. The women caller leaves additional cards for other women
who are age 18 years of age in the household. The number of cards to be left, however is limited by
another rule-that is, not more than three cards of one kind should be left at one place. For example, if
the couple called upon has it number of children over 18 years old, the man making a call may leave only
one additional card for all. The wife in this situation may leave two additional cards for the other ladies
of the household. In strict usage, cards of sons who are of age are also left for each lady and gentlemen
in the household. Cards of daughters of age are left for the ladies. The rule to leave not more than three
cards of one kind applies in all cases.
7 The husband-wife card (joint card) is not used when making post calls. In police and military circles,
it is a better form to use separate cards. Joint cards may be used by women when making social calls'
outside the police service as it is really the women’s responsibility to fulfill certain social obligations of
the family. For example, when a wife makes a normal call alone, she may leave such a card just before
departing. An officer leaves a joint card. When calling alone, he may properly leave only his own card.
8. If the official or person upon whom the call being made is not at home or is otherwise not in a
position to receive calls, cards may be left with one of the upper corners card bent to indicate that the
caller came in person. Some countries prescribe corner for uniformity.
9. Calling cards are never handed directly to the officer or individual on whom the call is being
made. They maybe left on a convenient table near the front door, or handed to the member of the
household or aide opening the door. It is practical for the persons being called upon to provide a card
tray on a convenient place. Some people leave a few cards on the tray as cue to identify such tray.
10. The writing of one's residence address in the lower right hand corner of the card left at the place
where the call is made makes it easy for the persons called upon to communicate with the calling party.
It is necessary to write Telephone Numbers in the card for easy communication with the calling party.
11. The hours ('If cal1ing vary in different countries of the world. In the absence of official guides,
formal calls should be made on week days only. In a police post, camp or station, the customary hours of
cal1ing should first be ascertained by newly arrived officers, Normally, calls may be made from 7:30
p.m. to 9:00 p.m. on weekdays and 4:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. on Sundays. Calls are not normally made on
Saturdays unless urgent. Normally, calls should be made during the early evening hours but not during
dinner time.
12. When for some important reasons a call is made by a married woman without being
accompanied by her husband, the wife must also leave her husband's calling card. This is permissible
particularly when the husband is immediately too occupied with his new job to call on his superior
officer and his wife. However, it should always be made by both.
13. Calls on visit are always made when' one is informed of events like birth f a baby, illness, arrival
from abroad, and the like.
14. Calling cards must always be engraved. It is preferable not to have any card at all rather than use
printed cards, which show poor taste except in countries where engraved cards are not available.
15. The double cards may be sent with a wedding present, flowers to a sick person or flowers to a
debutante. No message is necessary.
16. It is highly improper to use business cards in place of regular visiting
cards.
17. It is most considerate on the part of anybody to phone first before making an ordinary social call
or to inquire when it is convenient to do so.
18. Visiting cards should never be enclosed with Christmas greeting
cards.
19. Although the use of calling card for the issuing of invitations is now accepted, it is better to use
regular invitation cards. In some countries, calling cards In some countries, calling cards are never used
for invitations.
20. The phrase "not at home" means simply that the person called upon is either out of the house
or not in a position to receive visitors.
21. First visits must always be returned. There is absolutely no excuse for failure to do so formally.
Visits made later depend on the degree of intimacy of parties concerned.
22. In order to be able to make necessary calls promptly on arriving at new station one should carry
cards in accompanying baggage. In diplomatic and official life the initials below are correct to convey
appropriate messages, These initials are written in the lower left hand corner of the calling cards, but
only on one card of a group.
APPROPRIATE MESSAGES
Correct initials French English
P.p. pour presenter to present
p.r. thanks
pour remercier
to express
p.f. congratulations
pour feliciter
to express
p.c sympathy
pour condoler
to offer
p.p.c. leave
pour prendre conge
to
say good-bye, take
pf.n.a. pour feliciter nouvel an to express congratulations
When one receives cards with "p.p." "p.c." or "p.f. they are answered with the cards of the person to
whom they are sent with initials "p.r. which means "Thanks", A PNP and his wife send such cards to their
diplomatic colleagues and their wives, to officials of the foreign government and their families with
whom they are in frequent contact, and to local residents who have entertained them during their tour
of duty. It is customary to leave cards in person upon those who have become close friends. Others may
be sent by messenger, or even by mail. The latter is accepted because it is understood that departing
persons are too busy to call in person.
SIZE AND STYLE OF CARDS
The size of the calling card depends on the length of the name and the tide to be engraved. Initials
should not be used if one wishes to be perfectly correct. However, names customarily written out with
first or middle initials may be engraved as such. Some abbreviations are permissible, only if writing out
the necessary information in full would make the card look awkward. The advice of the engravers and
people familiar with calling cards should be sought.
In general, a man's card is narrower in shape and a married woman's card more square. The man's card
should be about 3 and 3/8 inches long, and from 1 1/4 to 1 3/4 inches high. The married woman's card is
usually from 3 to 3 1/2 inches long and from 2 1/4 to 2 1/2 by 2 1/2 inches. The use of a two-ply glade
white card is in good taste.
An officers calling card reflects taste. Only engraved cards are correct, unless they are not available, with
the rank and name normally written
out in full (see Appendix D-l). Script,. which is considered by conservative people as the most correct is
recommended. But shaded and antique Roman are getting more popular. Cards must be engraved only
in black and not be plate-marked. Matching envelopes go with cards.
SPECIFIC RULES ON FOR AND ENGRAVING
1. A PNP Officer must use his title (rank) on his calling card. Letters of degrees, no matter how
impressive, are never used. It would be in bad taste to do so.
2. Normally, when it is not important to include the specific assignment of
an officer on his calling card, the information on rank, assignment and designation are indicated on the
lower right hand corner of the card. In this case,. only the full name should appear on the middle of the
card. If the information on present assignment is to be shown, however, the rank precedes the full name
at the middle of the card, and the particular r position occupied indicated directly below. While these
are the accepted rules, an individual officer is at liberty to choose where to indicate his rank, regardless
of the inclusion of the assignment. Certain posts, e.g. PNP Attache’ or Aide –de-Camp, must always be
indicated. In the application of these rules, one must be guided by the general appearance of the lines,
and neatness in the grouping of names and words.
3. A married woman's card should match that of her husband's. Thus the card of CInsp Jose
Antonio Cruz' wife should read Mrs. Jose Antonio Cruz.
4. A single woman's social card is written in the form "Miss Maria Carmen Cruz”.
5. ”Jr.” when written out must be small letters, as “junior." The son ceases to be “Jr.” upon the
death of his father unless the latter was a very well known and ,distinguished public figure.
6. Official cards of high government personages are somewhat larger that ordinary man’s card ,
Names are not written; only the rank or position, and no other information.
Example: "The Secretary of National Defense," "The Governor of Davao Sur” “ The Mayor of Davao City."
7. The little of courtesy "The honorable" is never correct in a card. Neither should an official refer
to himself as "Honorable."
8. The use of nickname on calling cards is considered poor form. Women are prone to use
nickname even in cards
9 A man's social card is in the form "Mr. Jaime de los Reyes." The "Mr." should be omitted when a
young man is still dependent on his parents, or when he is not yet twenty-one.
10. A girl over sixteen years of age uses "Miss" on her calling cards, which must be of same size as
her mother's.
11. When assigned abroad, an officer must ascertain specific practices in the nation which may be at
variance with those suggested here.
SECTION IV
INVITATIONS, ACCEPTANCES, REGRETS
Written invitations may be issued in various ways, and the particular form adopted depends upon the
importance and character of the occasion (see Appendix D-2). Invitations may be made by telephone
but it is always safe to issue written ones. There would then be no confusion on time, date. and place;
and essential information pertaining to the party will not be missed.
Formal invitations to luncheons, dinners, and receptions are engraved or handwritten on appropriate
cards measuring about 5 3/3 inches by 4 1/2 inches. The most formal invitations issues on very special
occasions. must normally be completely engraved consistent with the facilities available in the locality.
Others may be partially engraved or completely handwritten or combination of both. Typewritten
invitations are not used. In diplomatic circles. one must observe the forms and practices in the country
of assignment.
Invitations to informal or semi-formal luncheons, cocktails, buffet suppers, tea, etc., may be extended by
using the fold-over card (informal) or pal1ially engraved cards or by writing a short note. The use of
visiting cards for this purpose is now accepted, but it should be limited as much as possible. In the
diplomatic service, they should never be used even when extending an invitation to an informal
gathering. As stated before, the practice is not accepted in some countries.
Acceptance and ,regrets, sent in reply to invitations may be made by telephone or in writing, depending
on what is indicated on the invitation card. If made in writing, the form and language must be the same
as that in the invitation. A prompt reply is always expected by the hosts, preferably within 24 hours
upon receipt of invitation. It is essential for them to know in the course of the preparation just how
many of the invited will attend. On certain occasions, it would enable also the hosts to invite others if
some of those originally invited cannot come. It is the height of
rudeness not to answer invitations.
.'
POINTERS OF INVITATIONS AND RESPONSES
1. All formal invitations are worded in the third person. Corresponding acceptances and regrets are
handwritten in the same form on good white stationery.
2. On informal cards, only the very basic information of time, date, place nature party, etc., are
required
3. For officers who must entertain very often, the use of partially engraved card is recommended
as they are most practical and least expensive. These cards are appropriate for luncheons, receptions,
cocktails, dinners, etc. When using this type of card, the name of the person or couple invited, the time,
date and placed and other information are handwritten (never typewritten) in the spaces provided.
4. On formal invitations, the only accepted abbreviation are: “Mr”, and “Mrs” and “R.S.V.P.”The
time, date and hour are always spelled out on engraved invitations or when filing out a partially
engraved card.
5. It is correct to extend even formal invitations by telephone. But these are confirmed by the
issuance of a formal card on which is written “ to remind “ or “ par memoir.” Further acknowledgement
of such card is not required.
6. The phrase “ honor of the company" is much better form than "pleasure of the company” when
extending invitations to high ranking government officials.
7. On formal or on visiting cards, some information need not be spelled out. For example: Thurs.
14th, 4:00-6:00" is sufficient. In France and in other countries the twenty four (24) hour system is used.
8. In France and the diplomatic communities, "R.S.V.P." is the correct form for the French phrase
”respondez”." "R. S. VP." is correct in connection with social activities outside diplomatic circle.
9. The phrase "In honor of…………………………………………….." or "To meet… " is usually written at
the top of the card.
The first one is more correct persons in high government and diplomatic positions. The phrase "To
meet” is usually more appropriate for new arrivals at a certain post or officials in rank and position of
the honoree is also stated.
10. On a completely engraved invitation, the phrase "In honor of…………" follows the word
describing the occasion. For example:”………………………..request the pleasure of your company at a
reception in honor of… ”
11. An invitation with an "R.S.V.P." must be answered either by telephone
or in writing. If the "R.S.Y.P." indicates a telephone number, the invitation may be answered by
telephone, otherwise in writing. The written answer to an invitation must always be in the third person
and in the same form as the invitation itself. If the acceptance is to be made to another location either
by telephone or in writing, the exact address or telephone number be indicated clearly under the "R.S.
Y.P."
12. When appropriate, the position of the one attending to the acceptances and regrets like "social
secretary" or "aide-de-camp" indicated below the "R. S. Y.P." In the absence of this, reply to an invitation
is addressed to the host or hostess.
13. Black ink is most preferable when writing out a formal invitation or when filling in the spaces on
a partially engraved invitation. The same is true for acceptances and regrets. Fancy colored inks, like
green and red, are never used.
14. The appropriate attire or uniform should be indicated at the lower right hand corner of the
invitation. For example: "Service Dress, White" "Dress, Gray," "Black, Tie," "Informal,"' "Barong Tagalog,"
etc.
15. The address of the envelope must be handwritten. Abbreviations are not normally used. A
return address should not be written. Extra care should be taken to insure the correct spelling of names,
and exact titles of persons invited. The civil status and titles of all persons invited should always be
verified.
16. Letters of thanks for invitations must also be handwritten. A typewritten letter is at once stiff
and cold; a handwritten one, warm and friendly.
17. It is correct to extend invitations by wire. In this case, acceptance or regrets may also be sent by
wire.
MISCELLANEOUS
1. When entertaining in someone's honor, it is customary to offer him the choice of the date and
to consult persons close to him concerning the guest list and party details. It is also helpful to know the
honoree's particular likes and dislikes.
2. Formal invitations must be sent about two weeks in advance. Others may be sent about a week
to ten days in advance, depending upon the degree of the preparation necessary and the size of the
gathering expected.
3. When it is desirable to control the entrance of guests, particularly in large gathering admittance
cards may be enclosed with the invitation. The instruction “please present at the door" or "please
present" must be indicated on this card. In all cases it is best to carry the invitations for the particular
occasion.
4. It is always courteous to explain one's inability to accept an invitation. One should doubt the
sincerity of the party extending the invitation.
5. "It is more in good taste to postpone than to cancel an invitation,
How
ever, when invitation have to be recalled due to unavoidable circumstances, like the
death of the President or of an important government oft1cial, the invited guests must be notified
immediately, briefly stating the reasons for the cancellation. If made in writing, the form may be printed
to save time.
6. Once transmitted the acceptance to an invitation may not be withdrawn for some flimsy reason.
Such an action is proper only on account of sudden illness, official absence from the town or city where
the party is to be held, or the recent
death of close relatives. It is understood that oft1cial duties take priority over social
engagement.
7. If one already accepted an invitation to a party on a certain date, he must not accept another
one to be held on the same date unless he is absolutely sure he would be able to attend both,
Conditions of traffic, distance, and weather may govern in this case. The first acceptance must prevail
even if a later invitation to a party on the same day is considered more important.
8. In the police service, an officer and his wife must take ,active part in social activities of the
organization. It is also their duty to accept invitations from outside the organization, particularly those
extended in consideration of the husband's rank and position in the PNP. The wife's obligation to attend
is as much as the husband’s.
9. When an officer is absent from station, the wife is expected to continue to fulfill social
obligations as far as practicable.
10. When an officer is abroad as an official guest of a foreign government he should never decline
invitations from his hosts for any reason other than illness. It is understood that acceptance of an official
invitations to spend some time in the foreign country carries with it the obligation to be present in all
activities, official and social, connected with the visit One should never allow matters of personal
convenience to interfere with the agreed itinerary.
11. The honoree in a party should arrive about five minutes before the appointed time. Thus, if a
reception is being held in one's honor during the hours from 6:00 p.m. to 8:00 p.m., he should arrive
around 5:55 p.m. It is most inconsiderable for one being honored, to keep the hosts and guests waiting.
12. The hosts must see to it that everything is set at about ten minutes before the appointed time.
They should also be ready to receive guests at that time.
13. It is never proper for an officer to send someone else to attend a party to which he was
originally invited.
14. It is wise not to invite persons whose precedence is still doubtful and may be in conflict with
those of important guests. It is also important to consider the compatibility and pm1icular interests of a
given group of guests. This would require some knowledge of "personalities.:
15. Invitations must be checked against the guest list before they are mailed or delivered by
messenger. An omission would certainly mean embarrassment on the part of the hosts.
16. In private life, replies to invitations are addressed to the hostess only. It is assumed that the
woman in the family normally attends to this detail.
17. When attending socials in a foreign country, an officer wears the PNP uniform equivalent to the
one indicated on the invitation card. The advice of the PNP Attache should be sought on this matter.
18. An invitation by the President of the Philippine Republic is a "must" and supersedes all other
social engagements. This is the only situation which allows withdrawal of acceptance to a party on the
same date. A note of explanation, or a telephone call, would be necessary to withdraw from the other
engagement. Likewise, when in a foreign country, an invitation from the Head of state is in the same
category.
19. If one will be out of town for a considerable length of time, or would be unable to accept
invitations during a certain period, the practical thing to do is to give appropriate instructions to
somebody in the office and at home to open all invitations. to parties that will take place after the
expected return to station may be withheld, and hosts notified accordingly. If time allows, invitations
may be forwarded.
SECTION V
CORRESPONDENCE
The quality of the letter that person write revealhis appearance, taste, and personality. It is therefore,
important that letters should be so written as to create an effective and favorable impression, To that
end, the principles of effective letter writing should be in making correspondence.
PERSONAL, SOCIAL AND BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE
A letter has five parts, namely, the heading, which includes the address, and date: the salutation which is
the opening greeting; the body of the letter, which is the subject or main content of the letter; the
complimentary close, which is the "fare well” and the signature. The proper forms for these parts are
discussed below
1. Heading
This includes the address and date and is written at the upper right hand side of the page An upper
margin of one inch and a right hand margin of three-quarters of an inch should be allowed.
Example: 08 Jose Abad Santos Street Kiblawan, Davao Sur

July 04, 1994
It should be noted that the name of the street, the city or province, and the month are written in full.
There is no period at the end of the line. Punctuation's are used only for clearness in separating the
month from the year, the district from the city, from the province. These are observed for politeness. In
a letter to a friend, the address may be omitted and only the day or date is given.
2. The Salutation
This is placed at the left and should be about one-half below the inside add. ns, if there is one;
otherwise, two spaces below the heading. A colon is used after a salutation in a business letter.
a. Personal or Socia! Salutation: EXAMPLE: My Dear Miss Barreto,
Dear Bernard, Dear Mr. Arroyo,
The expression "My Dear Miss Barreto" is more formal than the expression "Dear Miss Barreto"
b. Business Salutations:
EXAMPLES: Dear Sir:
Gentlemen:
Dear Madam:
NOTE: Never substitute "Mesdames" for "Madam."
3. The Body
This contains the main substance of the letter. It is best to use simple expressions and to see to it that
the letter is clear and direct. A personal letter, whatever the subject is, must express sincerity
throughout. It is good form in a business letter to come right to the point and be brief about it.
4. The Complimentary Close
This is nothing but a graceful way of ending the letter. It is placed two or three spaces below the body of
the letter and beginning slightly to the right of the center of the page. The first word is capitalized and a
comma is placed at the end of the phrase.
Examples of closing a personal or social letter:
(1) More formal: "Sincerely"
"Sincerely yours,"
(2) To family or friends:
"Affectionately, " "Very sincerely,"
"Very sincerely yours," "Affectionately yours," "Cordially yours," "Cordially," "Devotedly," "Devotedly
yours," "Lovingly,"
b. ” Yours truly”, ”Yours very truly," "Very truly yours," "Respectfully," is used only by a subordinate to
a superior; "Faithfully yours'" is proper when a man is writing to a woman, a clergyman, or a high official.
Florid phrases such as the following should be avoided": "I beg to remain ,“ “ I remain your humble
servant," "Your humble servant kisses your feet."
5. The Signature
It should be placed two or three lines below the complimentary close and a little to the right It should
always be hand written even when the letter is typed.
a. Women’s Signature
(1.) Single woman – If it is necessary to identify herself as an unmarried woman, she writes her
signature this way: (Miss) Marilou Pilarca. On a typed letter, Marilou Pilarca signs this way: Marilou
Pilarca (handwritten)
Marilou Pilarca (typewritten)
(2) Married woman - Marilou Pilarca is married to Froilan Elopre would sign her name:
To intimates: "Marilou Elopre o. or "Malou"
To others: "Marilou Elopre" or "Marilou Pilarca Elopre" (Mrs.'Froilan Elorpe)
b. Man's Signature:
Unless his first name is used by both man and woman, such as: "Patrocinio," "Loreto," he should never
use a "Mr." in his signature. Titles like Colonel, Attorney, Dr., are not used before the signature, though a
doctor and a clergyman may use M.D. and D.D. respectively, after their names. A police officer may put
his rank and service under his name.
Thus:
Ramon Melvin Buenafe CInsp PNP
6. The Inside Address
The inside address, that is, the name and address of a person to whom you are writing. is customary in
business correspondence or a letter requiring a touch of formality. It is not used in a letter to a friend
USE OF “MISS," "MASTER," "MESSRS," ".JR" AND "ESQ"
1. "Miss"
This is the formal way to address fin unmarried woman as well as a female child. The oldest daughter.
The oldest daughter of a family - even if she is only four - is, correctly, Miss Reyes. "Miss" is also used
when one is not sure if a woman is married or single.
2. "Master"
This is traditionally used in addressing a boy under twelve.
3. "Messrs "
This is an abbreviation of the French word "Messieurs." It should be used only for letters addressed to
two brothers, not to father and son, thus: The Messrs. Juan and Pedro Reyes. If there are no other
brothers in the family, the address could be shortened to: The Messrs. Reyes.
4. “Jr.”
When used after a man's name, it means that he has the same name as his father, thus: Julio Perez, Jr.
5. “Esq”
This is an English title meaning a gentleman. It is used without the "Mr." thus: Pedro Ramos, Esq.
ADDRESSING THE ENVELOPE
The address on the envelope should contain the same information and should be written in the same
manner as the inside address, if any. If handwritten, it should be neat and legible.
SEQUENCE OF PAGES
1. Personal or Social Letters
In single sheet stationery, page one is where the letter starts, page two is the back of page one, etc On a
double (folded) sheet stationary, the following ways are preferable.
a. If the letter is short, only the first page is used, writing from top to bottom.
b I f the letter is to cover two pages, use the first page, and the page
three
(the right hand page inside the fold).
c. If the letter is to cover all the pages, the generally accepted and most logical way is to write pages
1,2,3 ,4, just as you come to them.
d. If it is desired to number the pages, it should be placed on the top.
2. Business Letters
The variation allowed in the paging and sequence of social letters is not permitted in business letters. If a
letter exceeds one page, all other pages should be numbered.
TYPEWRITTEN AND HANDWRITTEN LETTERS SOCIAL LETTERS
1. Letter of Condolence
This is one of the letters that must never be omitted. In case of death of a friend, you should condole
with the nearest kin whether you know the person or not. This can be done in various ways. The easiest
way, although rather impersonal, is using a calling card with "Deepest sympathy" written on it. Another
way is by telegram, such as "My heartfelt sympathy in your great sorrow." If written, it must be
handwritten. Exception to this rule is a letter of condolence from a business office concerning a business
acquaintance. The following, are suggested for a letter of condolence.
a. Begin with an expression of sympathy
b. Express your interest in the deceased.
c. Give a short comforting remark.
d. Make a final expression of sympathy and affection.
A letter of condolence to a friend might read:
Dear Jaime.
I was deeply grieved to hear of your mother passing today. She was such a kind, thoughtful, and
charming person who was loved by all who know her. I know what the bitter loss means to you, but it
would be of some comfort to know that all those who had the good fortune of meeting her will share
your grief Please let me know if there is anything I can do for you to make your burden a little easier:
Sincerely, Rogelio
A more formal letter to an acquaintance should read:
Dear Mr. Diaz,
Please accept my most sincere sympathy in your recent bereavement, Your wife had such a beauty
character and personality that left a lasting impression upon those who met her.
Sincerely yours, Melvin
NOTE: In whatever manner the letter is conveyed, it must be done the day you hear of the death.
2. Answering Letters of Condolence
The answer to a letter of condolence need not be prompt. It can be anytime up to six weeks after receipt
of the letter. The letter must be answered by the receiver or by a close relatives, in case of illness. It
would be handwritten on plain white paper or on black-bordered mourning paper. The answer must be
short and personal. It might read.
Dear Mrs. Savio

Thank you very much for your note of sympathy.
Very sincerely.
Panchito Severo
3.. Letter of Thanks:
This type of letter should be written when someone has shown you hospitality, sent you a gift, or done
you a favor. Though a must, it is an informal letter and can written on any kind of stationery or even
postcards when written to a close friend, if a couple has enjoyed the hospitality of another, it is the wife
who usually writes the letter of thanks. It should be handwritten, friendly and informal in tone. A typical
letter of thanks might read:
a. For a weekend visit
EXAMPLE:
Dear Delia,
Pete and I had such a lovely weekend with you and Joe in your new mountain house. We enjoyed the
scenery, air, food, and above all your delightful company.
Thanks again for everything.
Affectionately,
Ramona
b. For gifts
Any gift received should be acknowledged with a thank you note as soon as possible. An exception to
this is a gift which you received directly from the giver and for which you gave your thanks on the spot.
The letter may be written on It foldover card.
EXAMPLE:
Dear Nimfa,
Thank you so much for the lovely dress. It is just the material, color, and print that I need for the coming
Jaycee outing. It was so kind of you to remember me on my birthday. Thanks again
Love,
Gigi
c. For wedding gifts
This letter should be written promptly within two or three weeks at the most. The bride does the
writing. The letter should be written as to include the groom.
EXAMPLE:
Dear Mr. Romero,

Romy and I were overjoyed with the beautiful silver tray you sent us. It is such a lovely one that we have
given it a prominent place in our display of wedding gifts. It matches perfectly with the coffee set we
received. Tommy joins me in sending you our warmest thanks.
Affectionately yours, Amor
NOTE: A study should be made on how a bride signs a thank-you letter for a gift sent by a guest invited
by the parents.
4. Letter of Congratulations:
Traditionally and correctly this type of letter is handwritten. Letters of congratulations may be sent to a
friend on such occasions as: graduation, promotion, birth of child, engagement, wedding, etc. In an
engagement or a wedding, you should congratulate the man and wish the girl happiness.
EXAMPLE
Dear Pons,
I have just read in the PNP Journal of your well-deserved promotion to Senior inspector: Malou joins me
in extending sincere congratulations and wishes for the best in everything.
Sincerely Froy
5. Letter of Social Introduction
The current trend which is gaining wide acceptance is toward the more informal way of introducing
scattered friends.
EXAMPLE
Dear Choleng and Dodong,
Sol and Jorge de los Santos , very good friends of ours from Lucena, Quezon will be in Taipei during the
first week of May. They will stay at the Grand Hotel. I have told them about your assignment in Taipei
and they would be happy to meet you during their stay there. If you could have spare time, look them
up in the hotel. I know you will like them as they are both your age and are fond of outdoor life.
Affectionately, Jona
BUSINESS LETTERS
A business letter should be simple, brief, and to the point. It may be handwritten or typewritten. In the
former, efforts should be exerted to make the handwriting legible in order to avoid misunderstandings.
1. Ordering from a store
EXAMPLE
54 Rizal Street
Luzon Art Lighting 25 Mabini Street Manila
Dear Sir:
Please send me via PAL at the above address the following articles listed in your recent brochure:
One (1) pi candle holders 2xVX… P 50.00
Two (2) Lamp Shade 6 BX Blue 80.00
P 130.00
Enclosed is my check for the amount of P130.00. I shall appreciate your giving this order your prompt
attention.
Very truly yours,
Simon Bolivar
2. Letter of reference fir Domestics:
EXAMPLE:
1640 Milagros Street Sta. Cruz, Manila August 27 1995
Cecile Librero has been working for us a maid for two years. She has been cheerful, reliable, honest and
neat in appearance. She has been especially kind to my children and has been of much help to them
especially in their homework. It is with deep regret that we are terminating her services due to our
department for foreign assignment.
Daisy Madrid
NOTE: No salutation. “To whom It May Concern” is considered poor form. EXAMPLE:
65 Bonifacio Street Lipa, Batangas February 9, 1995
The Manager Hotel Nikko Manila
Dear Sir,
Please reserve a double room, air-conditioned, with two beds, a private bath for me and for my wife for
the period 1-7 March 1995. We would prefer to be in the third floor with a view of Manila bay. Please
confirm the reservation to the above address.
Yours very truly, Victor Wanchakan
STATIONERY
Just as a person’s clothes and general appearances create a first impression so does the stationery that
he uses in his correspondence. In order to be in good taste, the paper should be neither too plain nor
too ornate.
1. Women’s Stationery
For every correspondence

permissible
(1) It may either be a single or double sheet.
(2) The edges should be machined out, not deckled.
(3) The color should be white, although gray, ivory light blue are
(4) The standard size is 5-1/2x6-3/4 inches
(5) It may be printed or engraved with a monogram, name, with or without address.
(6) The envelope should be the standard design and should
match the paper.
2. Men's Stationery
a. It should be a single sheet, 7 or 8x 1 0 inches.
b. White, gray, blue are the most suitable colors for men.
c. It may be printed or engraved with his monogram or his name; with or without his address
d. The: edges should be machined cut and the envelope should match the paper
DPLOMATIC CORRESPONDENCE
Officers assigned abroad as Police attaches or as members of panels in international conferences may
have occasion to handle diplomatic correspondence which is a class all by itself Part is intended to
acquaint officers with the common form of diplomatic correspondence, Below are explanations of some
terms:
Note Diplomatique
A formal communication between tow states and is signed by the representatives of the states
concerned.
Note collective
A formal note by two or more states addressed to one or more states on a subject of mutual interest. It
is signed by the representatives of the sending states.
Note Circular
These are identical notes in the third person from the foreign office to the chiefs of mission, or by a chief
of mission to his counterparts. It is initiated by the sender on the lower right hand corner.
Note Verbal
An unsigned communication which may be used instead of a signed note. It is written in the third
person, without address and signature, but is initiated on the lower right hand corner. It is also sealed.
EXAMPLE:
The Ambassador of the Philippines presents his compliments to his Excellency, the Minister of Foreign
Affairs, and has the honor to inform his Excellency that…………………………..
The Ambassador of the Philippines avails himself of the opportunity and reiterates to his Excellency the
assurance of his highest consideration
Taipei, March 3, 1995.
Memorandum
A written statement on any subject. It is similar to the note except that is does not begin and end with
the formal of courtesy.
EXAMPLE:
the Philippines believes that the legitimate claims of Filipino World War II veterans
Washington D.C. April 20, 1994
Aide Memoire
An informal summary of a conversation or interview between a foreign minister or his assistant and a
diplomat envoy or his representatives. It is not signed nor sealed, but is initiated at the lower right hand
corner.
Pro Memoria
A formal record of a subject discussed. It differs from an aide memoire in that the letter is an informal
summary of a conversation or interview. It s initiated at the lower right hand corner y the responsible
officer.
Instruction and Dispatches
Correspondence between the Home Office, diplomatic and consular officers abroad are classified into
instructions and dispatches. Instruction are communications from the Home Office to diplomatic
consular office abroad; dispatches are communications from diplomatic and consular officers abroad to
the home office.
EXAMPLES OF INSTRUCTIONS:
LETTERHEAD
UNRESTRICTED
I n reply, please address The Secretary of Foreign Affairs
and refer to
File No. Sir:
.. ........................................................................................................
. .........................................................................................................
................................................................................................................
Very truly yours, Secretary of Foreign Affairs
The honorable
The Ambassador of/he Philippines Bangkok
.......................................................................................................................
. ...........................................................................................................................
.. .......................................................................................................................
EXAMPLE OF DISPATCH
EMBASSY OF THE PHILIPPINES
UNRESTRICTED No. 25
July l81995 Taipei
Subject.. ................................................................................................................
The Honorable
The Secretary of Foreign Affairs Manila, Philippines
Sir:
..............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
…………………………………………………………………………….............
Very truly yours, Signature of the Ambassador
SOME COMMON DIPLOMATIC TERMS
The Pouch
Written reports and dispatches from a Chief of Mission for transmittal to his government are placed in a
mailbag exclusively used by the mission. In our foreign service, the mailbag is called the diplomatic
pouch. The British call it "The bag"; the French, "In valise." The pouch is inviolable, some countries
employ special couriers to carry the pouch; in our foreign service, it is generally sent through the
commercial airlines.
Extra Territory and Capitulation 's
Special privileges and immunities enjoyed by nationals of our country residing in another by operation of
certain treaties. These treaties were
called "capitulation's" and were imposed by the great powers on certain non- Christian countries.
Among the privileges and immunities were: Exemption from local taxation and exemption from
jurisdiction of local courts.
Assylum
A generally accepted practice by which a political refugee in another is not deported back to his own
country. another form of asylum which is called "bast" is practiced in some countries notably in Iran. By
"bast", a big group of politicians, their families and followers may take refuge in an Embassy or Legation
to avoid whatever harm or injury that master may want to inflict on them.
Diplomatic Privileges
Privileges and immunities accorded chiefs of missions, their staffs, and members of their families among
the privileges and immunities are: inviolability of person and domicile; exemption from local taxation;
exemption from local court jurisdiction. These are usually granted on reciprocal basis.
Attaches
Attaches Members of the staff' of a diplomatic mission or consular office who are attached thereat for
specialized service. In our foreign service there are two types of attache viz: civil and military. Examples
of the former case: Commercial Attache,
Cultural attache, Press attache.
Corps Diplomatique
Includes all the diplomatic staffs and attaches of the various diplomatic missions in any capital. Consuls
are generally not considered part of the corps. the senior chief of mission is called the "doyen" or "den
of the corps."
Safe Conduct
Permission granted to individuals to pass without hindrance through the territory of a country which is
at war with his own country.
SECTION VI SOCIALS
Socials take a very wide variety of forms, ranging from afternoon tea or cocktails to a formal dinner or
reception. The main differences is the atmosphere of the occasion. The host can suit the type to the kind
of guests he intends to invite or to the occasion he wishes to celebrate or commemorate. The normal
social affairs are discussed below.
Cocktails
1. Object or Purpose
Cocktails are tendered to introduce an official like a Military/Police Attache, a passing official like a PNP
Officer, a friend, or any person. Sometimes cocktails are for a get-together or in reciprocation of
previous cocktail ,invitation.
2. Time Given
Cocktails are normally given from 1800 to 2000 Hours. However, the time varies in different countries.
3. Requirements
a. Invitations
Normal informal invitations are issued with or without RSVP's or pour memoirs. The practice in the
United states and Europe is to carry the RSVP's in the invitations while in other countries like Thailand
and Taiwan, cocktail invitations normally do not carry the RSVP's.
b. Drinks
1) In the United States and other countries, Scotch and bourbon whisky with water or soda are
served, Mixed drinks like martinis, tom collins, gimlet, manhattan, gin and rum cocktails are also served.
2) In European countries, Aperitifs or champagne are served. Mixed or concocted drinks arc not
usually served.
3) Fruit juices must also be available for persons who cannot

take alcohol
c. Canapes
Canapes appetizers are usually served during cocktail parties. They may be nuts, potato chips, pickles,
small frankfurters, caviar or shrimps. In the Philippines, they may be "dilis", chuns of "tapa", barbecued
pork or meat, fried lumpia “,or clams.They can be elaborate as turkey or roost beef sandwiches. In
American cocktails the guests usually make their own sandwiches out of ingredients already available on
the table. In Europe, sweet, pastries, petit fours and ice cream are served.
4. Attire
Gentleman usually wear business suits or barong tagalog. For women, cocktail-dress or any less formal
attire may be worn although nothing will preclude them from wearing “ternos.” The uniform is not
usually worn unless the occasion demands it, In is so indicated in the invitation.
5. Duties of the Host and hostess
a. The host and the hostess mayor may not form a reception line. They should be ready to meet
their guests as they come in at all time.
b. They should see to it that no guest is left alone to himself.
c. They must insure everybody has a drink and that the canapes are served around. If a table for
canapes is provided, they must insure that all guests have access to it.
6. Duties of the Guest
a. The guest must greet the hosts, and the honoree if there is one, upon arrival.
b. He must circulate and greet as many quests as is practicable, In a small- sized party, he must
meet or greet everybody.
c. He should keep or have a ready subject of conversation.
d. Upon departure, the guest must not forget to thank and bid to the hosts, and the honoree if
there is one.
Formal Dinner
A formal dinner has the same purpose as a cocktail party except that it is done in a more serious or
formal atmosphere.
2. Time Given
In most European countries and in the United States, a formal dinner is tendered between 2000 and
2030 Hours. In Asian countries, it is customarily given between 1900 and 2000 Hours.
3. Requirements
a. Invitations
Invitations are issued with RSVP's.
b. What to Serve
A well-balanced menu with a desse11 to match is served.
Appropriate . wines are normally served.
4. Attire
The attire is usually stated in the invitation. If the nature is not mentioned, the accepted formal wear in
the locality is worn. In foreign countries, it is always safe to find. In foreign countries, it is always safe to
find out the most acceptable attire for occasions of this nature. In the locality, at least a coat and tie with
white shirt, or barong tagalog is worn. The barong tagalog when worn as a formal attire should be pena
or jusi in natural colors, and goes with black tuxedo pants, suspenders, linen undershirts with half
sleeves, black dresses studs, and black cuff links,
5. Duties the hosts
a .The hosts greet the guests as they come. It is good to say something pleasant to each guest.
b. If a guest is now known, the hosts should present him or her to other guest so that she
may not be left alone.
c. The hosts must inform the guests of the seating arrangement.
d. The host s must show each of the guests equal and impartial attention.
e. The hosts must keep the conversation going.
f. The hosts should accompany the guests to the door upon departure.
6. Duties of the Guest
a. The guest must come on time.
b. The guest must greet the hosts and person being honored, if any. In greeting, lady companion
precedes the gentlemen.
c. The guests and their dinner companions must know the seating arrangements.
d The guest s should not forget to thank and bid good-bye to the hosts, and to the honoree, if
there is any.
e. The honoree, if there is one, sends t10wers before, during or after the occasion. It is good form
for the other guests to express their thanks.
Informal Dinner
An informal dinner has the same object or purpose as a formal but is held in a more relaxed
atmosphere.
2. Time given
In Europe (France), an informal dinner is tendered between 2000 and 2030 Hours. In the United States
and the Asian countries it is customarily given between 1900 and 2000 Hours.
3. Requirements
a. Invitations
Invitations for an informal dinner may be made by telephone, telegraph, note, informal fold-over car, or
through a visiting card. Telephone invitations should always be confirmed.
b. What to Serve
A well-balanced menu with a dessert to match is served.
Appropriate wines are normally served.

4. Attire
Business suits or their equivalents are used, unless prescribed in
the invitation.
5. Duties of the Hosts
A reception line is usually formed during a reception. It is the duty of the hosts to be at the receiving line
on time.
6. Duties of the Guests.
It is the duty of the guest to pass the reception line.
Wines
The Philippines no\ being a wine country, the appreciation for the French real vintage wines is not keen.
The need for wine here is not as strong as those in cold countries, However, in spite of the fact that in
the Philippines, the etiquette on its proper service is a must for the well cultivated person. There are a
few simple rules easy to remember to prevent embarrassment.
In America, the scotch or bourbon with soda water is a popular drink. In formal gathering. the martini,
manhattan, or old fashioned are often ordered. Except in very formal gatherings. Americans are fond of
serving wines during the meals the ways European do. In France, the service of the wine is just a part of
the correct service of the meal on all occasions.
Prior to Meals
Aperitifs are served. Europeans usually serve vemouths, dubbonet, port or similar wines. Americans
usually serve scotch or bourbon with soda or water, martini, old fashioned and similar mixtures.
Europeans are not fond of concocting mixtures.
During Meals
1. White wines (chilled or cooled) are served with fish or similar seafood's, or during seafood
cocktails.
2. Red wines (room temperature) are served with meals, fowls, or similar dishes. A special kind of
purple wine is served with the cheese at the end of the meal with cheese wine.
3. Champagne is usually served with dessert. (Demisic).It can, however, be served throughout the
meal usually dry (brut) in place of both wine or red wine.
After Meals
Liqueurs are served after meals usually with coffee. It is never served at any other time. In general, one
is not obliged to serve all the above. A fine good simple wine, usually red, can suffice. As it has
previously been stated, the elaboration of the service depends on the country where an officer may find
himself
SECTION VII
RANK AND PRECEDENCE

In the early times official and social functions were often marred by squabbles, in some cases ending in
fatalities among officials and dignitaries each trying to claim precedence over the other. Conflicts over
rank and precedence were especially rampant among diplomatic representatives in various courts in
Europe during the period of from emergence of nation-states. In order, therefore, to avoid untoward
incidents resulting from improper treatment of rank and honors, rules of precedence have been
adopted to cover the situations in which officials and dignitaries may be grouped together in official and
social functions.
Precedence of Officials in the Philippines-although no law or executive order has established the order
of precedence in the Philippines, in practice the following order prevails:
The President
The Vice President
Former Presidents of the Philippines The President of the Senate
Speaker of the House of Representatives Chief Justice of the Supreme Court
"Foreign Ambassadors Extraordinary and Plenipotentiary Members of the Cabinet who are Department
Heads Foreign Affairs Secretary
Secretary of Finance
The Secretary of the Interior and Local Government The Secretary of National Defense
The Secretary of Public Works & Highways
The Secretary of Agriculture & Natural Resources The Secretary of Education, Culture & Sports The
Secretary of Labor & Employment
The Secretary of Health
The Secretary of Trade and Industry The Executive Secretary
The Secretary of Technology
The. Secretary of Social Welfare and Services The Secretary of Budget and Management
Foreign Envoys Extraordinary & Ministers Plenipotentiary Officials with Cabinet rank
The Commission on Immigration
The Chairman, National Economic Council The .Press Secretary

The Commissioner on Audit
Members of the Senate (by length of Service)
Members of the House of Representatives (by length of Service) Associate Justices of the Supreme
Court
The Commissioners on Elections .
Members of the Council of State (not cabinet members)
Acting Heads of Departments & former Vice Presidents of the Philippines The Undersecretary of
Foreign Affairs
Ambassadors of the Philippines
Undersecretaries of Departments including the Assistant Executive Secretaries
The Governor of the Central Bank
Principal Officers of the Department of Foreign Affairs
Envoys Extraordinary and Ministers Plenipotentiary of the Philippines: Foreign Charges' d' Aftaires en
pied
Foreign Charges' d'Affaires ad in
The Mayor of Manila, the Presiding Justice of the Court of Appeals, The President of the University of
the Philippines,
The Chief of Staff, AFP, The Chief, PNP, Commissioners and officials with the rank of Undersecretary
Heads of permanent United Nations Agencies in the Philippines with the rank of Director
The Provincial Governors
The Vice Chief of Staff, AFP and Deputy Chiefs, PNP
Foreign Ministers - Counselors, Counselors of embassies and legations,
Consuls-Generals, Foreign Military Attaches with the rank of Brigadier General or the equivalent rank in
the AFP, and PNP and other
officers of equivalent rank Mayor of Chartered Cities
Directors of Bureaus and Chiefs of Offices
Presidents, Chairman & Managers of Government Corporations
Second Secretaries & Consuls of Foreign Embassies and legations, foreign

Assistant Police Attahces with the rank of Major or Captain, and otherss of equivalent rank in the PNP,
Subordinate officials
The above order of the precedence which includes civil and military and diplomatic representatives
would vary under certain situations. For instance, in the absence of the President, Vice President, the
Senate President, the Speaker of the House
of Representatives, and the Chiefs of the Supreme Court, the Secretary of Foreign Affairs who is the
senior member of the Cabinet, takes over in which case he outranks foreign ambassador. Again, in a
function wherein the host is a foreigner, Filipino officials present therein precede their foreign
counterparts. Thus, if Mr Tong, a Chinese residing in Manila invites the Chief PNP to a party in his house,
the Chief PNP precedes the Chinese Chiefs of Police precedes the Filipino people.
The guest of 01 honor precedes all other guests. Usually no person of a
higher
Rank than the guest of honor is invited to the same function. Should it become necessary to invite such
a person of a higher rank, h should be properly informed Acceptance on his part after being so informed
means that he has no objection to being outranked by a guest of honor.
Filipino custom requires that a Filipino host give way to the President of the Philippines. The latter
occupies the seat normally occupied by the host. The host and his wife sit to left and right respectively of
the President, or the next positions of honor depending on the seating arrangement.
Diplomatic representatives precede each other in accordance with regulations adopted at the Congress
of Vienna in 1815 and the Congress of Aix- Ia-Chapelle 111 1818. In the order of rank, diplomatic
representatives are divided into the followil1p' classes.
1. Ambassadors. Legates-Papal ambassadors extraordinary (always a cardinal) charged with a

special mission. Nuncios (ordinary papal ambassadors who are never cardinals
2 Envoys and ministers plenipotentiary.
3 Ministers resident, accredited to the foreign ministers.
4 Charges' d' Affairs, accredited to the foreign ministers.

The above-mentioned diplomatic representatives together with their staffs constitute the Diplomatic
Corps of which the head is called the Doyen or Dean. In many countries, the papal representative is the
dean of the diplomatic corps regardless of his date of accreditation, and sometimes regardless of his
rank. In some countries, the dean is the diplomat with the rank. In some countries, the
dean is the accreditation. The title of Dean or Doyen is only for ceremonial purposes. A5 in the
Philippines, no other prerogatives go with that title.
Consular officers, who under international laws are not diplomatic representatives, do not have a right
to precedence except among themselves and in their home governments. They are classified in the
order of rank as; consuls-general,
c6nsuls or vice-consuls. They precede each other according to rank and deities of exequatur which is a
written official recognition and authority of a consular officer issued by the government to which he is
accredited. There is also a dean of the Consular Corps, a position which is, as in the case of the Dean of
the Diplomatic Corps, for ceremonial purposes only.
Philippine diplomatic missions abroad observe the following order of precedence: 1.. The Chief of
Mission or in his absence the Charges ' d' Affaires.
2. The Counselor or Senior Secretary where there is no counselor.
3. The Police Attache who ranks with but after the foreign affairs officer of the same rank as that of
the assimilated rank of the assistant attached.
4. Commercial and other attaches with assimilated ranks as foreign affairs officers take precedence
with but after Police Attaches or Assistant Police Attaches of the same rank as theirs.
5. Attaches without assimilated ranks as foreign affairs officers follow foreign affairs officers of any
class, unless otherwise specified by the Department of Foreign Affairs.
Precedence among wives of officials follows that of their husbands. There are certain exceptions to this
rule. For instance, Mrs. Reyes, wife of Senator Reyes, is' requested by the President of the Philippines to
be the hostess in an affair in Malacanang in the absence of the First Lady. Mrs. Reyes, then will precede
all the ladies present in the affair. In case the official is a lady, the husband does not follow the order of
precedence of his wife. Thus, the' husband of a Filipino lady ambassador ranks after the last accredited
minister. A safe rule to follow in the case of lady official precedes according to the normal order of
precedence; If spouses are included, the lady official ranks after the wife of the official immediately
preceding her. As for her husband, it is sometimes easier for him to feign diplomatic illness in order to
avoid awkward situation.
The ranks or grades of officers of the Philippine National Police follow more or less the common pattern
of officers' ranks which has evolved in the armed forces of the world’s major military/police powers.
The different ranks or grades of officers can be divided into the following categories:
1. General or Flag Officers. This category includes all Directors or Chief , Superintendents.
2. Field Officers. The US Navy and the British services call this category “ senior officers”. which
includes C, Supt., Sr. Supt., Supt., C Insp and their equivalents..
3. Company Officers. This group includes all junior officers in the ranks of Sr Insp, and Insp.
4. Cadets. This grade is below the normal officer grades. Individuals holding, this rank enjoy officer
status but do not have full officer responsibility.
Based on regulations and traditions of tile service, the following rules or precedence in the PNP are
being followed:
1. The Chief PNP, precedes all officers of the PNP.
2. The DCA follows the DCO.
3 Retired Chief: PNP follows the incumbent DCA.. Where there are more one retired Chiefs, PNP, they
precede each other according to the date of retirement irrespective of rank.
4. TCDS follows the DCO.
5. Directorial Staff Follows the TCDS.
6. Directorial Staff by rank promotion seniority and other assignment of the latter.
7. Other officers not mentioned above shall observe rank seniority protocol, irrespective of
assignments.
SECTION VIII TABLE ETIQUETTE
FORMAL
Duty of the Host
The host shall provide a plan of good seating arrangement (see Chapter on Seating Arrangement) and
shall see that minimum requirements for dinner service are observed. The following guides are useful:
1. 1, service plate per person per course, (In some dinners, only 1 service plate may suffice for the
entire course which are served all at once.)
1 Salad Plate 1 Soup Plate

NOTE: In a strictly form,1 dinner, bread if served, is not served on a bread plate but laid on the table.
2. Silver
Soup Spoon Service Fork
Fish fork (if fish is served) Oyster Fork
Cocktail Fork (if hors d'oeuvre is served or seafood cocktails) Dessert Spoon
Service Knife Butter Knife Salad Knife
Coffee or Tea Spoon
“Porte couteau" (Knife support European Style)
3. Napkin (linen preferred, folded into various artistic forms).
4. Nice Table Cloth (preferably linen white to match napkins).
5. Center piece to rhyme with candles. Most hosts prefer to light candles. (, 6. Dessert
Plate
7. Finger Bowl on fruit plate.
8. Glasses (see Appendix D-3),
9. Coffee cup and saucer (in Europe demi-tasse).
10. Liquor Glass and Wine Glasses.
NOTE: Coffee may be served at the table or in the office room with the liquors. Some find it an ordeal to
go through a formal dinner. A well prepared attractive menu should be planned to make the dinner
worthwhile. Formal attire is worn in Europe and the US. Dark suits are permissible depending on the
atmosphere. Bread is on the left. Salad is on the right.
Instruct servers to serve wife or honoree first and then other ladies in the order of seating protocol.
Serve on the left and reverse the plate on the right.
The hostess normally has a little bell to call the servers.
When wine is served, a little is poured on the host's glass for tasting and approval. This is an old
European custom. Wine glasses are not lifted from the table but poured in place.
An informal is similar to a formal dinner but less rigid. It may be buffet style where visitors serve
themselves and settle in table (Not practiced in Europe).
Duty of Guests
Observed correct table manners.
MANNERS AT THE TABLE
Controversial topics should be avoided at the dinner table. Talking about accidents, illness, scandals and
unaesthetic things should be avoided. Conversation and laughter should always be toned down, but the
hostess must encourage these all around. Well-bred men and women talk pleasantly with those who
seem to be disengaged at any particular moment.
The left hand may be used to convey food with the fork if one has just Gut a piece of meat or fish with
the knife. The continental fashion is accepted everywhere. It is, of course, entirely correct to use the
right hand all the time for conveying food. A combination of the two system is currently acceptable.
In a small sit down dinner, II is a good form to wait for the host to be served, or wait the host to begin
It is ill-mannered for a guest to go to the table with a lighted cigarette in his hand. Smoking is permitted
only on the living room or library, and after the conclusion of the meal.
Wiping the silver and plates with the napkin indicates poor manners. Like wise, leaving the spoon in the
cup, or looking for toothpicks, show lack of breeding.
One must make sure his mouth is empty and his lips wiped clean before taking any beverage. This will
keep the rim of glasses and cups free from ugly marks.
Napkins are placed on the lap by individual guests after the hostess has taken hers. Dinner napkins are
folded once (in half), while others are spread out. At the end of the meal, the napkin must be laid to the
left of the plate. No attempt need be made to let it look neat, it should never be refolded.
The soups spoon is filled from one side in an outwardly direction, that is, away from the one eating.
Convey to the mouth, the same side of the spoon, never from the end tip of the spoon. Again, one can
easily tell breeding in a person by just observing the manner he or she takes soup.
One should never stir up food or mix different items into the heap on the plate. Gravy, for example, is
used only for specific dishes and should not be spread all over.
Chewing must be done quietly with the mouth closed.
Foreign particles taken with the food (stone or gravel) are removed with the thumb and forefinger.
Same thing is done with the fish bones and other small bones.
Wet spoons should never be used to take sugar. The butter knife is for butter only, the salad fork, for the
salad only. The hostess sees to it that silverware is adequate for every purpose. .,
No guest should deliberately ask for second helpings, but make sure there is company. The experienced
hostess immediately places an individual guest at ease by providing the company herself.
It is but proper for a guest to take a little of every item offered at the table. the guest's favorable
reaction to the food served is some compensation to the hostess.
Elbows must never be placed on the table while one is eating. The feet must be flat on the floor.
When one has finished a certain course, or the meal itself, he places the fork and the knife on the right
side of the plate. The sharp side of the knife must face inward and the fork, with the tines up, is placed
to the left of the knife.
When using a linger bowl, the fingers of one hand are dipped lightly, followed by the other hand. they
are dried on the napkin, on the lap and not on the surface of the table. In the use of the finger bowl, it is
normally served with the fruit plate.
One must be familiar with the manner of eating different kinds of cooked foods, vegetables and fruits. It
adds a great deal to one's poise to know if a certain item is to be taken with a particular type of fork,
with the fingers, with a teaspoon or with the aid of a sharp knife.
When in doubt, follow the host.
SECTION IX SEATING ARRANGEMENTS
In any official assembly or social gathering where the seating of guests is in accordance with protocol,
arrangements must be worked out well in advance to avoid confusion and embarrassment. The
gathering may be one of the following: conference, international celebration or local, seated meal;
reception of important personages in a house or in a club; a national celebration where civil and police
officials will be present; police parade and review;
graduation exercises. There are simple situations which also require the proper seating of passengers
inside a car. (See Appendix D-4).
In preparing for this type of activity, one must always bear in mind that an individual guest will surely
feel either uneasy or offended if he is not seated in the right place. The problem of seating by
precedence must then be studied in minute detail, and relative rank of guests carefully established. It
must also be remembered that the rules must be so applied in order to blend into what may be termed
as the “ happiest arrangement”. It would be difficult to have a complete set of rules in any given
situation, but available rules may be used effectively as guides. There will always be some departures.
For example, in a sit-down dinner, it may be better to considered the language spoken by certain guests
instead of rank in order to avoid the situation which some guests may not be able to converse with
anybody. Explanations are order in case of departures from normal arrangements.
It is always safe and wise to consult officials and individuals familiar with seating arrangements when
preparing for a formal gathering. Protocol officers in the Department of Foreign Affairs and in foreign
service establishments are used to these routine experience is the best guide here as the particular
composition of a group of guest always a new thing.
The problems are most difficult when officials and prominent persons from different countries are
expected to attend. In general. the hosts follow their own rules. These rules may differ from those of
other countries. Likewise, when entertaining one's home, the host must follow the normal
arrangements accepted in his country When being entertained. however, one" must be prepared for
variations in arrangements in accordance with practices in the home country of the hosts. Guests should
accept the procedures even if they are not in accordance with those they have been used to (See
Appendix D-4).
Rules for Table Seating:
1. The senior ranking guest in a party is always given the first place
of
honor. No departures from this rule is allowed even if a party is being held in another person's honor
who is of lower rank. If the hosts prefer to give the guest of honor the "number one" place at the table
for a guest, avoid if possible, inviting a person of higher rank.
2. The place of honor for a male guest is to the right of the hostess. The wife of the male guest
given the place of honor sits on the right of the host. As a general rule, the most ranking woman guest
sits on the right of the host.
3. The male guest, who is next in rank to the one given the place of honor, sits on the left of the
hostess. The woman guest corresponding to this position sits on the left of the host.
4. Men and women sit alternately, but a man and his wife should not be seated next to each other.
If this happens because of the peculiar composition of a group of guests, the wife must be seated
elsewhere even if this move would violatt: the rule on seating in accordance with rank.
5. For the orientation of guests in a seated meal, a seating diagram showing individual assignment
of seats should be posted in a convenient place. Care must be taken that no names are omitted.
6. In a large gathering where guests will be distributed in two or more tables (as in a hotel or
garden party), it is sometimes more practical to list the guests in alphabetical order indicating the table
number opposite each guest's name. Another variation of this method is to list the guest in groups
according to table numbered.
7. To facilitate pairing off at formal dinners, "take-in" cards are normally used. "Take-in" cards
inside appropriate envelopes are arranged on a silver tray near the front door in the room where
cocktails are served. The name of the gentleman is on the envelope, and the name of his lady partner on
the card inside. A small sketch of the relative location of the seat for the lady may be indicated on the
card. Instead of the "envelope and card" method of single folded card may be used with the name of the
gentleman outside and that of his partner inside.
8. It is the male guest's concern to meet his partner well before dinner time. In a small gatherings,
The host sees to it that every man knows his dinner partner. In big dinners, necessary introductions may
be made by persons close to the host, or by official aides.
9. The host gives the signal for the guests to proceed to the table. He offers his right arm to the
wife of the most ranking gentleman present. They are followed by the hostess and the ranking guests.
There is an important exception to this rule, however. When the President is present as a guest, he goes
in first with the hostess. All the other pairs proceed in the same manner.
10. Cards placed on the table show exactly the seating assignments. The name of every guest is
hand-printed in black ink on a heavy plain white card about two inches long and one and a half inches
high. The name may be printed on both sides of the card, will be made to stand on the table by itself or
with the use of suitable stands. In case only one side is printed, that side should face the guest. The flag
of a General or Admiral, seal of embassy, or personnel crest, may be embossed at the top center of this
card .Needless to say, placed cards also serve to identify one's table neighbors those sealed across.
Conversations at the table could then proceed more smoothly.
11. When dining in a restaurant, the woman should have the best view when seated. This view may
be the main part of the restaurant or a nice one seen through a picture window. A good seat, therefore,
is given to the woman. In
a party of foure, the women must be similarly seated as the place of honor is always the one with the
best view.
12. Men should always help their dinner partners take assigned seats. This is done by slight
movements of the chairs to be occupied by the dinner partners. Then men usually take their own seats
afterwards at the cue from the hostess. At the end of the meal the man stands 6rst and helps their
ladies out of their chairs.
Other Seating Arrangements:
1. In an international conference, precedence is established in accordance with the rules agreed

upon by the working committees acting for the different delegations absence of understanding to this
effect, it is the responsibility of the host government establish precedence good for the duration of the
conference. The normal procedure is to follow the alphabetical order of the official names of the
participating countries. Thus, in a conference where countries of Southeast Asia and South Asia will
participate, India would precede Indonesia, and Indonesia would precede Pakistan and the Philippines.
The members of each delegation will have seats beside and behind the Chief Delegate. Questions of
seating arrangement within a particular delegation is decided by the Chief Delegate while the
conference is in progress.
2. In big celebration where many persons of rank are expected, and when those attending may be
grouped according to their positions, it is sufficient to 'reserve seats by groups, at the middle part or the
right or left of the central platform. The arrangement will depend on the size of the gathering and the
facilities available. The rule is to treat a group of guests of equal ranks as one person, and its precedence
established in relation to other groups. Estimates of the number of persons attending per group may be
made by protocol officers with experience in past celebration. Arrangements of this nature must be
flexible and adjustments made as fast as possible to accommodate the greatest number without
violating basic rules of protocol.
3. Inside an automobile, the place of honor is at the right. If there are
three
passengers, the least ranking sits at the middle of the seat. The ranking person enters the car last in
countries where the traffic rule is to drive on the right side of the road
He gets out of the car ahead of the others. In other countries where people drive to the left, the senior
enters the car first and leaves last.
4. At the opera or theater the best seats should always be offered to the higher ranking persons. In
theater boxes and opera boxes, the place of honor is the middle part, front row. In the main floor or
balcony of a theater the best seats are those found in the middle part.
5. The guest speaker in a graduation ceremony is given the place of honor, that is, the center
position of the front row or to the right of the ranking
official present. Officials participating in the exercise should be given seats in the front row. Others are
seated in accordance with rank.
6. In staff conferences, the officer presiding sits at the head of the table. The conferees will be
seated in. accordance with their respective ranks. Departures from these arrangements may be made
for convenience in the presentation of certain materials by a conference.
7. When entertaining in one's residence, the place of honor in the living room is the right side of
the sofa. This is usually reserved for the most honored guest.
8. Inside a VIP aircraft, cel1ain seats are reserved for high officials. Passengers of lower ranks
should follow the instructions of the aircraft commander regarding seating arrangements.
APPENDICES
English-Tagalog Translation "A"
Diagram of Formation "B"
Our Flag "C"
Protocol and Social Usage
Illustrations "D"
D-l Official Calling Cards
D-2 Samples of Invitations, Acceptance, and Regret Cards
D-3 Glasses Used in Socials D-4 Seating Arrangements

APPENDIX “A”
ENGLISH - TAGALOG TRANSLATION

APPENDIX “A”
MGA UTOS HUKBO NA NAPAGTIBAY NG KAPULUNGAN
SA PAGKAKAISA
I. Pagsasanay ng Kawal na walang Sandata School of Soldiers without Arms
A. Katayuan sa Pagtinding - Position of Attention
1. Attention Humanda
2. FalI in Line Humanay
3. At close Interval, Masingsing Pagitan FalI in Line Humanay
4. Assemble Magtipon
5. As You were Manumbalik

B. Katayuan sa Pahinga Nakahinto - Rest at the Halt
1. Parade Rest Tikas Pahinga
2. Stand at Ease Tindig, paluwag
3. At Ease Paluwag
4. Rest Pahinga
5. Fall Out Tiwalag
6. Dismissed Lumansag
C. Pagharap Kung Nakahinto - Facing at the Unit
1. Right Face Harap sa Kanan, Rap
2. Left Face Harap sa Kaliwa, Rap
3. About Face Harap sa Likod, Rap
4. Left Half Face Harap sa Hating-Kaliwa
5. Right Half Face Harap sa Hating Kanan
6. Center Face Harap sa Gitna,Rap
D. Pagpugay Salute
1. Hand Salute Pugay Kamay, Na
2. Eyes Right Tingin sa Kanan, Na
E. Hakbang at Lakad- Steps and Marching

1. Count Cadence Count Bilang Hakbang, Na
2. Two Three Four Isa Dalawa Tatlo Apat
3. Forward March Pasulong, Kad
4. Squad/Platoon Halt Tilap/Pulutong Hinto
5. Mark Time March Patakda, Kad
6. Half Step MarchHating-Hakbang, Kad
7. Double time March Takbong-Hakbang, Kad
8. Time March Siglang-Hakbang, Kad
9. In Place Double Time March Sa Lunan, Takbong Hakbang, Kad
10. Right Step March Hakbang Pakanan, Kad
11. Left Step March Hakbang Pakaliwa, Kad
12. Backward March Paurong, Kad
13. Two, Three, etc ..... Isa, Dalawa, Tatlo, atbp .....
Step to the Right, March Hakbang Pakanan, Kad
14. Rear March Pabalik, Kad
15. Change Step March Palit-Hakbang, Kad
16. Route Step March Layang Hakbang, Kad
17. At Ease March Paluwag, Kad
18. Column Right March Liko sa Kanan, Kad
19. Column Left March Liko sa Kaliwa, Kad
20. Column Half Right March Liko Hating-Kanan, Kad
21. Column Half Left March Liko Hating-Kaliwa, Kad
22. Incline to the Right Pagawing Kanan, Kad
23. Incline to the Left Pagawing Kaliwa, Kad
24. Right Flank March Kanang Panig, Kad
25. Left Flank March Kaliwang Panig, Kad
26. Right Turn March or Pihit sa Kanan 0
Right Half Turn March Pihit sa Hating Kanan, Kad

27. Right Turn March or Pihit sa Kaliwa
Right Half Turn March Pihit sa Hating Kaliwa, Kad
28. Right Oblique March Hilis Pakaliwa, Kad
29. Left Oblique March Hilis Pakaliwa, Kad
30. In Place Halt Sa Lunan Hinto
31. Resume March Patuloy,Kad
32. Assembly March Magtipon,Kad
33. Squads Right (Left) March Pangkat Pakanan/ Pakaliwa Kad
34. Squads Right (Left) about PangkatPakanan/Pakaliwa, pabalik
March Kad
35. Right (Left) by Squads March Kanan/Kaliwa, Kad
II Pagsasanay ng Pulis na May Sandata School of Police with Arms
A. Pagsasanay sa Paghawak ng Sandata at Kalis Manual of Arms for the Rifle and Sword
1. Right shoulder Arms Sa Kanang Balikat,Ta
2. Left Shoulder Arms Sa Kaliwang Balikat,Ta
3. Order Arms Ibaba,Ta
4. Present Arms Itanghal ,Ta
5. Port Arms Agap,Ta
6 Inspection Arms Siyasat,Ta
7. Riffle Salute Pugay,Ta
8. Trail Arms Bitbit,Ta
9. Sling Arms Isakbat,Ta
10. Unsling Arms Libis,Ta
11. Fix Bayonet Ikabit and Talibong, Na

12. Unfix Bayonet Alisin ang Talibong,na
13. Adjust Sling Ayusin ang Sakbat,Na
14. Stack Arms Itungkod,Ta
15. Take Arms Dampot,Ta
16. Ready Draw, Sword Antabay Bunot, Kalis
17. Ready Sheath, Sword Antabay Salom,Kalis
III. MALAPITANG PAGSASANAY
1. Dress Right Dress Tunton-Kanan,Na
2. Dress Left DressTunton-Kaliwa,Na
3. At Close Interval, Masinsing Pagitan
Dress Right Dress Tunton-Kanan,Na
4. Ready Front Handa, Rap
5. Cover-up Tumakip, Na
6. Guide Right Patnubay sa Kanan
7. Guide Left Patnubay sa Kaliwa
8. Guide Center Patnubay sa Gitna
9. Don’t Anticipate the command Huwag Pangunahan ang Utos
10. As You were Manumbalik
11. Stand Fast Manatili/Walang Kilos
12. Continue the March Tuloy ang Lakad
13. Prepare the Halt Humandang Huminto
14. GuidesRight/Left Patnubay sa Kanan/Kaliwa
15. Guides on the Line Patnubay Sumahanay
16. Post Sumalunan
17. Take Interval to the Right Ibayong Dalang Pakanan/
Pakaliwa, Na
18. Assemble to the Right/ Magtipon sa Kanan/ Left March Kaliwa, Kad
19. In Column of Platoons Sunuran ng mga Pulutong
20. In Column of Squads Sunuran ng mga Tilap
21. In Line of Platoons Mga Pulutong Nakahanay
22. Leading PlatoonUnang Pulutong
23. Platoon on the Line Pulutong Sumahanay
24. Right/Left Front into Line MarchHanay Pakanan/Pakaliwa, Kad
25. On Right/ Left Into line March Pangkat-pangkat Hanay Pakanan/
26. In Two Ranks form Platoon March Dalawang Hanay,Pulutong
27. Platoon/Company Right/ Pulutong/Balangay Pakanan/ Left March Pakaliwa, Kad
28. Column of Twos, to the Right/Left Dalawang Tudling Pakaliwa/
or Right/Left by Twos March Pakanan 0 Dalawahan Mula sa
Kanan Kaliwa,Kad
29. File From the Right/Left or Sunuran Mula sa Kanan!Kaliwa Right/Left File March Isahan
mula sa Kanan/Kaliwa,Kad
30. Extend on Rear -Platoon Padalang sa Ikalawang Pulutong
31. Coy F/Sgt Tandis Balangay
32. Extend on the Right/ Padalang Kanan/
Left Platoon Kaliwang Pulutong
33. Close on Leading Platoon Lapit sa Unang Pulutong Right/Left Kaliwa/Kanan
34. Close on Leading Platoon Lapit sa unang Pulutong
35. Close on Right/Left Platoon Lapit sa Kanang/Kaliwang
Pulutong
36. Extend on Rear Platoon Padalang sa Ikalawang Pulutong
37. Extend on Right/Left Platoon Padalang sa Kanang/Kaliwang
Pulutong ,Kad
38. Close Column of Platoons Masinsing Sunuran ng mga
Pulutong
39. Close Line of Platoons Masinsing Hanay ng mga Pulutong
IV. PAGPALIT NG PAGlTAN - CHANGE INTERVAL
1. Close March Lakad Masinsin,Kad
2. Extend March Padalang,Kad
3. Take Interval March Ibayong Dalang,Kad
4. Open Ranks March Pabukang Taludtod,Kad
5. Close Ranks March Masinsing Taludtod,Kad
V. PAGBILANG NG PULIS ACCOUNTING OF MAN
1. Count Off Isahang Bilang,Na
2. Call Off Tuluyang Bilang,Na
3. Count by Twos/Threes/Count Dalawahang/Tatluhang Bilang,
Na
4. By the Number Sabay na Bilang
VI. MGA UTOS SA PATIKAS AT PAGMASID AT MGA SEREMONYA
1. First Call Unang Panawagan
2. Assembly Call Panawagan sa Pagtitipon
3. Guides on the Line Mga Patnubay Sumahanay
4. Guides Post Patnubay sa Lunan
5. Sir, The Parade is Formed Ginoo,Handa napo ang Patikas
6. Sir, The Battalion is Formed Ginoo, Handa napo ang Talupad
7. Take Your Post Sumalunan

8. Sound Off Ihudyat
9. Sir, The Troop is Ready for Ginoo,handa napo ang Tipon sa Inspection
Pagsisiyasat
10. Troop the Line Libutin ang Hanay
11. Staff Behind MeKalipunan,Sumalikod Ko
12. Receive the Report Tanggapin ang Ulat
13. Report Mag-ulat
14. All Present or Narito pong Lahat o
Accounted For Napag-alaman
15. Publish the Order Ipahayag ang Kautusan
16. Attention to Order Makinig sa Kautusan
17. Details for Today Mga Nakatalaga ngayon
18. Field Officer of the Day Pinunong Panlarangan
19. Officer of the Day or Pinunong Tagapamahala or Officer in charge Pinunong

Pangalaga
20. By Order Sa Utos ni
21. Officers, Center March Mga Pinuno, Pumagitna,Kad
22. Officers, Halt Mga Pinuno, Hinto
23. Officers, Post March Mga Pinuno,Balik Kad
24. Persons to be Decorated and All Mga Taong Pararangalan at Mga Colors ,Centers March
Watawat, Pumagitna Na
25. Colors, Reverse March Watawat,Palit-Lunan Kad
26. Sound the Retreat Ihudyat ang Pagsilong
27 Pass- in- ReviewPasa-Masd
28. Dismiss your Company Lansagin ang iyong Balangay
29. Take Charge of your Companies Pamunuan ang iyong Balangay
30. Prepare for Inspection Humanda sa Pagsisiyasat
31. Sir, this Concludes the Ceremony Ginoo, Tapos na po ang Seremonya
32. Staff, Behind Me ,March Kalupunan, Sumalikod Ko,Kad

APPENDIX “B” DIAGRAM OF FORMATION
APPENDIX “C” OUR FLAG

OUR FLAG
I pledge allegiance to the Filipino Flag and to the Republic for which it stands, one Nation under God,
indivisible, and dedicated to the ideals of justice, liberty and democracy.
The National flag represents the living country and is considered to be a living thing emblematic of the
respect and pride we have for our nation. Our flag is a precious possession. Display it proudly.
There are certain fundamental rules of Heraldry which, if understood generally, indicate the proper
method of displaying the flag. The right center arm, which is the sword arm and the point of danger, is
the place of honor. Hence, the union of the flag is the place of honor or the honor point.
The National Emblem is a symbol of our great country, our heritage and our place in the world. We owe
reverence and respect to our flag. It represents the highest ideals ofindividuallibeI1Y, justice and equal
opportunity for all.
How to Display the Flag
When flown at half-staff, the flag is first hoisted to the peak of the staff and then lowered to half staff.
Before lowering the flag for the day it is again raised to the peak and then lowered. On Memorial Day,
the flag is displayed at half-staff from sunrise until noon and at full-staff from noon until sunset.
When a number of flags are grouped and displayed from staffs, the flag of the Philippines should be in
the center or at the highest point of the group.
When it is displayed with any other flag against a wall or in the open, from crossed staffs, the flag of the
Philippines should be on the right, the flag's own right, and its' staff should be in front of the staff of the
other flag.
When carried in a procession with another flag or flags, the flag of the Philippines should be either on
the marching right, i.e., the flag's own right, or when there is a line of other flags, the flag of the
Philippines may be in front of the center of that line.
When the Flag of the Philippines is displayed in a manner other than by being flown from a staff it
should be displayed flat, whether indoors or outdoors. When displayed horizontally against a wall the
blue field should be uppermost or when displayed vertically the blue field should be the flag's own right,
i.e., the observer's left . When displayed in a window it should be the same way. The flag should never
be draped or used as decoration to replace bunting.
Improper use of Flags. Never use them for decorations. Red- White-blue striped bunting is designated
for this use When displayed over the middle of the street, as between building, the flag of the
Philippines should be suspended vertically with the blue field to the north on an east and west street
and to the east on a north and south street.
When used on speakers platform the flag should be displayed above and behind the speaker. It should
never be used to cover the speaker's table not to drape over the front of the platform. If flown from a
staff it should be on the speaker's right.
When it is displayed on the pulpit or chancel in a church, the flag of the Philippines should be flown from
a staff placed on the clergyman's right as he faces the congregation, all other flags on the pulpit or
chancel should be on his left.
However, when it is displayed on the floor of the church, level with the congregation, the position of the
flag is reversed from that above. It is placed on the right of the congregation, as it faces the pulpit or
chancel.
When used to cover a casket, the flag should be placed so that the union is at the head and the blue
field over the heart of the deceased. The flag should not be lowered into the grave. It should not be
allowed to touch the ground. The casket should be carried foot-first from the hearse to the grave.
Flag Etiquette
It is universal custom to display the flag only from sunrise to sunset on buildings and on stationary flag
staffs in the open. However, the flag may be displayed at night upon special occasions when it is desired
to produce a patriotic effect.
The Flag should be hoisted briskly and lowered ceremoniously. The f1ag should be displayed daily,
weather permitting, on or near the main administration building of every public institution. The flag
should be displayed in or near every polling place on election day and should be displayed during school
days in or near every schoolhouse.
No other flag or pennant should be placed above or if on the same level, to the right of the flag of the
Philippines except during church services conducted by the chaplains at sea, when the church pennant
may be flown above the flag during church services.
The flag should form a distinctive feature of the ceremony of unveiling a statue or monument, but it
should never be used as the covering for the statue or monument.
The f1ag, when flown at half-staff, should be first hoisted to the peak for an instant and then.1owered
to the half-staff position. The flag should be again raised to the peak before it is lowered for the day. By
"half-staff" is meant lowering the flag to one half the distance between the top and bottom of the staff.
That no disrespect should be shown to the flag of the Philippines, the flag should not be dipped to any
person or thing. Regimental colors, Provincial flags, and organization or institutional t1ags are to be
dipped as a mark of honor.
The flag should never be displayed with the blue field down save as a signal of dire distress.
The f1ag should never be carried flat or horizontally, but always aloft and free.
The f1ag should never be used as a drapery of any sort whatsoever, never festooned, drawn back, nor
up, in folds but always allowed to fall free.. Bunting of blue, white and red, always arranged with the
Blue above the white in the middle, and the red below, should be used for covering a speaker's desk,
draping the front of a platform, and for decorations in general.
During the ceremony of hoisting or lowering the flag or when the flag is passing in a parade or in a
review, all persons present should face the flag stand at attention, and salute. Those present in uniform
should render the police salute. When not in uniform men should remove the headdress with the right
hand holding it at left shoulder, the hand being over the heart. Men without hats should salute in the
same manner. Aliens should stand at attention. Women should salute by placing the right hand over the
heart. The salute to the flag in the moving column should be rendered at the moment the flag passes.
When the National Anthem is played and the flag is not displayed, all present should rise and face
toward the music. Those in uniform should salute at the first note of the anthem, retaining this position
until the last note. All others should stand at attention, men removing their headdress. When the flag is
displayed, all present should face the flag and salute.
When to Display the Flag
Private buildings and homes are to display the flag from sunrise to sunset on national and special
holidays proclaimed by the President - such as the Araw ng Kagitingan (April 9), National Flag Day (May
28), Independence Day (June 12), National Heroes Day (last Sunday of August), Bonifacio Day
(November 30) and Rizal Day (December 30).
Government offices shall display the flag everyday, from sunrise to
sunset.
How to Display the Flag
When flown from a flagpole: The blue field should be on top in time of peace, the red field on top in
time of war.
When in vertical hanging position: The blue field should be to the right when viewed (kit side of the
observer) in time of peace, and the red field should be to the right in time of war.
When flown with other flags: When used with the flag of the Armed forces or civic organizations, or that
of another nation, the Philippine flag should always be above or on the right of the other flag. When in a
parade with flags of other countries, the Philippine flag should be in the center and in front of the other
flags.
Nothing should ever cover or decorate the surface of the flag. The flag should always occupy the highest
place of honor, and shall not be placed under any picture, or below a person.
Never use the flag as a staff whip, covering for tables or curtain for
door ways.
Never display a tattered or worn flag. Dispose of it by burning so as to avoid an old flag being thrown
into the garbage.
Flag Care
..
To preserve the bright, rich colors used in the manufacture of the
Philippine flags, it is necessary that extreme care be used when flags are cleaned.
Flags may be safely cleaned by dry cleaning.
The flag should not be displayed on days when the weather is inclement. If the flag should get wet,
spread out the flag until completely dry. DQ not fold or roll up the flag when damp.
When handled with the care described above, the flag should give excellent service commensurate with
the quality of the particular brand used.
The flag, when in such condition that it is no longer a fitting emblem for display should be destroyed in a
dignified way, preferably by burning.
2
b. DON’Ts: 1) Discourtesy. 2) Ridicule or scorn any member of the community regardless of stature,
political affiliation, culture, gender, among others. 3) Engage in gossips and illegal activities. 4) Refuse
lawful and just assistance to any member of the community. 5) Violate communities’ just policies,
regulations, and ordinances. 6) Failure to pay just debts. 7) Lobby personal interests or gains. 8) Use
profane and obscene language in dealing with the community. 9) Lewd action. 10) Other behaviors
that project conduct unbecoming of an officer. Section 3-3 Social Media Relations <The media is the
most powerful entity on earth. They have the power to make the innocent guilty and the guilty
innocent.= -Malcolm X In the advent of globalization, the social media has
become one of the most influential and visible avenues of communication, hence, every member of
the organization must be cautious of what they post or publish online as their individual opinions and
actions will be taken as a reflection of what the organization is. a. DOs 1) Converse politely. 2) Act
with propriety. 3) Establish good social and media relations. 4) Join legitimate associations and
organizations without compromising mandated duties. 5) Promote participation and feedback. 6)
Post Best Practices of unit and personnel. 7) Statement for media interview shall only be given by PIO.
8) Avoid obscene action. b. DON’Ts: 1) Disclose and/or publish confidential information. 2) Use
obscene language. 3) Post obscene materials.
4) Post unfounded documents and information in the social media. 5) Post materials/documents
promoting partisan politics, secession or recidivism. 6) Any personnel, if directly involved in an
operation or considered as first responder, may respond to a media interview for a recent
incident/operation. 7) Other behaviors that project conduct unbecoming of an officer.
8) While walking with significant others, they should be at the left side always. 9) While
walking, things should be held by the left hand. b. DON’Ts: 1) Ignore superiors. 2) Treat superiors
rudely or insolently. 3) Criticize the error of superiors but use it as a guide in improving one’s actuation.
4) Address/call PCOs by their ranks. 5) Over-familiarity. Section 4-3 Basic Courtesy in Dealing with
Peers and Subordinates c. DOs 1) Always respectfully/cheerfully greet peers and subordinates. 2)
Always converse in a tactful and pleasant manner. 3) Always be mindful of using nice, appropriate
and decent words when talking to them. d. DON’Ts: 1) Shun away your peers and subordinates. 2)
Talk in a boastful and haughty manner. 3) Use indecent words and profanities. 4) Scorn and ridicule. 5)
Sexual advances. 6) Ask gift, gratuity and personal favors. 7) Rumor-mongering. Section 4-4 Basic
Courtesy in Dealing with Clients a. DOs 1) Greet and welcome every person visiting their office. 2) Ask
the client about his/her concern and provide appropriate solutions and/or assistance. 3) Provide
appropriate seats where customers can wait while others are being entertained. 4) Converse to their
client cordially and courteously.
CHAPTER 5 POLICE DECORUM <A man who understands decorum is a great treasure=
-Mas Oyama The PNP is a special league of individuals in the entire government bureaucracy just
like the AFP, because each individual, especially the police, are committed to sacrifice their
interests and lives for the greater good of the people and the country in general. Accordingly, they
must primly, courteously and lawfully delegate their duties and responsibilities. Among the common
duties and responsibilities of police officers as stipulated in Section 17, Rule II of NAPOLCOM Resolution
No. 93-023 are the following: a. Be ready at all times to perform his duties and obey the lawful orders
of his superior officers or higher authority. b. Be responsible for the efficient performance of his
duties and adequate coverage of his beat or post. c. Be cooperative and coordinate with other
members of his relief, district or other division segments for the achievement of their objectives. d. Be
available for duty at all times. e. He shall respond readily and report punctually to all assignments. f.
Be familiarized with all the administrative and operational policies of the police station. g. Be
responsible in providing crime prevention, protection of life and property, apprehension and
prosecution of offenders, preservation of peace and enforcement of regulatory measures within his
area. h. Be in prescribed uniform in reporting to duty. i. Be attentive to instructions and information
given during briefing and record all your activities in prescribed manner during your tour of duty. j. He
shall, unless otherwise ordered, report to his superior for inspection and instruction at the
conclusion of his tour of duty.
k. When on patrol, be constantly alert and observant in everything that takes place within your sight
or hearing and do not hold conversations with anyone except in the discharge of duty. l. At night
time, be vigilant by watching and frequently examining and trying accessible doors or entrances and
windows of commercial or public buildings, including vacant or unoccupied houses on his beat. Be
ready to investigate all suspicious circumstances you may encounter. In like manner, be able to
check all uninhabited buildings or dwelling places in the day time. m. As far as practicable, he shall
exert efforts to know the identities and other circumstances of permanent residents of the area
assigned to him and shall keep track of movements of the newcomers or strangers transferring to
merely loitering in the place. He shall report his finding without delay. n. Be sharp to take note of
vehicles parked by day or staying overnight in the different streets of his beat, recording their plate
numbers, and whenever possible, the owners thereof and/or drivers or operators. o. Be observant to
all the movements of suspicious persons and vehicles and keep a record of the observations for
ready reference when the need arises. p. Be ready to report all known suspected places of vice, such
as gambling dens, houses of ill-repute, opium dives, hide-outs of persons of doubtful conduct and
places frequented by vagrants. q. He shall keep himself informed of the places in his area where
violations are known or reputed to exist, and he shall plan and take necessary action, duly
advising his superior officer as to the steps being taken. r. Be responsible in keeping your badge
properly displayed and be courteous to give your name and badge number when duly requested for
identification purposes. s. Be ready to respond promptly, in the event of any disturbance of the peace
within his beat or in its immediate vicinity, to restore order. Be prepared to take immediate steps to
bring the offender to the police station in case of crime committed, and endeavor to save life and
protect or preserve the crime scene until the arrival of the investigator. t. He shall not leave his beat
until properly relieved, except when required by the exigencies of the service and for unavoidable
reasons. He shall keep record of the same in his memorandum book indicating the time he left his beat,
the reason for leaving and the time he returned. u. He shall take care of lost children by taking them to
the residence of their parents, if located within or near the vicinity of his beat and shall promptly
notify his station of such action. If the residence is not known or at some distant location, he shall take
such necessary actions as may be required by the circumstances. He shall be observant of school
children who are not in classes during the proper hours and after making inquiries, as to the reasons
therefore shall take appropriate action on any case of truancy which may come to his notice. v. He
shall take note of all obstructions in the streets or sidewalks from which accidents may occur, removing
them when practicable. He shall also take appropriate action on all nuisances and other matters
affecting the safety and convenience of the public or the interest of the city/municipality. w. He shall
exercise vigilance in order to prevent fire or avoid waste of water; take note of all garbage, dead
animals or other offensive matters thrown into the streets and shall take appropriate action thereon.
x. He shall in order to summon aid, give three (3) blasts with the whistle and in extreme emergency, he
may discharge his firearm in the air. y. He shall familiarize himself with the location of the street traffic
signs and if he sees them misplaced or tampered with in any manner, he shall rectify the same. If such
signs are missing from their proper location, he shall make proper report of such fact to his superior.
z. While on patrol duty, he shall not enter any bar, nightclub, theater or any other place of amusement
or business except in the strict discharge of his duty. Section 5-1 During Patrol a. DOs 1) Operate the
patrol car at moderate rate of speed, and in such a manner that will enable him to observe any
condition or occurrence in his patrol beat which may require police attention. He shall adhere to
the methods prescribed for foot patrolmen, except as may be otherwise directed. 2) Report for roll
call at his station at the prescribed time. He shall report hourly to the base control operator or
such time as may be assigned by his superior officer. 3) Patrol his assigned beat regularly, paying
particular attention to critical areas. 4) Exercise judgment and care with due regard to the safety of life
and property when responding to an emergency call. 5) Be in proper uniform when on duty, unless
otherwise directed by his commander. 6) Be alert, attentive, and observant.
mandatory requirement for all training to be conducted by any unit, on top of the Human
Rights and Ethical Doctrine modules. The Directorate for Personnel and Records Management as
the agency’s overall and central personnel manager, shall ensure that proper decorum and
standards are observed by all PNP personnel, both uniformed and non-uniformed. Non-conformity to
the norms and standards set forth herein shall be treated as a form of <breach of internal
discipline= that shall be acted upon accordingly by the respective administrative officer of PNP
offices and units, and shall be charged accordingly by the proper disciplinary authorities based on
the disciplinary procedures set forth by the agency, which are all appended in this Primer.
Company

Coverage For Qualifying Exam For PJLC

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Coverage For Qualifying Exam For PJLC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE HANDBOOK PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13

REVISED PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES

PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE HANDBOOK (PNPM-DO-DS-3-2-13)

REVISED PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES

The Directorate for Operations

REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES

DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT

discipline and lawful conduct in its actions, operations and investigations.

Carry on and Godspeed!

Republic of the Philippines NATIONAL POLICE COMMISSION

NATIONAL HEADQUARTERS PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE OFFICE OF THE CHIEF, PNP

ALAN LA MADRID PURISIMA

Police Director General Chief, PNP

Republic of the Philippines

NATIONAL POLICE COMMISSION

NATIONAL HEADQUARTERS, PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE DIRECTORATE FOR OPERATIONS

Camp Crame, Quezon City

COMMISSION ON HUMAN RIGHTS

POWERS AND FUNCTIONS OF THE PHILIPPINE NATIONAL POLICE

viii POWERS AND FUNCTIONS OF THE PNP

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL PRINCIPLES 1

RULE 1. FUNCTIONS OF A POLICE OFFICER 1

1.1 To Serve and Protect 1

1.2 To Observe Human Rights and

RULE 2. POLICE UNIFORM, ATTIRE AND

2.1 Agency Prescribed Uniform 1

2.2 Appearing Before the Public 1

Pen and Miranda Warning Card 1

2.4 Carrying of Non-Lethal Weapon

in the Police Rig. 2

RULE 3. CATEGORIES OF POLICE OPERATIONS 2

3.1 Public Safety Operation 2

3.2 Law Enforcement Operation 2

3.3 Internal Security Operation 2

3.4 Special Police Operation 2

3.5 Intelligence Operation. 2

3.6 Investigation Operation. 2

3.7 Scene of the Crime Operation (SOCO) 3

CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES 4

RULE 4. PRE-OPERATIONAL CLEARANCE 4

RULE 5. INTER-UNIT COORDINATION 4

5.1 Personal Coordination or by

5.2 Coordination by Filing Coordination Form 4

5.3 Coordination by Practical/Available

RULE 6. REQUIREMENTS OF POLICE OPERATIONS 5

6.1 Basic Requirements 5

6.2 Use of Megaphones and Similar Instruments 5

6.3 Warning Shots Prohibited 5

RULE 7. USE OF FORCE DURING POLICE

7.1 Use of Excessive Force Prohibited. 5

7.3 Non-Issuance of Verbal Warning

7.4 Use of Non-Lethal Weapon 6

7.5 Application of Necessary and

7.6 Factors to Consider in the

Reasonableness of the Force Employed. 6

7.7 Responsibility of the Police Officer

in Charge of the Operations 6

RULE 8. USE OF FIREARM DURING POLICE OPERATIONS 6

8.1 Use of Firearm When Justified 6

8.2 Firing at Moving Vehicles Prohibited

But with Exceptions 7

8.3 Parameters to be Considered

in Firing at Moving Vehicles 7